JP6760706B2 - Game machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

Conventionally, there have been proposed game machines that perform a demonstration on the assumption that they are waiting for customers (for example, Patent Document 1).

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2012-21564 (paragraphs [0065] to [0067])

However, in the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1, there is a concern that the gaming interest may be reduced.

The present invention has been made in view of such circumstances, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of suppressing a decrease in a player's motivation to play.

Effective solutions to achieve the above objectives are shown below. The action and the like will be explained as necessary. Further, for the sake of easy understanding, the corresponding configurations and the like in the embodiments of the invention are appropriately shown, but the present invention is not limited thereto.

(Solution 1)
It is a game machine that performs variable display
An operating means that the player can operate to launch the game ball,
Display means that can display the effect,
The effect execution means for executing the effect and
With
The effect executing means is
In a situation where the variable display is not performed, when a predetermined condition is satisfied, the display means can be made to execute the standby effect.
In the situation where the standby effect is being executed, when the player touches the palm or finger of the operating means, the result of the variable display being performed from the standby effect displayed on the display means is displayed. It is possible to switch to the variable display waiting effect that is being performed, and in a situation where the standby effect is being executed and the variable display waiting effect is switched to, the player touches the operation means with the palm or finger. A gaming machine characterized in that the variable display waiting effect is continued in a situation where the variable display is not performed without executing the standby effect during the period.

In the gaming machine of the present invention, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's willingness to play.

It is a perspective view which shows the state which opened the main body frame with respect to the outer frame of a pachinko game machine, and opened the door frame with respect to the main body frame. It is a front view of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is a front perspective view of the outer frame. It is a front perspective view of the main body frame. It is a rear perspective view of the substrate unit in the main body frame. It is a perspective view of a door frame. It is a front view of a game board. FIG. 8 is an exploded perspective view of the game board of FIG. 8 as viewed from the front by disassembling. It is a front view which shows the function display unit in a game board in an enlarged state with it attached to a pachinko machine. It is a block diagram of a main control board, a payout control board, and a peripheral control board. It is a block diagram which shows the continuation of FIG. It is a schematic diagram of various detection signals input / output to a game ball rental device connection terminal board which relays an electrical connection between a payout control board which constitutes a main board, a CR unit, and a frequency display board. It is a block diagram which shows the continuation of FIG. It is a block diagram which shows the outline of the peripheral control MPU. It is a block diagram around the sound source built-in VDP in a liquid crystal and a sound control unit. It is a block diagram which shows the power-source system of a pachinko machine. It is a block diagram which shows the continuation of FIG. It is a figure (a) which shows the rotation range of the rotation angle in front of a rotary handle main body, and is the figure (b) which shows the relationship between the rotation angle of the detection shaft part of a potentiometer, and the rotation angle in front of a rotary handle main body. It is a figure (a) which shows an example of the output characteristic of a potentiometer, and the figure (b) which shows the table which shows the set current to a firing solenoid. It is a figure which shows an example of the timing chart which drives a firing solenoid and a ball feeding solenoid respectively. It is a circuit diagram which shows the waste hit prevention circuit. It is a circuit diagram which shows the circuit of a main control board. It is a circuit diagram which shows the power failure monitoring circuit. It is a circuit diagram which shows the communication interface circuit between the main control board and the peripheral control board. It is a circuit diagram which shows the circuit of the payout control unit and the like. It is a circuit diagram which shows the payout control input circuit. It is a circuit diagram which shows the continuation of FIG. It is a circuit diagram which shows the continuation of FIG. 28. It is a circuit diagram which shows the payout motor drive circuit. It is a circuit diagram which shows the CR unit input / output circuit. It is an input / output diagram which shows various input / output signals with a main control board, and various output signals to an external terminal board. This is a table showing an example of various commands transmitted from the main control board to the payout control board. This is a table showing an example of various commands transmitted from the main control board to the peripheral control board. It is a table which shows the continuation of various commands transmitted from the main control board of FIG. 34 to the peripheral control board. It is a table which shows an example of various commands from a payout control board received by a main control board. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the processing at the time of power-on of the main control side. It is a flowchart which shows the continuation of the process at the time of power-on of the main control side of FIG. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the timer interrupt processing on the main control side. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the processing at the time of power-on of a payout control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the continuation of the process at the time of power-on of the payout control unit of FIG. 40. It is the flowchart which shows the continuation of the process at the time of power-on of the payout control unit following FIG. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the payout control part timer interrupt processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the rotation angle switch history creation processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the sprocket fixed position determination skip process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the ball squeeze determination process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the prize ball stock number addition processing for prize balls. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the prize ball stock number addition processing for ball rental. It is a flowchart which shows an example of stock monitoring processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the payout ball operation judgment setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of payout setting processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a sphere motion setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a retry operation monitoring process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the inconsistency counter reset determination process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of an error release operation determination process. It is a timing chart which shows the signal processing (a) at the time of payout operation by ball lending, and the input signal confirmation processing (b) from a CR unit. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the processing at the time of power-on of a peripheral control unit. It is a flowchart which shows an example of peripheral control part V blank interrupt processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the peripheral control part 1ms timer interrupt processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the peripheral control part command reception interrupt processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the peripheral control part power failure advance notice signal interrupt processing. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect at the time of setting of a mobile terminal displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device on the game board side. It is a figure which shows an example of the game start effect displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device on the game board side. It is a figure which shows an example of the start prize inspiration effect and the first start prize limited effect displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device on the game board side, respectively. It is a figure which shows an example of the variation display effect displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device on the game board side. It is a figure which shows an example of the image of the departure notice displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device on the game board side. It is a figure which shows an example of the image of the error notification displayed in the display area of a mobile terminal. It is a figure which shows an example of the image of the setting of the break time displayed in the display area of a mobile terminal. It is a figure which shows an example of the image of the call of the clerk displayed in the display area of a mobile terminal.

[1. Overall configuration of pachinko game machines]
Hereinafter, the pachinko gaming machine as the gaming machine of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings. First, the entire pachinko gaming machine according to the embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 3. FIG. 1 is a perspective view showing a state in which the main body frame is opened with respect to the outer frame of the pachinko gaming machine according to the embodiment and the door frame is opened with respect to the main body frame, and FIG. 2 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine. Yes, FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in FIGS. 1 to 3, the pachinko gaming machine 1 has an outer frame 2 installed in an island facility (not shown) of a game hall and a box that is pivotally supported by the outer frame 2 and has an open front side. A game board 4 having a frame-shaped main body frame 3 and a game area 1100 mounted and fixed to the main body frame 3 from the front side and into which a game ball as a game medium is driven, and a player side of the main body frame 3 and the front surface of the game board 4 It is provided with a door frame 5 which is pivotally supported with respect to the main body frame 3 so as to be closed from the door frame 3. In the door frame 5 of the pachinko game machine 1, a game window 101 formed so that the game area 1100 of the game board 4 can be seen from the player side, and a game ball arranged below the game window 101 are stored. A dish-shaped upper plate 301 and a lower plate 302 (see FIG. 7), and a handle device 500 operated by the player to drive the game ball stored in the upper plate 301 into the game area 1100 of the game board 4. , Is equipped. The vertical distance dimension of the game board 4 is longer than the width dimension of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and is configured to be large.

Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, when viewed from the front, the outer frame 2, the main body frame 3, and the door frame 5 are each formed in a vertically long rectangular shape extending in the vertical direction, and the widths in the left and right directions are substantially the same. In addition to the dimensions, the vertical width in the vertical direction is formed so that the dimensions of the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 are slightly shorter than those of the outer frame 2. A decorative cover 23 is attached to the front surface of the outer frame 2 at a position below the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5, and the front surface of the outer frame 2 is completely closed by the door frame 5 and the decorative cover 23. It has become so. Further, the outer frame 2, the main body frame 3, and the door frame 5 are arranged so that the upper ends are substantially aligned with each other, and the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 can be rotated at a position on the front side of the left end of the outer frame 2. It is supported, and is opened by moving the right ends of the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 to the front side with respect to the outer frame 2.

Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, when viewed from the front, the gaming area 1100 in which the gaming ball is driven is facing through the substantially circular gaming window 101, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 projects forward to the lower side of the gaming window 101. Two upper plates 301 and lower plates 302 are arranged one above the other. Further, a handle device 500 for the player to operate is arranged in the lower right corner of the front surface of the door frame 5, and the player operates the handle device 500 in a state where the game balls are stored in the upper plate 301. When the rotation operation is performed, the game ball in the upper plate 301 is driven into the game area 1100 of the game board 4 with the hitting strength corresponding to the rotation angle, and the game can be played.

The game window 101 of the door frame 5 is closed by a transparent glass unit 590, and although the inside of the game area 1100 can be visually recognized by the player, the player inserts a hand or the like into the game area 1100 to play the game. It is not possible to touch the game balls, obstacle nails, various winning openings, and accessories in the area 1100.

[2. Overall composition of the outer frame]
Next, the outer frame 2 installed in the island facility of the game hall will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a front perspective view of the outer frame. As shown in FIG. 4, the outer frame 2 includes upper and lower upper frame plates 10 and lower frame plates 11 extending in the horizontal direction, left and right side frame plates 12 and 13 extending in the vertical (up and down) direction, and their respective frame plates. It is provided with four connecting members 14 for connecting the ends of 10, 11, 12, and 13, and by connecting the frame plates 10, 11, 12, and 13 to each other with the connecting member 14, a vertically long rectangular shape ( It is assembled in a square shape). The upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 in the outer frame 2 are made of solid wood (for example, wood, plywood, etc.) having a predetermined thickness. An upper support metal fitting 20, which will be described later, is attached to the upper surface and the front surface of the left end portion of the upper frame plate 10.

On the other hand, the side frame plates 12 and 13 are made of lightweight metal mold materials (for example, aluminum alloy) having a constant cross-sectional shape. In addition, a plurality of grooves extending in the vertical direction are formed on the outer side surface and the inner side surface of the side frame plates 12 and 13, and work is performed when installing the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the pachinko island facility of the gaming hall. The pachinko game machine 1 can be easily held by a person's finger, and the design of the appearance can be enhanced.

The outer frame 2 is arranged so as to face the upper support metal fitting 20 fixed to the upper surface of the left end of the upper frame plate 10 and the upper support metal fitting 20, and is fixed to a predetermined position inside the lower part of the left side frame plate 12. A support metal fitting 21, a reinforcing metal fitting 22 arranged to support the lower surface of the lower support metal fitting 21 and fixed so as to connect the left and right side frame plates 12, 13 and a decorative cover fixed to the front surface of the reinforcing metal fitting 22. 23 and. The upper support metal fitting 20 and the lower support metal fitting 21 are for pivotally supporting the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 so as to be openable and closable. A shaft support pin 633 (see FIG. 5) of the upper shaft support metal fitting 630 in the main body frame 3 described later is detachably engaged with the support hook hole 20c in the upper support metal fitting 20. The main body frame shaft support formed on the main body frame shaft support metal fitting 644 of the main body frame 3 described later is inserted into the support protrusion 21d of the lower support metal fitting 21, and the support protrusion 21d of the lower support metal fitting 21 is inserted. After inserting into the support hole of the main body frame shaft support metal fitting 644 in the main body frame 3, the main body frame 3 can be easily locked by locking the shaft support pin 633 of the upper shaft support metal fitting 630 of the main body frame 3 to the support hook hole 20c. It can be opened and closed freely.

Further, the outer frame 2 is attached and fixed to the inside of the right side frame plate 13 with two closing plates 24, 25 (see FIG. 1) arranged vertically separated by a predetermined distance. These closing plates 24 and 25 are formed in a substantially L shape in a plan view. The closing plates 24, 25 and the hook portions 1054, 1065 (see FIG. 1) of the lock device 1000, which are attached along the open side of the main body frame 3 when the main body frame 3 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2. The hook portion 1054, 1065 and the closing plates 24, 25 are disengaged by inserting the key into the cylinder lock 1010 of the locking device 1000 and rotating it in one direction, which will be described in detail later. The main body frame 3 can be opened with respect to the outer frame 2.

[3. Overall configuration of the main body frame]
Next, the main body frame 3 provided on the front surface side of the outer frame 2 so as to be openable and closable will be described with reference to FIGS. 5 and 6. FIG. 5 is a front perspective view of the main body frame, and FIG. 6 is a rear perspective view of the substrate unit in the main body frame. As shown in FIG. 5, the main body frame 3 has a main body frame base 600 having a rectangular game board holding port 601 for forming the skeleton of the main body frame 3 and penetrating in the front-rear direction to hold the game board 4. The upper shaft support bracket 630 and the lower shaft support bracket 640, which are attached to the upper and lower ends of the left end portion of the main body frame base 600 in front view and are pivotally supported by the outer frame 2 and the door frame 5 are pivotally supported, A ball launching device 650 attached to the lower front surface of the main body frame base 600 to drive a game ball into the game area 1100 of the game board 4, and a game to the upper plate 301 of the plate unit 300 attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 600. A prize ball unit 700 for paying out balls and a game ball from the prize ball unit 700 to the plate unit 300 of the door frame 5 when the door frame 5 is opened with respect to the main body frame 3 attached to the front surface of the main body frame base 600. It is provided with a ball outlet opening / closing unit 790 that blocks the flow of the door.

Further, the main body frame 3 is attached to the lower rear surface of the main body frame base 600, and various control boards, power supply boards 851, etc. for controlling the door frame 5 excluding the game board 4 and the electrical parts provided in the main body frame 3 and the like. The board unit 800 that is unitized as a unit, the back cover 900 that covers the rear opening of the game board holding port 601 in the main body frame base 600, and the side security plate 950 that covers the left end of the main body frame base 600 in front view. A locking device 1000 attached to the right end of the main body frame base in front view to open / close the main body frame 3 to the outer frame 2 and to open / close the door frame 5 to the main body frame 3 is mainly provided.

[3-1. Body frame base]
Next, the main body frame base 600 will be described. The main body frame base 600 is integrally molded with synthetic resin, and the outer shape of the front view is a vertically long rectangular shape along the outer shape of the door frame 5, and is formed so as to have a predetermined amount of depth in the front-rear direction. Has been done. The main body frame base 600 has a game board holding port 601 capable of fitting and holding the outer periphery of the game board 4 through a rectangular shape in the front-rear direction within a range of about 3/4 of the whole from the upper part to the lower part, and the main body frame. The U-shaped front end frame portion 602 forming the outer periphery of the front end excluding the left side of the base 600 in front view, and the front end frame portion 602 are recessed from the front to the rear, and the door frame 5 is recessed from the lower end to the rear of the door frame base body 110. The protruding door frame projecting piece 110c (see FIG. 1), the upper bent projecting piece 167 (see FIG. 1) projecting rearward from the upper reinforcing sheet metal 151 in the reinforcing unit 150 of the door frame 5, and the open side reinforcing sheet metal 153. It is provided with an engaging groove 603 into which an open side outer bent projectile 164 (see FIG. 1) projecting rearward is inserted and engaged.

Further, the main body frame base 600 extends from the lower side of the game board holding port 601 to the lower end of the main body frame base 600, and is recessed from the front end of the front end frame portion 602 to the rear side by a predetermined amount and spreads in a plate shape in the left-right direction. It includes a peripheral wall portion 605 that protrudes rearward inside the front end frame portion 602 and forms an inner peripheral wall of the game board holding port 601. The peripheral wall portion 605 connects the free ends of the U-shaped front end frame portion 602 (upper and lower left end portions when viewed from the front) so that the outer shape of the main body frame base 600 becomes a frame shape. It has become.

Further, the main body frame base 600 is formed by forming the lower side of the game board holding port 601 at the upper end of the lower rear wall portion 604 and mounting the game board 4 on the game board mounting portion 606 and the game board mounting portion 606. A positioning protrusion 607 that protrudes upward from approximately the center in the left-right direction and engages with the out-ball discharge groove of the game panel 1150 in the game board 4 and a game board stop of the game board 4 formed at a predetermined position on the inner wall on the right side of the front view of the peripheral wall portion 605. A game board locking portion to which the tool 1120 is fastened, and a plate-shaped upper end regulating rib 609 that hangs downward from the upper inner wall of the peripheral wall portion 605 and has a lower end that can contact the upper end of the game board 4 in the left-right direction. And have. By fitting the positioning protrusion 607 of the main body frame base 600 with the out ball discharge groove of the game board 4, it is possible to regulate the lower end of the game board 4 from moving in the left-right direction and the rear direction. There is. Further, the game board locking portion can regulate the movement of the right side of the game board 4 in the front-rear direction by locking the game board stopper 1120 of the game board 4. .. Although the details of the left side of the game board 4 in front view will be described later, the movement in the front-rear direction is restricted by the positioning member 956 of the side security plate 950.

Further, the main body frame base 600 is formed at a position where the lower rear wall portion 604 is recessed one step to the rear side from the front surface of the front end frame portion 602, and the hit ball launching device is formed on the right front surface of the lower rear wall portion 604 in front view. The ball launching device 650 is attached from the front side so that the small launching solenoid 654 of the 650 is accommodated in the solenoid accommodating recess. When the ball launching device 650 is attached to the front surface of the lower rear wall portion 604, a foul space 626 extending to the left and downward is formed on the left side of the front view of the upper end of the launch rail 660 in the ball launching device 650. It has become like. In the present embodiment, when the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the foul ball entrance 542e (see FIG. 1) in the foul cover unit 540 is located below the foul space 626. The game ball descending from the foul space 626 is received by the foul ball inlet 542e of the foul cover unit 540 and discharged to the lower plate 302 (see FIG. 7) of the plate unit 300.

Further, the main body frame base 600 is formed with a plurality of openings that penetrate in a rectangular shape in the front-rear direction to the left of the left-right center of the lower rear wall portion 604 in the front view, and a plurality of openings on the upper side of the openings and on both the left and right sides in the front view. It is provided with a through hole 615 penetrating through. The opening of the main body frame base 600 is closed by the relay terminal plate cover 692 from the front side, and the substrate unit is attached to the rear surface of the lower rear wall portion 604 through the opening 692a of the relay terminal plate cover 692. The main door relay terminal plate 880 of 800 and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 face the front side.

Further, the main body frame base 600 detects the opening of the door frame 5 with respect to the main body frame 3 on the lower front surface of the substantially circular cylinder lock through hole 611 penetrating in the front-rear direction through the upper right end of the lower rear wall portion 604 in front view. A door frame opening switch 618 is attached to the door frame, and when the door frame 5 is opened (opened) with respect to the main body frame 3, the pressure is released and the opening of the door frame 5 can be detected. It has become like. Further, the main body frame base 600 is provided with a main body frame opening switch 619 for detecting the opening of the main body frame 3 with respect to the outer frame 2 on the rear surface below the position where the door frame opening switch 618 is attached. When the main body frame 3 is opened (opened) with respect to the outer frame 2, the pressing is released so that the opening of the main body frame 3 can be detected.

[3-2. Upper shaft support and lower shaft support]
Next, the upper shaft support metal fitting 630 and the lower shaft support metal fitting 640 will be described. The upper shaft support bracket 630 and the lower shaft support bracket 640 are attached to the metal fitting mounting portions on the upper and lower rear surfaces of the left end of the main body frame base 600 by using predetermined screws, so that the door frame 5 can be attached to the main body frame 3. The main body frame 3 can be pivotally supported with respect to the outer frame 2 while being able to be pivotally supported so as to be openable and closable.

The upper shaft support bracket 630 has a plate-shaped mounting portion 631 that is attached to the upper bracket mounting portion of the main body frame base 600 and extends in the vertical and horizontal directions, and a plate-shaped forward extending that extends forward from the upper end of the mounting portion 631. The shaft pin 632, the shaft support pin 633 projecting upward from the vicinity of the front end of the front extension portion 632, and the shaft pin 155 of the door frame 5 arranged on the left side of the front view of the shaft support pin 633 (FIG. 7). The door frame shaft support hole 634 that penetrates in the vertical direction into which the door frame 5 is inserted, and the front extension portion 632 that hangs downward from the left end portion of the front view to regulate the rotation end of the door frame 5 toward the open side. It is equipped with a stopper. The upper shaft support metal fitting 630 is integrally formed with a mounting portion 631, a front extending portion 632, and a stopper by bending and molding a single metal plate.

The lower shaft support bracket 640 is arranged below the door frame shaft support bracket 642 for pivotally supporting the door frame 5 and the door frame shaft support bracket 642 to pivotally support the main body frame 3 with respect to the outer frame 2. Main body frame shaft support bracket 644 and. The door frame shaft support bracket 642 of the lower shaft support bracket 640 has a plate-shaped mounting portion that is attached to the lower bracket mounting portion of the main body frame base 600 and extends in the vertical and horizontal directions, and extends forward from the lower end of the mounting portion. A plate-shaped front extension portion 642b, a door frame shaft support hole 642c through which a shaft pin 157 (see FIG. 7) of the door frame 5 is inserted in the vicinity of the front end of the front extension portion 642b in the vertical direction, and a front The extension portion 642b is provided with a stopper 642d which is erected upward from the left end portion in the front view and regulates the rotation end of the door frame 5 toward the open side. The door frame shaft support bracket 642 has a mounting portion, a forward extending portion 642b, and a stopper 642d integrally formed by bending and molding a single metal plate.

Further, the main body frame shaft support metal fitting 644 in the lower shaft support metal fitting 640 has a plate-shaped mounting portion that is attached to the metal fitting mounting portion on the lower side of the main body frame base 600 and extends in the vertical and horizontal directions, and extends forward from the lower end of the mounting portion. It is provided with a front extending portion 644b to be extended and a main body frame shaft support hole penetrating in the vertical direction near the front end of the front extending portion 644b. The main body frame shaft support bracket 644 also has a mounting portion and a front extending portion 644b integrally formed by bending and molding a single metal plate.

The lower shaft support bracket 640 is in a state in which the mounting portion of the door frame shaft support bracket 642 and the mounting portion of the main body frame shaft support bracket 644 are overlapped (contacted) in the front-rear direction, and the door frame shaft support bracket 642 The front extension portion 642b and the front extension portion 644b of the main body frame shaft support metal fitting 644 are separated from each other by a predetermined distance in the vertical direction, and are attached to the lower metal fitting attachment portion of the main body frame base 600.

When the upper shaft support bracket 630 and the lower shaft support bracket 640 are attached to the main body frame base 600, the shaft support pin 633 of the upper shaft support bracket 630 and the main body frame shaft support hole of the lower shaft support bracket 640 are coaxially above. The main body frame shaft support hole of the main body frame shaft support metal fitting 644 in the lower shaft support metal fitting 640 fits into the support protrusion 21d (see FIG. 4) of the lower support metal fitting 21 in the outer frame 2. The front extension portion 644b of the main body frame shaft support bracket 644 is placed on the support protrusion 21c (see FIG. 4) of the lower support bracket 21 so as to be inserted, and then the shaft of the upper shaft support bracket 630. By inserting the support pin 633 into the support hook hole 20c (see FIG. 4) of the upper support metal fitting 20 in the outer frame 2, the main body frame 3 can be pivotally supported with respect to the outer frame 2 so as to be openable and closable. It has become like.

Further, the upper shaft support metal fitting 630 and the lower shaft support metal fitting 640 are attached to the main body frame base 600, and the door frame shaft support hole 634 of the upper shaft support metal fitting 630 and the door frame shaft support hole of the lower shaft support metal fitting 640 are attached. The door frame is positioned coaxially with 642c, and the door frame is inserted so that the shaft pin 157 of the door frame 5 is inserted into the door frame shaft support hole 642c of the door frame shaft support metal fitting 642 in the lower shaft support metal fitting 640. After placing the lower shaft support portion 158 of 5 (see FIG. 7) on the front extension portion 642b of the door frame shaft support bracket 642, the shaft pin 155 of the door frame 5 is placed on the door frame of the upper shaft support bracket 630. By inserting it into the shaft support hole 634, the door frame 5 can be opened and closed with respect to the main body frame 3. In the present embodiment, the shaft pin 155 on the upper side of the door frame 5 is slidable in the vertical direction, and the shaft pin 155 is inserted into the door frame shaft support hole 634 of the upper shaft support bracket 630. Is once slid downward so that the upper shaft support portion 156 of the door frame 5 and the front extension portion 632 of the upper shaft support metal fitting 630 overlap each other, and then the shaft pin 155 is slid upward. It can be inserted into the door frame shaft support hole 634.

[3-3. Hitting ball launcher]
Next, the hitting ball launching device 650 will be described. The ball striking device 650 is attached to the launch base 652 of a metal plate attached to the front predetermined position of the lower rear wall portion 604 of the main body frame base 600 so that the rotation drive shaft 654a projects forward on the lower rear surface of the launch base 652. A small launching solenoid 654, a hammer 656 fixed integrally to the rotation drive shaft 654a of the launching solenoid 654, a mallet 658 fixed to the tip of the hammer 656, and a mallet tip 658 on the movement trajectory. A hammer 656 at the tip of the ball hammer 656 between the launch rail 660 attached to the front surface of the launch base 652 and the launch rail 660 above the base end of the launch rail 660. Is made passable and at the same time, a ball stop piece 662 that forms a gap through which the game ball cannot pass and holds the game ball at the base end of the launch rail 660, and is held at the base end of the launch rail 660 by the ball stop piece 662. It is equipped with a stopper 664 that restricts the hammer 656 (hammer tip 658) from rotating toward the launch rail 660 side from the hitting position where the game ball can be hit. In the present embodiment, the vertical distance dimension of the game board 4 is longer than the width dimension of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the game board 4 is configured to be large. Since the pachinko gaming machine 1 is installed in the island facility of the gaming hall, the vertical dimension of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is specified in advance. Therefore, since the game board 4 is configured to be large, the vertical distance dimension of the hitting ball launching device 650 is reduced due to the restriction of the vertical dimension of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the hitting ball launching device 650 is downsized. Along with this, a small firing solenoid 654 has been adopted.

Although detailed illustration is omitted, the firing solenoid 654 in the hitting ball launching device 650 reciprocates with the strength (speed) of the rotation drive shaft 654a according to the rotation operation angle (rotation operation amount) of the handle device 500. It is designed to do. Further, the ball striking mallet 656 of the ball striking device 650 has a fixing portion 656a fixed to the rotation drive shaft 654a of the launch solenoid 654 and a tip extending from the fixing portion 656a in a gentle arc shape to the axis of the rotation drive shaft 654a. On the other hand, there are a rod portion 656b in which the tip 658 is fixed to the tip facing the normal direction, and a stopper portion 656c that can come into contact with the stopper 664 extending to the opposite side with the fixing portion 656a sandwiched between the rod portion 656b. It has. When the stopper portion 656c of the hitting mallet 656 comes into contact with the stopper 664, the mallet tip 658 at the tip rotates toward the launch rail 660 from the hitting position (rotating end in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front). It is becoming regulated.

When the ball striking device 650 is attached to the lower rear wall portion 604 of the main body frame base 600, the upper end of the launch rail 660 is substantially in the center in the left-right direction and the upper end of the lower rear wall portion 604, that is, the game board mounting portion. It is located below 606 (the lower side of the game board holding port 601), and has a predetermined width in the left-right direction with the lower end of the outer rail 1111 in the game board 4 held by the game board holding port 601. A foul space 626 that extends downward is formed at. Then, the ball striking device 650 launches the game ball so as to jump over the foul space 626 on the left side of the launch rail 660 so that the game ball can be driven into the game area 1100 of the game board 4. It has become. When the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the foul ball entrance 542e of the foul cover unit 540 attached to the door frame 5 is located at the lower part of the foul space 626. A game ball that has become a foul ball without being driven into the area 1100 falls in the foul space 626, is received by the foul ball entrance 542e, and is discharged to the lower plate 302.

[3-4. Prize ball unit]
Next, the prize ball unit 700 will be described. In the pachinko island facility in the hall where the pachinko game machine 1 is installed, after storing the game balls supplied from the pachinko island facility side to the pachinko game machine 1, the upper plate 301 of the pachinko game machine 1 is stored based on a predetermined payout instruction. It is to be paid out to. The prize ball unit 700 receives and stores the prize ball base 710 attached to the rear surface of the main body frame base 600 and the game balls attached to the upper rear surface of the prize ball base 710 and supplied from the pachinko island facility side. The 720, the tank rail unit 730 arranged below the prize ball tank 720 and storing the game balls stored in the prize ball tank 720 and sent to the downstream side, and the game balls aligned by the tank rail unit 730 are predetermined. The prize ball device 740 to be paid out based on the payout instruction and the game ball paid out by the prize ball device 740 can be guided to the upper plate 301 of the plate unit, and the upper plate 301 is paid out when the game ball is full. It is mainly equipped with a full tank branch unit 770 capable of branching and guiding the game ball to the lower plate 302 side.

Further, the prize ball unit 700 includes an external terminal plate 784 attached to the rear surface of the prize ball base 710, and an external terminal plate cover 786 that covers the rear side of the external terminal plate 784.
[3-4-1. Prize ball tank]

In the prize ball tank 720, the outer circumference of the bottom wall portion 721 is surrounded by the outer peripheral wall portion 722, and a predetermined amount of game balls can be stored on the bottom wall portion 721. Further, the prize ball tank 720 is inclined so that the upper surface of the bottom wall portion 721 is lowered toward the discharge port 723, so that the game ball on the bottom wall portion 721 rolls toward the discharge port 723. It has become.

Further, the prize ball tank 720 includes two ball leveling members 727 that are rotatably supported by the shaft portion 725. One end side of the ball leveling member 727 is pivotally supported by the shaft portion 725 and holds a weight inside, so that the other end side hangs down due to its own weight. The ball leveling member 727 hangs down in the tank rail unit 730, which will be described later, and allows the game balls circulating in the tank rail unit 730 to be leveled and aligned.

[3-4-2. Tank rail unit]
The tank rail unit 730 includes a tank rail 731 that is arranged below the prize ball tank 720 and extends long in the left-right direction. The tank rail 731 has a gutter shape with an open upper part and a predetermined depth, and has a width (depth) that allows game balls to be aligned in two rows in the front-rear direction. The bottom is tilted so that

Further, the tank rail unit 730 is continuously connected to the alignment gear 732 rotatably supported above the discharge port of the tank rail 731, the gear cover 733 covering the upper portion of the alignment gear 732, and the right end of the gear cover 733 in the front view. A ball holding plate 734 that closes the upper part of the rail 731, and a ball stop piece 735 that can advance and retreat into the tank rail 731 and stop the game ball in the tank rail 731 from rolling toward the discharge port side. , Is equipped. Two alignment gears 732 are provided side by side in the front-rear direction so as to correspond to two flow paths of the game balls partitioned in two rows by the partition wall of the tank rail 731.

[3-4-3. Prize ball device]
The prize ball device 740 is for paying out the game balls discharged and supplied from the discharge port of the tank rail unit 730 to the upper plate 301 of the plate unit 300 based on a predetermined payout instruction. The prize ball device 740 has a supply passage that opens at the upper end and extends to a position slightly lower than the center in the vertical direction with a width slightly wider than the outer shape of the game ball, and a predetermined width that communicates with the lower end of the supply passage. A distribution space with space, a prize ball passage that connects with the lower end of the left side (open side) of the distribution space and opens in the left side of the back view, and the right side of the back view of the distribution space. (Shaft support side) It is equipped with a ball-extracting passage that communicates with the lower end and extends downward to open at the lower end. The supply passage, the distribution space, the prize ball passage, and the ball removal passage are formed in a state of being open to the rear.

The prize ball device 740 is integrally rotatably fixed to the rotating shaft of the payout motor 744 and is arranged on the rear side of the motor support plate. The first gear, the second gear that meshes with the first gear, and the second gear mesh with each other. The third gear, the payout rotating body that rotates integrally with the third gear and is arranged in the distribution space, and the payout rotating body are fixed so as to be integrally rotatable on opposite sides of the third gear and are equal in the circumferential direction. A rotation detection board in which a plurality of (three in the present embodiment) detection slits are formed at intervals, a ball-out switch 750 for detecting the presence or absence of a game ball in the supply passage, and a prize ball passage. Holds a counting switch 751 for detecting a game ball flowing down inside, a rotation angle switch 752 for detecting a detection slit formed in a rotation detection board that rotates integrally with the payout rotating body, and a rotation angle switch 752. It includes a rotation angle switch board 753, a payout motor 744, a ball out switch 750, a counting switch 751, and a prize ball case inner board 754 that relays the connection between the rotation angle switch 752 and the payout control board described later.

The payout rotating body is provided with three recesses having a size capable of accommodating one game ball at equal intervals in the circumferential direction. By rotating the payout rotating body, the game ball supplied from the supply passage is one. Each ball is housed in a recess and can be paid out to the prize ball passage or the ball removal passage side. Further, the three detection slits formed in the rotation detection board that rotates integrally with the payout rotating body are formed in equal parts (every 120 degrees) on the outer circumference of the rotation detection board, and correspond to the recesses of the payout rotating body. Each position is provided, and by detecting the detection slit with the rotation angle switch 752, the rotation position of the payout rotating body can be detected. In the present embodiment, the rotation between the detection slits (120 degrees) of the rotation detection board (delivery rotating body) is designed to correspond to the rotation of 18 steps of the payout motor 744.

In the prize ball device 740, when the payout rotating body is rotated in the direction counterclockwise when viewed from the rear by the payout motor 744, the game balls in the supply passage are paid out to the prize ball passage, and the payout rotation The game balls paid out to the prize ball passage by the rotation of the body are counted one by one by the counting switch 751 and then delivered to the prize ball passage. On the other hand, when the ball removal operation member is operated by a clerk in the hall or the like, the game balls in the supply passage are discharged to the ball removal passage, and the game balls discharged to the ball removal passage are discharged to the ball removal passage. It can be discharged from the lower end of the passage to the outside of the rear side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 via the full tank branch unit 770 described later.

[3-4-4. Full tank branch unit]
The full tank branch unit 770 is formed in a box shape so that the whole becomes lower from the rear end to the front end, and opens upward at substantially the center in the left-right direction at the upper part of the rear end to win the prize ball device 740. The prize ball receiving port that receives the game ball that has flowed down the ball passage, the branch space that is placed under the prize ball receiving port and spreads in the left-right direction, and the game from directly below the prize ball receiving port in the branch space to the front side. The normal passage that guides the ball, the normal ball outlet 774 that discharges the game ball that has passed through the normal passage forward and opens at the right end of the front view, and the normal ball outlet 774 that opens at the right end of the front end, and the distance from directly below the prize ball receiving port in the branch space to the right side of the rear view It is equipped with a full tank passage that guides the game ball from the vertical position toward the front side, and a full tank outlet 776 that discharges the game ball that has passed through the full tank passage to the front and opens to the left side of the front view of the normal ball outlet 774. ing.

Further, the full tank branch unit 770 has a ball ejection port that opens upward to the left end of the front end of the upper part of the rear end and receives a game ball that has flowed down the ball ejection passage of the prize ball device 740, and a ball ejection port. A ball pulling passage that guides the game ball received in the mouth to the front side, and a game ball that has passed through the ball pulling passage are released forward and at the left end of the front view, at a position behind the normal ball exit 774 and the full tank exit 776. It is equipped with an open ball outlet.

When the door frame 5 of the full tank branch unit 770 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the normal ball outlet 774 and the full tank outlet 776 are the first ball inlets 542a of the foul cover unit 540 in the door frame 5, respectively. And the second ball inlet 542c (see FIG. 1) are opposed to each other, and the game ball released from the normal ball outlet 774 passes through the first ball entrance 542a of the foul cover unit 540 and serves as a plate. The game ball supplied to the upper plate 301 of the unit 300 and released from the full tank outlet 776 is supplied to the lower plate 302 of the plate unit 300 through the second ball inlet 542c of the foul cover unit 540. ing. Further, the ball ejection port is formed so as to communicate with the upper right end of the rear view of the main body frame base ball extraction passage in the main body frame base 600, and the game ball released from the ball extraction outlet is formed in the main body frame of the main body frame base 600. It is designed to be handed over to the base ball removal passage.

When the upper plate 301 of the plate unit 300 is full of game balls and the game balls are further discharged from the prize ball unit 700 (prize ball device 740), the foul cover unit 540 is moved up from the first ball outlet. The game ball that cannot go out to the plate 301 side stagnates in the first ball passage of the foul cover unit 540, and eventually fills the upstream normal passage through the normal ball outlet 774 in the full tank branch unit 770. In this state, the game ball that has entered the branch space from the prize ball socket cannot normally enter the passage, starts to move laterally in the branch space, and the game ball that has moved laterally is full. It enters the tongue passage and is supplied from the full tank outlet to the lower plate 302 of the plate unit 300 via the second ball entrance 542c of the foul cover unit 540, the second ball passage, and the second ball outlet. It has become.

[3-5. Board unit]
Next, the substrate unit 800 will be described. As shown in FIG. 6, the board unit 800 includes a board unit base 810 attached to the rear surface of the lower rear wall portion of the main body frame base 600, a speaker box 820 attached to the left rear surface of the board unit base 810 in front view, and a substrate. The power supply board box holder 840 attached to the rear surface of the unit base 810 and the power supply board box attached to the rear surface of the power supply board box holder 840 and having a rear end substantially flush with the rear end of the speaker box 820. The 850, the payout control board box 860 attached to the rear surfaces of the power supply board box 850 and the speaker box 820, and the terminal board box 870 attached to the rear surface of the speaker box 820 so as to cover the left end of the payout control board box 860 in the front view. A main door relay terminal plate 880 and a peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 attached to the front surface of the board unit base 810 are provided.

The power supply board box holder 840 has an discharge ball receiving portion 841 that is opened upward and receives the game ball discharged downward from the out ball discharging portion of the game board 4 on the left front side of the left and right center in front view. The discharge passage 842 that guides and discharges the game ball received by the discharge ball receiving portion 841 downward, and the discharge passage 842 and the discharge ball receiving portion 841 are opened forward and upward in front of the side (right side in front view). The entire rear surface of the power supply board box holder 840 is formed so as to be recessed toward the front side, and includes a box accommodating portion capable of accommodating the front end of the power supply board box 850.

Further, in the power supply board box holder 840, the open front end side of the discharge passage 842 is closed by the rear surface of the board unit base 810, and the opening of the board unit base 810 faces the discharge passage 842. It is formed and flows down through the opening of the board unit base 810 to the rear side of the board unit base 810 through the main body frame base ball pulling passage formed on the rear surface of the lower rear wall portion of the main body frame base 600. The game ball and the game ball discharged from the out ball discharging part of the game board 4 and received by the discharging ball receiving part 841 can be discharged downward to the rear side of the pachinko game machine 1 through the discharging passage 842. It has become.

The power supply board box 850 is formed in a horizontally long box shape with an open front, and includes a power supply board 851 attached so as to close the front end opening thereof. The power supply board box 850 accommodates various electronic components attached to the power supply board 851, and externally receives heat from the electronic components and the like through a plurality of slits 850a formed on the upper surface and the lower surface. It can be released to. The power switch 852 attached to the power supply board 851 faces the rear surface of the power supply board box 850.

The payout control board box 860 includes a thin box-shaped box base 861 that is horizontally long and has an open rear, a thin box-shaped cover 862 that is fitted into the box base 861 from the rear side and has an open front, and a box base 861. A payout control board 4110, which is attached to the rear surface and whose rear surface is covered by the cover 862, is provided. Further, the payout control board box 860 includes a plurality of separated cutting portions 863 formed on both the box base 861 and the cover 862 protruding outward from the left end of the rear view, and at one location of the plurality of separated cutting portions 863. The box base 861 and the cover 862 are caulked and fixed. As a result, in order to separate the box base 861 and the cover 862, it is not possible to separate the box base 861 and the cover 862 without cutting the separation cutting portion 863, and when the payout control board box 860 is opened, the trace remains. .. Therefore, it is possible to know whether or not the payout control board box 860 has been opened or closed illegally. In this embodiment, the payout control board box 860 can be opened and closed only once for inspection and the like.

Further, in the payout control board box 860, the operation switch 860a attached to the payout control board 4110, the inspection output terminal 860c, and the like face rearward through the cover 862. Further, in the payout control board box 860, terminals for various connections for connecting to the main control board 4100 and the like face rearward through the cover 862. The operation switch 860a is operated when the RAM built in the microprocessor of the payout control board 4110 and the RAM built in the microprocessor of the main control board 4100 are cleared when the power is turned on, or after the power is turned on. When an error is notified, it is operated to clear the error, and the function to clear the RAM at the time of turning on the power and the period to play the function as clearing the RAM have passed after the power was turned on. It has a function to cancel the error in (later). A detailed description of this point will be described later.

The terminal board box 870 includes a board base 871 attached to the rear surface of the speaker box 820, a frame peripheral relay terminal board 868 attached to the rear surface of the board base 871 and fixed to the peripheral panel relay terminal 872 toward the rear, and a board base. A board so that the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869, which is attached to the rear surface of 871 and the CR unit relay terminal 873 is fixed to the rear, and the peripheral panel relay terminal 872 and the CR unit relay terminal 873 face the rear side. It includes a substrate cover 874 that covers the rear side of the base 871. The peripheral panel relay terminal 872 is for connecting to a frequency display for displaying the operating status of the pachinko gaming machine 1 provided on the pachinko island facility side where the pachinko gaming machine 1 is installed, and is for connecting to a CR unit relay. Terminal 873 is for connecting to a CR unit installed adjacent to the pachinko gaming machine 1.

The main door relay terminal plate 880 and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 are provided on the door frame 5 together with the peripheral control board 4140 provided on the game board 4 attached to the main body frame 3, the payout control board 4110 of the board unit 800, and the like. This is for relaying the connection with the handle device 500, each decorative board, the operation unit 400, and the like. The main door relay terminal plate 880 and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 are attached to the board mounting portion formed on the front surface of the board unit base 810 so that they face the front side from the front surface of the main body frame base 600. The wiring extending from the door frame 5 can be connected.

The front side of the main door relay terminal plate 880 and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 is covered by the relay terminal plate cover 692 attached to the front surface of the main body frame base 600, and the relay terminal plate cover 692 Only the connection terminals face the front side through the opening 692a, so that the front surface of the main body frame 3 has a neat appearance.

Further, the main door relay terminal plate 880 includes a ball rental button 361, a return button 362, a rental balance display unit 363, a potentiometer 512 of the handle device 500, and a touch of the ball rental unit 360 in the dish unit 300 arranged on the door frame 5 side. This is for relaying the connection between the full switch 550 of the switch 516, the launch stop switch 518, and the foul cover unit 540, and the payout control board 4110 arranged on the main body frame 3 side. Regarding the ball rental button 361 of the ball rental unit 360, the return button 362, the loan balance display unit 363, the potentiometer 512 of the handle device 500, the touch switch 516, the launch stop switch 518, and the full tank switch 550 of the foul cover unit 540. The description will be described later.

Further, the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 is provided in each of the decorative units 200, 240, 280 arranged on the door frame 5 side, each of the decorative boards provided in the dish unit 300 and the operation unit 400, and the operation unit 400. , To relay the connection between the dial drive motor 414, various switches that detect the operation of the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405, and the peripheral control board 4140 of the game board 4 arranged on the main body frame 3 side. is there. The decorative units 200, 240, 280 arranged on the door frame 5 side, the decorative boards provided on the dish unit 300 and the operation unit 400, and the dial drive motor 414 and dial operation provided on the operation unit 400. A description of various switches for detecting the operation of the unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 will be described later.

[4. Overall configuration of door frame]
Next, the door frame 5 provided on the front side of the main body frame 3 so as to be openable and closable will be described with reference to FIG. 7. FIG. 7 is a perspective view of the door frame. As shown in FIG. 7, the door frame 5 includes a door frame base unit 100 having a game window 101 having an outer shape formed into a vertically long rectangular shape and an inner peripheral shape having a slightly vertically long circular shape (elliptical shape), and a door. The right side decoration unit 200 attached to the right outer circumference of the game window 101 on the front surface of the frame base unit 100, and the left side attached to the left outer circumference of the game window 101 on the front surface of the door frame base unit 100 facing the right side decoration unit 200. The decoration unit 240, the upper decoration unit 280 attached to the upper outer periphery of the game window 101 in front of the door frame base unit 100, and the door frame base unit arranged below the lower ends of the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240. It includes a pair of side speaker covers 290 that are attached to the front of the 100.

Further, the door frame 5 penetrates the plate unit 300 attached to the lower part of the game window 101 on the front surface of the door frame base unit 100, the operation unit 400 attached to the upper center of the plate unit 300, and the plate unit 300. A handle device 500 attached to the lower right corner of the frame base unit 100 for driving a game ball, and a rear surface of the door frame base unit 100 arranged behind the dish unit 300 with the door frame base unit 100 in between. The foul cover unit 540 attached to the foul cover unit 540, the ball feed unit 580 attached to the rear surface of the door frame base unit 100 on the right side of the foul cover unit 540, and the game window 101 attached to the rear side of the door frame base unit 100 so as to close. The glass unit 590 and the door are provided.

[4-1. Door frame base unit]
Next, the door frame base unit 100 will be described. The door frame base unit 100 has a door frame base body 110 having a game window 101 having an outer shape formed in a vertically long rectangular shape and a game window 101 having a substantially elliptical shape with an inner circumference penetrating in the front-rear direction and a door frame. An upper bracket 120 attached to the center of the upper part of the game window 101 on the front surface of the base body 110 to fix the upper decorative unit, and a pair of sides attached to the lower left and right sides of the game window 101 on the front surface of the door frame base body 110. It includes a speaker 130 and a handle bracket attached to the lower right corner of the front view on the front surface of the door frame base main body 110 to support the handle device 500.

Further, the door frame base unit 100 includes a metal frame-shaped reinforcing unit 150 (see FIG. 1) fixed to the rear side of the door frame base body 110 and a game window 101 on the rear surface of the door frame base body 110. A security cover 180 (see FIG. 1) attached so as to cover the lower portion, and a glass unit locking member 190 (FIG. 1) rotatably attached to a predetermined position on the outer periphery of the game window 101 on the rear surface of the door frame base main body 110. 1) and the launch cover 191 (see FIG. 1) which is arranged on the left side (open side) from the center in the left-right direction in the rear view and is attached to the rear surface of the door frame base body 110 along the lower end of the game window 101. , A handle relay terminal plate attached to the rear surface of the door frame base main body 110 under the launch cover 191 and relaying the connection between the potentiometer 512 of the handle device 500 described later and the main control board 4100 provided in the game board 4 described later. 192 (see FIG. 1), the handle relay terminal plate cover 193 (see FIG. 1) that covers the rear side of the handle relay terminal plate 192, and the launch cover 191 and the handle relay terminal plate 192 with the center in the left-right direction sandwiched. Frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 (see Fig. 1), which is arranged on the opposite side (rear view, to the right of the center in the left-right direction (shaft support side)) and attached to the rear surface of the door frame base body, and frame decoration drive. It includes a frame-decorated drive amplifier board cover 195 (see FIG. 1) that covers the rear side of the amplifier board 194.

The frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 is electrically connected to the side speakers 130 and the upper speakers of the left and right side decoration units 200 and 240, and is also electrically connected to the peripheral control board 4140 provided in the game board 4 described later. It is provided with an amplifier circuit that amplifies the acoustic signal sent from the peripheral control board 4140 and outputs it to each speaker 130. Although specific illustration is omitted, in the present embodiment, each of the decorative units 200, 240, 280, the dish unit 300, each decorative board provided in the operation unit 400, and the dial drive motor provided in the operation unit 400. The wiring that electrically connects the switch, the handle relay terminal board 192, the ball rental unit 360 of the dish unit 300, the payout control board 4110, the peripheral control board 4140, etc. is the rear view of the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194. After being bundled at the position on the right side (shaft support side), it extends rearward and is connected to the main door relay terminal plate 880 and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 of the main body frame 3.

[4-1-1. Door frame base body]
The door frame base main body 110 is formed of a synthetic resin in a vertically long frame shape, and is formed in such a form that the game window 101 having a vertically long inner shape and a substantially elliptical shape that penetrates in the front-rear direction is offset upward as a whole. Has been done. In the game window 101, the left and right side and the upper inner peripheral edge are formed in a continuous smooth curved line, while the lower inner peripheral edge is formed in a straight line extending to the left and right. Further, on the inner peripheral edge of the door frame base body 110 on the lower side of the game window 101, a square notch is formed on the shaft support side (left side in front view) through which the first ball outlet of the foul cover unit 540 can be inserted. The right (open side) end of the front surface, which is arranged on both the left and right outer sides of the lower side of the game window 101 and is arranged in the lower right corner of the front view to attach and fix the side speaker 130. A handle mounting part for mounting the handle bracket, a wiring passage port that penetrates in the front-rear direction at a predetermined position of the handle mounting part and allows wiring from the handle device 500 to pass through, and an upper side of the handle mounting part. A lock hole 116 is formed which is formed in a tubular shape extending shortly toward the front and through which a cylinder lock 1010, which will be described later, can be inserted. The width of the upper side and the left and right side sides of the door frame base body 110 formed by the game window 101 is the upper reinforcing sheet metal 151, the shaft support side reinforcing sheet metal 152, and the open side reinforcing sheet metal 153 of the reinforcing unit 150 described later. The width is substantially the same as the width of the game window 101, and the game window 101 is formed as large as possible with respect to the size of the door frame base body in the front view.

[4-1-2. Reinforcement unit]
The reinforcing unit 150 includes an upper reinforcing sheet metal 151 (see FIG. 1) attached along the back surface of the upper side of the door frame base body 110 and a shaft support attached along the back surface of the shaft support side of the door frame base body 110. The side reinforcing sheet metal 152 (see FIG. 1), the open side reinforcing sheet metal 153 attached along the back surface of the open side of the door frame base body 110 (see FIG. 1), and the game window 101 of the door frame base body 110. It is provided with a lower reinforcing sheet metal 154 (see FIG. 1) that is attached along the lower back surface of the lower side, and they are fastened to each other with screws, rivets, or the like to form a square shape.

At the upper and lower ends of the shaft support side reinforcing sheet metal 152, an upper shaft support 156 having a shaft pin 155 slidably provided on the upper surface thereof in the vertical direction and a lower shaft support 158 having a shaft pin 157 on the lower surface thereof are provided. It is provided integrally. Then, the upper and lower shaft pins 155 and 157 are pivotally supported by the upper shaft support metal fittings 630 and the lower shaft support metal fittings 640 formed above and below the shaft support side of the main body frame 3, so that the door frame 5 is pivotally supported with respect to the main body frame 3. It is designed to be pivotally supported so that it can be opened and closed.

Further, a hook cover 165 that comes into contact with the door frame hook portion 1041 of the locking device 1000 is provided in the lower part of the rear side of the open side reinforcing sheet metal 153. The hook cover 165 engages with the door frame hook portion 1041 of the lock device 1000 attached along the open side of the main body frame 3 when the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3. By inserting the key into the cylinder lock 1010 of the lock device 1000 and rotating it in one direction (rotating the main body frame 3 in the direction opposite to the opening direction with respect to the outer frame 2), the door frame hook portion 1041 and the hook cover The door frame 5 can be opened with respect to the main body frame 3 by being disengaged from the 165.

[4-2. Dish unit]
Next, the dish unit 300 will be described. The plate unit 300 includes an upper plate 301 and a lower plate 302 for storing the game balls paid out from the prize ball device 740, and launches the game balls stored in the upper plate 301 via the ball feeding unit. It can be supplied to the device 650.

The shape of the upper plate upper panel 314 of the plate unit 300 is formed in a curved shape so as to project forward from the left to the center when viewed from the front, and is linearly forward from the center to the right. It is formed so as to protrude. An operation unit mounting portion to which the operation unit 400 is mounted is formed in the upper center of the dish unit 300, and a rectangular shape larger than the outer shape of the mobile terminal 470 for mounting the mobile terminal 470 on the right side of the operation unit mounting portion. A recess 314d is formed. The shape of the upper plate upper panel 314 on which the recess 314d is formed is formed in a plate shape, and when a player presses this portion downward by hand, for example, the upper plate upper panel 314 bends downward. When the pressing force exceeds a predetermined force, the upper plate upper panel 314 is broken. This is because the mobile terminal 470 is expensive, so when the player presses the screen of the mobile terminal 470, the force is received by the upper plate upper panel 314 to bend the upper plate upper panel 314. By doing so, the mobile terminal 470 is not damaged. That is, a structure is adopted in which the upper plate upper panel 314 is damaged before the mobile terminal 470 is damaged. If the upper plate upper panel 314 is damaged, the plate unit 300 will be replaced.

Further, the plate unit 300 has an upper plate ball removing mechanism 340 for pulling out the game balls stored in the upper plate 301 to the lower plate 302 in response to the operation of the upper plate ball removing button 341, and a lower plate ball removing button 354. A lower plate ball removing mechanism 350 for pulling out the game ball stored in the lower plate 302 downward through the lower plate ball removing hole 324b in response to the operation of, and a lower plate ball removing mechanism 350 installed adjacent to the pachinko gaming machine 1 (not shown). It is equipped with a ball rental unit 360 for operating the CR unit.

[4-2-1. Operation unit]
The operation unit 400 is arranged in front of the upper plate 301 at substantially the center in the left-right direction of the front view, and includes a dial operation unit 401 that can be rotated and operated by the player, and a pressing operation unit 405 that can be pressed by the player. It is possible to accept the player's operation and move the dial operation unit 401 according to the game state, and participate not only in the player's driving operation of the game ball but also in the production during the game. It allows you to do it. The rotation (rotation direction) of the dial operation unit 401 is detected by the rotation detection switch provided in the operation unit 400, and the operation of the pressing operation unit 405 is detected by the pressure detection switch provided in the operation unit 400.

Further, the operation unit 400 can rotate the dial operation unit 401 in the clockwise direction or the counterclockwise direction by the driving force of the dial drive motor 414. Further, the operation unit 400 rotates the dial operation unit 401 stepwise by the driving force of the dial drive motor 414 using the stepping motor, or when the player rotates the dial operation unit 401, the operation unit 400 rotates the dial operation unit 401. It is possible to assist the rotation, prevent it from rotating intentionally, and give a click feeling to the rotation. Further, the operation unit 400 can vibrate the dial operation unit 401 by alternately repeating the rotation of rotating the dial drive motor 414 in the forward direction and the rotation of the dial drive motor 414 in the reverse direction in small steps.

[4-2-2. Ball rental unit]
The ball lending unit 360 includes a ball lending button 361 and a return button 362 that can be pressed backward, and a lending balance display unit 363 between the ball lending button 361 and the return button 362. When the ball lending button 361 is operated, it is detected by the ball lending switch 365a, and when the return button 362 is operated, it is detected by the return switch 365b. The display content of the residual frequency display 365c can be visually recognized via the loan residual display unit 363. The CR unit lamp 365d is arranged adjacent to the residual power display 365c, and the light emitting mode of the CR unit lamp 365d can be visually recognized via the rental residual display unit 363. The ball rental switch 365a, the return switch 365b, the remaining frequency indicator 365c, and the CR unit lamp 365d are mounted on the frequency display board 365, and the frequency display plate 365 is mounted inside the ball rental unit 360. .. The ball lending unit 360 inserts cash or a prepaid card into the ball lending machine provided adjacent to the pachinko game machine 1, and then presses the ball lending button 361 to release a predetermined number of game balls into the dish unit. You can rent (pay out) into the upper plate 301 of 300, and when you press the return button 362, the balance of cash and prepaid card that you put in after subtracting the rest of the lent amount will be returned. ing. In addition, the loan balance display unit 363 displays the remaining number of cash and prepaid cards inserted into the ball lending machine.

[4-2-3. Mobile terminal]
The mobile terminal 470 placed in the recess 314d formed on the right side of the upper plate upper panel 314 of the plate unit 300 is managed by a hall. A unique number (ID number) is pre-recorded on each mobile terminal managed by the hall. The mobile terminal 470 in this embodiment has a No. 1 ID number. 123 is stored in advance. The player goes to the reception of the hall, receives the mobile terminal 470, sits on the front surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1 playing the game, and places the mobile terminal 470 in the recess 314d formed on the right side of the plate unit 300. When the mobile terminal 470 is placed in the recess 314d, the peripheral control board 4140 performs communication initial settings for bidirectionally exchanging various information (various data) with the mobile terminal 470. In this initial communication setting, the individual information acquisition process for acquiring the ID number from the mobile terminal 470 is performed, and the ID number acquired in this individual information acquisition process and the machine number of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (the machine number installed in the hall, In the present embodiment, the associative processing for associating No. 8) with is performed. As a result, the pachinko game machine 1 and the mobile terminal 470 have a one-to-one correspondence relationship, and the other mobile terminal 470'is used as a plate unit except for the mobile terminal MST for the staff owned by the staff such as the hall clerk who patrols the hall. Even if it is placed in the recess 314d formed on the right side of the 300, even if the information from the other mobile terminal 470'is input wirelessly, the peripheral control board 4140 is determined not to be the information from the mobile terminal 470 and the mobile terminal. While rejecting the information from the 470', the mobile terminal 470 determines that the information is not from the pachinko game machine 1 even if the information from the other pachinko game machine 1'adjacent to the pachinko game machine 1 is input wirelessly. Information from the pachinko game machine 1'is rejected. That is, in the initial communication setting, the game board is in a state where the mobile terminal 470 associated with the association process is placed (set) in the recess 314d formed on the right side of the upper plate upper panel 314 of the plate unit 300. It is possible to maintain a state in which the operation of various gaming devices provided in 4 can be started. On the other hand, in the initial communication setting, another mobile terminal 470'different from the mobile terminal 470 associated by the association process is placed in the recess 314d formed on the right side of the upper plate upper panel 314 of the plate unit 300. In the (set) state, it is possible to maintain a state in which the operations of various game devices provided on the game board 4 cannot be started. In other words, the mobile terminal is the key for starting the operation of the game device.

In this way, the player goes to the reception desk in the hall, receives the mobile terminal 470, and places (sets) the mobile terminal 470 in the recess 314d formed on the right side of the upper plate upper panel 314 of the plate unit 300. As a result, the unique number (ID number) stored in advance in the mobile terminal 470 can be associated with the pachinko gaming machine 1 (unit number installed in the hall, No. 8 in this embodiment). Therefore, when the player may leave the seat of the pachinko game machine 1 due to, for example, a rest in the toilet, he / she may leave the seat of the pachinko game machine 1 with the mobile terminal 470. Even if the player goes to the reception desk in the hall and receives the mobile terminal 470', and the mobile terminal 470' possessed by the player sits in the seat of the pachinko game machine 1 and is set in the pachinko game machine 1, that is, the mobile terminal. Even if the 470'is placed (set) in the recess 314d formed on the right side of the upper plate upper panel 314 of the plate unit 300, the game is restarted by maintaining the state in which the operation of the gaming device cannot be started. You can't do it. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game from being restarted by another player while the player is away from the desk.

When the mobile terminal 470 is taken out (lifted) from the recess 314d formed on the right side of the upper plate upper panel 314 of the plate unit 300, the mobile terminal 470 and the pachinko gaming machine 1 (peripheral control board 4140) communicate with each other. With this as an opportunity, the peripheral control board 4140 is unable to communicate with the mobile terminal 470, that is, after the player takes out (lifts) the mobile terminal 470 from the recess 314d. The elapsed time is timed to start. The peripheral control board 4140 determines that the player is not ready to sit in front of the pachinko gaming machine 1 and start the game when the mobile terminal 470 is not mounted in the recess 314d. A screen for notifying that the player is away from the seat is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device (also referred to as “liquid crystal display device on the game board side”) provided in the game board 4.

When the player may leave the seat of the pachinko game machine 1 due to, for example, a restroom break or the purchase of a drink, the player holds the mobile terminal 470 and leaves the seat of the pachinko game machine 1. The state in which 1 displays the screen for notifying the absence of seats in the display area of the liquid crystal display device on the game board side and notifies the player is maintained. At this time, when the mobile terminal MST for the staff possessed by the staff such as the clerk of the hall that patrols the hall is placed in the recess 314d formed on the right side of the upper plate upper panel 314 of the plate unit 300, the peripheral control board 4140 is placed. Communication initial settings for wirelessly exchanging various information (various data) with the mobile terminal MST for staff members are performed. The elapsed time during which the mobile terminal 470 and the peripheral control board 4140 cannot communicate, that is, the elapsed time from when the player takes out (lifts) the mobile terminal 470 from the recess 314d (lifts), is the display area of the mobile terminal MST for staff. It is designed to be displayed in. If the elapsed time displayed on the screen has passed a predetermined time (15 minutes in this embodiment), the staff such as the clerk in the hall will use the mobile terminal 470 possessed by the player who has left the seat. In order to cancel the correspondence with the pachinko gaming machine 1, the correspondence cancellation command is transmitted from the mobile terminal MST for staff to the peripheral control board 4140 by touching the release button displayed on the screen. (In addition, the staff such as the hall clerk who patrols the hall should contact the manager of the hall management room and the counter staff at the reception of the hall before canceling the correspondence between the mobile terminal 470 and the pachinko game machine 1. Then, the player who possesses the mobile terminal 470 tells the hall to play a call announcement to return to the pachinko game machine 1. A staff member such as a clerk in the hall is on the right side of the upper plate upper panel 314 of the plate unit 300. The clerk's mobile terminal MST is taken out (lifted) from the formed recess 314d, and the hall is patrolled until a predetermined time (for example, 5 minutes) elapses after the call announcement is played. The clerk repositioned the clerk's mobile terminal MST in the recess 314d formed on the right side of the upper plate upper panel 314 of the plate unit 300, and the mobile terminal 470 and the peripheral control board 4140 could not communicate with each other. When the elapsed time, that is, the elapsed time since the player took out (lifted) the mobile terminal 470 from the recess 314d and (lifted) it is displayed in the display area of the mobile terminal MST for staff, the staff such as the clerk in the hall displays the screen. Since the displayed elapsed time has already passed a predetermined time (15 minutes in this embodiment), the correspondence between the mobile terminal 470 owned by the player who has left the seat and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is canceled. Will be). The peripheral control board 4140 cancels the correspondence relationship between the mobile terminal 470 owned by the player who has left the seat and the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the received correspondence cancellation command, and is in a customer waiting state from the seat leaving notification screen. It is switched to a demonstration that becomes a screen. When a clerk such as a clerk in the hall takes out (lifts) the clerk's mobile terminal MST from the recess 314d, he / she can accept the mobile terminal 470'owned by another player. That is, another player can sit on the front surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1 and place the mobile terminal 470'in the recess 314d formed on the right side of the plate unit 300 to start the game. There is. In addition, when a clerk such as a clerk in the hall takes out (lifts) the mobile terminal MST for the clerk from the recess 314d, the demonstration that the screen of the absence notification is switched to the screen of waiting for customers is switched to this demonstration. If the mobile terminal is placed (set) in the recess 314d and the game is not started during the demonstration, the mode shifts to the power saving mode after the demonstration.

In addition, a player who was seated in front of the pachinko game machine 1 last time and played a game, for example, a player who took a mobile terminal 470 and left the seat of the pachinko game machine 1 due to a rest in the toilet or purchase of a drink. When the mobile terminal 470 is taken out (lifted) from the recess 314d formed on the right side of the dish unit 300 when leaving the seat, the remaining time until the game restart time is timed on the mobile terminal 470 (that is,). , The mobile terminal 470 also has a timekeeping function.) In the display area, the unit number of the pachinko game machine 1 (unit number installed in the hall, No. 8 in the present embodiment) and " Please return within 15 minutes and set again. ”And the message are displayed respectively. When this message is displayed for a predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds), it is switched to a message indicating the remaining time until the game restart time and is displayed. Then, when the remaining 3 minutes are reached, the machine number of the pachinko gaming machine 1 and the message "3 minutes remaining until the game restart time" are displayed in the display area of the mobile terminal 470, and the remaining time is 3 The minute number "3" is blinking and displayed, and the background color changes from white to bright red. At this time, the mobile terminal 470 continues to vibrate and the alarm sound "boo, boo, boo" continues to sound. In this state, when the mobile terminal 470 is placed again in the recess 314d formed on the right side of the upper plate upper panel 314 of the plate unit 300, the communication between the mobile terminal 470 and the peripheral control board 4140 is restored, so that the mobile terminal 470 is restored. The vibration and alarm sound of the device are stopped. On the other hand, if the mobile terminal 470 is not placed again in the recess 314d formed on the right side of the upper plate upper panel 314 of the plate unit 300 by the game restart time, the mobile terminal 470 is the base of the pachinko gaming machine 1. The correspondence with the number is canceled, and the fact is displayed in the display area of the mobile terminal 470. As described above, the mobile terminal 470 also has a support function for returning to the pachinko gaming machine 1 in which the player is playing the game.

Further, for example, when the mobile terminal 470 is taken away from the seat of the pachinko gaming machine 1 due to a restroom break or the purchase of a drink, the remaining time until the game restart time is timed on the mobile terminal 470 and the display area is displayed. Displays the machine number of the pachinko game machine 1 (the machine number installed in the hall, No. 8 in this embodiment) and the message "Please return within 15 minutes and set again." Therefore, even if the player who has left the seat of the pachinko game machine 1 inadvertently forgets the machine number of the pachinko game machine 1 in which he / she is playing the game, the mobile terminal 470 It suffices to confirm (just look at) the machine number of the pachinko game machine 1 displayed in the display area (the machine number installed in the hall, No. 8 in this embodiment), and other machines different from the pachinko game machine 1. It is possible to prevent the mobile terminal 470 from being set by mistake when sitting on the front of the pachinko machine. Therefore, even if the player leaves the seat, he / she can return to the original seat and resume the game. When the player sets the mobile terminal 470 in another pachinko game machine different from the pachinko game machine 1 in which he / she is playing, the machine number of the pachinko game machine is different in the display area of the mobile terminal 470. A message telling you that you are is displayed.

By the way, since the mobile terminal 470 is owned by the hall, when the player takes the mobile terminal 470 out of the hall, the notification sound is detected by the detection device installed at the hall entrance and exit. The reception of the hall and the hall management room are ringing. However, when the player leaves the seat of the pachinko gaming machine 1, such as when taking a meal break or taking a break to refresh, a break time is set, and as will be described later, the display area of the mobile terminal 470 is set. When the remaining time until the game restart time is displayed, even if the mobile terminal 470 is detected by the detection device installed at the hall entrance / exit, the notification sound is emitted to the hall entrance / exit, the hall reception, and the hall management room. It is designed not to ring. Further, even if the player can take the mobile terminal 470 out of the hall, the tracking system on the hall side can grasp the current position of the mobile terminal 470.

Further, during the game, the pachinko game machine 1 and the mobile terminal 470 wirelessly exchange various information (various data) in both directions, so that the power of the mobile terminal 470 is consumed, so that the dish unit 300 A mobile terminal charging device 460 for wirelessly charging the mobile terminal 470 is attached to the back surface side of the upper plate upper panel 314 corresponding to the bottom surface of the recess 314d formed on the right side of the upper plate upper panel 314. The charging method by the portable terminal charging device 460 will be briefly described. By providing the portable terminal charging device 460 with a transmitting side coil (not shown) and providing the mobile terminal 470 with a receiving side coil (not shown), the transmitting side coil is provided with the transmitting side coil. The mechanism is such that electric current is passed to change the magnetic flux, and power is transmitted by "electromagnetic induction" in which the current flows through the receiving coil due to the change in the magnetic flux from the transmitting coil. In this way, when the mobile terminal 470 received by the player at the reception in the hall is placed in the recess 314d formed on the right side of the upper plate upper panel 314 of the plate unit 300, the player can charge the mobile terminal 470. Since charging is automatically started without performing the work of connecting the wiring, the power consumption of the mobile terminal 470 makes it impossible to communicate with the mobile terminal 470 and the pachinko game machine 1. Is not interrupted. As a result, the player can play the game for a long time without worrying about the remaining battery level due to the power consumption of the mobile terminal 470.

[4-3. Ball feed unit]
Next, the ball feeding unit 580 will be described. The ball feeding unit 580 can supply the game balls supplied from the upper plate 301 in the plate unit 300 to the hitting ball launching device 650 one by one, and the game balls stored in the upper plate 301 can be used as the upper plate balls. It can be pulled out to the lower plate 302 by operating the upper plate ball removing button 341 of the pulling mechanism 340.

In the ball feed unit 580, the game balls stored in the upper plate 301 of the plate unit 300 are supplied through the upper plate ball discharge port of the upper plate 301 and the ball feed opening of the door frame base main body 110 and penetrate in the front-rear direction. , And a box-shaped front cover that has a ball outlet that opens under the entrance and the rear is open, and a box-shaped front that closes the rear end of the front cover and is open in the front, penetrating in the front-rear direction. Rotates around an axis extending in the front-rear direction between the rear cover having a hit ball supply port 582a for supplying the game ball invading from the entry port of the front cover to the hit ball launcher 650, and the rear cover and the front cover. A ball pulling member that is pivotally supported and has a partition portion that separates the entrance and the ball pulling port on the rear side of the front cover, and a game ball on the partition portion of the ball pulling member are hit by the rear cover one by one. A ball feed member rotatably supported around an axis extending in the vertical direction between the front cover and the rear cover to the supply port 582a, and a ball feed solenoid 585 for rotating the ball feed member are provided. There is.

When the ball feeding solenoid 585 is driven (ON state), the ball feeding member accepts one game ball, while when the driving of the ball feeding solenoid 585 is released (OFF state), the ball feeding member accepts it. The game ball is sent (supplied) to the hit ball launching device 650 side.

[4-4. Handle device]
Next, the handle device 500 will be described. The handle device 500 includes a handle base that is fixed to a handle bracket attached to the front surface of the door frame base body 110 and has a cylindrical shape and a front end that bulges round in the direction perpendicular to the axis, and a handle base that can rotate relative to the handle base. It is arranged in front of the annular rotary handle main body arranged on the front side, the rotary handle main body front 506 fixed to the front after the rotary handle main body and integrally rotatable with the rotary handle main body, and the front of the rotary handle main body 506. It is also provided with a front end cover 508 that is fixed to the handle base and rotatably supports the front 506 of the rotating handle body and the rear of the rotating handle body in cooperation with the handle base.

Further, the handle device 500 is attached and fixed to the rotation center in front of the rotary handle body so as to project from the front side to the rear side, and is fitted with a shaft member having a non-circular bearing portion at the rear end and a bearing portion of the shaft member. Detection of the potentiometer 512, which has a detection shaft that is rotatable and is non-rotatably fitted to the front of the handle base, and the potentiometer 512, which is fixed to the front of the handle base so as to sandwich the potentiometer 512 with the handle base. A switch support member having a through hole through which the shaft portion can pass, a touch switch 516 attached to the rear surface of the switch support member, and a launch stop switch 518 attached to a different position on the rear surface of the switch support member from the touch switch 516. , A single-shot button that is rotatably supported by the switch support member and activates the launch stop switch 518, and is arranged so as to cover the outer periphery of the shaft member. A handle return spring that urges the user to return to the counterclockwise direction (rotation end in the counterclockwise direction) visually, and the rotation of the rotation handle body front 506 is magnified to the detection shaft portion of the potentiometer 512 (in this embodiment). It is equipped with a gear mechanism 519 (which expands 1.5 times). The potentiometer 512 is for electrically adjusting the strength of launching the game ball toward the game area 1100 according to the rotation position of the rotation handle main body front 506. Further, the front 506 of the rotary handle body and the rear of the rotary handle body rotate from the original rotation position to the limit rotation position (rotation end in the clockwise direction in the front view) which is the maximum rotation position in the clockwise direction in the front view. To do.

Further, in the handle device 500, the potentiometer 512 is a variable resistor, and when the front 506 of the rotary handle body and the rear of the rotary handle body are rotated, the detection shaft portion of the potentiometer 512 is rotated via the shaft member. .. Then, the internal resistance of the potentiometer 512 changes according to the rotation position (rotation angle) of the detection shaft portion, and the driving force of the launch solenoid 654 in the ball launching device 650 changes according to the internal resistance of the potentiometer 512. The game ball is driven into the game area 1100 with a firing strength corresponding to the rotation angle of the front 506 of the main body and the rear of the rotary handle body, that is, the rotation position of the front 506 of the rotary handle body and the rear of the rotary handle body. There is.

[4-5. Foul cover unit]
Next, the foul cover unit 540 will be described. The foul cover unit 540 is attached to the rear surface of the door frame base unit 100 below the game window 101, and is a game despite being fired by the game ball paid out from the prize ball unit 700 or the hit ball launcher 650. The game ball (foul ball) that has not reached the area 1100 is guided to the upper plate 301 and the lower plate 302 of the plate unit 300. The foul cover unit 540 includes a cover base whose front side is open and which has a plurality of game ball flow paths inside, and a front cover that closes the front end of the cover base.

The cover base of the foul cover unit 540 has a first ball entrance 542a that is arranged in the upper right corner in the rear view and penetrates in the front-rear direction, and a first ball that communicates with the first ball entrance and spreads to the right side in the front view toward the front end of the cover base 542. Inside the one-ball passage, the second ball entrance 542c, which is located outside the first ball entrance 542a (on the right side when viewed from the rear) and is larger than the first ball entrance 542a, and inside the cover base that communicates with the second ball passage. The second ball entrance 542c, which extends downward and is inclined so as to be lowered toward the lower right corner of the front view, is provided. The first ball entrance 542a and the second ball entrance 542c are the normal ball outlet 774 and the full tank outlet 77 of the full tank branch unit 770 in the prize ball unit 700 in a state where the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3. It is formed at a position facing each other. In the second ball passage in the cover base, the height of the portion extending in the left-right direction along the lower end is about three times as high as the outer diameter of the game ball, and a predetermined amount of the game ball can be used. A storage space that can be accommodated is formed.

Further, the cover base 542 communicates with the foul ball inlet 542e, which is arranged at the substantially central upper part in the left-right direction and opens upward, and the foul ball inlet 542e, which can guide the game ball to the upper part near the downstream of the second ball passage. It is equipped with a ball passage. Further, the cover base is provided with an opening / closing operating piece for operating the opening / closing shutter 792 of the ball outlet opening / closing unit 790 on the rear surface below the second ball entrance. When the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the opening / closing actuating piece comes into contact with the spherical contact portion of the opening / closing crank in the ball outlet opening / closing unit 790 to rotate the opening / closing crank and open / close the shutter 792. It can be in the open state.

The front cover of the foul cover unit 540 is formed in a substantially plate shape that closes the front surface of the cover base, and is arranged in the upper left corner of the front view and communicates with the first ball passage of the cover base and penetrates in the front-rear direction. It includes an exit and a second ball outlet that is arranged in the lower right corner of the front view and communicates with the downstream end of the second ball passage of the cover base 542 and penetrates in the front-rear direction. The first ball outlet of the front cover is connected to the upper plate ball supply port of the plate unit 300 through the notch of the door frame base unit 100. Further, the second ball outlet is connected to the rear end of the lower plate ball supply gutter in the plate unit 300 through the ball passage port of the door frame base main body 110.

The foul cover unit 540 allows the game ball supplied from the normal ball outlet 774 of the full tank branch unit 770 in the prize ball unit 700 to the first ball inlet 542a to pass through the first ball passage from the first ball outlet to the plate unit 300. It can be supplied to the upper plate 301 through the upper plate ball supply port. Further, the foul cover unit 540 allows the game ball supplied from the full tank outlet 776 of the full tank branch unit 770 in the prize ball unit 700 to the second ball inlet 542c from the second ball outlet through the second ball passage. It can be supplied to the lower plate 302 through the lower plate ball supply gutter and the lower plate ball supply port of the plate unit 300.

Further, in the foul cover unit 540, when the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the foul ball entrance 542e is located at the lower part of the foul space 626 of the main body frame 3, and the ball hitting device. When the game ball launched by the 650 does not reach the game area 1100 and becomes a foul ball and falls in the foul space 626, it is received by the foul ball entrance 542e. Then, the foul cover unit 540 can discharge (supply) the game ball received at the foul ball entrance 542e from the second ball outlet to the lower plate 302 of the plate unit 300 through the foul ball passage and the second ball passage. You can do it.

Further, the foul cover unit 540 forms a side surface on the upstream side (left side in the front view) of the accommodation space in the second ball passage, and is pivotally supported by the cover base by a game ball stored in the accommodation space. It includes a member, a full tank switch 550 that detects the swing of the swing member, and a spring that urges the swing member in a direction in which the swing member is not detected by the full tank switch 550. The lower end of this swinging member is rotatably supported with respect to the cover base, and the upper end rotates to the left side when viewed from the front, so that the left side wall of the accommodation space is substantially vertical. It is designed to form. Further, the swing member is urged by a spring to a position where it is in a substantially vertical state. Further, the rocking member is formed with a detection piece protruding outward on the side surface opposite to the accommodation space side, and this detection piece is detected by the full tank switch 550. That is, based on the detection signal from the full tank switch 550, it is possible to determine whether or not the game ball in which the accommodation space is stored is full.

[5. Overall configuration of the game board]
Next, the overall configuration of the game board 4 will be described with reference to FIGS. 8 and 9. FIG. 8 is a front view of the game board, and FIG. 9 is an exploded perspective view of the game board of FIG. 8 as viewed from the front. In the present embodiment, as described above, by adopting the small launch solenoid 654, the size of the ball launching device 650 can be made compact, and by increasing the vertical dimension of the game board 4, a large game can be played. It is board 4. As shown in FIGS. 8 and 9, the large game board 4 has an outer rail 1111 and an inner rail 1112, and a game area in which a game ball as a game medium is driven by a player operating a handle device 500. The frame-shaped front component 1110 that forms the outer periphery of the 1100 and the front right corner of the front component 1110 can be visually recognized from the game window 101 of the door frame 5 when attached to the pachinko game machine 1. A plurality of openings that are attached to the rear side of the front component 1110 so as to close the game area 1100 and that penetrate in the front-rear direction in a predetermined shape at a position corresponding to the game area 1100. It includes a plate-shaped game panel 1150 having 1158, a front unit 2000 attached to the opening 1158 of the game panel 1150 from the front side, and a back unit 3000 attached to the rear surface of the game panel 1150.

Further, the game board 4 is arranged between the game panel 1150 and the back unit 3000, and is inserted from the rear side of the game panel 1150 into a plurality of light emitting decorative holes formed so as to penetrate the game panel 1150. A liquid crystal display device that is detachably attached to the rear side of the panel lens member 2500 and the back unit 3000 and can display a predetermined effect image that can be visually recognized from the player side according to the game state ("Game board side liquid crystal display"). (Also referred to as "device"), a board holder 1160 attached to the lower part of the rear surface of the game panel 1150 so as to cover the lower part of the back unit 3000 from the rear side, and a main control board box 1170 attached to the rear surface of the board holder 1160. I have.

[5-1. Front component]
Next, the front component 1110 will be described. The outer shape of the front component 1110 is a substantially rectangular shape that can be inserted into the game board holding port 601 of the main body frame 3, and the inner shape penetrates in the front-rear direction in a substantially circular shape, and the game is played by the inner circumference of the inner shape. The outer circumference of the region 1100 is partitioned. The front component 1111 includes an outer rail 1111 extending in an arc shape from the lower end to the left from the center in the left-right direction in a front view, passing through the upper end in the center in the left-right direction in the front view, and extending diagonally to the upper right. The inner rail 1112, which is arranged inside the outer rail 1111 substantially along the outer rail 1111 and extends in an arc shape from the lower center in the left-right direction of the front view to the diagonally upper left side of the front view, and the inner rail 1112 so as to be smoothly continuous from the lower end of the inner rail 1112. The inner peripheral rail 1113 extending in an arc shape to a position below the end (upper end) of the outer rail 1111 along the circumferential direction counterclockwise when viewed from the front, and the end (upper end) and outer rail 1111 of the inner peripheral rail 1113. At the boundary between the abutment portion 1114 where the game ball that has rolled along the outer rail 1111 and the end (upper end) of the inner rail 1111 can come into contact with the game ball, and the inner rail 1113 and the inner peripheral rail 1113, the game area 1100 From the upper end of the inner rail 1112 so as to close between the out port guide surface 1115 arranged at the lowermost end and lowered toward the rear and the outer rail 1111 which is rotatably supported by the upper end of the inner rail 1112. It is possible to rotate only between the closed position extending upward and the open position where it rotates in the clockwise direction and opens between the outer rail 1111 and returns to the closed position side. It includes a backflow prevention member 1116 urged by a spring.

Assuming that the game board 4 is attached to the main body frame 3, the lower end opening between the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112 of the front component 1110 is the launch rail 660 in the ball launching device 650 of the main body frame 3 (FIG. 1). It is designed to be located on the extension line of). A space extending in the left-right direction and downward is formed between the lower end of the outer rail 1111 and the upper end of the launch rail 660, and the game ball launched along the launch rail 660 of the ball launcher 650 is formed. The space is jumped over, and the lower end opening between the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112 is driven into the space between the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112. The game ball driven between the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112 rolls upward along the outer rail 1111 according to the momentum, and the backflow prevention member 1116 pivotally supported at the upper end of the inner rail 1112. By rotating to the open position side against the urging force, it is possible to invade the game area 1100.

Further, when the game ball is strongly hit by the hit ball launching device 650, the game ball that has rolled along the outer rail 1111 in the game area 1100 comes into contact with the abutment portion 1114 provided at the end of the outer rail 1111. When the game ball comes into contact with the abutting portion 1114, the rolling direction of the game ball can be forcibly changed, and the game ball continuously rolls from the outer rail 1111 to the inner rail 1113. It is designed to prevent it from moving. Even if the game ball that has entered (dried) into the game area 1100 tries to return between the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112, the backflow prevention member 1116 returns to the closed position by the urging force before that. As a result, the backflow prevention member 1116 prevents the backflow of the game ball.

Further, if the game ball driven into the game area 1100 is not accepted by the start ports 2101, 1022 and the winning ports 2103, 2104, 2201 of the front unit 2000, it flows down to the lower end of the game area 1100. The out port guiding surface 1115 at the boundary between the inner rail 1112 and the inner peripheral rail 1113 guides the game panel 1150 to the out port 1151 and discharges the game board 4 downward from the out port 1151. ..

On the other hand, if the game ball launched from the ball striking device 650 cannot enter the game area 1100 beyond the backflow prevention member 1116 at the tip of the inner rail 1112, the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112 are combined. A foul space 626 formed between the upper end of the launch rail 660 and the lower end of the outer rail 1111 from the lower end opening between the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112, rolling downward in the opposite direction. (See FIG. 1) will fall and will be accepted by the foul ball inlet 542e (see FIG. 1) of the foul cover unit 540 attached to the door frame 5 located at the bottom of the foul space 626 in the dish unit 300. It is designed to be discharged to the lower plate 302 (see FIG. 7).

A metal plate is attached to the surface of the outer rail 1111 of the front constituent member 1110 to improve the wear resistance due to the rolling of the game ball, and the game ball rolls smoothly. ing. Further, the impact portion 1114 has an elastic body such as rubber or synthetic resin arranged on the surface thereof, so that even if the game ball rolls vigorously along the outer rail 1111 and collides with the abutment portion 1114, the impact is alleviated. It is also possible to repel the game ball inward.

Further, the front component 1110 is vertically separated from the left end of the front view, and is vertically separated from the pair of positioning recesses 1119 which are recessed from the front to the rear and opened to the left end. A pair of game board stoppers 1120 arranged, a fixed recess 1121 arranged on the left side of the outer rail 1111 on the left side in the front view and opened downward, and the upper side formed in an arc shape and recessed from the front side, and the lower end in the front view. A notch 1122 for a ball passage, which is notched in a rectangular shape extending upward from the lower end in the left-right direction, is provided near the left end of the above. The positioning recess 1119 of the front component 1110 is fitted with the positioning member 956 (see FIG. 5) attached to the inside of the side security plate 950 in the main body frame 3, so that the game board holding port 601 (see FIG. 5) is fitted. ), The left end of the front view of the game board 4 can be restricted from moving in the front-rear direction. Further, the game board stopper 1120 can be detachably locked to the game board locking portion of the main body frame base 600 in the main body frame 3, and the game board stopper 1120 can be locked to the game board clerk. By locking it to the stop portion, it is possible to restrict the right end of the game board 4 inserted into the game board holding port 601 of the main body frame 3 from moving in the front-rear direction.

Further, the fixing recess 1121 of the front component 1110 is a game board fixing tool 690 (FIG. 5) pivotally supported on the front surface of the main body frame 3 in a state where the game board 4 is inserted into the game board holding port 601 of the main body frame 3. When the game board fixture 690 is rotated in the clockwise direction in front view (see), the fixing piece 690a (see FIG. 5) of the game board fixture 690 is inserted, and the game board 4 is inserted by the game board fixture 690. The lower end of the is restricted from moving forward. Further, in the ball passage notch 1122 of the front component 1110, a similar ball passage notch 1152 is formed at the same position of the game panel 1150, and the game board 4 is used as the game board holding port 601 of the main body frame 3. In the state of being inserted into, the front end of the full tank branch unit 770 (see FIG. 5) is inserted into the notch portion 1122, 1152 for the ball passage.

A function display unit 1180, which will be described later, is arranged at the lower right of the front view of the front component 1110.

[5-2. Table unit]
Next, the table unit 2000 of the game board 4 will be described. The front unit 200 is arranged above the out port 1151 at the lower center in the left-right direction in the game area 1100 and is supported on the front surface of the game panel 1150, and the outer periphery of the game area 1100 on the left side of the attacker unit 2100. A side winning opening member 2200 arranged along the above and supported on the front surface of the game panel 1150, and a frame-shaped center accessory 2300 arranged along a substantially central portion of the game area 1100 and supported by the game panel 1150. There is.

The table unit 2000 is inserted from the front side into the opening 1158 formed at a position corresponding to the game area 1100 in the game panel 1150, and is attached to the front surface of the game panel 1150. The portion protruding forward from the game panel 1150 is located within the game area 1100. As a result, the front unit 2000 comes into contact with the game ball driven into the game area 1100 at an appropriate position, and with the obstacle nails planted on the front surface of the game panel 1150, with respect to the movement of the game ball. It is possible to give a change. Further, the table unit 2000 can decorate the inside of the game area 1100.

In addition, the method of hitting the game ball such that the game ball launched toward the game area 1100 flows down to the left of the center accessory 2300 is called "left strike", whereas the right side of the center accessory 2300 The method of hitting a game ball that flows down is called "right hit".

[5-2-1. Attacker unit]
Next, the attacker unit 2100 of the table unit 2000 will be described. The attacker unit 2100 has a plurality of entrances (winning openings) that allow the game balls driven into the game area 1100 to be accepted, and specifically, the attacker unit 2100 is arranged substantially in the center in the left-right direction. A rectangle arranged below the starting port 2101, the lower starting port 2101 located below the upper starting port 2101, and below the lower starting port 2102, and extending significantly in the left-right direction from the upper starting port 2101 and the lower starting port 2102. It is provided with a large winning opening 2103 having a shape and a general winning opening 2104 arranged slightly above the left and right sides of the large winning opening 2103. The game balls accepted by the upper start opening 2101, the lower start opening 2102, the large winning opening 2103, and the general winning opening 2104 are guided from the front side to the rear side of the game panel 1150.

The upper start port 2101 of the attacker unit 2100 is open on the upper side so that game balls can always be accepted (winning). On the other hand, in the lower starting port 2102 arranged below the upper starting port 2101, a pair of movable pieces 2106 that can be expanded by the starting port solenoid 2105 (see FIG. 99) are arranged between the lower starting port 2102 and the upper starting port 2101. In a state where the pair of movable pieces 2106 stands up substantially vertically, the upper starting port 2101 and the pair of movable pieces 2106 make the game ball unacceptable to the lower starting port 2102, whereas the pair of movable pieces are movable. When the piece 2106 is expanded in the left-right direction, the game ball can be accepted into the lower starting port 2102. That is, the lower starting port 2102 is a variable winning port due to the pair of movable pieces 2106. The pair of movable pieces 2106 are opened and closed by driving the start port solenoid 2105 based on the detection of the passage of the game ball by the gate switch 2352 of the gate portion 2350 in the center accessory 2300 described later.

Further, the large winning opening 2103 of the attacker unit 2100 can be opened and closed by a horizontally long rectangular opening and closing member 2107 that can close the opening. The lower side of the opening / closing member 2107 is rotatably supported by the shaft, and in a substantially vertical state, the large winning opening 2103 can be closed to make the game ball unacceptable, and the upper side moves to the front side. When it is rotated to, the large winning opening 2103 is opened so that the game ball can be accepted. The opening / closing member 2107 is in a state in which the large winning opening 2103 is closed in a normal gaming state, and a special lottery is drawn when the game ball is accepted into the upper starting opening 2101 and the lower starting opening 2102 (starting prize). Depending on the lottery result (when the special lottery result is "big hit" or "small hit"), the attacker solenoid 2108 (see FIG. 99) is driven to open and close.

Further, the general winning opening 2104 of the attacker unit 2100 is opened upward so that the game ball can always be accepted (winning).

Further, although detailed illustration is omitted, the attacker unit 2100 has a lower start port switch 2109 that detects a game ball received by the lower start port 2102 and a count switch that detects a game ball received by the grand prize opening 2103. 2110 is further provided, and the game ball detected by the lower start port switch 2109 and the count switch 2110 is discharged onto the bottom wall portion of the board holder 1160. The upper start port switch 3022 for detecting the game ball accepted by the upper start port 2101 and the general winning port switch 3020 for detecting the game ball accepted by the general winning opening 2104 are provided in the back unit 3000. ..

[5-2-2. Side winning opening member]
Next, the side winning opening member 2200 of the table unit 2000 will be described. The side winning opening member 2200 was inserted from the front side into the opening 1158 formed on the left side of the opening 1158 in which the attacker unit 2100 is inserted and fixed at the lower part of the game panel 1150 on the left side from the center in the left-right direction. Above, two are fixed to the front of the game panel 1150 and are oriented so as to face each other along the outer periphery of the game area 1100 so as to be aligned with the general winning opening 2104 on the left side of the front view of the attacker unit 2100. It is provided with a general winning opening 2201. These two general winning openings 2201 are opened upward so that game balls can always be accepted (winning), and the game balls accepted into the general winning opening 2201 are guided from the front side to the rear side of the game panel 1150. After that, it is detected by the general winning opening switch 3020 provided in the back unit 3000, which will be described later.

Further, the side winning opening member 2200 is arranged at a position where the left end portion is substantially in contact with the outer periphery of the game area 1100 at the upper left end portion thereof, and is inclined so as to be lowered toward the right end portion. The shelf portion 2202 and the first shelf portion 2202 are arranged on opposite sides and lower sides of the two general winning openings 2201 and are located on the left-right central side of the game area 1100 (the lower starting opening 2102 and the large winning opening of the attacker unit 2100). It is provided with a second shelf portion 2203 that becomes lower toward (2103 side), and the game ball that has flowed down along the outer periphery of the game area 1100 by the first shelf portion 2202 can be moved toward the center side of the game area 1100. You can do it.

The two general winning openings 2201 are arranged on the right side of the right end of the first shelf 2202, and even if the game ball is moved to the center side of the game area 1100 by the first shelf 2202, There is a possibility of winning a prize in the general winning opening 2201. Further, a third shelf portion 2204 inclined so as to be lowered toward the center side of the game area 1100 is also provided on the upper side between the two general winning openings 2201.

The side winning opening member 2200 is formed so as to have translucency as a whole, and although detailed illustration is omitted, a side winning opening decorative substrate is provided on the rear side of the second shelf portion 2203. At the same time, the side lamp decorative substrate 3014 in the back unit 3000, which will be described later, is arranged behind the side winning opening member 2200, and the side winning opening decorative substrate and the side lamp decorative substrate 3014 provide the side winning opening member 2200. Is luminescent and can be decorated.

[5-2-3. Center role]
Next, the center accessory 2300 of the table unit 2000 will be described. The center accessory 2300 is inserted from the front side into an opening 1158 formed large so as to penetrate substantially the center of the game panel 1150, and is fixed to the front surface of the game panel 1150. It is formed in a frame shape so as to occupy most of the area 1100, and the outer peripheral surface on the right side of the front view is arcuate so as to form a gap slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball with the outer circumference of the game area 1100. In addition to being formed, the outer peripheral surface on the left side is formed on a substantially straight line that hangs down so as to form a region having a predetermined width from the outer circumference of the game area 1100.

The center accessory 2300 is an upper shelf portion 2301 that is inclined to the left from a position slightly to the right of the center in the left-right direction on the upper outer peripheral surface of the front wall portion located in front of the game panel 1150 so as to be lowered toward the left. When a game ball driven into the upper part of the game area 1100 flows down to the upper shelf part 2301, it flows down through the left side of the center accessory 2300 and on the right side of the upper shelf part 2301. The game ball that has flowed down (invaded) passes through the right side of the center accessory 2300 and flows down to the lower part of the game area 1100 at once. In other words, if the game ball is driven so that the game ball invades to the right side of the upper shelf 2301 in the center accessory 2300, the chance of enjoying the flow of the game ball is reduced, so that the driving strength of the game ball is reduced. It is possible to adjust the wadana as appropriate, and it is possible to maintain a feeling of tension and suppress the game from becoming a vague game.

Further, the center accessory 2300 has invaded the warp entrance 2302 and the warp entrance 2302 in which the game ball flowing down the game area 1100 can enter the outer peripheral surface on the left side of the front wall portion located on the front side of the game panel 1150. A warp outlet (not shown) that discharges the game ball into the frame, and a center accessory that rolls the game ball released from the warp outlet in the left-right direction and then releases it into the game area 1100 above the attacker unit 2100. The stage 2310 formed on the upper surface of the lower side in the frame of the 2300 is mainly provided.

Although detailed illustration of the stage 2310 in the center accessory 2300 is omitted, the first stage to which the game balls released from the warp outlet are supplied and the game balls arranged in front of the first stage are arranged from the first stage. It includes a second stage, which is supplied and capable of releasing a game ball into the game area 1100. The stage 2310 is formed in a curved surface shape so that the substantially center in the left-right direction is lowered. In addition, a chance entrance 2313 through which a game ball can enter is formed on the rear side of the first stage substantially in the center in the left-right direction, and the game ball that has entered the chance entrance 2313 is a chance at the lowermost front of the center accessory 2300. It is designed to be discharged into the game area 1100 from the exit 2314. The chance exit 2314 is arranged directly above the upper start port 2101 in the attacker unit 2100, and the game ball released from the chance exit 2314 is accepted (wins) in the upper start port 2101 with a high probability. ing.

The stage 2310 in the center accessory 2300 is formed of a transparent member, and the decorative body arranged below the stage 2310 in the back unit 3000 can be visually recognized from the player side through the stage 2310. It has become.

Further, the center accessory 2300 has a transparent outer peripheral surface on the left side of the front wall portion located on the front side of the game panel 1150, which extends to the left so as to be substantially in contact with the inner rail 1112 above the warp entrance 2302. It further includes an arch portion 2315. The arch portion 2315 extends in a thin plate shape from a substantially front end of the front wall portion, and forms a space through which a game ball can pass between the arch portion 2315 and the front surface of the game panel 1150. As a result, the game ball driven into the upper part of the game area 1100 and guided to the left of the center accessory 2300 by the upper shelf portion 2301 flows down to the downstream side through the rear side of the arch portion 2315. ..

Further, the center accessory 2300 is provided with a gate portion 2350 that detects the passage of the game ball near the arch portion 2315 on the outer peripheral surface on the left side of the front wall portion located on the front side of the game panel 1150. The gate portion 2350 detects a gate entrance, which is arranged on the outer peripheral surface on the left side of the front wall portion and above the arch portion 2315 and allows a game ball flowing down the game area 1100 to enter, and a game ball that has entered the gate entrance. The gate switch 2352 and the gate outlet for discharging the game ball detected by the gate switch 2352 from the outer peripheral surface of the front wall portion to the game area 1100 are provided. In this embodiment, although detailed illustration is omitted, the gate exit of the gate portion 2350 is formed at the same height as the arch portion 2315, and the game ball detected by the gate switch 2352 is an arch. It looks as if you have dived in part 2315.

[5-3. Panel lens member]
Next, the panel lens member 2500 of the game board 4 will be described. The panel lens member 2500 is formed to penetrate in the front-rear direction in a circular or × shape at a position outside the opening 1158 in which the center accessory 2300 is inserted in the game region 1100 of the game panel 1150. It illuminates the decorative holes. The panel lens member 2500 includes a transparent upper panel lens 2510 corresponding to a plurality of light emitting decorative holes formed on the upper left side on the outer periphery of the center accessory 2300, and a plurality of panels arranged on the rear side of the upper panel lens 2510 on the surface. It is arranged behind the upper panel lens substrate on which the LED is mounted, the transparent lower panel lens 2520 corresponding to a plurality of light emitting decorative holes formed on the lower left side on the outer periphery of the center accessory 2300, and the lower panel lens 2520. It is provided with a lower panel lens substrate on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the surface.

The upper panel lens 2510 and the lower panel lens 2520 in the panel lens member 2500 project forward from the plate-shaped lens base portion and have a plurality of rod-shaped insertion guide guides having substantially the same shape as the shape of the light emitting decorative hole to be inserted. It has a part. When the insertion light guide portion is inserted into the light emitting decorative hole of the game panel 1150 from the rear side, the tip thereof is formed so as to substantially coincide with the front surface of the game panel 1150, and the game flows down the front surface of the game panel 1150. It is designed to have as little effect on the ball as possible.

By appropriately emitting the LEDs of the upper panel lens substrate and the lower panel lens substrate, the panel lens member 2500 can illuminate and decorate the area where the gaming ball flows down even if an opaque gaming panel 1150 such as veneer plywood is used. The decoration of the game panel 1150, which has never been seen before, can be shown to the player, and the pachinko game machine 1 can be made to stand out to be differentiated from other pachinko game machines.

[5-4. Back unit]
Next, the back unit 3000 of the game board 4 will be described. The back unit 3000 is attached and fixed to the rear surface of the game panel 1150, and has a back box 3001 that supports the liquid crystal display device 1900 at a position separated from the game panel 1150 to the rear side by a predetermined distance, and a liquid crystal display in the back box 3001. The upper unit 3100 arranged on the upper side of the device 1900, the humanoid machine head unit 3150 arranged on the upper side of the liquid crystal display device 1900 in the back box 3001 and behind the upper unit 3100, and the back. It mainly includes a character unit 3400 arranged on the right side of the liquid crystal display device 1900 in the box 3001 and a gear decoration unit 3500 arranged on the left side of the liquid crystal display device 1900 in the back box 3001. Various movable bodies are provided in each of the units 3100, 3150, 3400, and 3500.

Further, the back unit 3000 is arranged at a position corresponding to the side winning opening member 2200 in the front unit 2000 attached to the front surface of the game panel 1150 near the lower left front end of the back box 3001, and a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the surface. A game ball attached to the side lamp decorative substrate 3014 and the lower front end of the back box 3001 and accepted by the general winning opening 2201 of the side winning opening member 2200, and a game accepted by the general winning opening 2104 on the left side of the attacker unit 2100. The left guide member 3016 that guides the ball downward, and the right side that is arranged on the right side of the left guide member 3016 and guides the game ball received downward to the upper start opening 2101 and the right general winning opening 2104 of the attacker unit 2100. It mainly includes a guide member 3018.

Further, although detailed illustration of the back unit 3000 is omitted, a horizontally long rectangular lamp drive board box 3423 arranged at the lower rear side of the back box 3001 and accommodating the lamp drive board 4170 and below the lamp drive board box 3423. The horizontally long rectangular motor drive board box 3430 arranged on the side and accommodating the motor drive board 4180, and the lamp drive board box 3423 and the motor drive board box 3430 fixed to the rear side of the back box 3001 and arranged on the left side in the rear view. A panel relay terminal board 4161, a horizontally long rectangular upper resistance board arranged on the rear upper side of the back box 3001, and a lock member attached to the rear side of the back box 3001 to hold the liquid crystal display device 1900 detachably. , Is further equipped.

In the present embodiment, the back unit 3000 can be visually recognized from the player side through the frame of the center accessory 2300 in the front unit 2000, and the units 3100 and 3150 shaped into a predetermined shape are formed. , 3400, 3500 and the like can characterize the concept of the pachinko gaming machine 1. Further, in the back unit 3000, various movable bodies of each unit 3100, 3150, 3400, and 3500 are movable independently or in cooperation with each other according to the game state, and the movement allows the player to move. Therefore, it is possible to suggest changes in the gaming state and the arrival of opportunities, and it is possible to entertain the player.

[5-4-1. Back box]
Next, the back box 3001 of the back unit 3000 will be described. The back box 3001 is formed in a box shape with the front side open, and is provided with a plurality of flange-shaped fixing portions 3001a protruding outward at the front end, and is provided on the rear side of the game panel 1150 via the fixing portions 3001a. It is designed to be fixed. Further, the back box 3001 has a rectangular opening formed substantially in the center of the rear wall, and the liquid crystal display device 1900 supported on the rear side through the opening can be visually recognized from the player side. Further, the back box 3001 is formed with mounting portions for mounting and fixing the units 3100, 3150, 3400, 3500, the substrates 3014, and the like at appropriate positions.

Further, although not shown, the back box 3001 inserts and locks a fixed piece 1902 on the right side of the opening in the rear view, which protrudes outward from both the left and right sides of the liquid crystal display device 1900 (the right side in the rear view). A liquid crystal support portion is provided, and a lock member is attached to the left side when viewed from the rear of the opening. The lock member supports the other fixed piece 1902 of the liquid crystal display device 1900 (the left side when viewed from the rear) to obtain a liquid crystal. The display device 1900 is detachably attached to the rear side of the back box 3001.

[5-4-2. Guidance member]
Next, the left guide member 3016 and the right guide member 3018 will be described. The left guide member 3016 guides and discharges the game ball received into the general winning opening 2201 of the side winning opening member 2200 and the general winning opening 2104 on the left side of the attacker unit 2100 through different flow paths. Each flow path is provided with a general winning opening switch 3020 for detecting the passage of a game ball. On the other hand, the right guiding member 3018 guides and discharges the game balls received by the upper starting port 2101 of the attacker unit 2100 and the general winning opening 2104 on the right side through different flow paths to the vicinity of the lower end. The flow path corresponding to the upper start port 2101 is provided with the upper start port switch 3022, and the flow path corresponding to the general winning port 2104 on the right side is provided with the general winning port switch 3020. Further, the right guiding member 3018 is provided with a magnetic detection switch 3024 capable of detecting magnetism.

The game balls guided downward by the left guide member 3016 and the right guide member 3018 are discharged onto the bottom wall portion of the board holder 1160, and are discharged downward from the out ball discharge portion 1161 of the board holder 1160 to the lower side of the game board 4. It has become so.

[5-4-3. Upper unit]
Next, the upper unit 3100 will be described. The upper unit 3100 is formed in a horizontally long shape as a whole, and is attached and fixed to the upper side of the opening facing the liquid crystal display device 1900 in the back box 3001. The upper unit 3100 is arranged in the front at substantially the center in the left-right direction and is arranged in a circular shape in the front view, and is arranged behind the rotating decoration unit 3200 to raise and lower the rotating decoration unit 3200. Mainly provided with 3250, a swinging decorative unit 3300 arranged substantially in the center in the left-right direction on the rear side of the elevating mechanism 3250, and movable ceiling units 3350 arranged on both left and right sides of the swinging decorative unit 3300. ing.

The rotary decorative unit 3200 can be moved in the vertical direction by the elevating mechanism 3250 between the ascending position located at the upper part of the liquid crystal display device 1900 and the descending position located at substantially the center of the liquid crystal display device 1900. It has become. In the rotating decoration unit 3200, the rotating decoration formed in the shape of a shuriken arranged on the front surface rotates, and the rotation causes the rotational radius of the rotating decoration to increase due to the centrifugal force. It has become like.

Further, in the rotating decoration unit 3200, not only the rotating decoration rotates at the end but also the rotating decoration unit protrudes outward in the radial direction, so that the turning radius of the entire rotating decoration body is expanded and the appearance is greatly changed. It is possible to give a strong impact to the player, entertain the player and suppress the decline in the interest in the game, and strongly attract the interest of the player. This makes it easier to select the pachinko gaming machine 1 as the pachinko gaming machine that plays a game with a great difference from other pachinko gaming machines.

The swinging decoration unit 3300 includes swinging decorations arranged on the left and right sides on the rear side so as to be adjacent to the rotating decoration unit 3200 located at the raised position, and the swinging decorations on the left and right are arranged according to the gaming state. The body can be swung in the left-right direction all at once.

The movable ceiling unit 3350 is provided with plate-shaped ceiling decorations extending in the horizontal direction at both left and right ends of the upper unit 3100. The ceiling decoration is rotatably formed around an axis extending in the left-right direction around the front end side, and the rear end side of the ceiling decoration rotates in the descending direction according to the game state. It has become.

[5-4-4. Humanoid machine head unit]
Next, the humanoid machine head unit 3150 of the back unit 3000 will be described. The humanoid machine head unit 3150 includes a frame formed in the shape of sunglasses and decorated among the heads of the humanoid machine (robot) operated by the operator in the cockpit. This frame can appear by descending from the original position, which is the standby position, which is difficult to see when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is viewed from the front, to the substantially central position of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 1900. It has become. In addition, the pink sphere moves in the frame formed in the shape of sunglasses by drawing the pink sphere three-dimensionally in the manner of moving the display area of the liquid crystal display device 1900 up, down, left and right. By doing so, it is possible to express the "eyeball".

[5-4-5. Character unit]
Next, the character unit 3400 of the back unit 3000 will be described. The character unit 3400 includes a three-dimensionally shaped character body, and the character body can move in the left-right direction from the position at the right end to the position closer to the center side according to the game state. There is. Further, when the character body of the character unit 3400 moves in the left-right direction, it rotates by a predetermined angle around an axis extending in the up-down direction with the movement.

Further, the character body of the character unit 3400 can reciprocate around an axis whose head extends in the left-right direction, and reciprocates around an axis whose right arm extends in the vertical direction. Can be done. As a result, by rotating the head back and forth, it is possible to make the character move as if it were nodding. In addition, by rotating the right arm back and forth in the horizontal direction, it is possible to make the character act as if he were throwing a shuriken.

[5-4-6. Gear decoration unit]
Next, the gear decoration unit 3500 of the back unit 3000 will be described. The gear decoration unit 3500 includes gear-shaped gear decorations that are rotatable around an axis extending in the left-right direction and are arranged in the vertical direction, and the gear decorations are simultaneously arranged according to the game state. It is designed to rotate.

[5-4-7. Liquid crystal display device]
Next, the liquid crystal display device 1900 of the game board 4 will be described. The liquid crystal display device 1900 is detachably attached to the rear surface of the back box 3001 of the back unit 3000, and can display a predetermined effect image according to the game state. The liquid crystal display device 1900 includes fixed pieces 1902 protruding outward from both the left and right sides, and can be attached to the back box 3001 via the fixed pieces 1902.

Further, although detailed illustration is omitted, the liquid crystal display device 1900 includes a peripheral substrate box 1905 accommodating a peripheral control substrate 4140 on the rear side thereof.

[6. Function display unit]
Next, the function display unit 1180 in the game board 4 will be described with reference to FIG. The function display unit 1180 is attached and arranged at a predetermined position of the front component member 1110. FIG. 10 is an enlarged front view showing a function display unit on a gaming board in a state of being attached to a pachinko gaming machine.

As shown enlarged in FIG. 10, the function display unit 1180 is a game state display including one LED for displaying a game state changed by a game ball driven into the game area 1100 at the left end portion of the front view. It consists of a device 1183 and two LEDs arranged in the vertical direction on the right side of the game status display 1183, and is an upper special symbol memory display 1184 for displaying the number of holdings related to the acceptance of the game ball to the upper starting port 2101, and the upper The upper special symbol, which is arranged on the right side of the special symbol storage display 1184 and consists of one 7-segment LED for displaying the result of the first special lottery drawn by accepting the game ball to the upper starting port 2101 as the first special symbol. One 7 for displaying the result of the second special lottery, which is arranged diagonally to the right of the display 1185 and the upper special symbol display 1185 and is drawn by accepting the game ball to the lower starting port 2102, as the second special symbol. The lower special symbol display 1186, which consists of segment LEDs, and the lower, which consists of two LEDs arranged vertically on the right side of the lower special symbol display 1186, to display the number of reservations for accepting game balls to the lower starting port 2102. It is equipped with a special symbol memory display 1187.

The display unit 1181 of the function display unit 1180 is arranged in an arc shape substantially along the inner peripheral rail 1113 from directly above the lower special symbol display 1186 to display the number of reservations related to the passage of the gate portion 2350 by the game ball. The normal symbol memory display 1188 consisting of the four LEDs of the above, and the normal symbol lottery result arranged under the normal symbol storage display and drawn by passing the game ball through the gate 2350 are displayed as the normal symbol. The normal symbol display 1189 consisting of one LED and the normal symbol storage display 1188 are arranged side by side diagonally to the upper right side, and when the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result is "big hit", the big winning opening 2103 is opened and closed. It includes a round indicator 1190 composed of two LEDs for displaying the number of times the pattern is repeated (the number of rounds).

The game status display 1183 is a full-color LED capable of changing the emission color of red, green, and orange, and various gaming states (depending on the combination of the emission color and lighting / blinking). For example, it is possible to display a probability fluctuation state, a time reduction state, a probability change time reduction state, a big hit game state, a small hit game state, etc.).

The upper special symbol memory display 1184 suspends the start of the variable display when the game ball is accepted by the upper start opening 2101 when the first special symbol cannot be variablely displayed on the upper special symbol display 1185 ( The number of reserved first special symbols (stored) is displayed. Further, the special symbol storage display 1184 has a first special symbol storage lamp 1184a composed of a predetermined LED and a first special symbol storage lamp 1184b, and the first special symbol storage lamps 1184a and 1184b are lit. The number of holds can be displayed by the blinking pattern. Specifically, for example, when the number of holds is one, the first special symbol storage lamp 1184a is turned on and the first special symbol storage lamp 1184b is turned off, and when the number of holds is two, the first special symbol storage lamps 1184a, 1184b are turned on. 1184a blinks and the first special symbol memory lamp 1184b lights up when the number of holds is three, and the first special symbol memory lamps 1184a and 1184b both light up when the number of holds is four. It is supposed to blink. In this embodiment, up to four are reserved.

The lower special symbol memory display 1187 suspends the start of the variable display when the game ball is accepted by the lower start port 2102 when the lower special symbol display 1186 cannot display the second special symbol in a variable manner (1187). It displays the number of reserved second special symbols (stored). The lower special symbol storage display 1187 has a second special symbol storage lamp 1187a and a second special symbol storage lamp 1187b composed of predetermined LEDs, and the second special symbol storage lamps 1187a and 1187b are lit. The number of holds can be displayed by the blinking pattern. Specifically, for example, when the number of holds is one, the second special symbol storage lamp 1187a is turned on and the second special symbol storage lamp 1187b is turned off, and when the number of holds is two, the second special symbol storage indicator lamp 1187a, When 1187b is lit together, the second special symbol storage lamp 1187a blinks and the second special symbol storage lamp 1187b is lit when the number of holds is three, and when the number of holds is four, the second special symbol storage lamps 1187a and 1187b are lit. Both are designed to blink. In this embodiment, up to four are reserved.

The upper special symbol display 1185 and the lower special symbol display 1186 display the first special lottery result and the second special lottery result drawn by accepting the game ball to the upper start port 2101 and the lower start port 2102. The 7-segment LED is stopped after fluctuating for a predetermined time according to the special lottery result, and the first special lottery result and the second special lottery result are played according to the light emission pattern (special symbol) of the stopped 7-segment LED. It is designed to be recognized by the person.

The ordinary symbol display 1189 is a full-color LED capable of changing the emission color of red, green, and orange, and the gate portion 2350 is played by combining the emission color and lighting / blinking. It is possible to display the result of a normal lottery that is drawn when the ball passes through. As with the special symbol, the display of the normal symbol by the normal symbol display 1189 is also stopped and displayed in a light emitting pattern corresponding to the normal lottery result after the display is changed for a predetermined time.

In the normal symbol storage display 1188, when the game ball passes through the gate portion 2350 when the normal symbol cannot be variablely displayed on the normal symbol display 1189, the start of the variable display is suspended (stored). It displays the number of holds (the number of memories) of. This ordinary symbol storage display 1188 includes four ordinary symbol storage lamps 1188a to 1188d arranged side by side from the bottom, each of which is a predetermined LED, and the ordinary symbol storage lamp 1188a is arranged from the bottom according to the number of holdings. By sequentially lighting ~ 1188d, the number of reserved symbols can be displayed. In this embodiment, up to four variable displays of ordinary symbols are reserved (stored).

The round indicator 1190 includes a 2-round indicator lamp 1190a and a 15-round indicator lamp 1190b composed of predetermined LEDs, and the number of rounds in the "big hit" game can be displayed by turning on each lamp. It has become like.

Further, as shown in FIG. 10, the function display unit 1180 can be visually recognized from the player side through the game window 101 of the door frame 5 in a state where the game board 4 is attached to the pachinko game machine 1. There is. Game status indicator 1183, upper special symbol memory indicator 1184, upper special symbol indicator 1185, lower special symbol indicator 1186, lower special symbol memory indicator 1187, ordinary symbol memory indicator 1188, ordinary symbol indicator 1189, and The round display 1190 is attached to the front surface of the function display board 1191. A connection terminal for connecting the function display board 1191 and the main control board 4100 is attached to the rear end of the rear protruding portion of the function display unit 1180.

In the present embodiment, since the function display unit 1180 is provided in the front component 1110 of the game board 4, it is compared with the case where the front unit 2000 and the back unit 3000 attached to the game panel 1150 are provided. The function display unit 1180 can be diverted as the basic configuration of the gaming board 4, the configuration related to the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be simplified to prevent the cost from increasing, and the model of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (table). Even if the detailed configuration of the game board 4 that is embodied by the unit 2000 and the back unit 3000 and can characterize the model of the pachinko game machine 1) is different, the position of the function display unit 1180 does not change, so that the player and the game The position of the function display unit 1180 can be recognized by a clerk in the hall without any confusion.

[7. Main control board, payout control board, power supply board and peripheral control board]
Next, the control board that performs various controls of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 11 to 16. FIG. 11 is a block diagram of a main control board, a payout control board, and a peripheral control board, FIG. 12 is a block diagram showing a continuation of FIG. 11, and FIG. 13 is a payout control board, a CR unit, and a frequency constituting the main board. FIG. 14 is a schematic diagram of various detection signals input to / from the game ball rental device connection terminal board that relays the electrical connection with the display board, FIG. 14 is a block diagram showing the continuation of FIG. 11, and FIG. 15 is a block diagram. It is a block diagram which shows the outline of a peripheral control MPU, and FIG. 16 is a block diagram around a VDP with a built-in sound source in a liquid crystal and a sound control unit.

As shown in FIG. 11, the control configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is mainly composed of a main control board 4100, a payout control board 4110, and a peripheral control board 4140, and various controls are shared. First, the main control board will be described, and then the payout control board, the power supply board, and the peripheral control board will be described.

[7-1. Main control board]
As shown in FIG. 11, the main control board 4100 that controls the progress of the game is a main control MPU 4100a that is a microprocessor having a built-in ROM for storing various control programs and various commands, a RAM for temporarily storing data, and the like. A main control input circuit 4100b for inputting detection signals from various detection switches, a main control output circuit 4100c for outputting various signals to an external board, and a main control solenoid drive for driving various solenoids. It mainly includes a circuit 4100d and a power failure monitoring circuit 4100e that monitors signs of a power failure or momentary power failure of a predetermined voltage.

In addition to the built-in RAM (hereinafter, referred to as "main control built-in RAM") and the built-in ROM (hereinafter, referred to as "main control built-in ROM") of the main control MPU4100a. It also has a built-in watch dock timer that monitors its operation (system) and a function to prevent fraud.

Further, the main control MPU4100a has a built-in non-volatile RAM. In this non-volatile RAM, a unique ID code with a unique code (a code that exists only once in the world) for identifying an individual by the manufacturer of the main control MPU4100a is stored in advance. Since the ID code once attached is stored in the non-volatile RAM, it cannot be rewritten even by using an external device. The main control MPU4100a can take out the ID code from the non-volatile RAM and refer to it.

The main control input circuit 4100b is not provided with a reset terminal for forcibly resetting the information in which the detection signals from the various detection switches are input to the various input terminals, and does not have a reset function. Therefore, the main control input circuit 4100b is configured as a circuit in which the system reset signal from the main control system reset described later is not input. That is, in the main control input circuit 4100b, the information based on the detection signals from the various detection switches input to the various input terminals is not reset by the main control system reset described later, so that the various signals based on the information are various. It is configured as a circuit that is output from the output terminal.

The main control output circuit 4100c is configured as an open collector output type in which the emitter terminal is grounded to ground (GND), and various signals for outputting various signals to an external board or the like are input to the various input terminals. Main control output circuit 4100ca with a reset function that has a reset function provided with a reset terminal for forcibly resetting the input information, and main control output circuit 4100cc without a reset function that does not have a reset terminal. And is composed of. The main control output circuit 4100ca with a reset function is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from a main control system reset described later is input. That is, the main control output circuit 4100ca with a reset function is reset by the main control system reset described later, so that the information for outputting various signals input to the various input terminals to an external board or the like is reset. It is configured as a circuit in which signals based on the above are not output at all from the various output terminals. On the other hand, the main control output circuit 4100cc without a reset function is configured as a circuit in which a system reset signal from a main control system reset described later is not input. That is, the main control output circuit 4100cc without a reset function is converted to the information because the information for outputting various signals input to the various input terminals to an external board or the like is not reset by the main control system reset described later. It is configured as a circuit in which the based signal is output from its various output terminals.

The upper start port switch 3022 for detecting the game ball entering the upper start port 2101, the lower start port switch 2109 for detecting the game ball entering the lower start port 2102, and the general winning opening 2104 shown in FIG. The detection signal from the general winning port switch 3020 for detecting the entered game ball and the signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 4100e are input to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the main control MPU 4100a via the main control input circuit 4100b. There is. Further, as shown in FIG. 8, the gate switch 2352 for detecting the game ball passing through the gate portion 2350, the general winning opening switch 3020 for detecting the game ball entering the general winning opening 2201, and the large winning opening 2103 are entered. The detection signals from the count switch 2110 that detects the game ball and the magnetic detection switch 3024 that is attached to the back unit 3000 shown in FIG. 9 and detects fraudulent activity using a magnet are relayed to the panel attached to the game board 4. It is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the main control MPU 4100a via the terminal plate 4161 and the main control input circuit 4100b.

The main control MPU 4100a is a main control output circuit with a reset function by outputting a drive signal from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the main control output circuit 4100ca with a reset function based on the detection signals from each of these switches. A control signal is output from the 4100ca to the main control solenoid drive circuit 4100d, and a drive signal is output from the main control solenoid drive circuit 4100d to the start port solenoid 2105 and the attacker solenoid 2108 via the panel relay terminal plate 4161, or a predetermined output thereof. By outputting a drive signal from the output terminal of the port to the main control output circuit 4100ca with a reset function, the upper special symbol display is displayed from the main control output circuit 4100ca with a reset function via the panel relay terminal board 4161 and the function display board 1191. 1185, lower special symbol display 1186, upper special symbol storage indicator 1184, lower special symbol storage indicator 1187, ordinary symbol display 1189, ordinary symbol storage indicator 1188, game status indicator 1183, and round indicator 1190 It outputs a drive signal.

Further, the main control MPU 4100a outputs various information (game information) related to the game from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the main control output circuit 4100ca with a reset function, thereby controlling the payout from the main control output circuit 4100ca with a reset function. Main control output with reset function by outputting various information (game information) to the board 4110 or outputting a signal (power failure clear signal) to the main control output circuit 4100ca with reset function from the output terminal of the predetermined output port. A signal (power failure clear signal) is output from the circuit 4100ca to the power failure monitoring circuit 4100e.

In the present embodiment, the upper start port switch 3022, the lower start port switch 2109, the gate switch 2352, and the count switch 2110 use a non-contact type electromagnetic proximity switch, whereas they are generally used. A contact type ON / OFF operation type mechanical switch is used for the winning opening switches 3020 and 3020. This is because the game ball frequently enters the upper start port 2101 and the lower start port 2102 and frequently passes through the gate portion 2350, so that the upper start port switch 3022, the lower start port switch 2109, and the gate switch 2352 are used. The detection of game balls also occurs frequently. Therefore, a proximity switch having a long life is used for the upper start port switch 3022, the lower start port switch 2109, and the gate switch 2352. Further, when a big hit game state that is advantageous for the player occurs, the big winning opening 2103 is opened and the game ball frequently enters, so that the count switch 2110 also frequently detects the game ball. Therefore, the count switch 2110 also uses a proximity switch having a long life. On the other hand, in the general winning openings 2104 and 2201 where the game ball does not enter frequently, the detection by the general winning opening switches 3020 and 3020 does not occur frequently. For this reason, mechanical switches having a shorter life than proximity switches are used for the general winning opening switches 3020 and 3020.

Further, the main control MPU 4100a sends various commands related to payout as serial data from the output terminal of the predetermined serial output port to the main control output circuit 4100 kb without a reset function, thereby controlling the payout from the main control output circuit 4100 cc without a reset function. Various commands are transmitted as serial data to the board 4110. When the payout control board 4110 normally completes receiving various commands from the main control board 4100 as serial data, the payout control board 4110 outputs a signal (payer ACK signal) to that effect to the main control board 4100. This signal (payer ACK signal) is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the main control MPU 4100a via the main control input circuit 4100b.

Further, the main control MPU 4100a receives various commands related to the state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 from the payout control board 4110 as serial data in the main control input circuit 4100b, so that the main control input circuit 4100b can be used for the predetermined serial input port. Various commands are received as serial data at the input terminal. When the main control MPU 4100a normally receives various commands from the payout control board 4110 as serial data, the main control MPU 4100a outputs a signal (main payment ACK signal) to that effect from the output terminal of the predetermined output port with a reset function. It is output to the circuit 4100ca, and a signal (main payment ACK signal) is output from the main control output circuit 4100ca with a reset function to the payout control board 4110.

Further, the main control MPU 4100a transmits various commands related to the control of the game production and various commands related to the state of the pachinko game machine 1 as serial data from the output terminal of the predetermined serial output port to the main control output circuit 4100 bc without the reset function. As a result, various commands are transmitted as serial data from the main control output circuit 4100cc without the reset function to the peripheral control board 4140.

Here, the main peripheral serial transmission port that transmits various commands as serial data to the peripheral control board 4140 will be briefly described. The main control MPU 4100a is configured around the main control CPU core 4100aa, and in addition to the main control built-in RAM, the main peripheral serial transmission port 4100ae, which is one of the main control various serial I / O ports, provides a bus 4100ah. The circuit is connected via (see FIG. 25). The main peripheral serial transmission port 4100ae transmits various commands to the peripheral control board 4140 as main peripheral serial data, and is mainly composed of a transmission shift register 4100aea, a transmission buffer register 4100aeb, a serial management unit 4100aec, and the like (FIG. 6). See 25). When the main control CPU core 4100aa sets a command in the transmission buffer register 4100aeb and outputs a transmission start signal to the serial management unit 4100aec, the serial management unit 4100aec outputs a command set in the transmission buffer register 4100aeb from the transmission buffer register 4100aeb. It is transferred to the transmission shift register 4100ea and transmission is started to the peripheral control board 4140 as main peripheral serial data. In this embodiment, the transmission buffer register 4100aeb has 32 bytes as a storage capacity. The main control CPU core 4100aa continuously transmits a plurality of commands to the peripheral control board 4140 by setting a plurality of commands in the transmission buffer register 4100aeb and then outputting a transmission start signal to the serial management unit 4100aec.

The power supply board 851 that supplies various voltages to the main control board 4100 is an electric double layer capacitor (hereinafter, simply "capacitor") as a backup power source for supplying power to the main control board 4100 for a predetermined time even when the power supply is cut off. It is provided with BC0 (see FIG. 17). With this capacitor BC0, the main control MPU4100a can store various information in the main control built-in RAM in the power off processing even when the power is cut off. Various information stored in the main control built-in RAM is an operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the operation switch 860a when the operation switch 860a of the payout control board 4110 described later is operated within a predetermined period from the time when the power is turned on. Is output from the payout control board 4110, is input to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the main control MPU 4100a via the main control input circuit 4100b, and is completely erased from the main control built-in RAM by the main control MPU 4100a. It is supposed to be (cleared).

[7-2. Payout control board]
As shown in FIG. 12, the payout control board 4110 that controls the payout of game balls and the like has a state of a payout control unit 4120 that performs various controls related to payout, an operation switch 860a that also has various functions, and a pachinko game machine 1. It includes an error LED display 860b for displaying.

[7-2-1. Payout control unit]
As shown in FIG. 12, the payout control unit 4120 that performs various controls related to payout is a payout control MPU 4120a which is a microprocessor having a built-in ROM for storing various control programs and various commands, a RAM for temporarily storing data, and the like. The payout control input circuit 4120b for inputting detection signals from various detection switches related to payout, the payout control output circuit 4120c for outputting various signals to an external board, and the prize ball device 740 shown in FIG. The payout motor drive circuit 4120d for outputting a drive signal to the payout motor 744 and the CR unit input / output circuit 4120e for exchanging various signals with the CR unit 6 are provided. In addition to the built-in RAM (hereinafter, referred to as “payout control built-in RAM”) and the built-in ROM (hereinafter, referred to as “payout control built-in ROM”) of the payout control MPU4120a. It also has a built-in watch dock timer that monitors its operation (system) and a function to prevent fraud.

The payout control input circuit 4120b is not provided with a reset terminal for forcibly resetting the information in which the detection signals from the various detection switches are input to the various input terminals, and does not have a reset function. Therefore, the payout control input circuit 4120b is configured as a circuit in which the system reset signal from the payout control system reset described later is not input. That is, in the payout control input circuit 4120b, the information based on the detection signals from the various detection switches input to the various input terminals is not reset by the payout control system reset described later, so that the various signals based on the information are various. It is configured as a circuit that is output from the output terminal.

The payout control output circuit 4120c is configured as an open collector output type in which the emitter terminal is grounded to ground (GND), and various signals for outputting various signals to an external board or the like are input to the various input terminals. A payout control output circuit 4120ca with a reset function having a reset function provided with a reset terminal for forcibly resetting the input information, and a payout control output circuit 4120cc without a reset function having no reset function without a reset terminal. And is composed of. The payout control output circuit 4120ca with a reset function is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from the payout control system reset described later is input. That is, the payout control output circuit 4120ca with a reset function resets the information for outputting various signals input to the various input terminals to an external board or the like by the payout control system reset described later, and the information thereof. It is configured as a circuit in which signals based on the above are not output at all from the various output terminals. On the other hand, the payout control output circuit 4120cc without a reset function is configured as a circuit in which the system reset signal from the payout control system reset described later is not input. That is, the payout control output circuit 4120cc without a reset function is converted to the information because the information for outputting various signals input to the various input terminals to an external board or the like is not reset by the payout control system reset described later. It is configured as a circuit in which the based signal is output from its various output terminals.

The detection signals from the ball-out switch 750 that detects the presence or absence of the game ball in the supply passage of the prize ball device 740 and the counting switch 751 that detects the game ball flowing down in the prize ball passage of the prize ball device 740 are first awarded. It is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 4120a via the board 754 in the prize ball case of the ball device 740 and the payout control input circuit 4120b. The detection signals from the rotation angle switch 752 for detecting the detection slit formed in the rotation detection board of the prize ball device 740 are first, the rotation angle switch board 753 of the prize ball device 740, the board 754 in the prize ball case, and It is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 4120a via the payout control input circuit 4120b.

Further, the detection signals from the door frame opening switch 618 for detecting the opening of the door frame 5 with respect to the main body frame 3 and the main body frame opening switch 619 for detecting the opening of the main body frame 3 with respect to the outer frame 2 are the payout control input circuit 4120b. It is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU4120a via the payout control MPU4120a.

Further, the detection signal from the full tank switch 550 that detects whether or not the game ball in which the accommodation space of the foul cover unit 540 shown in FIG. 1 is full is full is first the handle relay terminal board 192 and the power supply board. It is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 4120a via the payout control input circuit 4120b and 851.

The payout control MPU 4120a receives various commands related to payout from the main control board 4100 via the payout control input circuit 4120b at the input terminal of the serial input port. When the payout control MPU4120a normally receives various commands from the main control board 4100 as serial data, the payout control MPU4120a outputs a signal (payer ACK signal) to that effect from the output terminal of the predetermined output port with a reset function. By outputting to the circuit 4120ca, a signal (payer ACK signal) is output from the payout control output circuit 4120ca with a reset function to the main control board 4100.

Further, the payout control MPU 4120a sends various commands for indicating the state of the pachinko game machine 1 as serial data from the output terminal of the serial output port to the payout control output circuit 4120 kb without the reset function, thereby paying out without the reset function. Various commands are transmitted as serial data from the control output circuit 4120 kb to the main control board 4100. When the main control board 4100 normally completes receiving various commands from the payout control board 4110 as serial data, the main control board 4100 outputs a signal (main payout ACK signal) to that effect to the payout control board 4110. This signal (main payment ACK signal) is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 4120a via the payout control input circuit 4120b.

Further, the payout control MPU 4120a outputs a drive signal for driving the payout motor 744 to the payout control output circuit 4120ca with a reset function from the output terminal of the predetermined output port, whereby the payout control output circuit 4120ca with a reset function is output. Outputs the drive signal from the payout motor drive circuit 4120d to the payout motor drive circuit 4120d, and outputs the drive signal from the payout motor drive circuit 4120d to the payout motor 744 via the board 754 in the prize ball case, or from the output terminal of the predetermined output port By outputting the drive signal for displaying the status of the game machine 1 to the error LED display 860b to the payout control output circuit 4120ca with a reset function, the drive signal is output from the payout control output circuit 4120ca with a reset function to the error LED display 860b. Output to.

The error LED display 860b is a segment display, and displays alphanumeric characters, figures, and the like to display the status of the pachinko gaming machine 1. The contents displayed and notified by the error LED display 860b are as follows. For example, when the figure "-" is displayed, it is notified that it is "normal", and when the number "0" is displayed, it means that it is "connection abnormality" (specifically, with the main control board 4100). Notifies that an abnormality has occurred in the electrical connection between the payout control board 4110 and the board, and when the number "1" is displayed, it means that the ball is out (specifically, the ball is out). Based on the detection signal from the switch 750, it notifies that there is no game ball in the supply passage of the prize ball device 740, and when the number "2" is displayed, it means that it is a "ball" (specifically). Is that the payout rotating body and the game ball mesh with each other near the entrance of the distribution space communicating with the supply passage of the prize ball device 740 based on the detection signal from the rotation angle switch 752, and the payout rotating body is difficult to rotate. When the number "3" is displayed, it means that there is a "counting switch error" (specifically, a problem occurs in the counting switch 751 based on the detection signal from the counting switch 751). When the number "5" is displayed, it notifies that it is a "retry error" (specifically, that the number of retries of the payout operation has reached a preset upper limit). However, when the number "6" is displayed, it means that the tank is "full" (specifically, in a game ball in which the accommodation space of the foul cover unit 540 is stored based on the detection signal from the full tank switch 550. Notifies that the tank is full), and when the number "7" is displayed, it means that "CR is not connected" (the electrical connection is disconnected in any of the payout control board 4110 to the CR unit 6). When the number "9" is displayed, it means that it is "in stock" (specifically, the number of game balls that have not been paid out has reached a predetermined number. To that effect) is being notified.

The content displayed on the error LED display 860b is also displayed on the display area of the mobile terminal 470 placed in the recess 314d formed on the right side of the upper plate upper panel 314 of the plate unit 300 shown in FIG. Before opening the main body frame 3 from the outer frame 2, the clerk in the hall displays the contents displayed on the error LED display 860b in the display area of the mobile terminal 470. It is possible to know by. A specific screen in which the content displayed on the error LED display 860b is displayed in the display area of the mobile terminal 470 will be described later.

Further, the payout control MPU 4120a outputs the number of game balls actually paid out from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the payout control output circuit 4120ca with a reset function, whereby the payout control output circuit 4120ca with a reset function is output. The number of game balls actually paid out is output to the external terminal plate 784 via a resistor (not shown).

Further, the payout control board 4110 outputs various information (game information) related to the game from the main control board 4100 to the external terminal board 784 via a resistor (not shown). The external terminal plate 784 is provided with a plurality of photocouplers (infrared LED and photoIC are built-in) (not shown), and the amusement park (hall) is provided through the plurality of photocouplers. ), The number of game balls and various other information (game information) are transmitted to the hall computer installed in). The external terminal board 784 and the hall computer are electrically insulated by a plurality of photocouplers, and an abnormal voltage is applied to the hall computer via the external terminal board 784 of the pachinko gaming machine 1. The hall computer does not malfunction or break down, and the payout control board that controls the payout, etc., and the main control board 4100 that advances the game from the hall computer via the external terminal plate 784 of the pachinko gaming machine 1. An abnormal voltage is applied to the 4110 to prevent malfunction or failure. The hall computer monitors the game of the player by grasping the number of game balls paid out by the pachinko game machine 1 and the game information of the pachinko game machine 1.

The ball lending request signal for the game ball from the ball lending switch 365a of the ball lending unit 360 shown in FIG. 2 and the return request signal for the prepaid card from the return switch 365b are, first, the frequency display board 365 and the main door relay terminal board 880. , And the game ball or the like is input to the CR unit 6 via the connection terminal plate 869 of the rental device. The CR unit 6 serially transmits a signal specifying the number of game balls to be rented according to the ball lending request signal to the payout control board 4110 via the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869, and this signal is the CR unit. It is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 4120a via the input / output circuit 4120e. Further, the CR unit 6 updates the remaining amount of the prepaid card inserted according to the number of rented game balls, and sends a signal for displaying the remaining amount on the remaining amount display 365c, such as a game ball. It is output to the rental device connection terminal board 869, the main door relay terminal board 880, and the frequency display board 365, and this signal is input to the residual frequency display 365c. Further, in the CR unit lamp 365d adjacent to the residual power display 365c, the supply voltage from the CR unit 6 is input via the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869 and the main door relay terminal plate 880. There is.

The power supply board 851 that supplies various voltages to the payout control board 4110 is provided with a capacitor BC1 (see FIG. 17) as a backup power source for supplying power to the payout control board 4110 for a predetermined time even when the power supply is cut off. There is. With the capacitor BC1, the payout control MPU4120a can store various information in the payout control built-in RAM in the power off processing even when the power is cut off. When the operation switch 860a is operated within a predetermined period from the time when the power is turned on, the various information stored in the payout control built-in RAM is sent to a predetermined payout control MPU 4120a via the payout control input circuit 4120b. The payout control MPU4120a, which is input to the input terminal of the input port, determines as a RAM clear signal for completely erasing the information stored in the payout control built-in RAM, and with this as an opportunity, the payout control MPU4120a sends the payout control built-in RAM. It is designed to be completely erased (cleared). This operation signal (RAM clear signal) is also output to the payout control output circuit 4120 cc without a reset function, and is also output to the main control board 4100 from the payout control output circuit 4120 cc without a reset function.

[7-2-2. Exchange of various signals with the terminal board for renting game balls, etc.]
Here, the exchange of various signals between the payout control unit 4120 and the CR unit 6 and the exchange of various signals between the CR unit 6 and the frequency display board 365 will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 13, the game ball rental device connection terminal board 869 relays the electrical connection between the CR unit 6 and the payout control board 4110, and also includes the CR unit 6 and the frequency display board 365. The electrical connection between the boards is also relayed (to be exact, the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869 is electrically connected to the frequency display plate 365 via the main door relay terminal plate 880. , The CR unit 6 and the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869 are electrically connected, the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869 and the main door relay terminal plate 880 are electrically connected, and the main door relay. The terminal board 880 and the frequency display board 365 are electrically connected). Between the boards of the CR unit 6 and the game ball rental device connection terminal board 869, between the boards of the game ball rental device connection terminal board 869 and the payout control board 4110, the game ball rental device connection terminal board 869 and the main door relay The boards of the terminal board 880 and the boards of the game ball rental device connection terminal board 869 and the frequency display board 365 are electrically connected by each wiring (harness). Further, AC24V described later from the power supply board 851 is supplied to the CR unit 6 via a game ball or the like rental device connection terminal plate 869. The CR unit 6 creates a predetermined voltage VL (in this embodiment, DC + 12V (hereinafter referred to as “+ 12V”)) from the supplied AC24V by a built-in voltage creation circuit (not shown) together with the ground LG. , The game ball rental device connection terminal board 869 is supplied to the payout control board 4110, while the game ball rental device connection terminal board 869 and the main door relay terminal board 880 are supplied to the frequency display board 365. ..

The frequency display board 365 has a ball rental switch 365a, which is a push button switch, mounted on the component surface at a position corresponding to the ball rental button 361 of the ball rental unit 360 shown in FIG. 2, and the ball rental unit 360 is returned. A return switch 365b, which is a push button switch, is mounted at a position corresponding to the button 362, and a residual frequency indicator 365c, which is a segment display, is mounted at a position corresponding to the rental balance display unit 363 of the ball rental unit 360.

In the ball rental switch 365a and the return switch 365b, the ground LG from the CR unit 6 is electrically connected via the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869 and the main door relay terminal plate 880. When the ball lending switch 361 is pressed, the ball lending switch 365a is switched on (ON), and the ball lending operation signal TDS from the ball lending switch 365a is sent to the main door relay terminal plate 880 and the game. It is designed to be input to the CR unit 6 via the ball rental device connection terminal plate 869. When the return button 362 is pressed, the return switch 365b is switched on (ON), and the return operation signal RES from the return switch 365b is connected to the main door relay terminal plate 880 and the game ball rental device. It is designed to be input to the CR unit 6 via the terminal plate 869.

The residual frequency indicator 365c has three segment indicators arranged side by side in a row, and three digits are driven by a so-called dynamic lighting method in which one digit segment indicator is sequentially driven among these three digit segment indicators. The segment display of is controlled to be lit. By such lighting control, the remaining frequency display 365c displays the remaining amount of the prepaid card inserted in the CR unit 6 and displays the error of the CR unit 6. The residual frequency indicator 365c is a digit signal DG0 to DG2 (three signals in total) for designating a one-digit segment indicator among the three-digit segment indicators, and the designated one-digit segment indicator. Segment drive signals SEG-A to SEG-G (7 signals in total) for designating the contents to be lit and displayed are from the CR unit 6 to the game ball rental device connection terminal board 869 and the main door relay terminal board. When input via 880, the 1-digit segment display is sequentially emitted according to the input digit signals DG0 to DG2 and the segment drive signals SEG-A to SEG-G, and these 3-digit segment indicators are emitted. The contents of the light emission can be visually recognized through the loan balance display unit 363.

A CR unit lamp 365d is mounted on the frequency display board 365 adjacent to the residual frequency display 365c. In the CR unit lamp 365d, a predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is input via the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869 and the main door relay terminal plate 880. The predetermined voltage VL is input to the CR unit 6 as a ball lending signal TDL through a current limiting resistor mounted on the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 via the CR unit lamp 365d. When the CR unit 6 creates a predetermined voltage VL from AC24V supplied from the power supply board 851 by the built-in voltage creation circuit, and the ball lending switch 365a and the return switch 365b are in a valid ball lending state. Controls the logic of the ball lending signal TDL to cause the CR unit lamp 365d to emit light, and this light emission can be visually recognized through the loan remaining display unit 363. Further, the segment drive signals SEG-A to SEG-G are input to the residual power display 365c through the current limiting resistor mounted on the terminal board 869 for the rental device for a game ball or the like.

In the CR unit 6, the ball lending button 361 is pressed and the ball lending operation signal TDS from the ball lending switch 365a is transmitted from the frequency display board 365 via the main door relay terminal board 880 and the game ball lending device connection terminal board 869. When input, BRDY, which is a ball lending request signal, is output to the payout control board 4110 (payout control MPU4120a) via the game ball or the like lending device connection terminal plate 869. Then, the CR unit 6 is a one-time payout operation start request signal for paying out a predetermined number of balls to be lent (in this embodiment, 25 balls, which corresponds to 100 yen as an amount) in one payout operation. The BRQ is output to the payout control board 4110 (payout control MPU 4120a) via the game ball or the like lending device connection terminal board 869. The payout control board 4110 (payout control MPU4120a) into which BRDY and BRQ are input sends EXS, which is a signal for notifying that one payout operation has started or ended, to a game ball or the like rental device connection terminal board 869. PRDY, which is a signal for outputting to the CR unit 6 or for notifying that the payout operation for paying out the ball rental is possible or impossible, is transmitted to the game ball rental device connection terminal board. It is output to the CR unit 6 via 869. For example, if the hall clerk or the like presets the CR unit 6 so that 200 yen worth of game balls are paid out when the ball rental button 361 is pressed, one payout operation is performed. Is to be performed twice in a row, and if 25 balls for 100 yen are paid out, 25 balls for 100 yen will be paid out in succession, and 50 balls for a total of 200 yen will be paid out. Become.

In the CR unit 6, the return button 362 is pressed and the return operation signal RES from the return switch 365b is input from the frequency display board 365 via the main door relay terminal board 880 and the game ball rental device connection terminal board 869. The prepaid card is ejected from an insertion slot (not shown) and returned. The returned prepaid card stores the remaining amount obtained by subtracting the amount corresponding to the number of game balls paid out as a result of pressing the ball lending button 361.

[7-3. Power supply board]
Next, the power supply board 851 will be briefly described. The power supply board 851 includes a power supply switch 852 that can electrically connect or electrically shut off AC 24 volt (AC24V) supplied from the pachinko island facility, and a power supply control unit 855 that generates various power sources. A launch control unit 857 that controls launch by the launch solenoid 654 of the ball launching device 650 shown in FIG. 5 and ball feed control by the ball feed solenoid 585 of the ball feed unit 580 shown in FIG. 1 is provided. When the AC 24 volt (AC24V) supplied from the pachinko island facility is supplied to the power supply board 851, it is first supplied to the power supply switch 852 via the fuse (FUSE) 851a.

[7-3-1. Power control unit]
The power supply control unit 855 improves the power ratio of the power rectified by the synchronous rectifier circuit 855a and the synchronous rectifier circuit 855a in which the power switch 852 is operated to rectify the AC 24 volt (AC24V) supplied from the Pachinko Island facility. The power factor improving circuit 855b, the smoothing circuit 855c for smoothing the power with the power factor improved by the power factor improving circuit 855b, and various alternating currents for supplying the power smoothed by the smoothing circuit 855c to various substrates. When the voltage supplied to the power supply creation circuit 855d and the power supply creation circuit 855d exceeds a predetermined voltage, a large current flows through the fuse 851a to electrically supply the AC 24 volt (AC24V) supplied from the Pachinko Island facility. It includes a power supply destruction circuit 855e for disconnecting.

[7-3-2. Launch control unit]
The launch control unit 857 that performs launch control by the launch solenoid 654 and ball feed control by the ball feed solenoid 585 mainly includes a launch control circuit 857a, an electrolytic capacitor 857b, and a waste hit prevention circuit 857c. The launch control circuit 857a includes an operation signal from the potentiometer 512 that electrically adjusts the strength (launch intensity) of launching the game ball toward the game area 1100 according to the rotation position of the rotation handle main body front 506 shown in FIG. , A detection signal from the launch stop switch 518 that detects whether or not the launch (launch) of the game ball is forcibly stopped by the player's will, is input via the handle relay terminal board 192, and is also input. When the detection signal from the touch switch 516 that detects whether or not the palm or finger is touching the rotary handle main body front 506 is input to the power supply board 851 via the handle relay terminal plate 192, the waste hit prevention circuit 857c Is being entered via. Further, in the launch control circuit 857a, when the CR unit 6 and the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869 are electrically connected, a CR connection signal to that effect is input via the payout control board 4110. ..

The firing control circuit 857a steps down a predetermined DC power supply (DC + 37V power supply described later) among various DC power supplies supplied from the power supply creation circuit 855d to lower the firing solenoid driving DC power supply (DC + 35V (DC + 35V, hereinafter, "DC + 35V", hereinafter ". It is described as "+ 35V")), and the drive current for launching (launching) the game ball toward the game area 1100 is adjusted and launched based on the operation signal from the DC / DC converter 857aa to create the potentiometer 512. By outputting a constant current to the ball feed solenoid 585 via the firing solenoid drive circuit 857ab that controls the output to the solenoid 654 and the handle relay terminal plate 192, the ball feed member of the ball feed unit 580 is the dish shown in FIG. It is mainly composed of a ball feed solenoid drive circuit 857ac that receives one game ball stored in the upper plate 301 of the unit 300 and controls the game ball received by the ball feed member to be sent to the hit ball launcher 650 side. ..

The emission control circuit 857a is electrically connected to the positive terminal of the electrolytic capacitor 857b whose negative terminal is grounded to the ground (GND), and the DC power supply (+ 35V) for driving the solenoid stepped down by the DC / DC converter 857a is supplied. The electrolytic capacitor 857b is charged by being applied. A combined current obtained by merging the current from the DC / DC converter 857aa and the current due to the discharge of the electric charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor 857b flows through the firing solenoid drive circuit 857ab. The firing solenoid drive circuit 857ab controls the drive current for launching (launching) the game ball toward the gaming area 1100 based on the operation signal from the potentiometer 512 by adjusting the merged current and outputting it to the firing solenoid 654. Is going. On the other hand, the ball feed solenoid drive circuit 857ac controls to output a constant current to the ball feed solenoid 585 by DC + 24V, which will be described later, among various DC power supplies supplied from the power supply creation circuit 855d.

When the launch control circuit 857a determines that the rotation position of the rotation handle main body front 506 is rotated more than the right-handed set position described later based on the operation signal from the potentiometer 512, the right-handed game is performed. A right-handed signal indicating the presence is output to the payout control board 4110 as a payout right-handed signal. This output is output via a right-handed signal output circuit (not shown), and is an open collector output. The launch control circuit 857a is electrically connected to the payout control board 4110 via wiring (harness). When it is determined that the rotation position of the 506 in front of the rotation handle main body is rotated more than the right-handed set position described later, the collector terminal of the transistor of the right-handed signal output circuit (not shown) is dispensed via the wiring (harness) 4110. When it is determined that the rotation position of the rotation handle main body front 506 is not rotated beyond the right-handed set position, which will be described later, while the logic of the payout right-handed signal is lowered to the ground (GND) side in In the payout control input circuit 4120b of the payout control unit 4120 in the payout control board 4110, the collector terminal of the transistor of the striking signal output circuit is of a pull-up resistor whose one end is electrically connected to the + 12V power supply line via wiring (harness). It is electrically connected to the other end and pulled up to the + 12V side, and the logic of the payout right-handed signal becomes HI.

The waste-strike prevention circuit 857c shuts off the power supply by preventing the electric charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor 857b from being discharged and flowing to the firing solenoid drive circuit 857ab and flowing to the firing solenoid 654 as a driving current when the power supply is cut off. It is a circuit that can prevent the firing of a waste ball of a game ball in. The detailed description will be described later.

[7-4. Peripheral control board]
As shown in FIG. 14, the peripheral control board 4140 includes a peripheral control unit 4150 that performs effect control based on various commands from the main control board 4100, and drawing control and a main body of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the mobile terminal 470. A liquid crystal and sound control unit 4160 that controls sounds such as music and sound effects flowing from the speaker housed in the speaker box 820 shown in FIG. 5 provided in the frame 3 and the speaker 130 provided in the door frame 5, and a portable terminal. A real-time clock (hereinafter referred to as a real-time clock) that holds a communication control unit 4162 for wirelessly exchanging various information (various data) with the 470, calendar information for specifying the date, and time information for specifying the hour, minute, and second. The control unit 4165, the speaker housed in the speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3, and the speaker 130 provided in the door frame 5 are used to control the volume of music, sound effects, and the like. It includes a volume adjusting volume 4140a that is adjusted by rotating the volume.

[7-4-1. Peripheral control unit]
As shown in FIG. 14, the peripheral control unit 4150 that performs the effect control includes a peripheral control MPU 4150a as a microprocessor, a peripheral control ROM 4150b that stores various control programs, various data, various control data, and various schedule data, which will be described later. Various information (for example, drawn on the liquid crystal display device 1900 on the game board side) that is executed every time a V blank signal is input from the VDP4160a having a built-in sound source of the liquid crystal and sound control unit 4160 Peripheral control RAM 4150c that stores schedule data that defines the screen, schedule data that defines the light emission mode of various LEDs, etc., and various information that continues over days (for example, jackpot game state) Peripheral control SRAM 4150d that stores information for managing the history of occurrence of data, information for managing special effect flags, etc., and peripheral control for monitoring whether the peripheral control MPU4150a is operating normally. It is equipped with an external watch dock timer 4150e (hereinafter, referred to as "peripheral control external WDT4150e").

The peripheral control RAM 4150c can hold the stored contents only for a time when a momentary power failure occurs and the power is immediately restored, and the power is cut off for a long time (when a long-time power failure occurs). ), The peripheral control SRAM 4150d is supplied with backup power by a large-capacity electrolytic capacitor (hereinafter, referred to as "electrolytic capacitor for SRAM") provided on the power supply board 851. As a result, the stored contents can be retained for about 50 hours. Since the power supply board 851 is provided with the electrolytic capacitor for SRAM, when the game board 4 is removed from the pachinko gaming machine 1, backup power is not supplied to the peripheral control SRAM 4150d. Therefore, the peripheral control SRAM 4150d has stored contents. Can no longer hold and lose its contents.

The peripheral control external WDT4150e is a timer for monitoring whether the system of the peripheral control MPU4150a is out of control, and when the timer is up, it is reset by hardware. That is, if the peripheral control MPU4150a does not output a clear signal for clearing the timer of the peripheral control external WDT4150e to the peripheral control external WDT4150e within a certain period of time (until the timer starts up), the peripheral control MPU4150a is reset. When the peripheral control MPU4150a outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control external WDT4150e within a certain period of time, the timer count of the peripheral control external WDT4150e can be restarted, so that the reset is not applied.

The peripheral control MPU4150a has a plurality of parallel I / O ports, serial I / O ports, etc. built-in, and when various commands from the main control board 4100 are received, each decorative board of the game board 4 is based on these various commands. The game board side light emission data for outputting the lighting signal, blinking signal, or gradation lighting signal to a plurality of LEDs provided in the lamp drive board is transmitted from the serial I / O port for the lamp drive board via a peripheral control output circuit (not shown). Serial for motor drive board to transmit game board side motor drive data for transmission to drive board 4170 and output drive signals to electrical drive sources such as motors and solenoids that operate various movable bodies provided on game board 4. Door-side motor drive for transmitting from the I / O port to the motor drive board 4180 via the peripheral control output circuit, or for outputting a drive signal to an electrical drive source such as the dial drive motor 414 provided on the door frame 5. Data can be transmitted from the serial I / O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 via the peripheral control output circuit, the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, or the door frame. Peripheral control output of light emission data on the door side for outputting lighting signals, blinking signals, or gradation lighting signals to a plurality of LEDs provided on each decorative board of 5 from the serial I / O port for frame decoration drive amplifier board LED. It is transmitted to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 via the circuit, the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882.

Further, the peripheral control MPU4150a exchanges various signals with the game information display device DCNT arranged above the pachinko game machine 1 via the game information display device parallel I / O port. In this game information display device DCNT, a plurality of lamps (decorative lamps) are provided on both sides of the data display unit DCNTa centering on the data display unit DCNTa for displaying information related to the game, and below the decorative lamp on the left side, A call button DCNTb for calling a staff member such as a clerk in the hall is arranged, and an operation button DCNTc for switching information about the game to be displayed on the data display unit DCNTta is arranged below the decorative lamp on the right side. Information about the game includes, for example, the number of big hits, the number of fluctuations until the big hit, the number of times the big hit continues, and the time when the player leaves the seat (in the game information display device DCNT, the player leaves the seat). It also has a function to measure the time taken). Information on these games is transmitted to the management terminal of the hall via the pachinko island facility.

Various commands from the main control board 4100 are input to the main control board serial I / O port of the peripheral control MPU 4150a via a peripheral control input circuit (not shown). Further, a detection signal from a rotation detection switch for detecting the rotation (rotation direction) of the dial operation unit 401 and a pressure detection switch for detecting the operation of the pressing operation unit 405 provided on the operation unit 400. The detection signal is serialized by a door-side serial transmission circuit (not shown) provided on the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194, and the serialized operation unit detection data is transmitted from the door-side serial transmission circuit to the peripheral door relay terminal board 882 and the frame. It is input to the operation unit detection serial I / O port of the peripheral control MPU4150a via the peripheral relay terminal plate 868 and the peripheral control input circuit.

Detection signals from various detection switches (for example, a photo sensor) for detecting the original position, movable position, etc. of various movable bodies provided on the game board 4 are on the game board side (not shown) provided on the motor drive board 4180. It is serialized by the serial transmission circuit, and this serialized movable body detection data is input from the game board side serial transmission circuit to the serial I / O port for the motor drive board of the peripheral control MPU4150a via the peripheral control input circuit. There is. The peripheral control MPU 4150a is adapted to exchange various data between the peripheral control board 4140 and the motor drive board 4180 by switching the input / output of the serial I / O port for the motor drive board.

The peripheral control MPU4150a has a built-in watchdog timer (hereinafter referred to as "peripheral control built-in WDT"), and its own system runs out of control by using the peripheral control built-in WDT and the peripheral control external WDT4150e together. I am diagnosing whether or not it is.

[7-4-1a. Peripheral control MPU]
Next, the peripheral control MPU4150a, which is a microcomputer, will be described. As shown in FIG. 15, the peripheral control MPU 4150a is centered on the peripheral control CPU core 4150aa, and has a peripheral control built-in RAM 4150ab, a peripheral control DMA (abbreviation of Direct Memory Access) controller 4150ac, a peripheral control bus controller 4150ad, and various peripheral control serial I. It is composed of a / O port 4150ae, a WDT4150af with built-in peripheral control, various parallel I / O ports for peripheral control 4150ag, a peripheral control analog / digital converter (hereinafter referred to as a peripheral control A / D converter) 4150ak, and the like.

Peripheral control CPU core 4150aa reads and writes various data to peripheral control built-in RAM 4150ab and peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac via internal bus 4150ah, while peripheral control various serial I / O ports 4150ae, peripheral control built-in WDT4150af, Peripheral control Various data are read and written to the various parallel I / O ports 4150ag and the peripheral control A / D converter 4150ak via the internal bus 4150ah, the peripheral control bus controller 4150ad, and the peripheral bus 4150ai.

Further, the peripheral control CPU core 4150aa reads various data to the peripheral control ROM 4150b via the internal bus 4150ah, the peripheral control bus controller 4150ad, and the external bus 4150h, while reading the peripheral control RAM 4150c and the peripheral control SRAM 4150d. Then, various data are read and written via the internal bus 4150ah, the peripheral control bus controller 4150ad, and the external bus 4150h.

The peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac includes storage devices such as peripheral control built-in RAM 4150ab, peripheral control ROM 4150b, peripheral control RAM 4150c, and peripheral control SRAM 4150d, peripheral control various serial I / O ports 4150ae, peripheral control built-in WDT4150af, and peripheral control parallel I. It is a dedicated controller that independently transfers data between the / O port 4150ag and the input / output device such as the peripheral control A / D converter 4150ak without going through the peripheral control CPU core 4150aa, and is DMA0. It has four channels, ~ DMA3.

Specifically, the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac includes a storage device of the peripheral control built-in RAM 4150ab built in the peripheral control MPU 4150a, various peripheral control serial I / O ports 4150ae built in the peripheral control MPU 4150a, and a peripheral control built-in WDT4150af. , Peripheral control Various parallel I / O ports 4150ag, and input / output devices such as peripheral control A / D converter 4150ak, to perform data transfer independently without going through the peripheral control CPU core 4150aa. In addition, while reading and writing to the storage device of the RAM 4150ab with built-in peripheral control via the internal bus 4150ah, various serial I / O ports 4150ae with peripheral control, WDT4150af with built-in peripheral control, parallel I / O ports 4150ag with peripheral control, and Reads and outputs to / from an input / output device such as a peripheral control A / D converter 4150ak via the peripheral control bus controller 4150ad and the peripheral bus 4150ai.

Further, the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac includes a storage device such as a peripheral control ROM 4150b, a peripheral control RAM 4150c, and a peripheral control SRAM 4150d externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 4150a, and various peripheral control serial I / Os built in the peripheral control MPU 4150a. Between the O port 4150ae, the WDT4150af with built-in peripheral control, the various parallel I / O ports 4150ag for peripheral control, and the input / output devices such as the peripheral control A / D converter 4150ak, without going through the peripheral control CPU core 4150aa. In order to perform data transfer independently, while reading and outputting to storage devices such as peripheral control ROM 4150b, peripheral control RAM 4150c, and peripheral control SRAM 4150d via peripheral control bus controller 4150ad and external bus 4150h, various peripheral controls are performed. For input / output devices such as serial I / O port 4150ae, WDT4150af with built-in peripheral control, various parallel I / O ports 4150ag for peripheral control, and peripheral control A / D converter 4150ak, via peripheral control bus controller 4150ad and peripheral bus 4150ai. Read and write.

The peripheral control bus controller 4150ad controls the internal bus 4150ah, the peripheral bus 4150ai, and the external bus 4150h to control the central processing unit of the peripheral control MPU core 4150aa, the peripheral control built-in RAM 4150ab, the peripheral control ROM 4150b, the peripheral control RAM 4150c, and the peripheral control. Various devices such as a storage device such as SRAM 4150d, various peripheral control serial I / O ports 4150ae, WDT4150af with built-in peripheral control, various parallel I / O ports 4150ag for peripheral control, and input / output devices such as peripheral control A / D converter 4150ak. It is a dedicated controller that exchanges various data between them.

Peripheral control Various serial I / O ports 4150ae are serial I / O ports for lamp drive boards, serial I / O ports for motor drive boards, serial I / O ports for frame decoration drive amplifier boards, and frame decoration drive amplifier board LEDs. It has a serial I / O port for, a serial I / O port for a frame decoration drive amplifier board motor, a serial I / O port for a main control board, and a serial I / O port for acquiring operation unit information.

The peripheral control built-in watchdog timer (WDT with built-in peripheral control) 4150af is a timer for monitoring whether the system of the peripheral control MPU 4150a is out of control, and when this timer is up, it resets in hardware. It has become. That is, the peripheral control CPU core 4150aa is reset when the watch dock timer is started and the clear signal for clearing the timer is not output to the peripheral control built-in WDT4150af within a certain period (until the timer is up). Will be required. When the peripheral control CPU core 4150aa starts the watch dock timer and outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control built-in WDT4150af within a certain period of time, the timer count can be restarted, so that the reset is not applied.

Peripheral control Various parallel I / O ports 4150ag output various latch signals such as game board side motor drive latch signal and door side motor drive light emission latch signal, as well as output clear signal to peripheral control external WDT4150e, and play games. Detection signals from various detection switches for detecting the original position, movable position, etc. of various movable bodies provided on the board 4 are serialized by a game board side serial transmission circuit provided on the motor drive board 4180, and this serialization is performed. The movable body information acquisition latch signal for receiving the converted movable body detection data from the game board side serial transmission circuit at the serial I / O port for the motor drive board of the peripheral control MPU4150a can be output, or the upper decoration on the door frame 5 can be output. It outputs a lighting signal of an LED mounted on the upper decorative board of the unit 280. This LED is a high-brightness white LED, and is a confirmation lamp for notifying that the occurrence of the big hit game state is confirmed. In the present embodiment, the path between the LED and the peripheral control parallel I / O ports 4150ag is shortened by adopting a configuration in which the LED and the peripheral control various parallel I / O ports 4150ag are directly connected electrically. It is possible to take noise countermeasures for LED lighting control, which has a heavy meaning in terms of games. It should be noted that the LED lighting control is executed in the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process described later, and other LEDs and the like other than this LED are executed in the peripheral control unit steady process described later. It has become.

The peripheral control A / D converter 4150ak is electrically connected to the volume adjustment volume 4140a, and the resistance value is changed by rotating the knob portion of the volume adjustment volume 4140a, and the resistance at the rotation position of the knob portion is changed. The voltage divided by the value is converted from an analog value to a digital value and converted into a value in 1024 steps from a value to a value of 1023. In the present embodiment, the value of 1024 steps is divided into seven and managed as the substrate volumes 0 to 6. The board volume 0 is set to mute, the board volume 6 is set to the maximum volume, and the volume is set to increase from the board volume 0 to the board volume 6. The liquid crystal and the sound control unit 4160 (VDP4160a with a built-in sound source, which will be described later) are controlled so that the volume is set to the board volumes 0 to 6, and the speaker and the door frame 5 housed in the speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3 Music and sound effects are played from the provided speaker 130. In this way, music and sound effects flow from the speaker housed in the speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3 and the speaker 130 provided in the door frame 5 by adjusting the volume based on the rotation operation of the knob portion. ..

In the present embodiment, in addition to music and sound effects, a notification sound for notifying the clerk of the hall of a malfunction of the pachinko game machine 1 or an illegal act against the pachinko game machine 1, contents related to the game production, etc. (For example, the screen unfolded on the liquid crystal display device 1900 on the game board side is produced as more powerful, or it is announced that there is a high possibility that the game state will be favorable to the player. The notification sound for) also flows from the speaker housed in the speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3 and the speaker 130 provided in the door frame 5, but the notification sound and the notification sound are adjusted in volume based on the rotation operation of the knob portion. It is a mechanism that flows independently of the sound, and the volume from mute to maximum volume can be adjusted by controlling the liquid crystal and sound control unit 4160 (VDP4160a with built-in sound source described later) by a program. .. The volume adjusted by this program is different from the above-mentioned substrate volume divided into seven stages, and can smoothly change from mute to maximum volume. As a result, for example, even when a hall clerk or the like rotates the knob portion of the volume adjustment volume 4140a to set the volume low, the speaker and the door housed in the speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3 Although the production sounds such as music and sound effects flowing from the speaker 130 provided in the frame 5 are reduced, the volume is loud when the pachinko gaming machine 1 has a problem or when the player is cheating. In the form, the notification sound set to the maximum volume) can be played. Therefore, even if the volume of the effect sound is reduced, it is possible to prevent the hall clerk and the like from becoming less likely to notice the occurrence of a problem or the cheating of the player due to the notification sound. In addition, based on the current board volume set by adjusting the volume based on the rotation operation of the knob, the volume at which the advertisement sound is played is reduced so as not to interfere with music and sound effects, while the advertisement sound is played. In addition to music and sound effects, there is a possibility that the screen unfolded by the liquid crystal display device 1900 on the game board side will be produced as more powerful, or the game will shift to a game state that is advantageous to the player. You can also announce that it is expensive.

[7-4-1b. Peripheral control ROM]
The peripheral control ROM 4150b stores in advance various control programs, various data, various control data, and various schedule data for controlling the peripheral control unit 4150, the liquid crystal and sound control unit 4160, the RTC control unit 4165, and the like. The various schedule data include screen generation schedule data for generating a screen to be drawn on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and mobile terminal 470, light emission mode generation schedule data for generating light emission modes of various LEDs, music, sound effects, and the like. There are schedule data for sound generation that generates the data, schedule data for the electric drive source that generates the drive mode of the electric drive source such as a motor and a solenoid, and the like. The screen generation schedule data is configured by arranging screen data that defines the screen configuration in time series, and defines the order of screens to be drawn on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the mobile terminal 470. The light emission mode generation schedule data is configured by arranging light emission data defining the light emission modes of various LEDs in a time series. The sound generation schedule data is composed of sound command data arranged in chronological order, and the order in which music and sound effects are played is defined. The sound command data includes an output channel number for instructing which output channel to use among a plurality of output channels in the built-in sound source of the sound source built-in VDP4160a of the liquid crystal and the sound control unit 4160 described later, and the sound source built-in VDP4160a. Of the plurality of tracks in the built-in sound source of the above, a track number for instructing which track to incorporate sound data such as music and sound effects is specified. The electric drive source schedule data is composed of drive data of electric drive sources such as a motor and a solenoid arranged in chronological order, and defines the operation of the electric drive source such as a motor and a solenoid.

Some of the control programs stored in the peripheral control ROM 4150b are directly read from the peripheral control ROM 4150b and executed, and some are copied to the various control program copy areas of the peripheral control RAM 4150c described later when the power is turned on. In some cases, what is done is read out and executed. Further, various data, various control data, and various schedule data stored in the peripheral control ROM 4150b may be read directly from the peripheral control ROM 4150b, or when the power is turned on in the various control data copy areas of the peripheral control RAM 4150c described later. In some cases, the copy is read out.

Further, the peripheral control ROM 4150b is used as one of various control programs for controlling the RTC control unit 4165 to correct the brightness of the liquid crystal display device 1900 on the game board side according to the usage time of the liquid crystal display device 1900 on the game board side. A brightness correction program is included. This brightness correction program corrects the decrease in brightness due to aging of the liquid crystal display device 1900 on the game board side when the backlight of the liquid crystal display device 1900 on the game board side is an LED type. , The date and time when the liquid crystal display device 1900 on the game board side was first turned on, the current date and time, the brightness setting information, etc. are acquired from the built-in RAM of the RTC control unit 4165, which will be described later, and the acquired brightness setting information is based on the correction information. To correct. This correction information is stored in advance in the peripheral control ROM 4150b. As will be described later, the brightness setting information includes brightness adjustment information for adjusting the brightness of the LED that is the backlight of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 in 5% increments in a range from 100% to 70%. The brightness of the LED that is the backlight of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 that has been set is included. For example, the date and time when the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 is first turned on and the current date and time. Therefore, if six months have already passed since the date and time when the power of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 was first turned on, the corresponding correction information (for example, 5%) is acquired from the peripheral control ROM 4150b and the brightness is increased. When the brightness of the LED included in the setting information is 75% and the backlight of the liquid crystal display device 1900 on the game board side is turned on, the brightness is 80%, which is an additional 5% of the correction information acquired for this 75%. The brightness of the backlight of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 is adjusted and turned on based on the brightness adjustment information included in the brightness setting information, and the power is turned on from the date and time when the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 is first turned on. If December has already passed, the corresponding correction information (for example, 10%) is acquired from the peripheral control ROM 4150b, and the brightness of the LED included in the brightness setting information is 75%, and the liquid crystal display device on the game board side. When the backlight of 1900 is turned on, the game board is based on the brightness adjustment information included in the brightness setting information so that the brightness is 85%, which is the correction information acquired for this 75%, which is added by 10%. The brightness of the backlight of the side liquid crystal display device 1900 is adjusted and turned on.

[7-4-1c. Peripheral control RAM]
As shown in FIG. 15, the peripheral control RAM 4150c externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 4150a is a backup that exclusively stores various information that is updated by executing various control programs and is to be backed up. It is stored in the management target work area 4150ca, the backup first area 4150cc and the backup second area 4150cc, and the peripheral control ROM 4150b, which exclusively store the copy of various information stored in the backup management target work area 4150ca. Various control program copy areas 4150cd that exclusively store copies of various control programs, and various data, various control data, various schedule data, etc. stored in the peripheral control ROM 4150b are copied. Various control data copy areas 4150ce that are exclusively stored, and backup unmanaged work area 4150cf that exclusively stores information that is not backed up among various information updated by executing various control programs. Is provided.

When the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on (including when the power is restored due to a momentary power failure or a power failure), a value of 0 is forcibly written to the backup unmanaged work area 4150 cf and cleared to zero. For the backup management target work area 4150ca, backup first area 4150cc, and backup second area 4150cc, the power on command (see FIG. 34) from the main control board 4100 starts the RAM clear effect when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on. (For example, when the operation switch 860a shown in FIG. 11 is operated within a predetermined period from the time when the power is turned on, the start of the effect is instructed. ), It is cleared to zero.

The backup management target work area 4150ca is a production information (effect information) which is various information updated in the peripheral control unit steady processing executed every time a V blank signal is input from the sound source built-in VDP 4160a of the liquid crystal and sound control unit 4160 described later. Bank0 (1fr) that exclusively stores 1fr) as a backup target, and effect information (1ms) that is various information updated in the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing that is executed every time a 1ms timer interrupt, which will be described later, occurs. It is composed of Bank0 (1 ms), which is exclusively stored as a backup target. Here, to briefly explain the names of Bank0 (1fr) and Bank0 (1ms), "Bank" is a minimum management unit representing the size of a storage area for storing various information, and is referred to as "Bank". The following "0" means that the storage area is normally used for storing various information updated by executing various control programs. That is, "Bank 0" means that the size of the storage area normally used is set as the minimum management unit. The "Bank1", "Bank2", "Bank3", and "Bank4" provided in the area extending from the backup first area 4150 cc to the backup second area 4150 cc, which will be described later, are the same storage areas as the "Bank0". It means that it has a size. In "(1fr)", as will be described later, the VDP4160a with a built-in sound source outputs drawing data for one screen (one frame) to the liquid crystal display device 1900 on the game board side, and the mobile terminal 470 via the communication control unit 4162. When it is output to, a V blank signal indicating that the screen data from the peripheral control MPU 4150a can be accepted is output to the peripheral control MPU 4150a. Therefore, every time the V blank signal is input, it is paraphrased. Then, since the peripheral control unit routine processing is executed for each frame (1 frame), it is added to "Bank0", "Bank1", "Bank2", "Bank3", and "Bank4", respectively (effect information). (1fr) and the effect backup information (1fr) described later are also used in the same meaning.) “(1ms)” means that the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is performed every time a 1ms timer interrupt occurs, as described later. From the point of execution, it is added to "Bank0", "Bank1", "Bank2", "Bank3", and "Bank4", respectively (the effect information (1 ms) and the effect backup information (1 ms) described later are also described. Used with the same meaning).

Bank0 (1fr) includes a lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 4150caa, a frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 4150cab, a reception command storage area 4150cac, an RTC information acquisition storage area 4150cad, and a schedule data storage area 4150cae. Etc. are provided. The game board side light emission data SL-DAT for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal to a plurality of LEDs provided on each decorative board of the game board 4 in the transmission data storage area 4150ca on the lamp drive board side. Is a storage area in which is set, and in the transmission data storage area 4150cab for the LED on the frame decoration drive amplifier board side, a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting for a plurality of LEDs provided on each decoration board of the door frame 5 is lit. It is a storage area in which the door-side light emission data STL-DAT for outputting a signal is set, and in the reception command storage area 4150cc, various commands transmitted from the main control board 4100 are received and the received various commands are stored. It is a storage area in which various commands transmitted from the mobile terminal 470 are received and the received various commands are set. In the RTC information acquisition storage area 4150cad, the RTC control unit 4165 (RTC41654a described later) It is a storage area in which various information acquired from the RTC built-in RAM4165aa) is set, and the schedule data storage area 4150cae corresponds to the received command based on the command received from the main control board 4100 (main control MPU4100a). This is a storage area in which various schedule data are set. In the schedule data storage area 4150cae, various schedule data copied from the peripheral control ROM 4150b to the various control data copy areas 4150ce are read and set, and various schedule data are directly read from the peripheral control ROM 4150b. Some are set. Note that Bank 0 (1fr) is also provided with a transmission command storage area for a mobile terminal and an output data storage area for a game information display device (not shown). In the transmission command storage area for the mobile terminal, in addition to various commands for activating the application pre-installed on the mobile terminal 470 and displaying various screens, various information from the game information display device DCNT shown in FIG. It is a storage area in which various commands for transmitting the above are set, and the output data storage area for the game information display device is a storage area in which various data for outputting various signals to the game information display device DCNT are set. ..

Bank 0 (1 ms) is provided with a frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 4150 caf, a motor drive board side transmission data storage area 4150 cag, a movable body information acquisition storage area 4150 cah, an operation unit information acquisition storage area 4150 cai, and the like. Has been done. In the transmission data storage area 4150 caf for the frame decorative drive amplifier board side motor, the door side motor drive data STM-DAT for outputting a drive signal to an electric drive source such as the dial drive motor 414 provided in the door frame 5 is provided. It is a storage area to be set, and is for outputting a drive signal to an electric drive source such as a motor or a solenoid for operating various movable bodies provided on the game board 4 in the transmission data storage area 4150 cg on the motor drive board side. It is a storage area in which the motor drive data SM-DAT on the game board side is set, and the movable body information acquisition storage area 4150cah is provided in the game board 4 based on the detection signals from various detection switches provided in the game board 4. It is a storage area in which various information acquired such as the original position and the movable position of various movable bodies is set, and the operation unit information acquisition storage area 4150 kai is based on detection signals from various detection switches provided in the operation unit 400. Dial operation unit 401 created based on various information acquired from the rotation (rotation direction) of the dial operation unit 401 and the operation of the pressing operation unit 405 (for example, detection signals from various detection switches provided in the operation unit 400). (Rotation direction) history information, operation history information of the pressing operation unit 405, etc.) is set in this storage area. In addition, Bank 0 (1 ms) is also provided with a game information display device information acquisition storage area (not shown). The game information display device information acquisition storage area is a storage area in which various information of the game information display device DCNT is set based on various signals from the game information display device DCNT.

Bank0 (1fr) lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 4150caa, frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 4150cab, and Bank0 (1ms) frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 4150caf. The transmission data storage area 4150 cg on the motor drive board side is divided into two areas, a first area and a second area, respectively.

In the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 4150caa, when the peripheral control unit steady processing described later is executed, the game board side light emission data SL-DAT is set in the first area of the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 4150caa. When the next peripheral control unit steady processing is executed, the game board side light emission data SL-DAT is set in the second area of the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 4150caa, and the peripheral control unit steady processing. Each time the process is executed, the game board side light emitting data SL-DAT is alternately set in the first area and the second area of the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 4150caa. Peripheral control unit steady processing is executed. For example, when the game board side light emission data SL-DAT is set in the second area of the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 4150ca in the current peripheral control unit steady processing, the previous peripheral When the control unit steady-state processing is executed, the processing proceeds based on the game board side light emission data SL-DAT set in the first area of the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 4150caa.

When the peripheral control unit steady processing is executed, the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 4150cab is placed in the first area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 4150cab. When -DAT is set and the next peripheral control unit steady processing is executed, the door side light emission data STL-DAT is set in the second area of the transmission data storage area 4150cab for the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED. The door side emission data STL-DAT is alternately set in the first area and the second area of the transmission data storage area 4150cab for the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED every time the peripheral control unit steady processing is executed. To. Peripheral control unit steady processing is executed, for example, when the door side light emission data STL-DAT is set in the second area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 4150cab in the peripheral control unit steady processing this time. When the previous peripheral control unit steady processing is executed, the processing proceeds based on the door side emission data STL-DAT set in the first area of the transmission data storage area 4150cab for the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED. It has become.

The frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 4150 caf is opened to the first area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 4150 caf when the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing described later is executed. When the side motor drive data STM-DAT is set and the next peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed, the door side motor drive data STM is stored in the second area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 4150 caf. -DAT is set, and each time the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is executed, the door side is in the first and second areas of the transmission data storage area 4150 caf for the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor. Motor drive data STM-DAT is set alternately. Peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is executed. For example, in the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing this time, the door side motor drive data STM-DAT is stored in the second area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 4150 caf. When set, the door-side motor drive data STM-DAT set in the first area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board-side motor transmission data storage area 4150 caf when the previous peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process was executed. The process is to proceed based on this.

In the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 4150 cag, when the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed, the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT is set in the first area of the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 4150 cag. Then, when the next peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed, the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT is set in the second area of the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 4150 cag. Every time the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process is executed, the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT is alternately set in the first area and the second area of the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 4150 cag. Peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is executed. For example, in the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing this time, the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT is set in the second area of the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 4150 cag. Occasionally, when the previous peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed, the process proceeds based on the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT set in the first area of the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 4150 cg. It has become like.

Next, the backup first area 4150 cc and the backup second area 4150 cc, which exclusively store a copy of the effect information which is various information stored in the backup management target work area 4150ca, will be described. In the backup first area 4150cc and the backup second area 4150cc, two pairs with two banks as one pair are managed as one page. The effect information (1fr), which is the content stored in Bank0 (1fr), which is a normally used storage area, is used as the effect backup information (1fr) every time the peripheral control unit steady processing is executed for each frame (1frame). The effect information (1 ms) is copied to the backup first area 4150 cc and the backup second area 4150 cc by the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac at high speed, and is stored in the normally used storage area Bank0 (1 ms). Is used as the effect backup information (1 ms) by the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac in the backup first area 4150 cc and the backup second area 4150 cc each time the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed every time a 1 ms timer interrupt is generated. It is copied at high speed. The consistency of one page is determined by whether or not the contents of the two banks constituting the page match.

Specifically, in the backup first area 4150cc, Bank1 (1fr) and Bank2 (1fr) are set as one pair, and Bank1 (1ms) and Bank2 (1ms) are set as one pair, for a total of two pairs managed as one page. ing. The content stored in Bank0 (1fr), which is a normally used storage area, is stored in Bank1 (1fr) and Bank2 (1fr) every time the peripheral control unit routine processing is executed every frame (1frame). The memory that is copied at high speed by the controller 4150ac and stored in Bank0 (1ms), which is a normally used storage area, is stored every time a 1ms timer interrupt is generated and every time the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is executed. It is copied to Bank1 (1ms) and Bank2 (1ms) at high speed by the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac, and the consistency of this page is determined by whether or not the contents of Bank1 (1fr) and Bank2 (1fr) match. This is performed depending on whether or not the contents of Bank 1 (1 ms) and Bank 2 (1 ms) match.

Further, in the backup second area 4150cc, Bank3 (1fr) and Bank4 (1fr) are set as one pair, and Bank3 (1ms) and Bank4 (1ms) are set as one pair, so that a total of two pairs are managed as one page. The content stored in Bank0 (1fr), which is a normally used storage area, is stored in Bank3 (1fr) and Bank4 (1fr) every time the peripheral control unit routine processing is executed every frame (1frame). The memory that is copied at high speed by the controller 4150ac and stored in Bank0 (1ms), which is a normally used storage area, is stored every time a 1ms timer interrupt is generated and every time the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is executed. It is copied to Bank3 (1ms) and Bank4 (1ms) at high speed by the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac, and the consistency of this page is determined by whether or not the contents of Bank3 (1fr) and Bank4 (1fr) match. This is performed depending on whether or not the contents of Bank 3 (1 ms) and Bank 4 (1 ms) match.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the backup first area 4150 kb has Bank 1 (1 fr) and Bank 2 (1 fr) as one pair, and Bank 1 (1 ms) and Bank 2 (1 ms) as one pair, for a total of two pairs. It is an area for managing as a page, and the backup second area 4150cc has a total of two pairs, one pair of Bank3 (1fr) and Bank4 (1fr) and one pair of Bank3 (1ms) and Bank4 (1ms). This is an area for managing as one page. Different ID coats are stored at the beginning and end of each page, that is, at the beginning and end of the backup first area 4150cc and the backup second area 4150cc.

Further, in the present embodiment, the effect information (1fr), which is the content stored in Bank0 (1fr), which is a normally used storage area, is used as the effect backup information (1fr) in the peripheral control unit for each frame (1 frame). Each time a steady process is executed, the contents are copied to the backup first area 4150 cc and the backup second area 4150 cc at high speed by the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac, and are stored in Bank0 (1 ms), which is a normally used storage area. The effect information (1 ms) is the effect backup information (1 ms), and each time a 1 ms timer interrupt is generated and each time the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed, the backup first area 4150 cc and the backup second area 4150 cc The peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac makes a high-speed copy, but the programs that execute the high-speed copy by these peripheral control DMA controllers 4150ac are common. That is, in the present embodiment, the effect information (1fr) and the effect information (1 ms) are managed by a common management method (execution of a common program).

[7-4-1d. Peripheral control SRAM]
The peripheral control SRAM 4150d externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 4150a includes a backup management target work area 4150da that exclusively stores the information to be backed up among various information updated by executing various control programs. A backup first area 4150db and a backup second area 4150dc are provided for exclusively storing a copy of various information stored in the backup management target work area 4150da. The contents stored in the peripheral control SRAM 4150d include a power-on command (see FIG. 34) from the main control board 4100 when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on (including when the power is restored due to a momentary power failure or a power failure). It instructs the start of the RAM clear effect and the start of each state effect (for example, it instructs the start of the effect when the operation switch 860a shown in FIG. 11 is operated within a predetermined period from the time when the power is turned on. Even when it is), it is not cleared to zero. This point is completely different from the above-mentioned point that the backup management target work area 4150ca, the backup first area 4150cc, and the backup second area 4150cc of the peripheral control RAM 4150c are cleared to zero. Further, when the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 is operated within a predetermined time after the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, a screen for performing the setting mode is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 on the game board side. It is supposed to be done. By operating the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 according to the screen of this setting mode, each content (item) stored in the peripheral control SRAM 4150d (for example, a history of occurrence of a jackpot game state, etc.) On the other hand, the contents (items) stored in the peripheral control RAM 4150c are not displayed at all and cannot be cleared in the setting mode. This point is also completely different between the peripheral control RAM 4150c and the peripheral control SRAM 4150d.

The backup management target work area 4150da is used for managing various information such as effect information (SRAM) (for example, information for managing the history of occurrence of a jackpot game state and special effect flags), which is various information that is continued over days. It is composed of Bank0 (SRAM) that exclusively stores information) as a backup target. Here, briefly explaining the name of Bank0 (SRAM), as described above, "Bank" is the minimum management unit representing the size of the storage area for storing various information, and is referred to as "Bank". The following "0" means that it is a normally used storage area for storing various information updated by executing various control programs. That is, "Bank 0" means that the size of the storage area normally used is set as the minimum management unit. The "Bank1", "Bank2", "Bank3", and "Bank4" provided in the area extending from the backup first area 4150db to the backup second area 4150dc, which will be described later, are the same storage areas as the "Bank0". It means that it has a size. Since various information stored in the peripheral control SRAM 4150d externally attached to the peripheral control SRAM 4150a is backed up in "(SRAM)", "Bank0", "Bank1", "Bank2", and "Bank3" , And "Bank4", respectively (the effect information (SRAM) and the effect backup information (SRAM) described later are also used with the same meaning).

Next, the backup first area 4150db and the backup second area 4150dc, which exclusively store the copy of the effect information (SRAM) which is various information stored in the backup management target work area 4150da, will be described. The backup first area 4150db and the backup second area 4150dc have two banks as one pair, and this one pair is managed as one page. The effect information (SRAM), which is the content stored in Bank0 (SRAM), which is a normally used storage area, is used as the effect backup information (RAM) every time the peripheral control unit steady processing is executed for each frame (1 frame). In addition, it is copied to the backup first area 4150db and the backup second area 4150dc at high speed by the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac. The consistency of one page is determined by whether or not the contents of the two banks constituting the page match.

Specifically, the backup first area 4150db has Bank1 (SRAM) and Bank2 (SRAM) as one pair, and this one pair is managed as one page. The contents stored in Bank0 (SRAM), which is a normally used storage area, are stored in Bank1 (SRAM) and Bank2 (SRAM) every time the peripheral control unit routine processing is executed every frame (1 frame). It is copied at high speed by the controller 4150ac, and the consistency of this page is determined by whether or not the contents of Bank1 (SRAM) and Bank2 (SRAM) match.

Further, in the backup second area 4150dc, Bank3 (SRAM) and Bank4 (SRAM) are set as one pair, and this one pair is managed as one page. The contents stored in Bank0 (SRAM), which is a normally used storage area, are stored in Bank3 (SRAM) and Bank4 (SRAM) every time the peripheral control unit routine processing is executed for each frame (1 frame). It is copied at high speed by the controller 4150ac, and the consistency of this page is determined by whether or not the contents of Bank3 (SRAM) and Bank4 (SRAM) match.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the backup first area 4150db is an area for managing Bank1 (SRAM) and Bank2 (SRAM) as one pair, and managing this one pair as one page, and the backup second area. 4150dc is an area for managing Bank3 (SRAM) and Bank4 (SRAM) as one pair, and managing this one pair as one page. Different ID coats are stored at the beginning and end of each page, that is, at the beginning and end of the backup first area 4150db and the backup second area 4150dc.

[7-4-2. LCD and sound control unit]
Drawing control of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and mobile terminal 470 and sound control of music, sound effects, etc. flowing from the speaker housed in the speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3 and the speaker 130 provided in the door frame 5. As shown in FIG. 14, the liquid crystal and sound control unit 4160 to perform the operation incorporates a sound source for performing sound control such as music and sound effects (hereinafter, referred to as "built-in sound source"), and the liquid crystal on the game board side. In addition to the sound effect built-in VDP (abbreviation of Video Display Speaker) 4160a that controls the drawing of the display device 1900 and the mobile terminal 470, and various character data of the screen displayed on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the mobile terminal 470, music and the like It is equipped with a liquid crystal and sound control ROM 4160b that stores various sound data such as sound effects, and an audio data transmission IC 4160c that transmits serialized music and sound effects as audio data toward the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194. There is.

The peripheral control MPU 4150a of the peripheral control unit 4150 extracts screen generation schedule data corresponding to the command from the main control board 4100 from the peripheral control ROM 4150b of the peripheral control unit 4150 or various control data copy areas 4150ce of the peripheral control RAM 4150c. The schedule data storage area of the peripheral control RAM 4150c is set to 4150 cae, and the screen data at the beginning of the screen generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 4150 cae is set to the peripheral control ROM 4150b of the peripheral control unit 4150 or various types of the peripheral control RAM 4150c. After extracting from the control data copy area 4150ce and outputting it to the sound source built-in VDP4160a, when the V blank signal described later is input, the first screen data according to the screen generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 4150cae. The next screen data following is extracted from the peripheral control ROM 4150b of the peripheral control unit 4150 or various control data copy areas 4150ce of the peripheral control RAM 4150c and output to the sound source built-in VDP4160a. In this way, the peripheral control MPU 4150a displays the screen data arranged in time series in the screen generation schedule data according to the screen generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 4150 cage, each time a V blank signal is input. The first screen data is output to the built-in sound source VDP4160a one by one.

Further, the peripheral control MPU 4150a transfers the sound command data at the head of the sound generation schedule data corresponding to the command from the main control board 4100 from the peripheral control ROM 4150b of the peripheral control unit 4150 or various control data copy areas 4150ce of the peripheral control RAM 4150c. Extracted and set in the schedule data storage area of the peripheral control RAM 4150c to 4150cae, and set the sound command data at the beginning of the sound generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 4150cae to the peripheral control ROM 4150b or the periphery of the peripheral control unit 4150. After extracting from various control data copy areas 4150ce of the control RAM 4150c and outputting to the sound source built-in VDP4160a, when a V blank signal is input, the head is headed according to the sound generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 4150cae. The next sound command data following the sound command data is extracted from the peripheral control ROM 4150b of the peripheral control unit 4150 or various control data copy areas 4150ce of the peripheral control RAM 4150c and output to the sound source built-in VDP 4160a. In this way, the peripheral control MPU4150a inputs the sound command data arranged in time series into the sound generation schedule data according to the sound generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 4150cae, and the V blank signal is input. Each time, the first sound command data is output to the built-in sound source VDP4160a one by one.

[7-4-2a. VDP with built-in sound source]
When screen data is input from the peripheral control MPU4150a in addition to the above-mentioned built-in sound source, the sound source built-in VDP4160a is a game board from the liquid crystal and the sound control ROM 4160b as shown in FIG. 16 based on the input screen data. VRAM for extracting side character data and upper plate side character data to create sprite data and generating drawing data for one screen (one frame) to be displayed on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and mobile terminal 470. Is also built-in (hereinafter, referred to as "built-in VRAM"). The VDP4160a with a built-in sound source outputs the image data for the liquid crystal display device 1900 on the game board side from the channel CH1 to the liquid crystal display device 1900 on the game board side among the drawing data generated on the built-in VRAM, and also channels the image data for the mobile terminal 470. By outputting data from CH2 to the mobile terminal 470 via the communication control unit 4162, the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the mobile terminal 470 are synchronized. In this way, when the peripheral control MPU4150a outputs the screen data for one screen (one frame) displayed on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the mobile terminal 470 to the sound source built-in VDP4160a, the sound source built-in VDP4160a is input. Character data is extracted from the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 4160b based on the screen data to create sprite data, and the drawing data for one screen (one frame) to be displayed on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the mobile terminal 470 is built-in. Generated on the VRAM, out of the generated drawing data, the image data for the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 is output from the channel CH1 to the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900, and the image data for the mobile terminal 470 is communicated from the channel CH2. It is output to the mobile terminal 470 via the control unit 4162. That is, "screen data for one screen (one frame)" means that drawing data for one screen (one frame) to be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 on the game board side and the mobile terminal 470 is generated on the built-in VRAM. It is the data for.

Further, the VDP4160a with a built-in sound source outputs drawing data for one screen (one frame) from channel CH1 to the liquid crystal display device 1900 on the game board side, and outputs image data for the mobile terminal 470 from channel CH2 to the communication control unit 4162. When output to the mobile terminal 470 via the peripheral control MPU 4150a, a V blank signal indicating that the screen data from the peripheral control MPU 4150a can be accepted is output to the peripheral control MPU 4150a. In the present embodiment, the frame frequency (the number of screen updates per second) of the liquid crystal display device 1900 on the game board side and the mobile terminal 470 is set to approximately 30 fps per second, so that the interval at which the V blank signal is output is approximately. It is 33.3 ms (= 1000 ms ÷ 30 fps). The peripheral control MPU4150a is adapted to execute the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing described later when the V blank signal is input. Here, the interval at which the V blank signal is output varies slightly depending on the liquid crystal size of the liquid crystal display device 1900 on the game board side and the mobile terminal 470. Further, the interval at which the V blank signal is output may be slightly changed even in the manufacturing lot of the peripheral control board 4140 on which the peripheral control MPU 4150a and the sound source built-in VDP 4160a are mounted.

The sound source built-in VDP4160a employs a frame buffer method. This "frame buffer method" is a frame buffer (built-in VRAM) that holds drawing data for one screen (one frame) to be drawn on the screens of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the mobile terminal 470, and this frame buffer. This is a method in which drawing data for one screen (one frame) held in (built-in VRAM) is output to the liquid crystal display device 1900 on the game board side and output to the mobile terminal 470 via the communication control unit 4162.

Further, when the above-mentioned sound command data is input from the peripheral control MPU 4150a based on the command from the main control board 4100, the sound source built-in VDP4160a has music stored in the liquid crystal and the sound control ROM 4160b as shown in FIG. By extracting sound data such as and sound effects and controlling the built-in sound source, sound data such as music and sound effects are incorporated into the track according to the track number specified in the sound command data, and used according to the output channel number. The output channel is set and the music and sound effects flowing from the speaker housed in the speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3 and the speaker 130 provided in the door frame 5 are serialized and output as audio data to the audio data transmission IC 4160c. ..

Note that the sound command data also includes a sub-volume value for adjusting the volume of the track that incorporates the sound data, and multiple tracks in the built-in sound source of the built-in sound source VDP4160a include directing sounds such as music and sound effects. In addition to the sound data of and the sub-volume value that adjusts the volume, the sound data of the notification sound and its volume for notifying the clerk of the hall of the occurrence of a malfunction of the pachinko game machine 1 or an illegal act against the pachinko game machine 1. A subvolume value that adjusts is incorporated. Specifically, for the production sound, the substrate volume adjusted by rotating the knob portion of the volume adjustment volume 4140a described above is set as the sub-volume value, and for the notification sound, the volume is adjusted. The maximum volume is set as the sub-volume value without being completely dependent on the volume adjustment based on the rotation operation of the knob portion of the volume 4140a. The sub-volume value of the effect sound can be adjusted by operating the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 to shift to the setting mode described later.

In addition, the sound designation data also includes a master volume value for adjusting the volume of the output channel, and the plurality of output channels in the built-in sound source of the built-in sound source VDP4160a include a plurality of multiple output channels in the built-in sound source of the built-in sound source VDP4160a. Of the tracks, the sound data of the production sound incorporated in the track to be used and the sub-volume value for adjusting the volume of the production sound incorporated in the track to be used are combined, and the volume of the combined production sound is calculated. Actually, it is amplified to the master volume value which is the volume flowing from the speaker housed in the speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3 and the speaker 130 provided in the door frame 5, and the amplified production sound is serialized as audio data. It is designed to output to the audio data transmission IC 4160c.

In the present embodiment, the master volume value is set to a constant value, and when the volume of the combined effect sound is the maximum volume, the speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3 is amplified to the master volume value. The volume flowing from the speaker housed in the door frame 5 and the speaker 130 provided on the door frame 5 is set to be the maximum allowable volume. Specifically, for the effect sound, as a sub-volume value for adjusting the volume of the effect sound incorporated in the track to be used and the volume of the effect sound incorporated in the track to be used among a plurality of tracks. The knob portion of the set volume adjustment volume 4140a is rotated to adjust the substrate volume, and the volume of the combined production sound is actually transmitted to the speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3. It is amplified to the master volume value that is the volume that flows from the accommodated speaker and the speaker 130 provided in the door frame 5, and this amplified production sound is serialized and output as audio data to the audio data transmission IC 4160c. Is based on the sound data of the notification sound incorporated in the track to be used and the rotation operation of the knob portion of the volume adjustment volume 4140a set as the sub-volume value for adjusting the volume of the notification sound incorporated in the track to be used. The maximum volume, which is completely independent of the volume adjustment, is combined, and the volume of the combined notification sound is actually combined with the speaker housed in the speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3 and the speaker provided in the door frame 5. It is amplified from 130 to the master volume value that is the volume that flows, and this amplified notification sound is serialized and output as audio data to the audio data transmission IC 4160c.

Here, when the production sound is flowing from the speaker housed in the speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3 and the speaker 130 provided in the door frame 5, a problem occurs in the pachinko game machine 1 or the pachinko game machine 1 is affected. To briefly explain the control of playing a notification sound to notify the clerk of the hall of fraudulent activity, first, the sub-volume value of the track in which the production sound is incorporated is forcibly set to mute, and this production sound is incorporated. The sound data of the track, the sub-volume value set to mute the sound, the sound data of the track in which the notification sound is incorporated, and the sub-volume value set to the maximum volume of the notification sound are combined and this is performed. The volume of the combined production sound and the volume of the notification sound are amplified to the master volume value that is the volume that actually flows from the speaker housed in the speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3 and the speaker 130 provided in the door frame 5. Then, the amplified production sound and notification sound are serialized and output as audio data to the audio data transmission IC 4160c.

That is, as for the sound actually flowing from the speaker housed in the speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3 and the speaker 130 provided in the door frame 5, only the maximum volume notification sound is played. At this time, since the effect sound is muted, the effect sound does not flow from the speaker housed in the speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3 and the speaker 130 provided in the door frame 5, but the effect sound is for sound generation described above. It is proceeding according to the schedule data. In the present embodiment, the notification sound flows from the speaker housed in the speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3 and the speaker 130 provided in the door frame 5 for a predetermined period (for example, 90 seconds). When the period elapses, the volume of the effect sound that has been progressing according to the sound generation schedule data forcibly set to mute is subordinated to the board volume adjusted by rotating the knob of the volume adjustment volume 4140a. It is set again as a volume value (at this time, if it is adjusted by operating the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 to shift to the setting mode, it is a sub of the adjusted effect sound. The volume value is set), and the sound flows from the speaker housed in the speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3 and the speaker 130 provided in the door frame 5.

In this way, when the production sound is flowing from the speaker housed in the speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3 and the speaker 130 provided in the door frame 5, a defect occurs in the pachinko game machine 1 or the pachinko game machine 1 occurs. When the notification sound is played to notify the clerk of the hall of the fraudulent act against the above, the volume of the production sound is muted and the notification sound is provided in the speaker and the door frame 5 housed in the speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3. Although the sound is played from the speaker 130, the muted production sound is progressing according to the sound generation schedule data. When the sound stops flowing from the speaker 130 provided on the door frame 5, the production sound does not start flowing again from the place where the notification sound starts to flow, but follows the sound generation schedule data until the time when the notification sound starts to flow and a predetermined period elapses. It starts to flow again from where it progressed.

[7-4-2b. LCD and sound control ROM]
As shown in FIG. 16, the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 4160b has the game board side character data for drawing in the display area of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the upper plate side for drawing in the display area of the mobile terminal 470. The character data is stored in advance, and various sound data such as music, sound effects, notification sounds, and notification sounds are also stored in advance.

[7-4-2c. Audio data transmission IC]
When the serialized audio data from the VDP4160a with a built-in sound source is input, the audio data transmission IC 4160c transmits the right side audio data as positive signal and negative signal to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 as differential serial data. At the same time, the left side audio data is transmitted to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 as differential serial data with a positive signal and a negative signal. As a result, music, sound effects, and the like that match various effects are reproduced in stereo from the speaker housed in the speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3 and the speaker 130 provided in the door frame 5.

The audio data transmission IC 4160c outputs audio data as serial data of the difference method between the left and right sides from the peripheral control board 4140 to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194, for example, a positive signal of the left side audio data. Even if the negative signal is affected by noise, when combining the noise component on the positive signal and the noise component on the negative signal on the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 to make one left side audio data, Since the noise components are removed by canceling each other, noise countermeasures can be taken.

[7-4-3. Communication control unit]
As shown in FIG. 14, the communication control unit 4162 for wirelessly exchanging various information (various data) with the mobile terminal 470 is configured around the communication control circuit 4162a. As shown in FIG. 16, the communication control circuit 4162a is controlled by the peripheral control MPU4150a. The peripheral control MPU 4150a and the communication control circuit 4162a exchange control signals with each other, so that the peripheral control MPU 4150a manages the operating state of the communication control circuit 4162a. When the mobile terminal 470 received by the player at the reception of the hall is placed in the recess 314d formed on the right side of the upper plate upper panel 314 of the plate unit 300 shown in FIG. 7, the mobile terminal 470 is placed in the recess 314d. The information is input to the peripheral control various parallel I / O ports 4150ag of the peripheral control MPU 4150a as a control signal from the communication control circuit 4162a. The peripheral control MPU 4150a to which this control signal is input controls the communication control circuit 4162a by outputting a control signal from the peripheral control various parallel I / O ports 4150ag to the communication control circuit 4162a to control the communication control circuit 4162a and the mobile terminal 470. Initialize communication settings for wirelessly exchanging information (various data) in both directions. With this communication initial setting, as described above, the sound source built-in VDP4160a carries the image data for the mobile terminal 470 from the channel CH2 via the communication control circuit 4162a of the communication control unit 4162 among the drawing data generated on the built-in VRAM. When output to the terminal 470, the image data from the channel CH2 is drawn in the display area of the mobile terminal 470. That is, various effects can be developed by drawing the image data generated by the sound source built-in VDP4160a provided in the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the display area of the mobile terminal 470.

[7-4-4. RTC control unit]
As shown in FIG. 14, the RTC control unit 4165 that holds the calendar information that specifies the date and the time information that specifies the hour, minute, and second is configured around the RTC4165a. The RTC4165a has a built-in RAM4165aa that holds calendar information and time information (hereinafter, referred to as "RTC built-in RAM4165aa"). The RTC4165a is supplied with power from a battery 4165b (a button battery is adopted in this embodiment) as a drive power source and a backup power source for the RTC built-in RAM4165aa. That is, the RTC4165a is not supplied with power from the peripheral control board 4140 (pachinko gaming machine 1) at all, but is supplied with power from the battery 4165b independently of the peripheral control board 4140 (pachinko gaming machine 1). As a result, even if the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is cut off, the RTC4165a can update and hold the calendar information and the time information by the power supply from the battery 4165b.

The peripheral control MPU 4150a of the peripheral control unit 4150 acquires calendar information and time information from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC 4165a, sets them in the RTC information acquisition storage area 4150cad of the peripheral control RAM 4150c described above, and uses the acquired calendar information and time information as the peripheral control MPU 4150a. Based on the effect, the liquid crystal display device 1900 on the game board side and the mobile terminal 470 can be used to develop the effect. As such an effect, for example, on December 25, the screen of the Christmas tree or reindeer is unfolded on the liquid crystal display device 1900 on the game board side and the mobile terminal 470, or on New Year's Day, the screen for executing the New Year countdown It can be unfolded by the liquid crystal display device 1900 on the game board side and the mobile terminal 470. Calendar information and time information are set at the time of shipment from the factory.

In addition to the calendar information and time information, the RTC built-in RAM4165aa stores and holds the LED brightness setting information when the backlight of the liquid crystal display device 1900 on the game board side is of the LED type. There is. When the backlight of the liquid crystal display device 1900 on the game board side is an LED type, the peripheral control MPU4150a acquires the brightness setting information from the RTC built-in RAM4165aa and adjusts the brightness of the backlight by PWM control. .. The brightness setting information includes brightness adjustment information for adjusting the brightness of the LED, which is the backlight of the liquid crystal display device 1900 on the game board side, in 5% increments in a range of 100% to 70%, and the game currently set. The brightness of the LED, which is the backlight of the liquid crystal display device 1900 on the panel side and the portable terminal 470, is included.

Further, in the RTC built-in RAM4165aa, in addition to the calendar information, the time information and the brightness setting information, the calendar information, the time information and the brightness setting information are stored as the date and hour, minute and second information first stored in the RTC built-in RAM4165aa. The input date and time information is also stored.

When the backlight of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the mobile terminal 470 is a cold cathode tube type, the peripheral control MPU4150a is set to ON / OFF control or only ON of the backlight. ing.

Various information such as calendar information, time information, luminance setting information, and input date / time information stored in the RTC built-in RAM4165aa are set in the manufacturing line of the game machine manufacturer. In the manufacturing line, for example, in order to perform various tests such as a display test of the liquid crystal display device 1900 on the game board side, the year when the input date and time information was input on the manufacturing line as the date and time when the liquid crystal display device 1900 on the game board side was first turned on. Set to the manufacturing date and time, which is the month, day, hour, minute, and second.

As described above, in addition to the calendar information and the time information, the RTC built-in RAM4165aa has the brightness setting information and the input date and time information when the backlight of the liquid crystal display device 1900 on the game board side is of the LED type. , Information that needs to be maintained can be stored and retained independently of the model information of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, the probability that a big hit gaming state occurs at a low probability or a high probability).

Further, the brightness setting information and the like stored and stored in the RTC built-in RAM4165aa are too bright with the brightness of the backlight of the liquid crystal display device 1900 on the game board side set at the manufacturing date and time depending on the environment of the hall where the pachinko game machine 1 is installed. Or it may be too dark. Therefore, by operating the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400, it is possible to shift to the setting mode and adjust the brightness of the backlight to a predetermined brightness. When the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 is operated within a predetermined time after the power of the pachinko game machine 1 is turned on, a screen for performing the setting mode is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 on the game board side. In addition, when the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 are operated during the period during which the customer is waiting and the demonstration by the liquid crystal display device 1900 on the game board side is being performed, the setting mode is performed. The screen is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 on the game board side. By operating the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 according to the screen of this setting mode, the calendar information and the time information can be reset, and the brightness of the backlight of the liquid crystal display device 1900 on the game board side can be desired. It can be adjusted to brightness. The desired brightness of the backlight of the adjusted liquid crystal display device 1900 on the game board side is overwritten (updated and stored) as the brightness of the LED stored in the brightness setting information.

In the setting mode, the peripheral control MPU4150a executes the above-mentioned luminance correction program, and when the backlight of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 is an LED type, the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 is installed. It corrects the decrease in brightness due to the aging of the display device 1900. The peripheral control MPU4150a acquires input date and time information from the RTC built-in RAM4165aa of the RTC control unit 4165, specifies the date and time when the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 is first turned on, and specifies the date and time as calendar information and time. The current date and time is specified by acquiring the time information that specifies the minutes and seconds, and the brightness of the LED that is the backlight of the liquid crystal display device 1900 on the game board side is adjusted in 5% increments from 100% to 70%. The brightness setting information having the brightness adjustment information for the purpose and the brightness of the LED which is the backlight of the liquid crystal display device 1900 on the game board side which is currently set is acquired. The acquired luminance setting information is corrected based on the correction information stored in advance in the peripheral control ROM 4150b.

For example, if six months have already passed from the date and time when the liquid crystal display device 1900 on the game board side was first turned on and the current date and time, and from the date and time when the liquid crystal display device 1900 on the game board side was first turned on. When the corresponding correction information (for example, 5%) is acquired from the peripheral control ROM 4150b and the brightness of the LED included in the brightness setting information is 75% and the backlight of the liquid crystal display device 1900 on the game board side is turned on, this 75%. The brightness of the backlight of the liquid crystal display device 1900 on the game board side is adjusted based on the brightness adjustment information included in the brightness setting information so that the brightness is 80%, which is an additional 5% of the correction information acquired for the above. When 12 months have already passed since the date and time when the power of the liquid crystal display device 1900 on the game board side was first turned on, the corresponding correction information (for example, 10%) is acquired from the peripheral control ROM 4150b. When the brightness of the LED included in the brightness setting information is 75% and the backlight of the liquid crystal display device 1900 on the game board side is turned on, the correction information acquired for this 75% is added by 10% to 85%. The brightness of the backlight of the liquid crystal display device 1900 on the game board side is adjusted and turned on based on the brightness adjustment information included in the brightness setting information so as to be the brightness.

The current date and time may be specified by directly acquiring the calendar information for specifying the date and the time information for specifying the hour, minute, and second from the RTC built-in RAM4165aa of the RTC control unit 4165. Current calendar information set in the calendar information storage unit and updated by the system of the peripheral control board 4140 in the RTC information acquisition storage area 4150cad of the peripheral control RAM 4150c in the current time information acquisition process of step S1002 in the control unit power-on processing. The current time information set in the time information storage unit and updated by the system of the peripheral control board 4140 may be acquired to specify the current date and time.

[7-4-5. Volume adjustment volume]
As described above, the volume adjusting volume 4140a rotates the knob portion to control the volume of music, sound effects, etc. flowing from the speaker housed in the speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3 and the speaker 130 provided in the door frame 5. It can be adjusted by doing. As described above, the resistance value of the volume adjustment volume 4140a is changed by rotating the knob portion, and the electrically connected peripheral control A / D converter 4150ak is attached to the knob portion. The voltage divided by the resistance value at the rotation position is converted from an analog value to a digital value and converted into a value in 1024 steps from a value to a value of 1023. In the present embodiment, as described above, the value of 1024 steps is divided into seven and managed as the substrate volumes 0 to 6. The board volume 0 is set to mute, the board volume 6 is set to the maximum volume, and the volume is set to increase from the board volume 0 to the board volume 6. The liquid crystal and the sound control unit 4160 (VDP4160a with a built-in sound source) are controlled so as to have the volume set to the board volumes 0 to 6, and the speaker and the door frame 5 accommodated in the speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3 are provided. Music and sound effects are played from the speaker 130.

In this way, music and sound effects flow from the speaker housed in the speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3 and the speaker 130 provided in the door frame 5 by adjusting the volume based on the rotation operation of the knob portion. .. Further, in the present embodiment, as described above, in addition to the music and sound effects, a notification sound for notifying the clerk of the hall of the occurrence of a malfunction of the pachinko game machine 1 or an illegal act against the pachinko game machine 1 and the like. Announce the contents related to the game production (for example, it is highly possible that the screen unfolded on the liquid crystal display device 1900 on the game board side is produced as more powerful, or the game state is likely to shift to an advantageous game state for the player. The notification sound for (such as playing) also flows from the speaker housed in the speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3 and the speaker 130 provided in the door frame 5, but the notification sound and the notification sound are operated by rotating the knob portion. It is a mechanism that flows without depending on the volume adjustment based on the above, and the volume from mute to maximum volume can be adjusted by controlling the liquid crystal and sound control unit 4160 (VDP4160a with built-in sound source) by a program. ing.

The volume adjusted by this program is different from the above-mentioned substrate volume divided into seven stages, and can smoothly change from mute to maximum volume. As a result, for example, even when a hall clerk or the like rotates the knob portion of the volume adjustment volume 4140a to set the volume low, the speaker and the door housed in the speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3 Although the production sounds such as music and sound effects flowing from the speaker 130 provided in the frame 5 are reduced, the volume is loud when the pachinko gaming machine 1 has a problem or when the player is cheating. In the form, the notification sound set to the maximum volume) can be played. Therefore, even if the volume of the effect sound is reduced, it is possible to prevent the hall clerk and the like from becoming less likely to notice the occurrence of a problem or the cheating of the player due to the notification sound.

In addition, based on the current board volume set by adjusting the volume based on the rotation operation of the knob, the volume at which the advertisement sound is played is reduced so as not to interfere with music and sound effects, while the advertisement sound is played. In addition to music and sound effects, increase the volume of the advertisement to make the screen unfolded on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and mobile terminal 470 more powerful, or shift to a game state that is advantageous for the player. You can also announce that you are likely to do so.

In the present embodiment, in addition to adjusting the volume of music and sound effects by rotating the knob portion of the volume adjusting volume 4140a, the dial operating portion 401 and pressing of the operation unit 400 are performed. By operating the operation unit 405, it is possible to shift to the setting mode and adjust the volume of music and sound effects. When the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 is operated within a predetermined time after the power of the pachinko game machine 1 is turned on, a screen for performing the setting mode is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 on the game board side. In addition, when the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 are operated during the period during which the customer is waiting and the demonstration by the liquid crystal display device 1900 on the game board side is being performed, the setting mode is performed. The screen is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 on the game board side. By operating the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 according to the screen of this setting mode, the volume of music and sound effects can be adjusted to a desired volume. Specifically, the peripheral control A / D converter 4150ak converts the voltage divided by the resistance value at the rotation position of the knob portion of the volume adjustment volume 4140a from an analog value to a digital value, and the converted value is obtained. Therefore, the value of the board volume can be increased or decreased by adding or subtracting a predetermined value according to the operation of the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400. .. This adjusted volume is set and updated as a sub-volume value for the track in which the sound data of the production sound such as music or sound effect is incorporated among a plurality of tracks in the built-in sound source of the built-in sound source VDP4160a. Although it is reflected in the adjustment of the volume of, it is not reflected in the adjustment of the volume of the notification sound and the notification sound described above.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the volume of music or sound effect is adjusted by directly rotating the knob portion of the volume adjustment volume 4140a, and the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400. There are two methods, one is to adjust the volume of music and sound effects by increasing or decreasing the value of the substrate volume by adding or subtracting a predetermined value according to the operation. Since the volume adjusting volume 4140a is mounted on the peripheral control board 4140, it is necessary to make sure that the main body frame 3 is open from the outer frame 2. Then, it is the clerk in the hall who can rotate the knob portion of the volume adjusting volume 4140a. However, at the volume adjusted by the clerk in the hall, the player may feel small and it may be difficult to hear the music or sound effect, or the player may feel loud and the music or sound effect may be noisy. Therefore, after the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 are operated within a predetermined time, or the pachinko game machine 1 is in a customer waiting state and a demonstration is performed by the liquid crystal display device 1900 on the game board side. When the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 is operated within the period during which the operation unit 400 is being performed, a screen for performing the setting mode is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 on the game board side. By operating the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 according to the screen of the setting mode, the volume of music and sound effects can be adjusted to a desired volume. As a result, the player can adjust the volume of the music or sound effect to a desired volume. Therefore, if the volume adjusted by the hall clerk feels low and it is difficult to hear the music or sound effect, the operation unit 400 The dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 can be operated to increase the volume to a desired level, and when the volume adjusted by the hall clerk is felt loud and the music or sound effect is noisy, the operation unit 400 can be used. The dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 can be operated to reduce the volume to a desired level.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is not playing a game for a predetermined time, is in a waiting state for customers, and the demonstration by the liquid crystal display device 1900 on the gaming board side is repeatedly performed (for example, 10 times). ), The volume adjusted by the player who was sitting in front of the pachinko gaming machine 1 last time and playing the game is canceled, and the volume is initialized. In this volume initialization, the volume is adjusted by the hall clerk, that is, the volume adjusted by the hall clerk by directly rotating the knob portion of the volume adjusting volume 4140a. As a result, if the player who was sitting in front of the pachinko machine 1 last time feels that the volume adjusted is low and it is difficult to hear the music or sound effects, this time, the front of the pachinko machine 1 is displayed. A player who sits and plays a game can operate the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 to increase the volume to a desired level, and last time, the player sits on the front of the pachinko gaming machine 1 and plays the game. If the player who was playing the game feels the volume adjusted loudly and the music or sound effect is noisy, this time, the player who sits in front of the pachinko machine 1 and plays the game is the dial operation unit of the operation unit 400. The volume can be reduced to a desired level by operating 401 or the pressing operation unit 405.

[8. Power system]
Next, the power supply system of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 17 and 18. FIG. 17 is a block diagram showing a power supply system of a pachinko gaming machine, and FIG. 18 is a block diagram showing a continuation of FIG. First, the power supply board will be described, and then the power supply supplied to each control board and the like will be described. The grounds (GNDs) of the various substrates and the grounds (GNDs) of the various terminal boards are electrically connected to the grounds (GNDs) of the power supply substrate 851, and are the same grounds (GNDs).

[8-1. Power supply board]
The power supply board 851 is electrically connected to the power cord, and when the plug of this power cord is plugged into the AC 24 volt (AC24V) power outlet, which is the power supply voltage for the gaming machine of the pachinko island equipment, the pachinko island equipment The AC 24 volt (AC24V), which is the power supply voltage for the gaming machine from the above, is applied to the power supply switch 852 shown in FIG. 3 via the fuse 851a. When this power switch 852 is operated, AC 24 volt (AC24V) supplied from the pachinko island facility is supplied into the power supply board 851 via the power switch 852, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be turned on. it can.

As shown in FIG. 17, the power supply board 851 includes a power supply control unit 855 and a launch control unit 857. The power supply control unit 855 creates various DC voltages from the AC 24 volt (AC24 V) supplied from the Pachinko Island facility, or has a commercial AC 100 volt (AC100V) higher than the AC 24 volt (AC24V) power supply voltage for gaming machines. When the power supply voltage is supplied, it is a circuit that electrically cuts the fuse 851a to make the power supply board 851 unusable, or supplies backup power to the main control board 4100 and the payout control board 4110. Section 857 is a circuit that drives and controls the firing solenoid 654 of the ball launching device 650 shown in FIG. 5 and the ball feeding solenoid 585 of the ball feeding unit 580 shown in FIG.

The power supply control unit 855 includes a synchronous rectifier circuit 855a, a power factor improvement circuit 855b, a smoothing circuit 855c, a power supply creation circuit 855d, a power supply destruction circuit 855e, and capacitors BC0 and BC1. The AC24V, which is the power supply voltage for the gaming machine supplied from the pachinko island facility, is supplied to the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869 and also to the synchronous rectifier circuit 855a via the power supply board 851. This synchronous commutator circuit 855a is supplied from the pachinko island facility, rectifies AC 24V (AC24V), and supplies it to the power factor improving circuit 855b via the power supply destruction circuit 855e.

This power supply destruction circuit 855e has a circuit configuration centered on a field effect transistor (FET), and when a circuit destruction signal from the power supply creation circuit 855d is input, its own circuit is destroyed and supplied from the Pachinko Island facility. By entering the short-circuit mode state in which the existing power supply voltage is short-circuited to the ground, a large current flows through the fuse 851a, the fuse 851a is electrically cut off, and the power supply board 851 becomes unusable.

The power factor improving circuit 855b improves the power factor of the power rectified by the synchronous rectifier circuit 855a to create DC + 37V (DC + 37V, hereinafter referred to as “+ 37V”) and supplies it to the smoothing circuit 855c. ing. The smoothing circuit 855c removes the supplied + 37V ripple, smoothes the + 37V, and supplies the + 37V to the launch control circuit 857a and the power supply creation circuit 855d of the launch control unit 857, respectively. In addition, the plug of the power cord is not plugged into the power outlet of AC 24V (AC24V), which is the power supply voltage for the game machine of Pachinko Island equipment, and the commercial power supply voltage is higher than the AC 24V (AC24V), which is the power supply voltage for the game machine. If it is accidentally plugged into a certain AC 100V (AC100V) power outlet, it will create a power supply voltage higher than + 37V and supply it to the smoothing circuit 855c.

The capacitor BC0 supplies backup power to the RAM (main control built-in RAM) built in the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100, and the capacitor BC1 is built in the payout control MPU 4120a of the payout control unit 4120 in the payout control board 4110. It supplies backup power to the RAM (RAM with built-in payout control).

The launch control circuit 857a of the launch control unit 857 uses + 37V supplied from the smoothing circuit 855c as a drive power source to drive the game ball with a launch strength (launch strength) commensurate with the rotation position of the rotary handle main body front 506 shown in FIG. While controlling the drive current for launching (launching) toward the game area 1100 shown in FIG. 1 and outputting it to the firing solenoid 654, a constant current is output to the ball feeding solenoid 585 of the ball feeding unit 580. As a result, the ball feeding member of the ball feeding unit 580 accepts one game ball stored in the upper plate 301 of the plate unit 300 shown in FIG. 7, and sends the game ball received by the ball feeding member to the ball launching device 650 side. Take control.

Specifically, the launch control circuit 857a is electrically connected to the positive terminal of the electrolytic capacitor 857b whose negative terminal is grounded to the ground (GND), and the DC / DC converter 857aa shown in FIG. 12 of the launch control circuit 857a. In, the + 37V supplied from the power supply creation circuit 855d is stepped down to create a solenoid driving DC power supply (+ 35V), and the solenoid driving DC power supply (+ 35V) is applied to the electrolytic capacitor 857b to charge the electrolytic capacitor 857b. It is supposed to be done. The combined current obtained by merging the current from the DC / DC converter 857a and the current due to the discharge of the electric charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor 857b flows through the firing solenoid drive circuit 857ab shown in FIG. 12 of the firing control circuit 857a. It has become. That is, the electrolytic capacitor 857b has a function as an auxiliary power source. The firing solenoid drive circuit 857ab is an operation signal from the potentiometer 512 that electrically adjusts the strength (launching strength) of launching the game ball toward the game area 1100 according to the rotation position of the rotation handle main body front 506 shown in FIG. Based on the above, the drive current for launching (launching) the game ball toward the game area 1100 is controlled to be output to the launch solenoid 654 by adjusting the merged current. On the other hand, the ball feed solenoid drive circuit 857ac shown in FIG. 12 of the launch control circuit 857a controls to output a constant current to the ball feed solenoid 585 by + 24V supplied from the power supply creation circuit 855d.

When the power failure warning signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 4100e provided in the main control board 4100, which will be described later, is input via the payout control board 4110, the waste hit prevention circuit 857c emits the charged charge to the electrolytic capacitor 857b. By preventing the drive current from flowing to the firing solenoid 654 by flowing through the solenoid drive circuit 857ab, it is possible to prevent the firing of a waste ball of the game ball when the power is cut off.

The power supply making circuit 855d is supplied from the smoothing circuit 855c from + 37V to DC + 5V (DC + 5V, hereinafter referred to as “+ 5V”), DC + 12V (DC + 12V, hereinafter referred to as “+ 12V”), and DC. + 24V (DC + 24V, hereinafter referred to as “+ 24V”) is created and supplied to the payout control board 4110 and the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, respectively. Further, + 5V, + 12V, and + 24V are supplied to the launch control unit 857, respectively, although not shown. The power supply system to which + 5V is applied and supplied is the + 5V power supply line, the power supply system to which + 12V is applied and supplied is the + 12V power supply line, and the power supply system to which + 24V is applied and supplied is the + 24V power supply line.

The power supply creation circuit 855d monitors the magnitude of the power supply voltage supplied from the smoothing circuit 855c. The plug of the power cord is not plugged into the AC 24V (AC24V) power outlet, which is the power supply voltage for the game machine of the Pachinko Island facility, and the AC is a commercial power supply voltage higher than the AC 24V (AC24V), which is the power supply voltage for the game machine. If accidentally plugged into a 100 volt (AC100V) power outlet, the smoothing circuit 855c supplies a power supply voltage higher than + 37V to the power supply creation circuit 855d. When the magnitude of the power supply voltage reaches a predetermined value (threshold value: set to about 50V in this embodiment), the power supply creation circuit 855d has various types of + 5V, + 12V, and + 24V described above. A circuit destruction signal is output to the power supply destruction circuit 855e before the power supply voltage is created and output. When this circuit destruction signal is input, the power supply destruction circuit 855e is in a short mode state in which its own circuit is destroyed and the power supply voltage supplied from the pachinko island facility is short-circuited to the ground as described above. The power supply voltage supplied from the Pachinko Island facility is supplied in the order of fuse 851a, power supply switch 852, synchronous rectifying circuit 855a, power supply destruction circuit 855e, power factor improvement circuit 855b, smoothing circuit 855c, and power supply creation circuit 855d. Therefore, when the power supply destruction circuit 855e is short-circuited, a large current flows toward the fuse 851a, the power supply switch 852, the synchronous rectifier circuit 855a, and the short-circuited power supply destruction circuit 855e, so that a large current flows through the fuse 851a and the fuse. The 851a will be electrically disconnected. That is, in the power supply board 851, the plug of the power cord is not plugged into the power outlet of AC 24 volt (AC24V), which is the power supply voltage for the game machine of the Pachinko Island facility, and is higher than the AC 24 volt (AC24V), which is the power supply voltage for the game machine. Even if it is accidentally plugged into an AC 100V (AC100V) power outlet, which is a commercial power supply voltage, the power supply destruction circuit 855e will be destroyed and unusable, and various power supply voltages of + 5V, + 12V, and + 24V will not be output at all. The circuit is configured in.

The + 5V created by the power supply creation circuit 855d is supplied to the payout control board 4110 as described later. The + 5V supplied to the payout control board 4110 is applied to the power supply terminal of the payout control MPU 4120a via the payout control filter circuit 4110a, and is also applied to the power supply terminal of the payout control built-in RAM via the diode PD0. ing. The + 12V created by the power supply creation circuit 855d is supplied to the + 5V creation circuit 4100g of the main control board 4100 via the payout control board 4110. This + 5V creation circuit 4100g creates + 5V, which is the control reference voltage of the main control MPU 4100a, from + 12V from the payout control board 4110. The + 5V created by the + 5V creation circuit 4100g is supplied to the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 4100a via the main control filter circuit 4100h, and is also supplied to the power supply terminal of the main control built-in RAM via the diode MD0. ing.

The negative terminal of the capacitor BC1 of the power supply board 851 is grounded to the ground (GND), while the positive terminal of the capacitor BC1 is electrically connected to the power supply terminal of the payout control built-in RAM of the payout control board 4110 and is paid out. It is also electrically connected to the cathode terminal of the diode PD0 of the control board 4110. That is, in the + 5V created by the power supply creation circuit 855d of the power supply board 851, a current flows toward the power supply terminal of the payout control MPU4120a, and the power supply terminal of the payout control built-in RAM and the capacitor BC1 in the forward direction by the diode PD0. Current flows toward and toward the positive terminal. In this way, the capacitor BC1 is + 5V by the electrical connection method in which + 5V created by the power supply creation circuit 855d of the power supply board 851 returns from the payout control board 4110 and the power supply board 851 again. Is supplied and can be charged. As a result, when the + 5V created by the power supply creation circuit 855d is no longer supplied to the payout control board 4110, the electric charge charged in the capacitor BC1 is supplied to the payout control board 4110 as the payout VBB. Therefore, although the current is blocked by the diode PD0 and does not flow to the power supply terminal of the payout control MPU4120a and the payout control MPU4120a does not operate, the stored contents are retained by supplying the payout VBB to the power supply terminal of the payout control built-in RAM. It has become so.

The negative terminal of the capacitor BC0 of the power supply board 851 is grounded to the ground (GND), while the positive terminal of the capacitor BC0 is electrically connected to the power supply terminal of the main control built-in RAM of the main control board 4100 via the payout control board 4110. It is also electrically connected to the cathode terminal of the diode MD0 of the main control board 4100. That is, in the + 5V created by the + 5V creation circuit 4100g, a current flows toward the power supply terminal of the main control MPU4100a, and the power supply terminal of the main control built-in RAM in the forward direction by the diode MD0, the positive terminal of the capacitor BC0, and the positive terminal of the capacitor BC0. The current is flowing toward. In this way, the capacitor BC0 is charged with + 5V supplied by the electrical connection method in which + 5V created by the + 5V creation circuit 4100g is supplied from the main control board 4100 and the payout control board 4110 to the power supply board 851. You can do it. As a result, + 12V created by the power supply creation circuit 855d of the power supply board 851 is not supplied to the + 5V creation circuit 4100g of the main control board 4100 via the payout control board 4110, and the + 5V creation circuit 4100g can create + 5V. When it disappears, the electric charge charged in the capacitor BC0 is supplied to the main control board 4100 as the main VBB via the payout control board 4110. Therefore, a diode is connected to the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 4100a. Although the main control MPU4100a does not operate because the current is obstructed by MD0 and does not flow, the stored contents are retained by supplying the main VBB to the power supply terminal of the main control built-in RAM.

In a transformer (not shown) installed in the pachinko island facility, the commercial power supply voltage of 100 volts AC (AC100V) is converted to the power supply voltage for gaming machines of 24 volts AC (AC24V). Some ball rental machines installed adjacent to pachinko game machines are supplied with AC24V, which is the power supply voltage for gaming machines, and some are operated by being supplied with 100V AC, which is the commercial power supply voltage. , Power outlets for supplying the power supply voltage for game machines and the commercial power supply voltage are provided in the pachinko island facility. For this reason, the clerk in the hall or the worker who installs the pachinko game machine (replaces the game board) plugs the power cord (wiring) that supplies the power supply voltage to the pachinko game machine with the AC24V power supply voltage for the game machine. If you accidentally plug it into a commercial power supply voltage of AC100V instead of a power outlet and turn on the power switch of the pachinko game machine to turn on the power, the commercial power supply voltage of AC100V will be the game machine power supply voltage of AC24V. Because it is higher, the fuse of the pachinko game machine is electrically cut and the game cannot be played, but an abnormal voltage is instantaneously output from the power supply board, and the main control board, payout control board, peripheral control board, etc. It is in a state of being supplied to various boards such as a lamp drive board and a motor drive board to cause damage.

If you replace the fuse, insert the plug of the power cord (wiring) into the power outlet of AC24V, which is the power supply voltage for the game machine, turn on the power switch of the pachinko game machine, and turn on the power, the previous wrong power supply voltage That is, the supply of AC100V, which is the commercial power supply voltage, to the pachinko game machine causes damage to the electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids that operate various substrates of the pachinko game machine and various movable bodies provided on the game board. Since it is in the given state, for example, the exciting current continues to flow to the motor and solenoid controlled by the peripheral control board and motor drive board, and heat is generated, causing the parts around the motor and solenoid to deform or melt. Problems will arise.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, the plug of the power cord is not plugged into the power outlet of AC 24 volt (AC24V), which is the power supply voltage for the game machine of the Pachinko Island facility, and is from the AC 24 volt (AC24V), which is the power supply voltage for the game machine. If an AC 100V (AC100V) power outlet, which is a high commercial power supply voltage, is accidentally plugged in, the power supply creation circuit 855d monitors the magnitude of the power supply voltage, and the power supply voltage supplied is a predetermined value. (Threshold: set to about 50V in this embodiment.) Before creating and outputting the various power supply voltages of + 5V, + 12V, and + 24V described above, a circuit is connected to the power supply destruction circuit 855e. It is designed to output a destruction signal. When this circuit destruction signal is input, the power supply destruction circuit 855e is put into a short mode state in which its own circuit is destroyed and the power supply voltage supplied from the Pachinko Island facility is short-circuited to the ground as described above. As a result, a large current flows toward the fuse 851a, the power switch 852, the synchronous rectifier circuit 855a, and the short-circuited power supply destruction circuit 855e, so that a large current flows through the fuse 851a and the fuse 851a is electrically cut off. , + 5V, + 12V and + 24V, which are various power supply voltages, are not output at all. In other words, the plug of the power cord is not plugged into the power outlet of AC 24V (AC24V), which is the power supply voltage for the game machine of Pachinko Island equipment, and the commercial power supply voltage is higher than the AC 24V (AC24V), which is the power supply voltage for the game machine. If it is accidentally plugged into a certain AC 100V (AC100V) power outlet, an abnormal power supply voltage will not be output.

As described above, in the power supply board 851, the plug of the power cord is not inserted into the power outlet of AC 24 volt (AC24 V) which is the power supply voltage for the game machine of the Pachinko Island facility, and the AC 24 volt (AC24V) which is the power supply voltage for the game machine is not inserted. ) Even if it is accidentally plugged into an AC 100V (AC100V) power outlet, which is a higher commercial power supply voltage, an abnormal power supply voltage will not be output and damage its own circuit called the power supply destruction circuit 855e. Since it can be destroyed and made unusable, it does not damage the electrical drive sources such as motors and solenoids that operate various movable bodies provided on the game board 4 and various boards except the power supply board 851. Absent. For this reason, the plug of the power cord is not plugged into the AC 24 volt (AC24V) power outlet, which is the power supply voltage for the game machine of the Pachinko Island facility, and the commercial power supply voltage is higher than the AC 24 volt (AC24V) power supply voltage for the game machine. Even if it is accidentally plugged into an AC 100V (AC100V) power outlet, it can be used as an electrical drive source for motors, solenoids, etc. that operate various movable bodies provided on the various boards of the pachinko game machine 1 and the game board 4. By preventing the damaged state, for example, it is possible to prevent the exciting current from continuously flowing to the motor or solenoid controlled by the peripheral control board 4140 or the motor drive board 4180 to generate heat, and it is possible to prevent the motor or solenoid from generating heat. It is also possible to prevent the peripheral parts from being deformed or melted. Therefore, it is possible to prevent an abnormal power supply voltage from being output from the power supply board 851 when an AC 100V (AC100V), which is a commercial power supply voltage higher than the AC 24V (AC24V), which is the power supply voltage for a game machine, is supplied. At the same time, the power supply board 851 can be disabled.

In addition, the plug of the power cord is not plugged into the AC 24 volt (AC24V) power outlet, which is the power supply voltage for the game machine of the Pachinko Island facility, and the commercial power supply voltage is higher than the AC 24 volt (AC24V) power supply voltage for the game machine. A portion that is damaged even if it is accidentally plugged into a certain AC 100 volt (AC100 V) power outlet is specified in the power supply destruction circuit 855e of the power supply board 851. In other words, the plug of the power cord is not plugged into the AC 24V (AC24V) power outlet, which is the power supply voltage for the game machine of the Pachinko Island facility, and the commercial power supply voltage is higher than the AC 24V (AC24V) power supply voltage for the game machine. If it is accidentally plugged into an AC 100 volt (AC100 V) power outlet, an electrical drive source such as a motor or solenoid that operates various movable bodies provided on the various boards of the pachinko game machine 1 or the game board 4. The power supply destruction circuit 855e of the power supply board 851 receives all the damage that would be received by any of the above.

In addition, the plug of the power cord is not plugged into the AC 24V (AC24V) power outlet, which is the power supply voltage for the game machine of the Pachinko Island facility, and the commercial power supply voltage is higher than the AC 24V (AC24V), which is the power supply voltage for the game machine. In a state where the power supply destruction circuit 855e is destroyed by being accidentally inserted into a certain AC 100V (AC100V) power supply outlet, the fuse 851a is replaced and the power cord plug is the power supply voltage for the game machine of the Pachinko Island facility. Even if it is plugged into an AC 24 volt (AC24V) power outlet, the power supply destruction circuit 855e is already destroyed and short-circuited. Therefore, as described above, the fuse 851a, the power supply switch 852, and the synchronous rectifier circuit 855a, Then, when a large current flows toward the short-circuited power supply destruction circuit 855e, a large current flows through the fuse 851a, and the fuse 851a is electrically cut off. That is, unless the power supply board 851 in which the power supply destruction circuit 855e is already destroyed is replaced with a normal power supply board 851 in which the power supply destruction circuit 855e is not destroyed, the plug of the power cord is used with the power supply voltage for the game machine of the pachinko island facility. Even if it is plugged into a certain AC 24V (AC24V) power outlet, the game cannot be started.

Further, a clerk in the hall, a worker who installs the pachinko game machine 1 (replaces the game board 4), or the like supplies a power supply voltage to the pachinko game machine 1, and the plug of the power cord (wiring) is the power supply voltage for the game machine. If you accidentally plug it into a commercial power outlet of AC100V instead of an AC24V power outlet and turn on the power switch of the pachinko game machine to turn on the power, the power supply destruction circuit 855e will be destroyed as a trace. Therefore, even if the hall clerk or worker insists that "even if the power coat plug is plugged into the power outlet, the power cannot be turned on, it may be an initial failure", his own work mistake (wiring). You can't cheat (make no excuses) for mistakes.

[8-2. Voltage supplied to each control board, etc.]
Next, the outline of the voltage supplied to each control board and the like will be described, and then the voltage mainly supplied to the payout control board and the voltage supplied to the main control board will be described.

As shown in FIG. 17, three types of voltages of + 5V, + 12V, and + 24V created by the power supply creation circuit 855d of the power supply board 851 are supplied to the payout control board 4110, and of these three types of voltages, + 12V and Two types of voltages of + 24V are supplied to the main control board 4100 via the payout control board 4110. In addition, three types of voltages, + 5V, + 12V, and + 24V, created by the power supply creation circuit 855d of the power supply board 851, are supplied to the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868 and peripherally via the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868. It is supplied to the control board 4140 and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, respectively.

As shown in FIG. 18A, the three types of voltages of + 5V, + 12V, and + 24V supplied to the peripheral control board 4140 are the lamp drive circuit 4170a of the lamp drive board 4170 and the drive source drive circuit of the motor drive board 4180. It is supplied to each of the 4180a. The lamp drive circuit 4170a of the lamp drive board 4170 outputs various signals such as a lighting signal, a blinking signal, and a gradation lighting signal to various decorative boards of the game board 4, and the drive source drive circuit 4180a of the motor drive board 4180 is a game. A drive signal is output to an electric drive source such as a motor or a solenoid of the panel 4.

The peripheral control board 4140 includes a + 3.3V creation circuit 4140b that creates a direct current 3.3V (DC + 3.3V, hereinafter referred to as “+ 3.3V”) from + 5V supplied from the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868. ing. The + 3.3V created by the + 3.3V creation circuit 4140b is supplied to the liquid crystal module 1900a of the liquid crystal display device 1900 on the game board side.

Further, + 12V supplied to the peripheral control board 4140 is supplied to the backlight power supply 1900b of the liquid crystal display device 1900 on the game board side and to the charging circuit 460a of the mobile terminal charging device 460. The charging circuit 460a changes the magnetic flux of the transmitting coil by controlling the current flowing through the transmitting coil (not shown), and causes the current to flow to the receiving coil (not shown) of the mobile terminal 470 by the change of the magnetic flux from the transmitting coil. The mobile terminal 470 can be charged by flowing it.

On the other hand, three types of voltages, + 5V, + 12V, and + 24V, which are supplied to the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, are supplied to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 as shown in FIG. 18B. The frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 includes a + 9V creation circuit 194a that creates a direct current + 9V (DC + 9V, hereinafter referred to as “+ 9V”) from + 12V supplied from the peripheral door relay terminal board 882. Along with + 9V created by the + 9V creation circuit 194a, a total of four types of voltages of + 5V, + 12V, and + 24V supplied from the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 are supplied to various decorative substrates of the door frame 5.

[8-2-1. Voltage supplied to the payout control board]
As shown in FIG. 17, the payout control board 4110 includes a payout control filter circuit 4110a and the like in addition to the payout control MPU 4120a and the like. The payout control filter circuit 4110a is supplied with + 5V from the power supply board 851, and noise is removed from the + 5V. This + 5V is supplied to the capacitor BC1 of the power supply board 851 via the diode PD0, and is also supplied to, for example, the payout control MPU4120a of the payout control unit 4120. The + 12V from the power supply board 851 is supplied to, for example, the payout control input circuit 4120b of the payout control unit 4120, and is also supplied to the external communication circuit 784a of the external terminal board 784 via the payout control board 4110. The external communication circuit 784a of the external terminal board 784 outputs a signal for transmitting the number of game balls paid out by the pachinko game machine 1 and the game information of the pachinko game machine 1 to the hall computer installed in the game hall. It is a circuit to do. The hall computer monitors the game of the player by grasping the number of game balls paid out by the pachinko game machine 1 and the game information of the pachinko game machine 1 from the signal output from the external communication circuit 784a. .. The +24 from the power supply board 851 is supplied to the main control board 4100 via the payout control board 4110 without being used in the payout control board 4110.

[8-2-2. Voltage supplied to the main control board]
As shown in FIG. 17, the main control board 4100 includes a + 5V creation circuit 4100g, a main control filter circuit 4100h, a power failure monitoring circuit 4100e, and the like, in addition to the main control MPU 4100a and the like. In the + 5V creation circuit 4100g, + 12V from the power supply board 851 is supplied via the payout control board 4110, and + 5V, which is the control reference voltage of the main control MPU 4100a, is created from this + 12V. In the main control board 4100, the power supply system to which + 5V created by the + 5V creation circuit 4100g is applied and supplied becomes the + 5V power supply line. In the present embodiment, the + 5V power supply line created by the power supply creation circuit 855d of the power supply board 851 and the + 5V power supply line created by the + 5V creation circuit 4100g of the main control board 4100 are not electrically connected. Since the circuit is configured as described above, the + 5V power supply line created by the power supply creation circuit 855d of the power supply board 851 is not electrically connected to various electronic components of the main control board 4100, and + 5V of the main control board 4100. The + 5V power supply line created by the creation circuit 4100g is not electrically connected to various electronic components such as other substrates other than the main control substrate 4100.

The main control filter circuit 4100h is supplied with + 5V created by the + 5V creation circuit 4100g, and noise is removed from this + 5V. This + 5V is supplied to the capacitor BC0 of the power supply board 851 via the diode MD0, and is also supplied to, for example, the main control MPU4100a. + 12V from the payout control board 4110 is supplied to, for example, the main control input circuit 4100b, and + 24V from the payout control board 4110 is supplied to, for example, the main control solenoid drive circuit 4100d.

In the power failure monitoring circuit 4100e, + 12V and + 24V from the power supply board 851 are supplied via the payout control board 4110, and the signs of a power failure or momentary power failure of these + 12V and + 24V are monitored. When the power failure monitoring circuit 4100e detects a sign of a power failure or momentary power failure of + 12V and + 24V, it outputs a power failure warning signal to the main control MPU 4100a as a power failure warning. The power failure warning signal is input to the payout control MPU 4120a via the payout control input circuit 4120b of the main control board 4100 and the payout control board 4110. Further, the power failure warning signal is input to the waste hit prevention circuit 857c of the launch control unit 857 of the power supply board 851 via the main control board 4100 and the payout control board 4110. Further, the power failure warning signal is input to the peripheral control board 4140 via the main control board 4100. Further, the power failure warning signal is input to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 as shown in FIG. 18B via the peripheral control board 4140, the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882. At the same time, the input is input to the decorative substrate of the door frame or the like via the frame decorative drive amplifier substrate 194.

In the present embodiment, the power failure monitoring circuit 4100e applies voltage to one of the + 12V power supply line and the + 24V power supply line by monitoring the voltage applied to each of the two power supply lines, the + 12V power supply line and the + 24V power supply line. Compared with the case of monitoring the voltage, it is possible to more accurately grasp the signs of power failure such as power failure or momentary power failure.

[9. Power supply board launch control circuit]
Next, the launch control circuit 857a of the launch control unit 857 in the power supply board 851 shown in FIG. 12 will be described with reference to FIGS. 19 to 22. First, the rotation range of the rotary handle main body front 506 of the handle device 500 shown in FIG. 7 will be described, and then shown in FIG. 12 for detecting the rotation angle of the rotary handle main body front 506 and the rotation angle of the rotary handle main body front 506. The relationship with the rotation angle of the detection shaft of the solenoid meter 512 was explained, the relationship between the rotation angle of the detection shaft of the solenoid meter 512 and the output of the potentiometer 512 was explained, and it corresponded to the rotation angle of the rotation handle main body front 506 (matching). ) The set current to the launch solenoid 654 shown in FIG. 12 for rotationally driving the ball launching mallet 656 shown in FIG. The drive timing with the ball feed solenoid 585 shown in FIG. 12 for feeding the ball will be described, and the waste hit prevention circuit 857c will be described. FIG. 19A is a diagram showing a rotation range of the rotation angle in front of the rotary handle main body, and FIG. 19B is a diagram showing the relationship between the rotation angle of the detection shaft portion of the potentiometer and the rotation angle in front of the rotary handle main body. 20 (a) is a diagram showing an example of the output characteristics of the potentiometer, FIG. 20 (b) is a table showing the set current to the firing solenoid, and FIG. 21 shows the firing solenoid and the ball feeding solenoid, respectively. It is a figure which shows an example of the timing chart to drive, and FIG.

[9-1. Rotation range in front of the rotation handle body]
First, the rotation range of the rotation handle main body front 506 of the handle device 500 will be described with reference to FIG. 19A. The rotation position of the rotation handle body front 506 is the original position (zero degree (0 degree (0 degree)) which is the minimum rotation position as shown in FIG. 19A when the player is not operating the rotation handle body front 506. °)). When the rotation position of the rotary handle main body front 506 is rotated clockwise from the original position (zero degree (0 °)) and the rotation position of the rotary handle main body front 506 reaches 10 degrees (10 °), the firing shown in FIG. When the firing stop switch release position at which the single-shot button for operating the stop switch 518 can be operated is reached, and the rotation position of the rotary handle main body front 506 reaches 100 degrees (100 °) by further rotating clockwise, the figure is shown. A right-handed state in which a game ball is launched toward the game area 1100 so as to flow down to the right of the center accessory 2300 arranged substantially in the center of the game area 1100 formed in the game board 4 shown in 8. When the right-handed set position is reached and the rotation operation is further clockwise, the rotation position of the rotation handle main body front 506 reaches the maximum rotation position of 120 degrees (120 °). At this maximum rotation position, the rotation handle main body front 506 cannot be rotated any more clockwise.

In this way, the range of the rotation angle θ of the rotation handle main body front 506 extends from the original position (zero degree (0 °)) which is the minimum rotation position to 120 degrees (120 °) which is the maximum rotation position clockwise. It is in the range.

[9-2. Relationship between the rotation angle in front of the rotation handle body and the rotation angle of the detection shaft of the potentiometer]
Next, with reference to FIG. 19B, regarding the relationship between the rotation angle θ of the rotation handle main body front 506 and the rotation angle φ of the detection shaft portion of the potentiometer 512 that detects the rotation angle θ of the rotation handle main body front 506. I will explain. As described above, the rotary handle main body front 506 can be rotated clockwise from the original position (zero degree (0 °)), which is the minimum rotation position, to 120 degrees (120 °), which is the maximum rotation position. it can. The detection shaft portion of the potentiometer 512 is adapted to rotate by transmitting the rotation of the rotation handle main body front 506 via the gear mechanism 519. By this gear mechanism 519, the rotation of the rotation handle main body front 506 is expanded by 1.5 times, and the detection shaft portion of the potentiometer 512 is rotated. The potentiometer 512 can be rotated from 300 degrees (300 °) to zero degrees (0 °), and when the rotation handle main body front 506 is rotated clockwise, the potentiometer 512 is rotated clockwise. It is designed to rotate from 300 degrees (300 °) to zero degrees (0 °).

As described above, the range of the rotation angle φ of the detection shaft portion of the potentiometer 512 is a range from 300 degrees (300 °) to zero degrees (0 °).

When the rotation handle main body front 506 rotates once (1 °), it is transmitted to the detection shaft portion of the potentiometer 512 via the gear mechanism 519 that expands this rotation by 1.5 times, and the detection shaft portion of the potentiometer 512 is 1. It is designed to rotate 5 degrees (1.5 °). When the rotation handle main body front 506 is rotated from the original position (zero degree (0 °)) which is the minimum rotation position to 120 degrees (120 °) which is the maximum rotation position clockwise, the potentiometer 512 The resistance value, which is the output, becomes smaller linearly. That is, when the rotation handle main body front 506 is rotated from the original position (zero degree (0 °)) which is the minimum rotation position to 120 degrees (120 °) which is the maximum rotation position clockwise, the potentiometer The rotation angle of the detection shaft of the potentiometer 512 is rotated from 300 degrees (300 °) to zero degrees (0 °) via the gear mechanism 519, and the resistance value which is the output of the potentiometer 512 is changed. It is designed to be linearly smaller. As described above, in the present embodiment, as the potentiometer 512, a so-called "B-curve" variable resistor in which the resistance value which is the output of the potentiometer 512 changes linearly by the rotation of the detection shaft portion is adopted.

Since the detection shaft of the potentiometer 512 has a maximum play of about 10 degrees (10 °), in order to absorb this play, the rotation position of the rotation handle main body front 506 is the original position of zero degrees (0 °). ), The rotation position of the detection shaft of the potentiometer 512 is adjusted in advance to be 290 degrees (290 °), which is obtained by subtracting 10 degrees (10 °) of play from 300 degrees (300 °). There is. When the rotary handle body front 506 is rotated and the rotation position of the rotary handle body front 506 reaches the maximum rotation position 120 degrees (120 °) clockwise from the original position of zero degrees (0 °), the potentiometer As described above, the rotation position of the detection shaft portion of the 512 is 290 degrees (290 °) by transmitting the rotation of the rotation handle main body front 506 by 1.5 times and transmitting the rotation via the gear mechanism 519. ) To 110 degrees (110 °) (= 290 degrees (290 °) -120 degrees (120 °) x 1.5 times), and the effective rotation angle at which the detection shaft of the potentiometer 512 can actually rotate. The range is from 290 degrees (290 °) to 110 degrees (110 °).

[9-3. Relationship between the rotation angle of the detection shaft of the potentiometer and the output of the potentiometer]
Next, the relationship between the rotation angle φ of the detection shaft portion of the potentiometer 512 and the output of the potentiometer 512 will be described with reference to FIG. 20A. The potentiometer 512 is a variable resistor whose resistance value can be changed from 0 (zero) to 10 kiloohms (kΩ), and the resistance value which is an output changes linearly by the rotation of the detection shaft portion of the potentiometer 512. It is a thing. As shown in FIG. 20A, the output of the potentiometer 512 is set to be 10 kΩ, which is 100% when the rotation angle φ of the detection shaft portion of the potentiometer 512 is 290 degrees (290 °), and the potentiometer 512 is set to 10 kΩ. When the rotation angle φ of the detection shaft portion is 10 degrees (10 °), it is set to be zero Ω (0 Ω), which is zero% (0%).

In the present embodiment, the output of the potentiometer 512 is set to 100% in the region where the rotation angle φ of the detection shaft portion of the potentiometer 512 extends from 300 degrees (300 °) to 290 degrees (290 °), and the potentiometer 512 is used. The output of the potentiometer 512 is set to 0% (0%) in the region where the rotation angle φ of the detection shaft portion ranges from 10 degrees (10 °) to zero degrees (0 °).

[9-4. Set current to the firing solenoid according to the rotation angle of 506 in front of the rotating handle body]
Next, the set current to the firing solenoid 654 shown in FIG. 12 for rotationally driving the hitting mallet 656 shown in FIG. 5 for obtaining the firing strength corresponding to the rotation angle of the rotary handle main body front 506 is shown in FIG. It will be described with reference to 20 (b). As shown in FIG. 20B, the set current to the firing solenoid 654 is the detection shaft portion of the potentiometer 512 when the rotation angle θ of the rotation handle main body front 506 is zero degree (0 °) which is the original position. When the rotation angle φ becomes 290 degrees (290 °) and the output of the potentiometer 512 becomes 100% (10 kΩ), the current is adjusted to 0.93 A, and the rotation angle θ of 506 in front of the rotation handle body is released from the firing stop switch. When the position is 10 degrees (10 °), the rotation angle φ of the detection shaft of the potentiometer 512 is 275 degrees (275 °), and the output of the potentiometer 512 is 94.6% (9.46 kΩ). When the rotation angle θ of the rotation handle main body front 506 is 100 degrees (100 °), which is the right-handed setting position, the rotation angle φ of the detection shaft portion of the potentiometer 512 is 125 degrees ( 125 °) and the output of the potentiometer 512 becomes 41.1% (4.11 kΩ), so that the current is adjusted to 2.10 A, and the rotation angle θ of the rotation handle body front 506 is 120 degrees, which is the maximum rotation position. When it is (120 °), the rotation angle φ of the detection shaft of the potentiometer 512 becomes 110 degrees (110 °), and the output of the potentiometer 512 becomes 35.7% (3.57 kΩ), so that 2.21 A. It is designed to be adjusted to the current.

When the rotary handle main body front 506 is rotated, a game ball is launched from the ball launching device 650 with a firing intensity corresponding to (matching) the rotation angle of the rotary handle main body front 506, and the outer rail 1111 shown in FIG. The inner rail 1112 guides the player toward the game area 1100.

When the rotation angle θ of the rotation handle main body front 506 is zero degree (0 °) which is the original position, as described above, the rotation angle φ of the detection shaft portion of the potentiometer 512 becomes 290 degrees (290 °) and the potentiometer When the output of 512 becomes 100% (10 kΩ), the current is adjusted to 0.93 A. At this time, at the moment when the player grabs the rotary handle main body 506, a current of 0.93 A flows to the launch solenoid 654, and at this launch intensity, the launch rail 660 of the ball launcher 650 (see FIG. 1). It is not possible to actually launch a game ball along it.

The player grabs the rotary handle body front 506 and rotates it clockwise from the original position of zero degree (0 °), and the rotation angle θ of the rotary handle body front 506 is 10 degrees (the firing stop switch release position). When it reaches 10 °), as described above, the rotation angle φ of the detection shaft of the potentiometer 512 becomes 275 degrees (275 °), and the output of the potentiometer 512 becomes 94.6% (9.46 kΩ). Is adjusted to a current of 1.04 A. At this time, a current of 1.04 A flows to the firing solenoid 654, but at this firing intensity, the game ball launched along the launch rail 660 of the ball launching device 650 is at the lower end of the outer rail 1111 and the upper end of the launch rail 660. Even if it is driven from the lower end opening between the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112 into the space between the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112, the backflow at the tip of the inner rail 1112 will only jump over the space formed between the two. It was unable to enter the gaming area 1100 beyond the prevention member 1116 (see FIG. 8) and rolled downward in the opposite direction between the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112 to the outer rail 1111. The foul space 626 (see FIG. 1) formed between the upper end of the launch rail 660 and the lower end of the outer rail 1111 will fall from the lower end opening between the inner rail 1112 and the lower end of the foul space 626. It is accepted by the foul ball inlet 542e (see FIG. 1) of the foul cover unit 540 attached to the positioned door frame 5 and discharged to the lower plate 302 (see FIG. 7) of the dish unit 300. There is.

The player grabs the rotary handle body front 506 and further rotates the rotary handle body front 506 clockwise from the firing stop switch release position of 10 degrees (10 °) to set the rotation angle θ of the rotary handle body front 506. As described above, the rotation angle φ of the detection shaft of the potentiometer 512 becomes 275 ° (275 °) to 125 ° (125 °) until it reaches the right-handed setting position of 100 ° (100 °). The output of the potentiometer 512 is 94.6% to 41.1% (9.46 kΩ to 4.11 kΩ), so that the current is adjusted to change linearly from 1.04 A to 2.10 A. ing. At this time, if the game ball launched from the ball striking device 650 cannot enter the game area 1100 beyond the backflow prevention member 1116 at the tip of the inner rail 1112, the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112 A foul space 626 formed between the upper end of the launch rail 660 and the lower end of the outer rail 1111 from the lower end opening between the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112, rolling downward in the opposite direction. Is received by the foul ball inlet 542e (see FIG. 1) of the foul cover unit 540 attached to the door frame 5 located at the bottom of the foul space 626, and the lower plate 302 (FIG. 1) in the plate unit 300 7) is to be discharged. That is, the player grabs the rotary handle main body front 506 and further rotates the rotary handle main body front 506 clockwise from the firing stop switch release position of 10 degrees (10 °) so that the game ball is at the tip of the inner rail 1112. It is possible to realize "weak hitting" that the firing intensity can be adjusted to such that it cannot enter the game area 1100 beyond the backflow prevention member 1116 by the resolution of the rotation operation of the rotation handle main body front 506. ..

On the other hand, when the game ball launched from the hit ball launching device 650 can enter the game area 1100 beyond the backflow prevention member 1116 at the tip of the inner rail 1112, the game ball launched toward the game area 1100. The above-mentioned "left-handed hit" can be realized by the rotation operation of the rotary handle main body front 506, which enables the player to hit the game ball so as to flow down to the left side of the center accessory 2300.

When the player grabs the rotary handle main body front 506 and rotates it clockwise to reach the rotation angle θ of the rotary handle main body front 506 up to the right-handed set position of 100 degrees (100 °), as described above. , The rotation angle φ of the detection shaft of the potentiometer 512 becomes 125 degrees (125 °), and the output of the potentiometer 512 becomes 41.1% (4.11 kΩ) so that the current is adjusted to 2.10 A. It has become. At this time, the current of 2.10 A flows to the firing solenoid 654, so that the game ball launched toward the game area 1100 can be hit so as to flow down to the right of the center accessory 2300. , The above-mentioned "right-handed" can be realized by the rotation operation of the rotary handle main body front 506.

When, for example, the vertical dimension of the game board is increased to increase the size of the game board, the firing strength of the game ball for "right-handed" must also be increased according to the size of the game board. However, in the conventional technique, the size of the launch solenoid of the hitting ball launcher has to be increased as the size of the game board is increased, and the size of the game board is limited when a small launch solenoid is adopted. In addition, in the conventional technology, if a small launch solenoid is adopted to increase the size of the game board, it is necessary to pass a large current to the launch solenoid in order to increase the launch intensity of the game ball and "clockwise". In addition, when a variable resistor whose resistance value changes linearly called "B curve" is adopted, a game with respect to the rotation angle θ of the rotation handle body front 506 in order to obtain a firing intensity for "right-handed". There is no choice but to set the firing strength of the ball to be stronger as a whole, and the game ball is vigorously fired toward the game area 1100 simply by rotating the rotary handle body front 506 clockwise several times from the original position. This has the drawback that the ratio of the change in firing intensity to the rotation angle θ due to the rotation operation of the rotation handle main body front 506 becomes large. That is, in the conventional technology, when the game board is enlarged by adopting a small firing solenoid, the firing strength of the game ball is increased and the firing strength with respect to the rotation operation amount of the rotation handle body front 506 when "right-handed" is performed. Since the resolution of the game ball is low, even if an attempt is made to adjust the game ball so as to pop out at a predetermined position in the game area 1100, it is difficult to adjust the game ball, and there is a drawback that the player is frustrated.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, the entire range from zero ohm (0Ω), which is the minimum output resistance value of the potentiometer 512, to 10 kiloohms (10 kΩ), which is the maximum output resistance value, is covered from the maximum firing intensity to the minimum firing intensity of the game ball. Instead of being adjusted to change linearly, when the rotation angle φ of the detection shaft of the potentiometer 512 is 290 degrees (290 °), it is set to 10 kΩ, which is 100%, and the detection shaft of the potentiometer 512 is set. When the rotation angle φ of the unit is 10 degrees (10 °), it is set to zero Ω (0 Ω), which is 0%, and the range of the effective rotation angle at which the detection shaft of the potentiometer 512 can actually rotate. Is set in the range from 290 degrees (290 °) to 110 degrees (110 °). As a result, the player grabs the rotary handle main body front 506 and further rotates the rotary handle main body front 506 clockwise from the firing stop switch release position of 10 degrees (10 °) to rotate the rotary handle main body front 506. In the rotation range of 90 degrees (90 °) over which the angle θ is the right-handed set position of 100 degrees (100 °), "weak hit" and "left-handed" can be performed, and the player Grasps the rotary handle body front 506 and rotates it clockwise to perform "right strike" when the rotation angle θ of the rotary handle body front 506 reaches the right-handed set position of 100 degrees (100 °). You can do it.

As described above, in the present embodiment, by adopting the small firing solenoid 654, the game board 4 can be enlarged, and the rotation operation of the rotation handle main body front 506 in "weak hit" and "left hit". Since the resolution of the firing intensity with respect to the amount can be increased, it is easy to adjust so that the game ball pops out at a predetermined position of the game area 1100 formed in the large game board 4, and the firing intensity is small. Adjustments can be made, and the player grabs the rotary handle body front 506 and rotates it clockwise until the rotation angle θ of the rotary handle body front 506 is 100 degrees (100 °), which is the right-handed set position. When you reach, you can definitely "right-hand". That is, in the present embodiment, since the gaming board 4 is configured to be large in size, the distance dimension in the vertical direction is reduced and miniaturized due to the restriction of the vertical dimension of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is moved toward the gaming area 1100. Even if the launch solenoid for driving the hitting mallet 656 that launches the game ball is a small launch solenoid 654, the ratio of the change in the launch intensity of the game ball to the rotation angle θ of the rotation handle main body front 506 is increased. Instead, it is possible to make fine adjustments so that the game ball pops out at a predetermined position in the game area 1100. Therefore, it is possible to increase the size of the game board by adopting a small launch solenoid, and it is possible to suppress the player's feeling of frustration by adjusting the launch intensity of the game ball.

In the present embodiment, as described above, the entire range from zero ohm (0Ω), which is the minimum output resistance value of the potentiometer 512, to 10 kiloohms (10 kΩ), which is the maximum output resistance value, is measured from the maximum firing intensity of the game ball. Rather than adjusting to change linearly up to the minimum firing intensity, set it to 10 kΩ, which is 100% when the rotation angle φ of the detection shaft of the potentiometer 512 is 290 degrees (290 °). When the rotation angle φ of the detection shaft of the potentiometer 512 is 10 degrees (10 °), it is set to be zero Ω (0Ω), which is zero%, and the detection shaft of the potentiometer 512 can actually rotate. The range of the effective rotation angle is set to a range from 290 degrees (290 °) to 110 degrees (110 °). Then, the detection shaft portion of the potentiometer 512 is fired from the maximum firing intensity of the game ball to the minimum firing strength in a range of 290 degrees (290 °) to 110 degrees (110 °), which is a range of effective rotation angles that can actually rotate. It is adjusted so that the strength is changed linearly. When adjusting from the maximum firing intensity to the minimum firing intensity of a game ball along a plurality of straight lines (that is, along a straight line like a line graph), it is necessary to provide a dedicated circuit around the potentiometer 512. Not only is the cost high, but it is also necessary to secure a space on the board for providing this dedicated circuit, and it is also necessary to enlarge the board box by this space and consider heat dissipation and the like. Then, since the dedicated circuit is loaded by changing it on the polygonal line, the lifespan of the potentiometer 512 and the dedicated circuit is different, and in the circuit design and trial production, the deterioration characteristic of the polygonal line characteristic by the potentiometer 512 and the dedicated circuit is investigated in detail. It is necessary and it will take time to develop.

[9-5. Drive timing of launch solenoid and ball feed solenoid]
Next, the drive timings of the launch solenoid 654 and the ball feed solenoid 585 shown in FIG. 12 for sending the game ball to the hit ball launcher 650 shown in FIG. 5 will be described with reference to FIG. 21. As described above, the launch control unit 857 shown in FIG. 12 mainly includes a launch control circuit 857a that performs launch control by the launch solenoid 654 and ball feed control by the ball feed solenoid 585. The launch control circuit 857a adjusts the drive current for launching (launching) the game ball toward the game area 1100 based on the resistance value which is the operation signal from the potentiometer 512, and controls the output to the launch solenoid 654. At the same time, by outputting a constant current to the ball feed solenoid 585, the ball feed member of the ball feed unit 580 receives one game ball stored in the upper plate 301 of the plate unit 300 shown in FIG. 7, and the ball feed member receives one ball. Control is performed to send the received game ball to the hit ball launching device 650 side. The launch control circuit 857a may be configured as an ASIC (Application Specific Integrated Circuit), or may be configured around a microprocessor having a ROM and a RAM.

The emission control circuit 857a includes a clock signal oscillator (not shown) that generates a source oscillation of 4.096 megahertz (MHz), generates a clock signal from this source oscillation, and has a reference time t0 (= 30.0195 milliseconds (ms)). )) Is generated, and based on this reference time t0, the launch control by the launch solenoid 654 and the ball feed control by the ball feed solenoid 585 are performed.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 21, the launch control circuit 857a generates a clock signal CLK to generate a reference time t0, and the operations of the ball feed solenoid 585 and the launch solenoid 654 are managed based on the reference time t0. Has been done. The operations of the ball feed solenoid 585 and the launch solenoid 654 are each started and completed by the time the reference time t0 is ticked 20 times. That is, 20 times of the reference time t0 is one operation cycle of the ball feed solenoid 585 and the launch solenoid 654. By setting this one operation cycle to a time equivalent to 20 times of the reference time t0, it is possible to control for firing about 100 game balls per minute.

When one operation cycle is started, the ON signal to the ball feed solenoid 585 is started to be output, and when the time corresponding to three times of the reference time t0 elapses, the ON signal to the firing solenoid 654 is started to be output and the reference time t0. When the ON signal to the firing solenoid 654 is stopped and the OFF signal is started to be output, and the ON signal to the ball feed solenoid 585 is started to be output and only 5 times of the reference time t0 elapses, that is, When the output of the ON signal to the firing solenoid 654 is started and only two times of the reference time t0 elapses, the ON signal to the ball feed solenoid 585 is stopped and the OFF signal is output. Then, when the ON signal to the ball feed solenoid 585 is stopped, the OFF signal is output, and the time for 15 times of the reference time t0 is started, one operation cycle is started again.

When the output of the ON signal to the firing solenoid 654 is started, as described above, the ON signal to the firing solenoid 654 is stopped and the OFF signal is started to be output by the time when the reference time t0 elapses. .. Specifically, when the ON signal to the firing solenoid 654 is started to be output and 23 ms elapses as the current supply time t1, the ON signal to the firing solenoid 654 is stopped and the OFF signal is started to be output. ..

As described above, the time during which the ON signal is output to the firing solenoid 654 is shorter than the reference time t0 of 30.0195 ms, which is 23 ms, which is the current supply time t1. When the ON signal to the launch solenoid 654 is started to be output, the hitting mallet 656 shown in FIG. 5 is also rotationally driven to hit and fire the game ball. At this time, the rotation-driven hammer 656 is returned to the original position in order to launch the next game ball, thereby prolonging the waiting time of the ball hammer 656 in the original position and hitting the game ball. It is possible to lengthen the time from the vibrating state of the hammer 656 to the stationary state with the momentum when the hammer is fired and returned to the original position. As a result, the player grabs the rotary handle main body front 506 and rotates the rotary handle main body front 506 so as to obtain the desired firing intensity, and the upper start port 2101 and the like provided in the game area 1100 shown in FIG. In order to increase the probability of occurrence of a big hit game state that gives a profit to the player by stably entering the game ball into the ball, the vibration of the hitting mallet 656 is performed when the rotation position of the rotation handle body front 506 is maintained. By this method, it is possible to prevent the player from hitting the ball in a state of being deviated from the core of the game ball, and when the next game ball is hit and fired, the variation in the firing strength of the game ball can be suppressed, which is set by the player. By stabilizing the firing intensity, it is possible to suppress fluctuations in the rate at which the game ball enters the upper starting port 2101 or the like (ball entry rate). Therefore, it is possible to suppress the player's feeling of frustration due to the variation in the firing intensity of the game ball.

In addition, unlike the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the present embodiment, the large winning opening is opened for a predetermined period when the game ball enters the starting opening provided in the gaming area, and a specific area in the large winning opening (so-called). , V zone), the game board 4'with the specification that a big hit game advantageous to the player is performed when the game ball passes through is replaced with the game board 4 shown in FIG. 8, so-called blade mono-game machine 1 In the case of being installed in the hall as', in the present embodiment, as described above, it is possible to increase the resolution of the firing intensity with respect to the rotation operation amount of the rotation handle main body front 506 in "weak hit" and "left hit". Because it is possible, it is possible to fine-tune the firing intensity of the game ball, and it is also possible to suppress the variation in the firing intensity of the game ball, so the game ball can be placed in the big prize opening. It is possible to enter the ball stably.

[9-6. Waste hit prevention circuit]
Next, the waste hit prevention circuit 857c will be described. As shown in FIG. 22, the waste hit prevention circuit 857c has a detection signal from the touch switch 516 that detects whether or not the palm or finger is touching the rotary handle main body front 506 of the handle device 500 shown in FIG. Is input via the handle relay terminal board 192, and the payout power failure warning signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 4100e provided in the main control board 4100 shown in FIG. 17 is input via the payout control board 4110.

The touch switch 516 that detects whether or not the palm or finger is touching the front 506 of the rotating handle body is a capacitance type switch and has an open collector output. The touch switch 516 is turned on when the palm or finger is touching the rotary handle main body front 506, and is turned off when the palm or finger is not touching the rotary handle main body front 506.

The power failure monitoring circuit 4100e, which will be described in detail later, monitors signs of power failure or momentary power failure of two types of voltages, + 12V and + 24V, from the power supply board 851, and detects signs of power failure or momentary power failure. , The payout power failure notice signal is output to the payout control board 4110 as a power failure notice, and the payout power failure notice signal is input to the waste hit prevention circuit 857c as a power failure notice. The payout power failure warning signal output from the power failure monitoring circuit 4100e provided on the main control board 4100 is lowered to the ground (GND) side when no sign of power failure or momentary power failure of + 12V and + 24V voltages is detected, and the logic is LOW. On the other hand, when a sign of a power failure or momentary power failure of one or both of the + 12V and + 24V is detected, the voltage is raised to the + 12V side and the logic becomes HI.

Specifically, the transmission line that transmits the detection signal (contact signal 1) from the touch switch 516 that detects whether or not the palm or finger is touching the rotary handle body front 506 is electrically connected to the + 12V power supply line at one end. It is electrically connected to the other end of the connected pull-up resistor WR0 and is also electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor WTR0 via the resistor WR1. In addition to being electrically connected to the resistor WR1, the base terminal of the transistor WTR0 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor WR2 whose one end is grounded to ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor WTR0 is grounded to ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor WTR0 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor WR3 whose one end is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line. When the transistor WTR0 is turned ON / OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor WTR0 changes, and the signal is input to the negative logic connection signal input terminal of the emission control circuit 857a as a connection signal.

The circuit composed of the resistors WR1 and WR2 and the transistor WTR0 is a switch circuit that is turned ON / OFF by a detection signal (contact signal 1) from the touch switch 516.

When the palm or finger is touching the front 506 of the rotary handle body, the touch switch 516 is turned on, so that the touch switch 516 has an open collector output, so that the collector terminal of the transistor of the touch switch 516 is on the ground (GND) side. The logic of the detection signal (contact signal 1) from the touch switch 516 becomes LOW, and the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor WTR0 is also lowered to the ground (GND) side, so that the transistor WTR0 is turned off and the switch is switched. The circuit will also be turned off.

On the other hand, when the palm or finger is not touched on the front 506 of the rotary handle body, the touch switch 516 is turned off and the touch switch 516 is an open collector output. Therefore, the collector terminal of the transistor of the touch switch 516 is a pull-up resistor. By pulling up to the + 12V side by WR0, the logic of the detection signal (contact signal 1) from the touch switch 516 becomes HI, and the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor WTR0 is also pulled up to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistor WR0. As a result, the transistor WTR0 is turned on, and the switch circuit is also turned on.

In this way, when the palm or finger is touching the front 506 of the rotary handle body, the transistor WTR0 is turned off, and the switch circuit is also turned off so that the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor WTR0 is raised to the + 5V side by the resistor WR3. On the other hand, when the palm or finger is not touched on the front 506 of the rotating handle body, the transistor WTR0 is turned on, and by turning on the switch circuit, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor WTR0 is lowered to the ground (GND) side. It has become like.

Further, the transmission line for transmitting the payout power failure warning signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 4100e provided in the main control board 4100 is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor WR4 whose one end is electrically connected to the + 12V power supply line. At the same time, it is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor WTR1 in the previous stage via a resistor WR5. The base terminal of the transistor WTR1 in the previous stage is electrically connected to the resistor WR5, and is also electrically connected to the other end of the resistor WR6 whose one end is grounded to ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor WTR1 in the previous stage is grounded to ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor WTR1 in the previous stage is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor WR7 whose one end is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line. At the same time, it is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor WTR2 in the subsequent stage via the resistor WR8. The base terminal of the transistor WTR2 in the subsequent stage is electrically connected to the resistor WR8, and is also electrically connected to the other end of the resistor WR9 whose one end is grounded to ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor WTR2 in the latter stage is grounded to ground (GND), the collector terminal of the transistor WTR2 in the latter stage is electrically connected to the collector terminal of the transistor WTR0 described above, and one end thereof is connected to the + 5V power supply line described above. It is electrically connected to the other end of the electrically connected resistor WR3. The logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor WTR1 in the previous stage changes when the transistor WTR1 in the previous stage is turned ON / OFF, and the transistor WTR2 in the latter stage is turned OFF / ON by the logic of the signal. The logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the WTR2 changes, and the signal is input to the negative logic connection signal input terminal of the launch control circuit 857a as a connection signal.

The circuit composed of the resistors WR5 and WR6 and the transistor WTR1 in the front stage and the circuit composed of the resistors WR8 and WR9 and the transistor WTR2 in the rear stage are turned on / off by the payout power failure warning signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 4100e. It is a switch circuit.

When the power failure monitoring circuit 4100e does not detect a sign of power failure or momentary power failure of + 12V and + 24V, the logic of the payout power failure warning signal is LOW, so the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor WTR1 in the previous stage is also grounded. By pulling it down to the (GND) side, the transistor WTR1 in the previous stage is turned off, and the switch circuit in the previous stage is also turned off. When the applied voltage is raised to the + 5V side by the resistor WR7, the transistor WTR2 in the subsequent stage is turned on, and the switch circuit in the subsequent stage is also turned on.

On the other hand, when the power failure monitoring circuit 4100e detects a sign of power failure or momentary power failure of one or both of + 12V and + 24V, the payout power failure warning signal is pulled up to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistor WR4. Is HI, and the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor WTR1 in the previous stage is also pulled up to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistor WR4, so that the transistor WTR1 in the previous stage is turned on and the switch circuit in the previous stage is also turned on. The voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor WTR1 in the previous stage, which is the voltage applied to the base terminal of WTR2, is lowered to the ground (GND) side, so that the transistor WTR2 in the latter stage is turned off and the switch circuit in the latter stage is also turned off. It will be.

In this way, when the power failure monitoring circuit 4100e does not detect a sign of a power failure or momentary power failure of + 12V and + 24V voltages, the transistor WTR1 in the front stage is turned off, the switch circuit in the front stage is also turned off, and the transistor WTR2 in the rear stage is turned on. Then, by turning on the switch circuit in the subsequent stage, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor WTR2 in the subsequent stage is lowered to the ground (GND) side, while the power failure monitoring circuit 4100e has one or both of + 12V and + 24V. When a sign of voltage failure or momentary power failure is detected, the transistor WTR1 in the front stage is turned on, the switch circuit in the front stage is also turned on, the transistor WTR2 in the rear stage is turned off, and the switch circuit in the rear stage is also turned off. The voltage applied to the collector terminal of the WTR2 is raised to the + 5V side by the resistor WR3.

In the present embodiment, the collector terminal of the transistor WTR0 and the collector terminal of the transistor WTR2 in the subsequent stage are electrically connected to each other as a "wired OR circuit". As a result, when the power failure monitoring circuit 4100e does not detect a sign of power failure or momentary power failure of + 12V and + 24V voltages, as described above, the transistor WTR1 in the front stage is turned off, the switch circuit in the front stage is also turned off, and the switch circuit in the rear stage is also turned off. When the transistor WTR2 of the above stage is turned on and the switch circuit of the subsequent stage is also turned on, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor WTR2 of the subsequent stage is lowered to the ground (GND) side, so that the logic is always LOW, so that the transistor The voltage applied to the collector terminal of WTR0 is applied to the negative logic connection signal input terminal of the emission control circuit 857a. That is, when the palm or finger is touching the front 506 of the rotary handle body, the transistor WTR0 is turned off, and the switch circuit is also turned off, so that the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor WTR0 is raised to the + 5V side by the resistor WR3. The connection signal whose logic is HI is input to the negative logic connection signal input terminal of the launch control circuit 857a, while the transistor WTR0 is turned on when the palm or finger is not touched on the 506 in front of the rotating handle body, and the switch circuit is also By turning it on, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor WTR0 is lowered to the ground (GND) side, and the connection signal whose logic is LOW is input to the negative logic connection signal input terminal of the emission control circuit 857a. It has become.

On the other hand, when the power failure monitoring circuit 4100e detects a sign of power failure or momentary power failure of one or both of + 12V and + 24V, the transistor WTR1 in the previous stage is turned on and the switch circuit in the previous stage is also turned on as described above. When the transistor WTR2 in the subsequent stage is turned off and the switch circuit in the subsequent stage is also turned off, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor WTR2 in the subsequent stage is raised to the + 5V side by the resistor WR3, so that the logic is always HI. Regardless of whether the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor WTR0 is lowered to the ground (GND) side or pulled up to the + 5V side by the resistor WR3, a connection signal whose logic is always HI is emitted. It is designed to be input to the negative logic connection signal input terminal of the control circuit 857a.

As described above, the launch control circuit 857a lowers the + 37V supplied from the power supply creation circuit 855d in the DC / DC converter 857aa shown in FIG. 12 of the launch control circuit 857a to create a solenoid-driven DC power supply (+ 35V). Then, the electrolytic capacitor 857b is charged by applying the solenoid driving DC power supply (+ 35V) to the electrolytic capacitor 857b. The combined current obtained by merging the current from the DC / DC converter 857a and the current due to the discharge of the electric charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor 857b flows through the firing solenoid drive circuit 857ab shown in FIG. 12 of the firing control circuit 857a. It has become.

When the power failure monitoring circuit 4100e does not detect a sign of power failure or momentary power failure of + 12V and + 24V voltage, the firing control circuit 857a determines that the logic of the connection signal input to the negative logic connection signal input terminal is LOW. That is, when the power failure monitoring circuit 4100e does not detect a sign of a power failure or momentary power failure of + 12V and + 24V voltages, and when the palm or finger is not touched on the rotary handle main body front 506, the firing is stopped. Operation from the potential meter 512 that electrically adjusts the strength (launch strength) of launching the game ball toward the game area 1100 according to the rotation position of the rotation handle main body front 506 in the firing solenoid drive circuit 857ab. The power failure monitoring circuit 4100e forcibly stops the control of adjusting the merged current and outputting the drive current for launching (launching) the game ball toward the game area 1100 based on the signal to the launch solenoid 654. When no sign of power failure or momentary power failure of + 12V and + 24V voltage is detected, and when the palm or finger is touching the front 506 of the rotating handle body, it is determined that the firing is permitted and the firing is performed. In the solenoid drive circuit 857ab, the game ball is launched based on the operation signal from the potential meter 512 that electrically adjusts the strength (launch strength) of launching the game ball toward the game area 1100 according to the rotation position of the rotation handle main body front 506. The drive current for launching (launching) toward the game area 1100 is controlled to be output to the firing solenoid 654 by adjusting the merged current.

On the other hand, the launch control circuit 857a inputs to the negative logic connection signal input terminal when the power failure monitoring circuit 4100e detects a sign of power failure or momentary power failure of one or both of + 12V and + 24V. Since the logic of the connection signal to be input is always HI, it is determined that the firing is stopped regardless of whether or not the palm or finger is touched by the rotary handle main body front 506, and the firing solenoid drive circuit 857ab determines that the firing is stopped. , The game ball is directed toward the game area 1100 based on the operation signal from the potential meter 512 that electrically adjusts the strength (launch intensity) of launching the game ball toward the game area 1100 according to the rotation position of the rotation handle main body front 506. The control for outputting the drive current for launching (launching) to the firing solenoid 654 by adjusting the merged current is forcibly stopped. As a result, in the event of a power failure or momentary power failure, the electric charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor 857b is discharged and flows to the firing solenoid drive circuit 857ab to prevent it from flowing to the firing solenoid 654 as a driving current. It is possible to prevent the firing of wasteful hits.

Since the touch switch 516 (capacitance type switch) detects a change in capacitance due to the palm or finger touching the rotary handle main body front 506, the player can perform the rotary handle main body front 506. When the rotation position of the hall is fixed with paper or coins, the game is played, the seat is left and the state is left as it is, and when the hall business hours are over, the hall clerk or the like shuts off the power of the pachinko game machine 1. In addition, the touch switch 516 may turn on even though the palm or finger is not touched in front of the rotating handle body 506 due to the unstable voltage due to the power cutoff, so that the electrolytic capacitor 857b was charged. The electric charge is discharged and flows as a drive current to the firing solenoid 654 to fire the game ball toward the game region 1100.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, as described above, the launch control circuit 857a is negative when the power failure monitoring circuit 4100e detects a sign of a power failure or momentary power failure of one or both of + 12V and + 24V. When the logic of the connection signal input to the logical connection signal input terminal is always HI, it is determined that the firing is stopped and the firing is stopped regardless of whether the palm or finger is touched on the front 506 of the rotating handle body. In the solenoid drive circuit 857ab, the game ball is launched based on the operation signal from the potential meter 512 that electrically adjusts the strength (launch strength) of launching the game ball toward the game area 1100 according to the rotation position of the rotation handle main body front 506. The control for outputting the drive current for launching (launching) toward the game area 1100 to the firing solenoid 654 by adjusting the merged current is forcibly stopped. As a result, the player fixes the rotation position of the 506 in front of the rotary handle body with paper or coins, plays the game, leaves the seat and is left as it is, and the clerk in the hall or the like turns on the power supply of the pachinko game machine 1. Even if the touch switch 516 is turned on even though the palm or finger is not touched on the 506 in front of the rotating handle body when the power is cut off, the electric charge charged in the solenoid capacitor 857b due to a power failure or a momentary power failure is generated. By preventing the electric charge from flowing to the launch solenoid 654 as a drive current by being discharged and flowing to the launch solenoid drive circuit 857ab, it is possible to prevent the wasting of the game ball when the power is cut off.

Further, before the player starts the game with the pachinko gaming machine 1, for the time being, the ball lending button 361 of the ball lending unit 360 shown in FIG. 7 is pressed to press the ball lending button 361 on the upper plate 301 shown in FIG. Fill with and leave the seat for a break (toilet or eating and drinking), or fill the upper plate 301 with the game ball acquired by another pachinko machine and leave the seat for a break (toilet or eating and drinking) May be done. At this time, the player who was playing the game with the pachinko game machine 1 in front of the player did not notice that the rotation position of the rotation handle main body front 506 was fixed with paper or coins, and for a break as it was. If a power outage or momentary power failure occurs while you are away from your seat, the voltage due to the power outage or momentary power failure becomes unstable, and the 506 in front of the rotating handle body is not touched by your palm or fingers. Since the touch switch 516 may be turned on, the electric charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor 857b is discharged and flows as a driving current to the firing solenoid 654 to fire the game ball toward the game region 1100.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, even in such a case, as described above, in the launch control circuit 857a, the power failure monitoring circuit 4100e is a sign of a power failure or a momentary power failure of one or both of + 12V and + 24V. When the logic of the connection signal input to the negative logic connection signal input terminal is always HI, the firing is stopped regardless of whether the palm or finger is touched on the front 506 of the rotating handle body. Operation from the potential meter 512 that electrically adjusts the strength (launch intensity) of launching the game ball toward the game area 1100 according to the rotation position of the rotation handle main body front 506 in the firing solenoid drive circuit 857ab. The control for ejecting (launching) the game ball toward the game area 1100 based on the signal and outputting it to the launching solenoid 654 by adjusting the merged current is forcibly stopped. As a result, before the player starts the game with the pachinko game machine 1, for the time being, the ball rental button 361 of the ball rental unit 360 is pressed to fill the upper plate 301 with the game ball and leave the seat for a break. Or, when the upper plate 301 is filled with the game ball acquired by another pachinko game machine and the player leaves the seat for a break, the game is played by the pachinko game machine 1 in front of the player. The player did not notice that the rotation position of the rotary handle main body front 506 was fixed with paper or a coin, and the touch switch 516 was turned on even though the palm or finger was not touched on the rotary handle main body front 506. Even if there is a power failure or momentary power failure, the electric charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor 857b is discharged and flows to the firing solenoid drive circuit 857ab to prevent it from flowing to the firing solenoid 654 as a driving current, thereby causing a power failure or a power failure. Since it is possible to prevent the wasting of the game ball in a momentary power failure, the game ball can be pressed even though the player does not operate the rotary handle body front 506 during the break. The disadvantage of being fired can be prevented.

By the way, the transmission line that transmits the detection signal (contact signal 1) from the touch switch 516 that detects whether or not the palm or finger is touching the rotary handle main body front 506 is electrically the above-mentioned + 12V power supply line at one end. In addition to being electrically connected to the other end of the connected pull-up resistor WR0, it is also electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor WTR3 via the resistor WR10. The base terminal of the transistor WTR3 is electrically connected to the resistor WR10, and is also electrically connected to the other end of the resistor WR11 whose one end is grounded to ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor WTR3 is grounded to ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor WTR3 is electrically connected to the payout control board 4110 via wiring (harness). When the collector terminal of the transistor WTR3 is electrically connected to the payout control board 4110 via wiring (harness), the payout control input circuit 4120b of the payout control unit 4120 shown in FIG. 12 on the payout control board 4110. Is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor electrically connected to the + 12V power supply line and electrically connected to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 4120a shown in FIG. Ru.

When the transistor WTR3 is turned ON / OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor WTR3 changes, and the signal is input to the payout control board 4110 as a payout connection signal via the wiring (harness).

The circuit composed of the resistors WR10, WR11, and the transistor WTR3 is a switch circuit that is turned ON / OFF by a detection signal (contact signal 1) from the touch switch 516.

When the palm or finger is touching the front 506 of the rotary handle body, as described above, when the touch switch 516 is turned on, the touch switch 516 has an open collector output, so that the collector terminal of the transistor of the touch switch 516 is grounded. The transistor WTR3 is pulled down to the (GND) side and the logic of the detection signal (contact signal 1) from the touch switch 516 becomes LOW, and the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor WTR3 is also pulled down to the ground (GND) side. It turns off, and the switch circuit also turns off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor WTR3 is pulled up to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistor in the payout control input circuit 4120b of the payout control unit 4120 in the payout control board 4110 via the wiring (harness). The payout contact signal that becomes HI is input to the payout control board 4110.

On the other hand, when the palm or finger is not touched on the front 506 of the rotary handle body, as described above, when the touch switch 516 is turned off, the touch switch 516 has an open collector output, and therefore the collector terminal of the transistor of the touch switch 516. However, the pull-up resistor WR0 of the waste-strike prevention circuit 857c pulls it up to the + 12V side, so that the logic of the detection signal (contact signal 1) from the touch switch 516 becomes HI, and the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor WTR3 also becomes. By being pulled up to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistor WR0, the transistor WTR3 is turned on and the switch circuit is also turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor WTR3 is lowered to the ground (GND) side of the payout control board 4110 via the wiring (harness), so that the payout contact signal whose logic is LOW is the payout control board 4110. Is entered in.

[10. Main control board circuit]
Next, the circuit and the like of the main control board 4100 shown in FIG. 11 will be described with reference to FIGS. 23 to 25. FIG. 23 is a circuit diagram showing a circuit of the main control board, FIG. 24 is a circuit diagram showing a power failure monitoring circuit, and FIG. 25 is a circuit showing a communication interface circuit between the main control board and the peripheral control board. It is a figure. First, the main control filter circuit 4100h shown in FIG. 17 will be described, and then the power supply, main control system reset, main control crystal oscillator, main control input circuit, power failure monitoring circuit, and main control MPU created by the main control board 4100 will be described. Various input / output signals to and from the main control board 4100 and a communication interface circuit between the boards of the main control board 4100 and the peripheral control board 4140 will be described.

The main control board 4100 includes a main control MPU 4100a, a main control input circuit 4100b, a main control output circuit 4100c, a main control solenoid drive circuit 4100d, a power failure monitoring circuit 4100e, a + 5V creation circuit 4100g, and a main control board 4100g shown in FIGS. In addition to the control filter circuit 4100h, as peripheral circuits, as shown in FIG. 23, the main control system reset MIC1 that outputs a reset signal and the main control crystal oscillator MX0 that outputs a clock signal (24 megahertz (MHz in this embodiment)). )) Is mainly composed.

[10-1. Main control filter circuit]
As shown in FIG. 23, the main control filter circuit 4100h mainly comprises a main control 3-terminal filter MIC0. This main control 3-terminal filter MIC0 is a T-type filter circuit, which is magnetically shielded with ferrite and has excellent attenuation characteristics. In the main control 3-terminal filter MIC0, + 5V created by the + 5V creation circuit 4100g was applied to the 1st terminal, the 2nd terminal was grounded to the ground (GND), and the noise component was removed from the 3rd terminal. + 5V is output. The + 5V applied to the 1st terminal is first electrically removed from the ripple (AC component folded by the voltage) by being electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC0 whose one end is grounded to the ground (GND). Is smoothed.

The + 5V output from the 3rd terminal is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC1 and the electrolytic capacitor MC2 (capacitance: 470 microfarad (μF) in this embodiment), one end of which is grounded to ground (GND). By connecting to, the ripple is further removed and smoothed. This smoothed + 5V is applied to the power supply terminal of the main control system reset MIC1, the VDD terminal which is the power supply terminal of the main control crystal oscillator MX0, the VDD terminal which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU4100a, and the like.

The VDD terminal of the main control MPU4100a is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC3 whose one end is grounded to ground (GND), and the + 5V applied to the VDD terminal is further stripped of ripples and smoothed. The VSS terminal, which is the ground terminal of the main control MPU 4100a, is grounded to the ground (GND).

Further, the VDD terminal of the main control MPU4100a is electrically connected to the anode terminal of the diode MD0 in addition to being electrically connected to the capacitor MC3. The cathode terminal of the diode MD0 is electrically connected to the VBB terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the RAM (main control built-in RAM) built in the main control MPU4100a, and one end of the capacitor MC4 is grounded to ground (GND). It is electrically connected to the other end of the. The VBB terminal of the main control built-in RAM is electrically connected to the cathode terminal of the diode MD0 and the other end of the capacitor MC4, and is also connected to the plus of the capacitor BC0 of the power supply board 851 shown in FIG. 17 via the resistor MR0. It is electrically connected to the terminal. That is, + 5V smoothed by removing the noise component by the main control filter circuit 4100h is applied to the VDD terminal of the main control MPU4100a, and is applied to the VBB terminal of the main control built-in RAM and the capacitor BC0 via the diode MD0. It is designed to be applied to the positive terminal of. As a result, as described above, + 12V created by the power supply creation circuit 855d of the power supply board 851 shown in FIG. 17 is not supplied to the + 5V creation circuit 4100g of the main control board 4100 via the payout control board 4110, and + 5V is created. When the circuit 4100g cannot create + 5V, the charge charged in the capacitor BC0 is supplied to the main control board 4100 as the main VBB, so that the VDD terminal of the main control MPU 4100a Although the main control MPU4100a does not operate because the current is obstructed by the diode MD0 and does not flow, the stored contents are retained by applying the main VBB to the VBB terminal of the main control built-in RAM.

[10-2. Main control system reset]
As shown in FIG. 23, + 5V smoothed by removing the noise component by the main control filter circuit 4100h is applied to the power supply terminal of the main control system reset MIC1. The main control system reset MIC1 resets the main control MPU 4100a and the main control output circuit 4100ca with a reset function, respectively, and has a built-in delay circuit. One end of the delay capacitance terminal of the main control system reset MIC1 is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC5 which is grounded to ground (GND), and the delay time by the delay circuit is set by the capacitance of this capacitor MC5. You can do it. Specifically, when the + 5V input to the power supply terminal reaches the threshold value (for example, 4.25V), the main control system reset MIC1 outputs a system reset signal from the output terminal after the delay time elapses.

The output terminal of the main control system reset MIC1 is electrically connected to the SRST terminal, which is the reset terminal of the main control MPU 4100a, and the reset terminal of the main control output circuit 4100ca with a reset function. The output terminal is an open collector output type, and is a capacitor whose one end is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor MR1 which is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line, and one end is grounded to ground (GND). It is electrically connected to the other end of the MC6. Ripple is removed and smoothed by this capacitor MC6. When the voltage input to the power supply terminal is larger than the threshold value, the output terminal is pulled up to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor MR1 and the logic becomes HI. This logic becomes the SRST terminal of the main control MPU4100a and the main control output with a reset function. While each is input to the reset terminal of the circuit 4100ca, when the voltage input to the power supply terminal is smaller than the threshold value, the logic becomes LOW, and this logic is the SRST terminal of the main control MPU 4100a and the main control output circuit 4100ca with a reset function. It is input to each reset terminal. Since the SRST terminal of the main control MPU 4100a and the reset terminal of the main control output circuit 4100ca with a reset function are each negative logic inputs, when the voltage input to the power supply terminal becomes smaller than the threshold value, the main control MPU 4100a and the reset function The main control output circuit 4100ca is reset. The power supply terminal is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC7 whose one end is grounded to ground (GND), and the + 5V input to the power supply terminal is smoothed by removing ripples. Further, the ground terminal is grounded to the grant (GND), and the NC terminal is not electrically connected to the outside.

[10-3. Main control crystal oscillator]
As shown in FIG. 23, + 5V smoothed by removing the noise component by the main control filter circuit 4100h is applied to the VDD terminal which is the power supply terminal of the main control crystal oscillator MX0. This VDD terminal is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC8 whose one end is grounded to ground (GND), and the + 5V input to the VDD terminal is further stripped of ripples and smoothed. Further, in addition to the VDD terminal, this smoothed + 5V is also applied to the A terminal, the B terminal, the C terminal, and the ST terminal, which are output frequency selection terminals, respectively. The main control crystal oscillator MX0 outputs a 24 MHz clock signal from the F terminal, which is an output terminal, by applying + 5 V to each of these A terminal, B terminal, C terminal, and ST terminal.

The F terminal of the main control crystal oscillator MX0 is electrically connected to the CLK terminal, which is the clock terminal of the main control MPU4100a, and a 24 MHz clock signal is input. The GND terminal, which is the ground terminal of the main control crystal oscillator MX0, is grounded to ground (GND), and the D terminal, which outputs the frequency division of the F terminal of the main control crystal oscillator MX0, is not electrically connected to the outside. It is in a state.

[10-4. Main control input circuit]
The main control input circuit 4100b is a detection signal from the general winning port switches 3020 and 3020, the upper start port switch 3022, the lower start port switch 2109, the magnetic detection switch 304, the count switch 2110, and the gate switch 2352 shown in FIG. In addition, it is a circuit in which an operation signal (RAM clear signal) or the like from the operation switch 860a provided on the payout control board 4110 shown in FIG. 12 is input. Since the circuit configuration in which the detection signal from each switch is input is the same, a circuit in which the operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the operation switch 860a is input will be described here.

[10-4-1. Circuit to which the operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the operation switch is input]
First, as described above, the operation switch 860a is a RAM (RAM with built-in payout control) built in the payout control MPU 4120a of the payout control board 4110 and a main control of the main control board 4100 within a predetermined period from the time when the power is turned on. It is operated when clearing the RAM (main control built-in RAM) built in the MPU4100a, or when an error is notified after the power is turned on, it is operated to clear the error. A function to clear the RAM within a predetermined period from the time the power is turned on, and an error cancellation after the power is turned on (after the period during which the function as RAM clear is performed, that is, after the predetermined period has passed from the time the power is turned on). It has a function to perform. Since the main control board 4100 does not have the function of canceling the error of the payout control board 4110, the main control is performed when the operation signal from the operation switch 860a is input within a predetermined period from the time when the power is turned on. A process of clearing the main control built-in RAM is performed by judging as a RAM clear signal for clearing the built-in RAM.

When the operation switch 860a is not operated, the operation signal whose logic is LOW is input to the main control board 4100, while when the operation switch 860a is operated, the logic is input from the payout control board 4110. The operation signal in which is HI is input from the payout control board 4110 (a detailed description of this point will be described later).

As shown in FIG. 23, the transmission line for transmitting the operation signal from the operation switch 860a provided on the payout control board 4110 within a predetermined period from the time when the power is turned on is a pull-up in which one end is electrically connected to the + 12V power supply line. It is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR2 and is also electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor MTR0 via the resistor MR3. In addition to being electrically connected to the resistor MR3, the base terminal of the transistor MTR0 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR4 whose one end is grounded to ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor MTR0 is grounded to ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor MTR0 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR5, one end of which is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line, and a non-inverting buffer. Main control via ICMIC10 (non-inverting buffer ICMIC10 includes eight non-inverting buffer circuits, and formats and outputs the logic of the signal waveform input to one of them (MIC10A) without inverting it). It is electrically connected to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the MPU4100a.

The circuit that outputs the operation signal from the operation switch 860a on the payout control board 4110 is configured as an open collector output type in which the emitter terminal is grounded to the ground (GND), and the transmission that transmits the operation signal from the operation switch 860a. The line is pulled up to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistor MR2. In the main control board 4100, when the operation switch 860a is not operated, the operation signal from the payout control board 4110 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side and the logic is input as LOW, while the operation switch 860a is operated. At this time, the operation signal from the payout control board 4110 is pulled up to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistor MR2, and the logic is input as HI.

The circuit composed of the resistors MR3 and MR4 and the transistor MTR0 is a switch circuit that is turned ON / OFF by an operation signal from the operation switch 860a.

When the operation switch 860a is not operated, the operation signal whose logic is LOW is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR0, so that the transistor MTR0 is turned off and the switch circuit is also turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR0 is pulled up to the + 5V side by the resistor MR5, and the operation signal from the operation switch 860a whose logic becomes HI is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the main control MPU4100a. Will be done. The main control MPU4100a determines that when the logic of the operation signal from the operation switch 860a input to the input terminal PA0 is HI, it does not instruct to perform RAM clear to erase the information stored in the main control built-in RAM. To do.

On the other hand, when the operation switch 860a is operated, the operation signal pulled up to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistor MR2 and the logic becomes HI is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR0, so that the transistor MTR0 is turned on and the switch is switched. The circuit will also be turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR0 is lowered to the ground (GND) side, and the operation signal from the operation switch 860a whose logic is LOW is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the main control MPU4100a. Will be done. The main control MPU4100a is instructed to perform RAM clear to erase the information stored in the main control built-in RAM when the logic of the operation signal from the operation switch 860a input to the input terminal PA0 is LOW. to decide.

The operation signal from the operation switch 860a is pulled up to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistor MR2. This is because the operation signal from the operation switch 860a is input via the payout control board 4110. That is, the voltage between the main control board 4100 and the payout control board 4110 is higher than the control reference voltage of + 5V in order to suppress the influence of noise invading the wiring (harness) that electrically connects the boards. The reliability of the signal is enhanced by using + 12V, which is a voltage. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the detection signals from the general winning port switch 3020, the upper starting port switch 3022, and the lower starting port switch 2109, which are directly input to the main control board 4100, are pulled up to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor. On the other hand, the detection signals from the magnetic detection switch 3024, the count switch 2110, the general winning opening switch 3020, and the gate switch 2352, which are input via the panel relay terminal plate 4161 shown in FIG. 11, are directly sent to the main control board 4100. Since it is not input, it is pulled up to the + 12V side by a pull-up resistor like the operation signal from the operation switch 860a.

[10-5. Power failure monitoring circuit]
As shown in FIG. 17, the main control board 4100 is supplied with two types of voltages, + 12V and + 24V, from the power supply board 851 via the payout control board 4110, and + 12V and + 24V are input to the power failure monitoring circuit 4100e. ing. The power failure monitoring circuit 4100e monitors signs of a power failure or momentary power failure of + 12V and + 24V, and when it detects a sign of power failure or momentary power failure, it sends a power failure warning signal as a power failure warning, in addition to the main control MPU4100a, a payout control board. It is output to the payout control MPU 4120a of the 4110 and the peripheral control board 4140. Here, the configuration of the power failure monitoring circuit will be described first, followed by the monitoring of + 24V power failure or momentary power failure, the monitoring of + 12V power failure or momentary power failure, and the output of the power failure warning signal.

[10-5-1. Power failure monitoring circuit configuration]
As shown in FIG. 24, the power failure monitoring circuit 4100e mainly includes a shunt type stabilized power supply circuit MIC20, an open collector output type comparator MIC21, a D type flip-flop MIC22, and transistors MTR20 to MTR23.

The REF terminal, which is the reference voltage input terminal of the shunt-type regulated power supply circuit MIC20, and the K terminal, which is the cathode terminal, are electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR20 whose one end is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line. + 5V is applied, and the current input to the REF terminal is limited by the resistor MR20. The K terminal outputs a reference voltage Vref (2.495V is set in this embodiment) which is a comparison reference voltage of the comparator MIC21. The K terminal is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC20 whose one end is grounded to ground (GND), and the reference voltage Vref output from the K terminal is rippled (folded by the voltage) by the capacitor MC20. The AC component) has been removed and smoothed. The A terminal, which is the anode terminal of the shunt-type regulated power supply circuit MIC20, is grounded to ground (GND).

The comparator MIC21 includes two voltage comparison circuits, one of which (MIC21A) is used to compare the + 24V monitoring voltage V1 with the reference voltage Vref, and the remaining one (MIC21B). , + 12V monitoring voltage V2 and reference voltage Vref are used for comparison. A monitoring voltage V1 of + 24V is applied to the positive terminal 3 of the MIC 21A, and a reference voltage Vref is applied to the negative terminal 2 of the MIC 21A. A monitoring voltage V2 of + 12V is applied to the 5th terminal which is a positive terminal of the MIC21B, and a reference voltage Vref is applied to the 6th terminal which is a negative terminal of the MIC21B. The results of these comparisons are input to the D-type flip-flop MIC22. This D-type flip-flop MIC 22 includes two D-type flip-flop circuits, one of which (MIC 22A) is used in the present embodiment. The Vcc terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the comparator MIC21, is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC21 whose one end is grounded to ground (GND), and + 5V applied to the Vcc terminal which is the power supply terminal of the comparator MIC21 is Ripple is removed and smoothed by the capacitor MC21, and the GND terminal, which is the ground terminal of the comparator MIC21, is grounded to the ground (GND).

[10-5-2. + 24V power outage or momentary power failure monitoring]
As described above, the monitoring of the + 24V power failure or momentary power failure is performed by the MIC21A of the comparator MIC21 comparing the + 24V monitoring voltage V1 with the reference voltage Vref. As shown in FIG. 24, the third terminal, which is the positive terminal of the MIC21A of the comparator MIC21 to which the monitoring voltage V1 of + 24V is applied, has the other end and one end of the resistor MR21 whose one end is electrically connected to the + 24V power supply line. Is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR22 which is grounded to the ground (GND), the other end of the resistors MR21 and MR22, and the other end of the capacitor MC23 whose one end is grounded to the ground (GND). Are electrically connected. The + 24V monitoring voltage V1 applied to the positive terminal 3 of the MIC21A of the comparator MIC21 is divided by the resistance ratio of the resistors MR21 and MR22 to + 24V, and the ripple is removed by the capacitor MC23 and smoothed. .. The values of the resistors MR21 and MR22 become the preset power failure detection voltage V1pf (set to 21.40V in this embodiment) when the voltage starts to drop from + 24V when + 24V has a power failure or momentary power failure. At that time, the monitoring voltage V1 of + 24V is set to be the same value as the reference voltage Vref.

The first terminal, which is the output terminal of the MIC21A of the comparator MIC21, has an open collector output, and one end is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor MR23 which is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line. One end is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC24 which is grounded to the ground (GND), and is electrically connected to the PR terminal which is a preset terminal of the D type flip flop MIC22. The capacitor MC24 plays a role as a low-pass filter.

When the voltage of + 24V is larger than the failure detection voltage V1pf, the monitoring voltage V1 of + 24V becomes larger than the reference voltage Vref, and the voltage applied to the first terminal which is the output terminal of the MIC21A of the comparator MIC21 is + 5V by the pull-up resistor MR23. The signal pulled up to the side and the logic becomes HI is input to the PR terminal which is the preset terminal of the D type flip-flop MIC22.

On the other hand, when the voltage of + 24V is smaller than the power failure detection voltage V1pf, the monitoring voltage V1 of + 24V becomes smaller than the reference voltage Vref, and the voltage applied to the first terminal which is the output terminal of the MIC21A of the comparator MIC21 is ground (GND). The signal pulled down to the side and the logic becomes LOW is input to the PR terminal which is the preset terminal of the D type flip-flop MIC22.

[10-5-3. + 12V power outage or momentary power failure monitoring]
As described above, the monitoring of the + 12V power failure or momentary power failure is performed by comparing the monitoring voltage V2 of + 12V with the reference voltage Vref by the MIC21B of the comparator MIC21. As shown in FIG. 24, the 5th terminal, which is the positive terminal of the MIC21B of the comparator MIC21 to which the monitoring voltage V2 of + 12V is applied, has one end and the other end of the resistor MR24 electrically connected to the + 12V power supply line. Is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR25 which is grounded to the ground (GND), the other end of the resistors MR24 and MR25, and the other end of the capacitor MC25 whose one end is grounded to the ground (GND). Are electrically connected. The + 12V monitoring voltage V2 applied to the 5th terminal, which is the positive terminal of the MIC21B of the comparator MIC21, is divided by the resistance ratio of the resistors MR24 and MR25 to + 12V, and the ripple is removed by the capacitor MC25 and smoothed. .. The values of the resistors MR24 and MR25 become the preset power failure detection voltage V2pf (set to 10.47V in this embodiment) when the voltage starts to drop from + 12V when + 12V has a power failure or momentary power failure. At that time, the monitoring voltage V2 of + 12V is set to be the same value as the reference voltage Vref.

The 7th terminal, which is the output terminal of the MIC21B of the comparator MIC21, has an open collector output and is electrically connected to the 1st terminal, which is the output terminal of the MIC21A described above, so that one end is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line. The preset of the D type flip flop MIC22 is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor MR23 and is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC24 whose one end is grounded to the ground (GND). It is electrically connected to the PR terminal, which is a terminal. As described above, the capacitor MC24 plays a role as a low-pass filter.

When the voltage of + 12V is larger than the power failure detection voltage V2pf, the monitoring voltage V2 of + 12V becomes larger than the reference voltage Vref, and the voltage applied to the 7th terminal which is the output terminal of the MIC21B of the comparator MIC21 is + 5V by the pull-up resistor MR23. The signal pulled up to the side and the logic becomes HI is input to the PR terminal which is the preset terminal of the D type flip-flop MIC22.

On the other hand, when the voltage of + 12V is smaller than the power failure detection voltage V2pf, the monitoring voltage V2 of + 12V becomes smaller than the reference voltage Vref, and the voltage applied to the 7th terminal which is the output terminal of the MIC21B of the comparator MIC21 is ground (GND). The signal pulled down to the side and the logic becomes LOW is input to the PR terminal which is the preset terminal of the D type flip-flop MIC22.

[10-5-4. Output of power failure warning signal]
The D-type flip-flop MIC22 stores the value (logic) of the signal input to the 1D terminal, which is the D input terminal, due to the change in the edge of the clock signal input to the 1CK terminal, which is the clock input terminal, and this stored value. (Logic) is output from the 1Q terminal which is an output terminal, and the value obtained by inverting the stored value (logic) is output from the negative logic 1Q terminal which is an output terminal. Further, the D type flip-flop MIC22 releases the latch state when a signal whose logic is LOW is input to the CLR terminal which is a clear terminal, and performs the logic of the signal input to the PR terminal which is a preset terminal. The inverted signal is output from the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal (at this time, the logic of the signal output from 1Q is inverted, that is, the same as the logic of the signal input to the PR terminal which is the preset terminal. (The logical signal is output from the negative logic 1Q terminal) On the other hand, when the signal whose logic is HI is input to the CLR terminal which is the clear terminal, the latch state is set. Further, in the D type flip-flop MIC22, when a signal whose logic is HI is input to the CLR terminal which is a clear terminal and the latch state is set, the logic is LOW to the PR terminal which is a preset terminal. When the signal becomes, the state of outputting the signal whose logic is HI from the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal is maintained (at this time, the signal which inverts the logic of the signal output from 1Q is negative logic. Maintain the state of output from the 1Q terminal).

In the D-type flip-flop MIC22, in the present embodiment, the 1D terminal which is the D input terminal and the 1CK terminal which is the clock input terminal are grounded to the ground (GND), so that the 1CK terminal which is the clock input terminal can be used. The circuit is configured so that the edge of the input clock signal does not change, and the value (logic) of the signal input to the 1D terminal, which is the D input terminal, is not stored and output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal. ing. As described above, the D-type flip-flop MIC22 has a signal from the output terminal 1 of the MIC21A of the comparator MIC21 that monitors a + 24V power failure or a momentary power failure and a + 12V power failure at the PR terminal which is a preset terminal. Alternatively, a signal from the 7th terminal, which is the output terminal of the MIC21B of the comparator MIC21 that monitors the momentary power failure, is input, and a signal is output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal, based on these signals. The Vcc terminal, which is a power supply terminal, is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC22 whose one end is grounded to ground (GND), and is applied to the Vcc terminal which is the power supply terminal of the D type flip-flop MIC22. + 5V is smoothed by removing ripples by the capacitor MC22, the GND terminal, which is the ground terminal, is grounded to ground (GND), and the negative logic 1Q terminal, which inverts the logic of the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal, is electrical to the outside. It is in an unconnected state.

In the D-type flip-flop MIC22, in the present embodiment, a power failure clear signal from the main control MPU 4100a is input to the CLR terminal, which is a clear terminal, via the main control output circuit 4100ca with a reset function. This power failure clear signal is output started and stopped after a predetermined time has elapsed in the main control side power-on processing described later performed by the main control MPU4100a. Since the CLR terminal is a negative logic input, the power failure clear signal from the main control MPU 4100a is input to the CLR terminal with its logic set to LOW via the main control output circuit 4100ca with a reset function. The D-type flip-flop MIC22 is designed to release the latch state when a power failure clear signal is input to the CLR terminal. At this time, the logic input to the PR terminal, which is a preset terminal, is inverted and the output terminal is output. Output from the 1Q terminal.

On the other hand, when the output of the power failure clear signal from the main control MPU 4100a is stopped, the logic becomes HI and is input to the CLR terminal via the main control output circuit 4100ca with a reset function. The D-type flip-flop MIC 22 is designed to set a latch state when a power failure clear signal is not input to the CLR terminal, and latches the state in which the logic is LOW and is input to the PR terminal.

The 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is electrically connected to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the main control MPU4100a via the main control input circuit 4100b, and is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22. The signal output from the 1Q terminal is input to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the main control MPU4100a as a power failure warning signal. Further, the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal of the D type flip-flop MIC 22 is electrically connected to the main control output circuit 4100cc without the reset function, and the signal output from the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal of the D type flip-flop MIC 22 is reset. No function The main control output circuit 4100cc outputs the payout control board 4110 as a payout power failure warning signal, and outputs the peripheral control board 4140 as a peripheral power failure warning signal.

As shown in FIG. 24, the main control input circuit 4100b that electrically connects the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal of the D type flip-flop MIC22 and the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the main control MPU4100a is a D type flip-flop. The 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the MIC22, is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR26, one end of which is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line, and electrically to the base terminal of the transistor MTR20 via the resistor MR27. It is connected. In addition to being electrically connected to the resistor MR27, the base terminal of the transistor MTR20 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR28, one end of which is grounded to ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor MTR20 is grounded to ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor MTR20 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR29, one end of which is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line, and a non-inverting buffer. Main control via ICMIC23 (non-inverting buffer ICMIC23 includes eight non-inverting buffer circuits, and formats and outputs the logic of the signal waveform input to one of them (MIC23A) without inverting it). It is electrically connected to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the MPU4100a.

The circuit composed of the resistors MR27, MR28, and the transistor MTR20 is a switch circuit that turns ON / OFF by a signal output from the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal of the D type flip-flop MIC22.

When the logic of the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is LOW, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR20 is lowered to the ground (GND) side, and the transistor MTR20 is turned off. , The switch circuit will also be turned off. On the other hand, when the logic of the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D type flip-flop MIC22, is HI, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR20 is raised to the + 5V side, and the transistor MTR20 is turned on. The switch circuit will also be turned on.

When both the condition that the voltage of + 24V is larger than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of + 12V is larger than the power failure detection voltage V2pf are satisfied, the signal whose logic is HI is the preset of the D type flip-flop MIC22. Since it is input to the PR terminal, which is a terminal, the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, has its logic as LOW and is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR20, so that the transistor MTR20 is Turn off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR20 is pulled up to the + 5V side by the resistor MR29, and the power failure warning signal whose logic becomes HI via the non-inverting buffer ICMIC23 is the input terminal of the input port PA of the main control MPU4100a. It is input to PA1.

On the other hand, when either of the condition that the voltage of + 24V is smaller than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of + 12V is smaller than the power failure detection voltage V2pf is satisfied, the signal whose logic is LOW is D. Since it is input to the PR terminal which is the preset terminal of the type flip-flop MIC22, the signal output from the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal of the D type flip-flop MIC22 becomes HI and is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR20. As a result, the transistor MTR20 is turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR20 is lowered to the ground (GND) side, and the power failure warning signal whose logic becomes LOW via the non-inverting buffer ICMIC23 is the input terminal of the input port PA of the main control MPU4100a. It is input to PA1.

Further, the main control output circuit 4100cc without a reset function that outputs the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, to the payout control board 4110 as a payout failure warning signal is open as shown in FIG. The circuit is configured as a collector output type, and the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D type flip-flop MIC22, is electrically connected to the resistor MR26 of the main control input circuit 4100b described above, and the transistor MTR21 in the previous stage is connected via the resistor MR30. It is electrically connected to the base terminal. In addition to being electrically connected to the resistor MR30, the base terminal of the transistor MTR21 in the previous stage is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR31 whose one end is grounded to ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor MTR21 in the previous stage is grounded to ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor MTR21 in the previous stage is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR32 whose one end is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line. At the same time, it is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the subsequent stage via the resistor MR33. In addition to being electrically connected to the resistor MR33, the base terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the subsequent stage is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR34 whose one end is grounded to ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the latter transistor MTR22 is grounded to ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the latter transistor MTR22 is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC26 whose end is grounded to ground (GND), and wiring. It is electrically connected to the payout control board 4110 via (harness). When the collector terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the subsequent stage is electrically connected to the payout control board 4110 via wiring (harness), the payout control input of the payout control unit 4120 shown in FIG. 12 on the payout control board 4110. In circuit 4120b, one end is electrically connected to the other end of a pull-up resistor (not shown) that is electrically connected to the + 12V power supply line, and the input terminal and electricity of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 4120a shown in FIG. Is connected.

The circuit composed of the resistors MR30, MR31, and the transistor MTR21 in the front stage is the switch circuit in the front stage, and the circuit composed of the resistors MR33, MR34, and the transistor MTR22 in the rear stage is the switch circuit in the rear stage, and is a D type flip-flop. It is turned ON / OFF by the signal output from the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal of the MIC 22.

When the logic of the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D type flip flop MIC22, is LOW, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR21 in the previous stage is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and the transistor in the previous stage The MTR21 is turned off, the switch circuit in the front stage is also turned off, and the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR21 in the front stage, which is the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the rear stage, is raised to the + 5V side by the resistor MR32. By doing so, the transistor MTR22 in the subsequent stage is turned on, and the switch circuit in the subsequent stage is also turned on. On the other hand, when the logic of the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip flop MIC22, is HI, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR21 is raised to the + 5V side, and the transistor MTR21 is turned on. The switch circuit in the front stage is also turned on, and the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR21 in the front stage, which is the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the rear stage, is lowered to the ground (GND) side, so that the switch circuit in the rear stage is also turned on. The transistor MTR22 is turned off, and the switch circuit in the subsequent stage is also turned off.

When both the condition that the voltage of + 24V is larger than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of + 12V is larger than the power failure detection voltage V2pf are satisfied, the signal whose logic is HI is the preset of the D type flip-flop MIC22. Since it is input to the PR terminal, which is a terminal, the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, has its logic set to LOW and is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR21 in the previous stage. Transistor MTR21 is turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR21 in the previous stage is pulled up to the + 5V side by the resistor MR32 and applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the subsequent stage, so that the transistor MTR22 in the subsequent stage is turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the subsequent stage is lowered to the ground (GND) side in the payout control board 4110 via the wiring (harness), so that the payout power failure warning signal whose logic is LOW is paid out. It is input to the control board 4110.

On the other hand, when either of the condition that the voltage of + 24V is smaller than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of + 12V is smaller than the power failure detection voltage V2pf is satisfied, the signal whose logic is LOW is D. Since it is input to the PR terminal, which is the preset terminal of the type flip-flop MIC22, the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, has its logic as HI and becomes the base terminal of the transistor MTR21 in the previous stage. Upon input, the transistor MTR21 in the previous stage is turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR 21 in the previous stage is lowered to ground (GND) and applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR 22 in the subsequent stage, so that the transistor MTR 22 in the subsequent stage is turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the subsequent stage is pulled up to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistor in the payout control input circuit 4120b of the payout control unit 4120 in the payout control board 4110 via the wiring (harness). The payout power failure warning signal whose logic is HI is input to the payout control board 4110.

Further, the main control output circuit 4100cc without a reset function that outputs a signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, to the peripheral control board 4140 as a peripheral power failure warning signal is open as shown in FIG. The circuit is configured as a collector output type, and the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D type flip-flop MIC22, is electrically connected to the resistor MR26 of the main control input circuit 4100b described above, and is the base terminal of the transistor MTR23 via the resistor MR35. Is electrically connected to. In addition to being electrically connected to the resistor MR35, the base terminal of the transistor MTR23 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR36 whose one end is grounded to ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor MTR23 is grounded to ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor MTR23 is electrically connected to the peripheral control board 4140 via wiring (harness). When the collector terminal of the transistor MTR23 is electrically connected to the peripheral control board 4140 via wiring (harness), a peripheral control input circuit (not shown) of the peripheral control unit 4150 in the peripheral control board 4140 shown in FIG. 14 In, one end is electrically connected to the other end of a pull-up resistor (not shown) that is electrically connected to the + 12V power supply line, and is electrically connected to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the peripheral control MPU 4150a shown in FIG. Be connected.

The circuit composed of the resistors MR35, MR36, and the transistor MTR23 is a switch circuit that turns ON / OFF by a signal output from the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal of the D type flip-flop MIC22.

When the logic of the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is LOW, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR23 is lowered to the ground (GND) side, and the transistor MTR23 is turned off. , The switch circuit will also be turned off. On the other hand, when the logic of the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D type flip-flop MIC22, is HI, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR23 is raised to the + 5V side, and the transistor MTR23 is turned on. The switch circuit will also be turned on.

When both the condition that the voltage of + 24V is larger than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of + 12V is larger than the power failure detection voltage V2pf are satisfied, the signal whose logic is HI is the preset of the D type flip-flop MIC22. Since it is input to the PR terminal, which is a terminal, the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, has its logic as LOW and is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR23, so that the transistor MTR23 becomes Turn off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR23 is pulled up to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistor in the payout control input circuit of the peripheral control unit 4150 on the peripheral control board 4140 via the wiring (harness), so that the logic is HI. The peripheral power failure warning signal is input to the peripheral control board 4140.

On the other hand, when either of the condition that the voltage of + 24V is smaller than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of + 12V is smaller than the power failure detection voltage V2pf is satisfied, the signal whose logic is LOW is D. Since it is input to the PR terminal which is the preset terminal of the type flip-flop MIC22, the signal output from the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal of the D type flip-flop MIC22 becomes HI and is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR23. As a result, the transistor MTR23 is turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR23 is lowered to the ground (GND) side of the peripheral control board 4140 via the wiring (harness), so that the peripheral power failure warning signal whose logic is LOW is sent to the peripheral control board. It is input to 4140.

In this way, the main control input circuit 4100b that transmits the signal output from the 1Q terminal that is the output terminal of the D type flip flop MIC 22 to the main control MPU 4100a as a power failure warning signal, and the 1Q terminal that is the output terminal of the D type flip flop MIC 22. There is no reset function that outputs the signal output from the peripheral control board 4140 as a peripheral power failure warning signal. The main control output circuit 4100cc has one transistor each, and the power failure warning signal and the peripherals input to the main control MPU 4100a. While the logic is the same as the peripheral power failure warning signal input to the control board 4140, the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D type flip flop MIC 22, is paid out to the payout control board 4110. There is no reset function to output as a power failure warning signal. The main control output circuit 4100cc has two transistors, the front stage and the rear stage, and the logic of the payout power failure warning signal is the logic of the power failure warning signal input to the main control MPU 4100a and its surroundings. The logic is the reverse of the logic of the peripheral power failure warning signal input to the control board 4140, which is different from the logic of the power failure warning signal and the logic of the peripheral power failure warning signal.

Further, the collector terminal of the transistor MTR20 of the main control input circuit 4100b is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR29 whose one end is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line, and the main control MPU4100a is electrically connected via the non-inverting buffer ICMIC23. The collector terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the subsequent stage of the main control output circuit 4100cc without the reset function is electrically connected to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the above, and is a payout control board via a wiring (harness). In the payout control input circuit 4120b of the payout control unit 4120 in 4110, one end is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor electrically connected to the + 12V power supply line, and the main control output circuit 4100cc without a reset function. The collector terminal of the transistor MTR23 of is electrically connected to a + 12V power supply line at one end in the payout control input circuit of the peripheral control unit 4150 on the peripheral control board 4140 via a wiring (harness) and an electrical pull-up resistor. It is connected to the. This is because the transistor MTR20 of the main control input circuit 4100b and the main control MPU4100a are the main control boards between the collector terminal of the transistor MTR20 of the main control input circuit 4100b and the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the main control MPU4100a. Since it is mounted on the 4100, the power failure warning is given by the logic (ON / OFF signal) of the power failure warning signal using + 5V, which is the control reference voltage of the main control MPU 4100a, whereas the main control board 4100 and the payout control board are used. In order to suppress the influence of noise invading the wiring (harness) that electrically connects the boards between the boards of the 4110 and the boards of the main control board 4100 and the peripheral control board 4140, the main control MPU 4100a, The power failure warning is given by the logic (ON / OFF signal) of the power failure warning signal using + 12V, which is a voltage higher than the control reference voltage of + 5V, which is the control reference voltage of the payout control MPU 4120a and the peripheral control MPU 4150a.

[10-6. Various input / output signals to the main control MPU]
Next, various input / output signals to the main control MPU 4100a will be described with reference to FIG. The RXA terminal, which is the serial data input terminal of the serial input port of the main control MPU 4100a, receives the serial data from the payout control board 4110 shown in FIG. 11 as the payer serial data reception signal via the main control input circuit 4100b. .. On the other hand, the TXA terminal and the TXB terminal, which are the serial data output terminals of the serial output port of the main control MPU4100a, use the serial data transmitted from the TXA terminal to the payout control board 4110 as the main payment serial data transmission signal without the reset function. No reset function by transmitting to circuit 4100cc The main control output circuit 4100cc transmits the main payment serial data transmission signal to the payout control board 4110, and the TXB terminal mainly transmits the serial data to be transmitted to the peripheral control board 4140 shown in FIG. As a peripheral serial data transmission signal, it is transmitted to the main control output circuit 4100cc without a reset function, and a main control output circuit 4100cc without a reset function transmits a main peripheral serial data transmission signal to the peripheral control board 4140.

In addition to the above-mentioned operation signal (RAM clear signal) being input to each input terminal of the predetermined input port of the main control MPU4100a, for example, payout notifying that the above-mentioned main payment serial data reception signal has been normally received. The payer ACK signal from the control board 4110 is input via the main control input circuit 4100b, and the detection signals from various switches such as the upper start port switch 3022 shown in FIG. 11 are input via the main control input circuit 4100b. It is input and so on.

On the other hand, from each output terminal of the predetermined output port of the main control MPU 4100a, for example, the main payment ACK signal for notifying the completion of normal reception of the above-mentioned payer serial data reception signal is output to the main control output circuit 4100ca with a reset function. Then, the main control output circuit 4100ca with a reset function outputs a main payment ACK signal to the payout control board 4110, or the drive signal is sent to the main control output circuit 4100ca with a reset function with respect to the start port solenoid 2105 shown in FIG. Outputs a drive signal from the main control output circuit 4100ca with a reset function to the start port solenoid 2105 via the main control solenoid drive circuit 4100d, and various indicators such as the upper special symbol display 1185 shown in FIG. On the other hand, a drive signal is output to the main control output circuit 4100ca with a reset function, and a drive signal is output from the main control output circuit 4100ca with a reset function to various indicators.

[10-7. Interface circuit for communication between the main control board and the peripheral control board]
Next, the communication interface circuit between the main control board 4100 and the peripheral control board 4140 will be described with reference to FIG. 25. In the main control board 4100, + 12V from the power supply board 851 shown in FIG. 17 is supplied via the payout control board 4110, and the + 5V creation circuit 4100g creates + 5V, which is the control reference voltage of the main control MPU 4100a, from this + 12V. ing. The main peripheral serial data transmission signal transmitted from the main control board 4100 to the peripheral control board 4140 is affected by noise that invades the wiring (harness) that electrically connects the main control board 4100 and the peripheral control board 4140. In order to suppress the above, the reliability is enhanced by transmitting using + 12V, which is a voltage higher than the control reference voltage of the main control MPU 4100a, which is + 5V.

Specifically, the main control board 4100 makes the main control output circuit 4100 cc without a reset function function as a communication interface circuit, and the communication interface circuit mainly comprises resistors MR50, resistors MR51, MR52, and a transistor MTR50. Has been done. On the other hand, the peripheral control board 4140 includes a diode AD10, an electrolytic capacitor AC10 (capacitance: 47 μF in this embodiment), and a photocoupler AIC10 (infrared LED and photoIC) as communication interface circuits. It is mainly composed of.).

+ 12V supplied from the power supply board 851 is applied to the anode terminal of the diode MD50 of the main control board 4100 via the payout control board 4110, and the negative terminal is grounded to the ground (GND) to the cathode terminal of the diode MD50. It is electrically connected to the positive terminal of the electrolytic capacitor MC50 (capacitance: 220 microfarad (μF) in this embodiment). The cathode terminal of the diode MD50 is electrically connected to the positive terminal of the electrolytic capacitor MC50, and is also electrically connected to the anode terminal (terminal 1) of the photocoupler AIC10 of the peripheral control board 4140 via wiring (harness). It is connected to the. As a result, when the power from the power supply board 851 is not supplied to the main control board 4100 via the payout control board 4110 due to, for example, a power failure or a momentary power failure, the electric charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor MC50 is charged. As + 12V, it can be continuously applied from the main control board 4100 to the anode terminal of the photocoupler AIC10 of the peripheral control board 4140.

As described above, the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU4100a, is charged to the electrolytic capacitor MC2 (capacitance: 470 μF in this embodiment) shown in FIG. 23 when a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs. Since the charged charge is applied as + 5V, the main peripheral serial transmission port 4100ae built in the main control MPU 4100a serially manages at least the command set by the main control CPU core 4100aa in the transmission buffer register 4100aeb. The unit 4100aec can transfer the data to the transmission shift register 41aea and complete the transmission as main peripheral serial data from the transmission shift register 4100aea.

As described above, the main peripheral serial data transmission signal transmitted from the main control board 4100 to the peripheral control board 4140 is connected to the wiring (harness) that electrically connects the boards between the main control board 4100 and the peripheral control board 4140. In order to suppress the influence of invading noise, the reliability is enhanced by transmitting using + 12V, which is a voltage higher than + 5V, which is the control reference voltage of the main control MPU4100a.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, when a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs, the charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor MC50 is applied as + 12V from the main control board 4100 to the anode terminal of the photocoupler AIC10 of the peripheral control board 4140. Therefore, the main peripheral serial transmission port 4100ae built in the main control MPU 4100a transfers the command set by the main control CPU core 4100aa to the transmission buffer register 4100aeb to the transmission shift register 41aea by the serial management unit 4100aec and transmits the command. When transmitted as main peripheral serial data from the shift register 4100ea, a main peripheral serial data transmission signal whose logic is HI can be transmitted from the collector terminal of the transistor MTR50 by + 12V.

In the present embodiment, the storage capacity of the transmission buffer register 4100aeb of the main peripheral serial transmission port 4100ae built in the main control MPU 4100a has 32 bytes, and one packet is composed of 3 bytes of data. Therefore, a maximum of 10 packets of data are stored in the transmission buffer register 4100aeb. Further, in the present embodiment, the transfer bit rate of the main peripheral serial data transmitted from the main control MPU 4100a is set to 19200 bps.

The cathode terminal (terminal 3) of the photocoupler AIC10 is electrically connected to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR50 of the main control board 4100 via the resistor AR10 and its wiring (harness). The resistor AR10 of the peripheral control board 4140 is a limiting resistor for limiting the current flowing through the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler AIC10.

The TXB terminal that outputs the main peripheral serial data transmission signal from the main control MPU4100a shown in FIG. 23 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR50, one end of which is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line, and the resistor MR51. It is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor MTR50 via. In addition to being electrically connected to the resistor MR51, the base terminal of the transistor MTR50 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR52 whose one end is grounded to ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor MTR50 is grounded to ground (GND).

The circuit composed of the resistors MR51, MR52, and the transistor MTR50 is a switch circuit, and when the logic of the main peripheral serial data transmission signal is HI, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR50 is on the ground (GND) side. When it is pulled down, the transistor MTR50 is turned off, and the switch circuit is also turned off. As a result, no forward current flows through the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler AIC10 of the peripheral control board 4140, so that the photocoupler AIC10 is turned off. On the other hand, when the logic of the main peripheral serial data transmission signal is LOW, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR50 is pulled up to the + 5V side by the resistor MR50, the transistor MTR50 is turned on, and the switch circuit is also turned on. .. As a result, a forward current flows through the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler AIC10 of the peripheral control board 4140, so that the photocoupler AIC10 is turned on.

+ 5V supplied from the power supply board 851 is applied to the anode terminal of the diode AD10 of the peripheral control board 4140 via the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, and the cathode terminal of the diode AD10 and the negative terminal are grounded (GND). It is electrically connected to the positive terminal of the grounded electrolytic capacitor AC10. The cathode terminal of the diode AD10 is electrically connected to the positive terminal of the electrolytic capacitor AC10, and is also electrically connected to the Vcc terminal (terminal 6) which is the power supply terminal of the photocoupler AIC10. The emitter terminal (terminal 4) of the photocoupler AIC10 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal (terminal 5) of the photocoupler AIC10 is a pull-up resistor that is electrically connected to the positive terminal of the electrolytic capacitor AC10. It is pulled up to the + 5V side by AR11 and is electrically connected to the input terminal of the serial I / O port for the main control board of the peripheral control MPU4150a. When the photocoupler AIC10 is turned ON / OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler AIC10 changes, and the signal is used as the main peripheral serial data transmission signal as the peripheral control MPU4150a serial I / O port for the main control board. It is input to the input terminal of.

As a result, as described above, when + 5V supplied from the power supply board 851 is no longer supplied to the peripheral control board 4140 via the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868 due to, for example, a power failure or a momentary power failure. The electric charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor AC10 can be continuously applied to the Vcc terminal of the photocoupler AIC10 as + 5V. When + 5V is applied from the electrolytic capacitor AC10 when an electric power or momentary power failure occurs, the main peripheral serial data transmission signal transmitted from the TXB terminal of the main control MPU 4100a to the peripheral control board 4140 is sent to the main control MPU 4100a. The data set in the transmission buffer register 4100aeb of the built-in main peripheral serial transmission port 4100ae can be completed, and the main peripheral serial data transmission signal in the middle of transmission, that is, the main peripheral serial data is cut off. The peripheral control board 4140 ensures reception without any omission or omission.

When the logic of the main peripheral serial data transmission signal transmitted from the TXB terminal of the main control MPU 4100a to the peripheral control board 4140 is HI, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR50 is lowered to the ground (GND) side and the transistor. Since the photocoupler AIC10 is turned off when the MTR50 is turned off, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler AIC10 is pulled up to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor AR11, and the logic becomes HI. The logic of the main peripheral serial data transmission signal transmitted from the TXB terminal of the main control MPU 4100a to the peripheral control board 4140 while the serial data transmission signal is input to the input terminal of the serial I / O port for the main control board of the peripheral control MPU 4150a. When is LOW, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR50 is pulled up to the + 5V side by the resistor MR50, and when the transistor MTR50 is turned on, the photocoupler AIC10 is turned on, so that the photocoupler AIC10 is turned on. The voltage applied to the collector terminal is lowered to the ground (GND) side, and the main peripheral serial data transmission signal whose logic is LOW is input to the input terminal of the serial I / O port for the main control board of the peripheral control MPU4150a. .. As described above, the logic of the main peripheral serial data transmission signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler AIC10 is the same as the logic of the main peripheral serial data transmission signal transmitted from the TXB terminal of the main control MPU 4100a to the peripheral control board 4140. It is the logic of.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the + 5V power supply line to which the control reference voltage of the main control MPU 4100a is applied and the + 12V power supply line to which the communication voltage of + 12V applied via the diode MD50 is applied. However, measures are taken when a power failure or momentary power failure occurs and the control reference voltage and communication voltage drop. That is, for the main peripheral serial transmission port 4100ae built in the main control MPU 4100a, a + 5V power supply line, a positive terminal of the electrolytic capacitor MC2 using the electrolytic capacitor MC2 of the main control filter circuit 4100h as the first auxiliary power supply, and Even if the control reference voltage applied from the + 5V power supply line drops due to a power failure or momentary power failure due to the electrical parallel connection, the electrolytic capacitor of the main control filter circuit 4100h, which is the first auxiliary power supply. By applying the control reference voltage from the positive terminal of the MC2, the state in which the control reference voltage is applied can be maintained, and it is composed of the resistors MR50, the resistors MR51, MR52, and the transistor MTR50. No reset function to function as a communication interface circuit For the main control output circuit 4100cc, + 12V applied to the + 12V power supply line is applied to the anode terminal of the diode MD50 as a communication voltage, and the cathode terminal of this diode MD50. And the positive terminal of the electrolytic capacitor MC50, which is the second auxiliary power supply, are electrically connected in parallel, so that a power failure or momentary power failure occurs and the communication is applied from the + 12V power supply line via the diode MD50. Even if the voltage drops, the communication voltage from the positive terminal of the electrolytic capacitor MC50, which is the second auxiliary power source, is applied, so that the state in which the communication voltage is applied can be maintained. There is. As a result, it is possible to prevent the command being transmitted from the main control board 4100 to the peripheral control board 4140 to be interrupted and to prevent the command from being missing, so that the peripheral control board 4140 reliably receives the command being transmitted. can do. Therefore, it is possible to eliminate missing commands immediately after a power failure occurs or during a momentary power failure.

Further, a plurality of commands set in the transmission buffer register 4100aeb of the main peripheral serial transmission port 4100ae built in the main control MPU 4100a are all composed of resistors MR50, resistors MR51, MR52, and a transistor MTR50 as main peripheral serial data. No reset function to function as a communication interface circuit 470 μF is set as the capacitance of the electrolytic capacitor MC2 of the main control filter circuit 4100 h so that transmission to the peripheral control board 4140 can be completed via the main control output circuit 4100 cc. Therefore, 220 μF is set as the capacitance of the electrolytic capacitor MC50. As a result, even if a power failure or momentary power failure occurs during transmission from the main control board 4100 to the peripheral control board 4140, all the commands set in the transmission buffer register 4100aeb are reset to function as an interface circuit as main peripheral serial data. Since transmission to the peripheral control board 4140 can be completed via the main control output circuit 4100 cc without a function, the peripheral control board 4140 does not interrupt a plurality of commands set in the transmission buffer register 4100aeb and is missing. It can be received reliably without any problems.

[11. Payout control board circuit]
Next, the circuit and the like of the payout control board 4110 shown in FIG. 12 will be described with reference to FIGS. 26 to 32. FIG. 26 is a circuit diagram showing a circuit of the payout control unit and the like, FIG. 27 is a circuit diagram showing a payout control input circuit, FIG. 28 is a circuit diagram showing a continuation of FIG. 27, and FIG. 30 is a payout motor drive. FIG. 31 is a circuit diagram showing a circuit, FIG. 31 is a circuit diagram showing a CR unit input / output circuit, and FIG. 32 is an input / output diagram showing various input / output signals to and from the main control board and various output signals to an external terminal board. Is. First, the payout control filter circuit will be described, and then the payout control unit circuit, various input / output signals with the main control board, and various output signals to the external terminal board will be described.

[11-1. Payout control filter circuit]
As shown in FIG. 26, the payout control filter circuit 4110a mainly comprises the payout control 3-terminal filter PIC0. The payout control 3-terminal filter PIC0 is a T-type filter circuit, which is magnetically shielded with ferrite and has excellent attenuation characteristics. + 5V from the power supply board 851 shown in FIG. 17 is applied to the 1st terminal of the payout control 3-terminal filter PIC0, and one end is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor PC0 grounded to the ground (GND). + 5V from the power supply board 851 is first smoothed by removing ripples (AC components folded by the voltage) by the capacitor PC0. The 2nd terminal of the payout control 3 terminal filter PIC0 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the 3rd terminal of the payout control 3 terminal filter PIC0 outputs + 5V from which the noise component is removed.

The third terminal of the payout control three-terminal filter PIC0 is the other end of the capacitor PC1 and the electrolytic capacitor PC2 (capacitance: 180 microfarad (μF) in this embodiment) whose one end is grounded to ground (GND). By being electrically connected to each of them, ripples are further removed from + 5V output from the 3rd terminal of the payout control 3 terminal filter PIC0 to be smoothed. This smoothed + 5V is applied to the power supply terminal of the payout control system reset PIC1, the VCS terminal which is the power supply terminal of the payout control crystal oscillator PX0, the VDD terminal which is the power supply terminal of the payout control MPU4120a, and the like, which will be described later. ..

The VDD terminal of the payout control MPU4120a is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor PC3 whose one end is grounded to ground (GND), and the + 5V applied to the VDD terminal is further stripped of ripples by the capacitor PC3 and smoothed. ing. The VSS terminal, which is the ground terminal of the payout control MPU4120a, is grounded to the ground (GND).

Further, the VDD terminal of the payout control MPU4120a is electrically connected to the anode terminal of the diode PD0 in addition to being electrically connected to the capacitor PC3. The cathode terminal of the diode PD0 is electrically connected to the VBB terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the RAM (RAM with built-in payout control) built in the payout control MPU4120a, and one end of the capacitor PC4 is grounded to ground (GND). It is electrically connected to the other end of the. The VBB terminal of the RAM with built-in payout control is electrically connected to the cathode terminal of the diode PD0 and the other end of the capacitor PC4, and is also connected to the plus of the capacitor BC1 of the power supply board 851 shown in FIG. 17 via the resistor PR0. It is electrically connected to the terminal. That is, the + 5V smoothed by removing the noise component by the payout control filter circuit 4110a is applied to the VDD terminal of the payout control MPU4120a, and is applied to the VBB terminal of the payout control built-in RAM and the capacitor BC1 via the diode PD0. It is designed to be applied to the positive terminal of. As a result, as described above, when the + 5V created by the power supply creation circuit 855d of the power supply board 851 shown in FIG. 17 is no longer supplied to the payout control board 4110, the electric charge charged in the capacitor BC1 is paid VBB. Since the electric charge is supplied to the payout control board 4110, the current is blocked by the diode PD0 and does not flow to the VDD terminal of the payout control MPU4120a, and the payout control MPU4120a does not operate. The stored contents are retained by applying the pay VBB.

[11-2. Payout control circuit]
In addition to the payout control MPU 4120a, the payout control input circuit 4120b, the payout control output circuit 4120c, the payout motor drive circuit 4120d, and the CR unit input / output circuit 4120e, the payout control unit 4120 resets as peripheral circuits as shown in FIG. The payout control system reset PIC1 that outputs a signal and the payout control crystal oscillator PX0 that outputs a clock signal (8 megahertz (MHz) in this embodiment) are mainly configured. Here, the payout control system reset will be described first, and then the payout control crystal oscillator, the payout control input circuit, the payout motor drive circuit, the CR unit input / output circuit, and various input / output signals to the payout control MPU will be described.

[11-2-1. Payout control system reset]
As shown in FIG. 26, + 5V smoothed by removing the noise component by the payout control filter circuit 4110a is applied to the power supply terminal of the payout control system reset PIC1. The payout control system reset PIC1 resets the payout control MPU 4120a and the payout control output circuit 4120ca with a reset function, respectively, and has a built-in delay circuit. The delay capacitance terminal of the payout control system reset PIC1 is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor PC5 whose one end is grounded to ground (GND), and the delay time by the delay circuit is set by the capacitance of this capacitor PC5. You can do it. Specifically, the payout control system reset PIC1 outputs a system reset signal from the output terminal after the delay time elapses when the + 5V input to the power supply terminal reaches a threshold value (for example, 4.25V).

The output terminal of the payout control system reset PIC1 is electrically connected to the SRT0 terminal, which is the reset terminal of the payout control MPU4120a, and the reset terminal of the payout control output circuit 4120ca with a reset function. The output terminal is an open collector output type, and is a capacitor whose one end is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor PR1 which is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line, and one end is grounded to ground (GND). It is electrically connected to the other end of the PC 6. This capacitor PC6 plays a role as a low-pass filter. When the voltage input to the power supply terminal is larger than the threshold value, the output terminal is pulled up to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR1 and the logic becomes HI, and this logic becomes the SRT0 terminal of the payout control MPU4120a and the payout control output with a reset function. While each is input to the reset terminal of the circuit 4120ca, when the voltage input to the power supply terminal is smaller than the threshold value, the logic becomes LOW, and this logic becomes the SRT0 terminal of the payout control MPU 4120a and the payout control output circuit 4120ca with a reset function. It is input to each reset terminal. Since the SRT0 terminal of the payout control MPU 4120a and the reset terminal of the payout control output circuit 4120ca with a reset function are negative logic inputs, respectively, when the voltage input to the power supply terminal becomes smaller than the threshold value, the payout control MPU 4120a and the reset function The payout control output circuit 4120ca is reset. The power supply terminal is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor PC7 whose one end is grounded to ground (GND), and the + 5V input to the power supply terminal is smoothed by removing ripples. Further, the ground terminal is grounded to the grant (GND), and the NC terminal is not electrically connected to the outside.

[11-2-2. Payout control crystal oscillator]
As shown in FIG. 26, the + 5V smoothed by removing the noise component by the payout control filter circuit 4110a is input to the VCS terminal which is the power supply terminal of the payout control crystal oscillator PX0. This VCS terminal is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor PC8 whose one end is grounded to ground (GND), and the + 5V input to the VCS terminal is further smoothed by removing ripples. Further, this smoothed + 5V is applied not only to the VCS terminal but also to the OE terminal which is the output enable terminal of the payout control crystal oscillator PX0. The payout control crystal oscillator PX0 outputs an 8 MHz clock signal from the OUT terminal, which is an output terminal, by applying + 5 V to its OE terminal.

The OUT terminal of the payout control crystal oscillator PX0 is electrically connected to the MCLK terminal, which is the clock terminal of the payout control MPU4120a, and an 8 MHz clock signal is input to the payout control MPU4120a. The GND terminal, which is the ground terminal of the payout control crystal oscillator PX0, is grounded to the grant (GND).

[11-2-3. Payout control input circuit]
The payout control input circuit 4120b receives a payout power failure warning signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 4100e provided in the door frame opening switch 618, the main body frame opening switch 619, and the main control board 4100 shown in FIG. The circuit, the handle relay terminal plate 192 shown in FIG. 12, the circuit in which the detection signal from the full tank switch 550 is input via the power supply board 851, the circuit in which the operation signal from the operation switch 860a is input, and FIG. The circuit in which the payout contact signal from the touch switch 516 of the handle device 500 shown is input via the power supply board 851, and the launch control circuit 857a of the launch control unit 857 provided in the power supply board 851 to the handle device 500 shown in FIG. This is a circuit or the like in which a payout right-handed signal is input when the rotation position of the 506 in front of the main body of the rotary handle reaches the right-handed set position (100 degrees (100 °)) shown in FIG. 19 (a). First, the circuit in which the detection signal from the door frame opening switch is input will be described, followed by the circuit in which the detection signal from the main body frame opening switch is input, the circuit in which the payout power failure warning signal from the power failure monitoring circuit is input, and the circuit in which the payout power failure warning signal from the power failure monitoring circuit is input. A circuit to which the detection signal from the full tank switch is input, a circuit to which the operation signal from the operation switch is input, a circuit to which the payout contact signal from the touch switch is input, and a circuit to pay out from the launch control circuit of the power supply board. A circuit to which a signal is input will be described. Since the output terminals of various detection switches such as the full tank switch 550, the ball-out switch 750, the counting switch 751, and the rotation angle switch 752 shown in FIG. 12 are open collector output types, the various detection switches can be used. Since the circuit configuration in which the detection signal is input is almost the same, a circuit in which the detection signal from the full switch is input will be described here.

[11-2-3 (a). Circuit to which the detection signal from the door frame open switch is input]
The door frame opening switch 618 uses a normally closed type (normally closed (NC)), and the switch is turned on (conducting) with the door frame 5 released from the main body frame 3 as shown in FIG. 1, and the door frame is turned on. The switch is turned off (disconnected) when 5 is closed to the main body frame 3. The 2nd terminal of the door frame opening switch 618 is grounded to the ground (GND), while the 1st terminal of the door frame opening switch 618 has a pull-up resistor PR20 whose one end is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line. It is electrically connected to the end and is also electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR 20 via a resistor PR21. The base terminal of the transistor PTR 20 is electrically connected to the resistor PR21, and is also electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR22 whose one end is grounded to ground (GND). Further, the first terminal of the door frame opening switch 618 is electrically connected to the pull-up resistor PR20, and is also electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor PC20 whose one end is grounded to the ground (GND). .. The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR20 is grounded to ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR20 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR23, one end of which is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line, and a non-inverting buffer. Payout control via ICPIC20 (the non-inverting buffer ICPIC20 includes eight non-inverting buffer circuits, and formats and outputs the logic of the signal waveform input to one of them (PIC20A) without inverting it). It is electrically connected to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the MPU4120a. When the transistor PTR 20 is turned ON / OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR 20 changes, and the signal is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU4120a as a door opening signal.

Further, the first terminal of the door frame opening switch 618 is pulled up to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR20 and electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR20 via the resistor PR21, and is also connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR20 by the pull-up resistor PR20 on the + 5V side. It is pulled up to and electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR21 via a resistor PR24. In addition to being electrically connected to the resistor PR24, the base terminal of the transistor PTR21 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR25, one end of which is grounded to ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR21 is grounded to ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR21 is electrically connected to the external terminal plate 784 via wiring (harness). When the collector terminal of the transistor PTR21 is electrically connected to the external terminal plate 784 via wiring (harness), one end of the external terminal plate 784 is electrically connected to the + 12V power supply line, which is not shown. It is electrically connected to the other end of the up resistor. When the transistor PTR21 is turned ON / OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR21 is changed, and the signal is input to the external terminal plate 784 as the outer end frame door opening information output signal.

Further, the first terminal of the door frame opening switch 618 is pulled up to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR20 and electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR20 via the resistor PR21, and is also electrically connected to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR20. In addition to being pulled up to the base terminal of the transistor PTR21 via the resistor PR24, it is pulled up to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR20 and electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR22 via the resistor PR26. ing. In addition to being electrically connected to the resistor PR26, the base terminal of the transistor PTR22 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR27 whose one end is grounded to ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR22 is grounded to ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR22 is electrically connected to the main control board 4100 shown in FIG. 11 via wiring (harness). When the collector terminal of the transistor PTR22 is electrically connected to the main control board 4100 via wiring (harness), one end of the main control input circuit 4100b of the main control board 4100 shown in FIG. 11 is a + 12V power supply. It is electrically connected to the other end of a pull-up resistor (not shown) that is electrically connected to the line. When the transistor PTR22 is turned ON / OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR22 changes, and the signal is input to the main control board 4100 as a main frame door opening signal.

The circuit composed of the pull-up resistor PR20 and the capacitor PC20 is a switch signal generation circuit, and when the door frame 5 is opened from the main body frame 3 or when the door frame 5 is closed by the main body frame 3. It is configured as a circuit having a function of absorbing voltage fluctuations from the door frame opening switch 618 due to a fluttering phenomenon in which the contacts constituting the door frame opening switch 618 are repeatedly turned on and off for a short time.

The circuit composed of the resistors PR21, PR22 and the transistor PTR20, the circuit composed of the resistors PR24, PR25 and the transistor PTR21, and the circuit composed of the resistors PR26, PR27 and the transistor PTR22 are door frame opening switches. It is a switch circuit that turns ON / OFF according to the detection signal from 618.

When the door frame 5 is opened from the main body frame 3, the door frame opening switch 618 is turned on, so that the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR 20 is lowered to the ground (GND) side, so that the transistor PTR 20 is opened. It turns off, and the switch circuit also turns off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR20 is pulled up to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR23, and the door frame opening signal whose logic is HI is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU4120a. To. Further, in the state where the door frame 5 is opened from the main body frame 3, since the door frame opening switch 618 is ON, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR21 is lowered to the ground (GND) side, so that the transistor The PTR21 is turned off, and the switch circuit is also turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR21 is pulled up to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistor of the external terminal plate 784 via the wiring (harness), and the logic becomes HI. Is input to the external terminal board 784. Further, in the state where the door frame 5 is opened from the main body frame 3, since the door frame opening switch 618 is ON, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR22 is lowered to the ground (GND) side, so that the transistor The PTR 22 is turned off, and the switch circuit is also turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR22 is pulled up to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistance of the main control input circuit 4100b of the main control board 4100 via the wiring (harness), and the logic becomes HI. The door opening signal is input to the main control board 4100.

On the other hand, when the door frame 5 is closed from the main body frame 3, the door frame opening switch 618 is turned off, so that the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR 20 is pulled up to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR20. Then, the transistor PTR20 is turned on, and the switch circuit is also turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR20 is lowered to the ground (GND) side, and the door frame opening signal whose logic is LOW is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU4120a. Further, when the door frame 5 is closed from the main body frame 3, the door frame opening switch 618 is turned off, so that the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR 21 is raised to the + 5 V side, so that the transistor PTR 21 is turned on. However, the switch circuit will also be turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR21 is lowered to the ground (GND) side, and the outer end frame door opening information output signal whose logic is LOW is input to the external terminal plate 784. Further, when the door frame 5 is closed from the main body frame 3, the door frame opening switch 618 is turned off, so that the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR 22 is raised to the + 5 V side, so that the transistor PTR 22 is turned on. However, the switch circuit will also be turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR22 is lowered to the ground (GND) side, and the main frame door opening signal whose logic is LOW is input to the main control board 4100.

In this way, when the door frame 5 is opened from the main body frame 3, when the door frame opening switch 618 is turned on, the door frame opening signal whose logic is HI is the input terminal of the input port PA of the payout control MPU4120a. The outer end frame door opening information output signal input to PA0 and whose logic is HI is input to the external terminal board 784, and the main frame door opening signal whose logic is HI is input to the main control board 4100. When the door frame 5 is closed to the main body frame 3, the door frame opening switch 618 is turned off, so that the door frame opening signal whose logic is LOW is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU4120a. , The outer end frame door opening information output signal whose logic is LOW is input to the external terminal board 784, and the main frame door opening signal whose logic is LOW is input to the main control board 4100.

[11-2-3 (b). Circuit to which the detection signal from the main body frame release switch is input]
The main body frame release switch 619 uses a normally closed type (normally closed (NC)), and the switch is turned on (conducting) in a state where the main body frame 3 is released from the outer frame 2 as shown in FIG. 1, and the main body frame is turned on. The switch is turned off (disconnected) when 3 is closed to the outer frame 2. The 2nd terminal of the main body frame opening switch 619 is grounded to the ground (GND), while the 1st terminal of the main body frame opening switch 619 has a pull-up resistor PR28 whose one end is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line. It is electrically connected to the end and is also electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR23 via a resistor PR29. In addition to being electrically connected to the resistor PR29, the base terminal of the transistor PTR23 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR30 whose one end is grounded to ground (GND). In addition to being electrically connected to the pull-up resistor PR28, the first terminal of the main body frame release switch 619 is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor PC21 whose one end is grounded to ground (GND). .. The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR23 is grounded to ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR23 is electrically connected to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR21 described above, and is connected to the external terminal plate 784 via wiring (harness). It is electrically connected. When the collector terminal of the transistor PTR23 is electrically connected to the external terminal plate 784 via wiring (harness), one end of the external terminal plate 784 is electrically connected to the + 12V power supply line, which is not shown. It is electrically connected to the other end of the up resistor. When the transistor PTR23 is turned ON / OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR23 is changed, and the signal is input to the external terminal plate 784 as the outer end frame door opening information output signal.

Further, the first terminal of the main body frame opening switch 619 is pulled up to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR28 and electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR23 via the resistor PR29, and is also connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR23 by the pull-up resistor PR28 on the + 5V side. It is pulled up to and electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR24 via a resistor PR31. In addition to being electrically connected to the resistor PR31, the base terminal of the transistor PTR24 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR32, one end of which is grounded to ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR24 is grounded to ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR24 is electrically connected to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR22 described above, and is shown in FIG. 11 via wiring (harness). It is electrically connected to the main control board 4100. When the collector terminal of the transistor PTR24 is electrically connected to the main control board 4100 via wiring (harness), one end of the main control input circuit 4100b of the main control board 4100 shown in FIG. 11 is a + 12V power supply. It is electrically connected to the other end of a pull-up resistor (not shown) that is electrically connected to the line. When the transistor PTR24 is turned ON / OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR24 changes, and the signal is input to the main control board 4100 as a main frame door opening signal.

The circuit composed of the pull-up resistor PR28 and the capacitor PC21 is a switch signal generation circuit, and when the main body frame 3 is released from the outer frame 2 or when the main body frame 3 is closed by the outer frame 2. It is configured as a circuit having a function of absorbing voltage fluctuations from the main body frame opening switch 619 due to a fluttering phenomenon in which the contacts constituting the main body frame opening switch 619 are repeatedly turned on and off for a short time.

The circuit composed of the resistors PR29 and PR30 and the transistor PTR23 and the circuit composed of the resistors PR31, PR32 and the transistor PTR24 are switch circuits that are turned ON / OFF by a detection signal from the main body frame opening switch 619.

When the main body frame 3 is released from the outer frame 2, since the main body frame opening switch 619 is ON, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR23 is lowered to the ground (GND) side, so that the transistor PTR23 is opened. It turns off, and the switch circuit also turns off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR23 is pulled up to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistor of the external terminal plate 784 via the wiring (harness), and the logic becomes HI. Is input to the external terminal board 784. Further, in the state where the main body frame 3 is opened from the outer frame 2, since the main body frame opening switch 619 is ON, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR24 is lowered to the ground (GND) side, so that the transistor The PTR24 is turned off, and the switch circuit is also turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR24 is pulled up to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistance of the main control input circuit 4100b of the main control board 4100 via the wiring (harness), and the logic becomes HI. The door opening signal is input to the main control board 4100.

On the other hand, when the main body frame 3 is closed to the outer frame 2, since the main body frame opening switch 619 is OFF, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR23 is pulled up to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR28. Then, the transistor PTR23 is turned on, and the switch circuit is also turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR23 is lowered to the ground (GND) side in the external terminal plate 784 via the wiring (harness), and the logic becomes LOW. It is input to the external terminal board 784. Further, in the state where the main body frame 3 is closed to the outer frame 2, since the main body frame opening switch 619 is OFF, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR24 is pulled up to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR28. Then, the transistor PTR24 is turned on, and the switch circuit is also turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR24 is lowered to the ground (GND) side in the main control board 4100 via the wiring (harness), and the main frame door opening signal whose logic becomes LOW is the main control board. It is input to 4100.

In this way, when the main body frame 3 is released from the outer frame 2, the main body frame opening switch 619 is turned on, so that the outer end frame door opening information output signal whose logic is HI is input to the external terminal board 784. The main frame door opening signal whose logic is HI is input to the main control board 4100, while the main body frame 3 is closed to the outer frame 2, and the main body frame opening switch 619 is turned off to perform logic. The outer end frame door opening information output signal whose logic is LOW is input to the external terminal board 784, and the main frame door opening signal whose logic is LOW is input to the main control board 4100.

In the present embodiment, as described above, either one or both of the state in which the door frame 5 is closed to the main body frame 3 and the state in which the main body frame 3 is opened from the outer frame 2 Even in the case of, since the main frame door opening signal is input to the main control board 4100, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 shown in FIG. 11 is the main frame door opening signal. Although it is not possible to determine whether the door frame 5 is open from the main body frame 3 or the main body frame 3 is open from the outer frame 2, the door frame 5 and / or The player can determine that the main body frame 3 is open, which does not occur during the normal game, and the outer end frame door opening information output signal is sent to the external terminal plate 784. Since it is input, this outer end frame door opening information output signal is transmitted to the hall computer via the external terminal plate 784, and the hall computer is based on the outer end frame door opening information output signal. Although it is not possible to determine whether 5 is in a state of being released from the main body frame 3 or in a state in which the main body frame 3 is released from the outer frame 2, the door frame 5 and / or the main body frame 3 is opened. It is possible to determine that the player who says that the door is in a state that does not occur during the normal game.

Further, in the present embodiment, as described above, by adopting the normally closed switch for the door frame opening switch 618 and the main body frame opening switch 619, the door frame opening switch 618 is short-circuited for some reason and the switch is turned on ( Even if the door frame 5 is released from the main body frame 3 and the main body frame opening switch 619 is short-circuited for some reason and the switch is turned on (conducting), the main body frame 3 is in a state of being released from the outer frame 2. In this way, by adopting the normally closed switch for the door frame opening switch 618 and the main body frame opening switch 619, the main frame door opening signal can be output to the main control board 4100 even when a short circuit occurs, and the outer end can be output. The frame door opening information output signal can be transmitted to the hall computer via the external terminal board 784.

If the door frame opening switch 618 and the main body frame opening switch 619 are changed from the normally closed switch to the normally open type (normally open (NO)) switch (door frame opening switch 618'and main body frame opening switch 619'), , The door frame opening switch 618'turns on (conducts) when the door frame 5 is closed from the main body frame 3, and turns off (disconnects) when the door frame 5 is opened to the main body frame 3. .. The main body frame opening switch 619'turns on (conducts) when the main body frame 3 is closed from the outer frame 2, and turns off (disconnects) when the main body frame 3 is opened to the outer frame 2. Then, even if the door frame opening switch 618'is disconnected for some reason and the switch is turned off (disconnected), the door frame 5 is released from the main body frame 3 and the main body is released for some reason. Even if the frame opening switch 619'is disconnected and the switch is turned off (disconnected), the main body frame 3 is released from the outer frame 2. In this way, even if the door frame opening switch 618'and the main body frame opening switch 619'are adopted as normally open switches, the main frame door opening signal can be output to the main control board 4100 even when the wire is broken. The outer end frame door opening information output signal can be transmitted to the hall computer via the external terminal plate 784.

[11-2-3 (c). A circuit to which a power outage warning signal is input from the power outage monitoring circuit]
The transmission line for transmitting the payout power failure warning signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 4100e provided in the main control board 4100 is electrically connected to and resists the other end of the pull-up resistor PR40 whose one end is electrically connected to the + 12V power supply line. It is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR40 via PR41. In addition to being electrically connected to the resistor PR41, the base terminal of the transistor PTR40 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR42, one end of which is grounded to ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR40 is grounded to ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR40 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR43, one end of which is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line, and a non-inverting buffer. Payout control via ICPIC40 (non-inverting buffer ICPIC40 includes eight non-inverting buffer circuits, and formats and outputs the logic of the signal waveform input to one of them (PIC40A) without inverting it). It is electrically connected to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the MPU4120a. When the transistor PTR40 is turned ON / OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR40 changes, and the signal is input to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU4120a as a payout power failure warning signal.

The circuit composed of the resistors PR41 and PR42 and the transistor PTR40 is a switch circuit that is turned ON / OFF by a payout power failure warning signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 4100e provided in the main control board 4100.

As described above, the power failure monitoring circuit 4100e monitors the signs of power failure or momentary power failure of two types of voltages, + 12V and + 24V, from the power supply board 851, and when the power failure or momentary power failure sign is detected, there is no reset function. A payout power failure warning signal is output to the payout control board 4110 as a power failure notice via the main control output circuit 4100 cc. The power failure monitoring circuit 4100e monitors signs of power failure or momentary power failure of + 12V and + 24V voltages, and as described above, the condition that the voltage of + 24V is larger than the power failure detection voltage V1pf, and the voltage of + 12V is higher than the power failure detection voltage V2pf. When both of the conditions of being large are satisfied, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the subsequent stage is lowered to the ground (GND) side on the payout control board 4110 via the wiring (harness), and the logic becomes LOW. While the payout power failure warning signal is input to the payout control board 4110, one of the conditions that the + 24V voltage is smaller than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the + 12V voltage is smaller than the power failure detection voltage V2pf. When the condition is satisfied, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the subsequent stage is pulled up to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistor PR40 described above via the wiring (harness), and the logic becomes HI. Is input to the payout control board 4110.

When both the condition that the voltage of + 24V is larger than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of + 12V is larger than the power failure detection voltage V2pf are satisfied, that is, there is no sign of power failure or momentary power failure of the + 12V and + 24V voltages. Occasionally, a payout power failure warning signal whose logic is LOW is input to the payout control board 4110, so that the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR40 is lowered to the ground (GND) side, so that the transistor PTR40 is turned off. The voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR40 is raised to the + 5V side by the resistor PR43. As a result, the payout power failure warning signal whose logic is HI is input from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR40 to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU4120a.

On the other hand, when either of the condition that the voltage of + 24V is smaller than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of + 12V is smaller than the power failure detection voltage V2pf is satisfied, that is, the voltage of + 12V and / or + 24V When there is a sign of power failure or momentary power failure, the payout power failure warning signal whose logic is HI is input to the payout control board 4110, so that the payout power failure warning signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 4100e is applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR40. When the voltage is pulled up to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistor PR40, the transistor PTR40 is turned on, and the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR40 is lowered to the ground (GND) side. As a result, the payout power failure warning signal in which the logic of the collector terminal of the transistor PTR40 is LOW is input to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU4120a.

In this way, when there is a sign of a power failure or momentary power failure of + 12V and / or + 24V voltage, the payout power failure warning signal whose logic is HI is input to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU4120a, while When there is no sign of a power failure or momentary power failure of the + 12V and + 24V voltages, the payout power failure warning signal whose logic is LOW is input to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU4120a. As described above, when there is a sign of a power failure or momentary power failure of + 12V and / or + 24V, a power failure warning signal whose logic is HI is input to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the main control MPU4100a. On the other hand, when there is no sign of power failure or momentary power failure of + 12V and + 24V voltage, the power failure warning signal is input to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the main control MPU4100a, so that the power failure monitoring circuit 4100e The logic of the payout power failure warning signal input to the payout control MPU 4120a and the logic of the power failure warning signal input to the main control MPU 4100a according to the power failure notice are the same logic.

[11-2-3 (d). Circuit to which the detection signal from the full switch is input]
The detection signal from the full switch 550 provided in the foul cover unit 540 shown in FIG. 1 is transmitted to the payout control board 4110 via the handle relay terminal board 192 shown in FIG. 1 and the power supply board 851 shown in FIG. It has been entered. The output terminal of the full switch 550 is configured as an open collector output type in which the emitter terminal is grounded to ground (GND), and one end of the payout control board 4110 is electrically connected to the + 12V power supply line. It is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor PR44a and is also electrically connected to the first terminal of the 3-terminal filter PIC50 for a full tank switch. The 3-terminal filter PIC50 for a full-tan switch is a T-type filter circuit, which is magnetically shielded with ferrite and has excellent attenuation characteristics.

The 2nd terminal of the 3-terminal filter PIC50 for a full-tan switch is grounded to ground (GND), and the 3rd terminal of the 3-terminal filter PIC50 for a full-tan switch is a 3-terminal filter PIC50 for a full-tan switch via a resistor PR44b. It is electrically connected to the first terminal of the transistor PTR41 and also electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR41 via the resistor PR45. As a result, the detection signal of the full-tan switch 550 is input to the base terminal of the transistor PTR 41 after the noise component is removed in the 3-terminal filter PIC50 for the full-tan switch. In addition to being electrically connected to the resistor PR45, the base terminal of the transistor PTR41 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR46, one end of which is grounded to ground (GND), and one end to ground (GND). It is electrically connected to the other end of the electrically connected capacitor PC40. The capacitor PC 40 plays a role as a low-pass filter. The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR41 is grounded to ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR41 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR47, one end of which is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line, and a non-inverting buffer. Payout control via ICPIC40 (the non-inverting buffer ICPIC40 includes eight non-inverting buffer circuits, and formats and outputs the logic of the signal waveform input to one of them (PIC40B) without inverting it). It is electrically connected to the input terminal PA2 of the input port PA of the MPU4120a. When the transistor PTR41 is turned ON / OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR41 changes, and the signal is input to the input terminal PA2 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU4120a as a full tank signal.

The circuit composed of the resistors PR45 and PR46 and the transistor PTR41 is a switch circuit that is turned ON / OFF by a detection signal from the full switch 550.

As described above, the full tank switch 550 detects whether or not the game ball in which the accommodation space in the second ball passage of the foul cover unit 540 is stored is full. In the present embodiment, when the accommodation space is not full in the stored game ball, the voltage applied to the output terminal of the full tank switch 550 is discharged via the handle relay terminal plate 192 and the power supply board 851. When the signal that the pull-up resistor 44a pulls up to the + 12V side in the control board 4110 and the logic becomes HI is input to the payout control board 4110, while the accommodation space is full of the stored game balls, The voltage applied to the output terminal of the full switch 550 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side on the payout control board 4110 via the handle relay terminal board 192 and the power supply board 851, and a signal whose logic is LOW is paid out. It is input to the control board 4110.

When the accommodation space is not full in the stored game ball, the voltage applied to the output terminal of the full tank switch 550 is pulled on the payout control board 4110 via the handle relay terminal board 192 and the power supply board 851. When the signal pulled up to the + 12V side by the up resistor 44a and the logic becomes HI is input to the base terminal of the above-mentioned transistor PTR41, the transistor PTR41 is turned on and the switch circuit is also turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR41 is lowered to the ground (GND) side, and the full tank signal whose logic is LOW is input to the input terminal PA2 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU4120a.

On the other hand, when the game ball in which the accommodation space is stored is full, the voltage applied to the output terminal of the full tank switch 550 is passed through the handle relay terminal board 192 and the power supply board 851 to the payout control board 4110. When the signal pulled down to the ground (GND) side and the logic becomes LOW is input to the base terminal of the above-mentioned transistor PTR41, the transistor PTR41 is turned off and the switch circuit is also turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR41 is pulled up to the + 5V side by the resistor PR47, and the full tank signal whose logic is HI is input to the input terminal PA2 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU4120a.

In the present embodiment, the detection signal from the full switch 550 is input to the switch circuit composed of the resistor PR45, the resistor PR46, and the transistor PTR41 via the 3-terminal filter PIC50 for the full switch. However, the detection signals from various detection switches such as the ball-out switch 750, the counting switch 751, and the rotation angle switch 752 shown in FIG. 12 are T-type filter circuits such as the 3-terminal filter PIC50 for a full tank switch. The circuit configuration is such that it is directly input to each switch circuit without going through. Since the full tank switch 550 is provided on the foul cover unit 540 attached to the door frame 5, the ball-out switch 750, the counting switch 751, and the rotation angle switch 752 provided on the prize ball device 740 attached to the main body frame 3 are provided. The path for transmitting the detection signal is extremely long, and it is extremely susceptible to noise.

The full tank switch 550 detects whether or not the accommodation space in the second ball passage of the foul cover unit 540 is full with the stored game ball, and the payout control MPU 4120a is from the full tank switch 550. When it is determined that the game ball in which the accommodation space is stored is full based on the detection signal of, the drive control of the payout motor 744 is forcibly stopped to stop the payout of the game ball by the payout rotating body. It is supposed to do. That is, when noise invades the transmission path (transmission line) that transmits the detection signal from the full tank switch 550, the payout control MPU4120a drives the payout motor 744 even though the game ball in which the accommodation space is stored is not full. In some cases, the control is forcibly stopped to stop the payout of the game ball by the payout rotating body, or the payout motor 744 is driven and controlled even though the game ball in which the accommodation space is stored is full. Then, when the payout rotating body is rotated to continue paying out the game ball and the game ball is filled up to the upstream side of the prize ball passage described above, the payout rotating body itself cannot rotate and the payout motor 744 becomes The load may be abnormally applied, and the payout motor 744 may become overloaded and generate abnormal heat and fail, or the mechanism for transmitting the rotating shaft of the payout motor 744 to the rotational movement of the payout rotating body may break down. .. Therefore, in the present embodiment, in order to prevent such a problem from occurring, a circuit configuration is adopted so that the noise component is first removed from the detection signal from the full tank switch 550 in the 3-terminal filter PIC 50 for the full tank switch. ..

[11-2-3 (e). Circuit to which the operation signal from the operation switch is input]
The 1st and 2nd terminals, which are the output terminals of the operation switch 860a, are grounded to the ground (GND), and the 3rd and 4th terminals, which are the output terminals of the operation switch 860a, are moved to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR48. It is pulled up and connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR42 in the previous stage via a resistor PR49 and electrically. In addition to being electrically connected to the resistor PR49, the base terminal of the transistor PTR42 in the previous stage is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR50 whose one end is grounded to ground (GND). In addition to being electrically connected to the pull-up resistor PR48, the fourth terminal, which is the output terminal of the operation switch 860a, is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor PC41 whose one end is grounded to ground (GND). ing. The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR42 in the previous stage is grounded to ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR42 in the previous stage is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR51 whose one end is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line. At the same time, it is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR43 in the subsequent stage via the resistor PR52. The base terminal of the transistor PTR43 in the subsequent stage is electrically connected to the resistor PR52, and is also electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR53 whose one end is grounded to ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the latter transistor PTR43 is grounded to ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the latter transistor PTR43 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR54, one end of which is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line. The non-inverting buffer ICPIC40 (the non-inverting buffer ICPIC40 includes eight non-inverting buffer circuits, and the logic of the signal waveform input to one of them (PIC40C) is formatted and output without being inverted). It is electrically connected to the input terminal PA3 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU4120a via. When the first-stage and second-stage transistors PTR42 and PTR43 are turned ON / OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the second-stage transistor PTR43 changes, and the signal becomes the RWMCLR signal as the input terminal PA3 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU4120a. Is entered in.

In addition, the 3rd and 4th terminals, which are the output terminals of the operation switch 860a, are pulled up to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR48 and are electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR42 in the previous stage via the resistor PR49. It is pulled up to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR48 and is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR44 via the resistor PR55. In addition to being electrically connected to the resistor PR55, the base terminal of the transistor PTR44 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR56, one end of which is grounded to ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR44 is grounded to ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR44 is electrically connected to the main control board 4100 via wiring (harness). When the collector terminal of the transistor PTR44 is electrically connected to the main control board 4100 via a wiring (harness), one end of the main control input circuit 4100b of the main control board 4100 shown in FIG. 23 is + 12V. It is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor MR2 that is electrically connected to the power supply line. When the transistor PTR44 is turned ON / OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR44 changes, and the signal is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the main control MPU4100a as a RAM clear signal.

The circuit composed of the pull-up resistor PR48 and the capacitor PC41 is a switch signal generation circuit, and when the operation switch 860a is pressed, the contacts constituting the operation switch 860a repeat ON / OFF for a short time. It is configured as a circuit having a function of absorbing the fluctuation of the voltage from the operation switch 860a by the above.

The circuit composed of the resistors PR49, PR50 and the transistor PTR42 is the switch circuit in the front stage, and the circuit composed of the resistors PR52, PR53 and the transistor PTR43 is the switch circuit in the latter stage, and the resistors PR55, PR56 and the transistor PTR44. The circuit composed of the above is a switch circuit, which is turned ON / OFF by an operation signal from the operation switch 860a.

As described above, the operation switch 860a is used in the RAM (RAM with built-in payout control) built in the payout control MPU 4120a of the payout control board 4110 and the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 within a predetermined period from the time when the power is turned on. It is operated when clearing the built-in RAM (main control built-in RAM), or when an error is notified after the power is turned on, it is operated to clear the error, and the power is turned on. The function to clear the RAM within a predetermined period from time and the error cancellation after the power is turned on (after the period during which the function as RAM clear is performed, that is, after the predetermined period has elapsed from the time when the power is turned on). It has a function. The operation signal from the operation switch 860a becomes a RAM clear signal in the function of clearing the RAM within a predetermined period from the time when the power is turned on, while after the power is turned on (after a predetermined period has elapsed from the time when the power is turned on). ) Is an error release signal.

When the operation switch 860a is not operated, the operation signal whose logic is HI is the transistor in the previous stage because the 3rd and 4th terminals, which are the output terminals of the operation switch 860a, are pulled up to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR48. It is input to the base terminal of the PTR42, the transistor PTR42 in the previous stage is turned on, the switch circuit in the previous stage is also turned on, and it is applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR43 in the previous stage, which is the voltage applied to the base of the transistor PTR43 in the subsequent stage. When the voltage is lowered to the ground (GND) side, the transistor PTR43 in the subsequent stage is turned off, and the switch circuit in the subsequent stage is also turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR43 in the subsequent stage is pulled up to the + 5V side by the resistor PR54, and the RWMCLR signal whose logic is HI is input to the input terminal PA3 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU4120a. The payout control MPU4120a performs RAM clearing that erases the information stored in the payout control built-in RAM when the logic of the RWMCLR signal input to the input terminal PA3 is HI within a predetermined period from the time when the power is turned on. It is judged that it is not an instruction, and after the power is turned on (after a predetermined period has passed since the power was turned on), if the logic of the RWMCLR signal input to the input terminal PA3 is HI, the error is cleared. Judge that it is not an instruction.

When the operation switch 860a is not operated, the operation signal whose logic is HI is the transistor PTR44 when the output terminals of the operation switch 860a, the 3rd terminal and the 4th terminal, are pulled up to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR48. The transistor PTR44 is turned on by being input to the base terminal of, and the switch circuit is also turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR44 is lowered to the ground (GND) side of the main control board 4100 via the wiring (harness), and the RAM clear signal whose logic is LOW is sent to the main control board 4100. Entered. When the RAM clear signal whose logic is LOW is input to the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 within a predetermined period from the time when the power is turned on, as described above, this logic is LOW. When the RAM clear signal is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR0, the transistor MTR0 is turned off and the switch circuit is also turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR0 is pulled up to the + 5V side by the resistor MR5, and the RAM clear signal whose logic is HI is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the main control MPU4100a. The main control MPU4100a determines that when the logic of the RAM clear signal input to the input terminal PA0 is HI, it does not instruct to perform RAM clear for erasing the information stored in the main control built-in RAM.

On the other hand, when the operation switch 860a is being operated, the operation signal whose logic is LOW is the transistor in the previous stage because the 3rd and 4th terminals, which are the output terminals of the operation switch 860a, are pulled down to the ground (GND) side. The voltage applied to the base terminal of the PTR42 is applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR42 in the previous stage, which is the voltage applied to the base of the transistor PTR43 in the subsequent stage, which is the voltage applied to the base of the transistor PTR43 in the subsequent stage. When the voltage is raised to the + 5V side by the resistor PR51, the transistor PTR43 in the subsequent stage is turned on, and the switch circuit in the subsequent stage is also turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR43 in the subsequent stage is lowered to the ground (GND) side, and the RWMCLR signal whose logic is LOW is input to the input terminal PA3 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU4120a. The payout control MPU4120a performs RAM clearing that erases the information stored in the payout control built-in RAM when the logic of the RWMCLR signal input to the input terminal PA3 is LOW within a predetermined period from the time when the power is turned on. It is determined that the signal is to be instructed, and after the power is turned on (after a predetermined period has elapsed since the power was turned on), if the logic of the RWMCLR signal input to the input terminal PA3 is LOW, the error is cleared. Judge that it is an instruction.

Further, when the operation switch 860a is operated, the output terminals of the operation switch 860a, the 3rd terminal and the 4th terminal, are pulled down to the ground (GND) side by the pull-up resistor PR48, so that the logic becomes LOW. A signal is input to the base terminal of the transistor PTR44, the transistor PTR44 is turned off, and the switch circuit is also turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR44 is pulled up to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistor MR2 of the main control input circuit 4100b of the main control board 4100 via the wiring (harness), and the logic becomes HI. The clear signal is input to the main control board 4100. When the RAM clear signal whose logic is HI is input to the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 within a predetermined period from the time when the power is turned on, as described above, this logic is HI. When the RAM clear signal is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR0, the transistor MTR0 is turned on and the switch circuit is also turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR0 is lowered to the ground (GND) side, and the RAM clear signal whose logic is LOW is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the main control MPU4100a. The main control MPU4100a determines that when the logic of the RAM clear signal input to the input terminal PA0 is LOW, the main control MPU4100a instructs to perform RAM clear to erase the information stored in the main control built-in RAM.

[11-2-3 (f). Circuit to which the payout contact signal from the touch switch is input]
The detection signal (contact signal 1) from the touch switch 516 included in the handle device 500 shown in FIG. 7 is input to the payout control board 4110 via the power supply board 851 as shown in FIG. 22. The output terminal of the touch switch 516 is configured as an open collector output type in which the emitter terminal is grounded to ground (GND). As shown in FIG. 29, one end of the payout control board 4110 is a + 12V power supply line and electricity. It is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor PR57a to be electrically connected, and is also electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR45 via the resistor PR57b. The base terminal of the transistor PTR45 is electrically connected to the resistor PR57b, and is also electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR57c whose one end is grounded to ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR45 is grounded to ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR45 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR57d, one end of which is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line, and a non-inverting buffer. Payout control via ICPIC40 (non-inverting buffer ICPIC40 includes eight non-inverting buffer circuits, and formats and outputs the logic of the signal waveform input to one of them (PIC40D) without inverting it). It is electrically connected to the input terminal PA6 of the input port PA of the MPU4120a. When the transistor PTR45 is turned ON / OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR45 changes, and the signal is input to the input terminal PA6 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU4120a as a payout connection signal.

The circuit composed of the resistors PR57b, PR57c, and the transistor PTR45 is turned ON / OFF by the payout contact signal in which the detection signal (contact signal 1) from the touch switch 516 provided in the handle device 500 is input via the power supply board 851. It is a switch circuit.

As described above, the touch switch 516 is a capacitive switch that detects whether or not the palm or finger is touching the rotary handle main body front 506, and has an open collector output. The touch switch 516 is turned on when the palm or finger is touching the rotary handle main body front 506, and is turned off when the palm or finger is not touching the rotary handle main body front 506. When the palm or finger is touching the front 506 of the rotary handle body, as described above, when the touch switch 516 is turned on, the touch switch 516 has an open collector output, so that the collector terminal of the transistor of the touch switch 516 is grounded. The logic of the detection signal (contact signal 1) from the touch switch 516 is lowered to the (GND) side, and the logic applied to the base terminal of the transistor WTR3 shown in FIG. 22 is also lowered to the ground (GND) side. As a result, the transistor WTR3 is turned off, and the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor WTR3 is + 12V side by the pull-up resistor PR57a in the payout control input circuit 4120b of the payout control unit 4120 in the payout control board 4110 via the wiring (harness). The payout contact signal whose logic became HI by being pulled up to is input to the payout control board 4110, while the touch switch 516 is turned off as described above when the palm or finger is not touched on the rotary handle main body front 506. As a result, since the touch switch 516 has an open collector output, the collector terminal of the transistor of the touch switch 516 is pulled up to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistance WR0 of the waste hit prevention circuit 857c, so that the detection from the touch switch 516 is detected. The logic of the signal (contact signal 1) becomes HI, and the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor WTR3 shown in FIG. 22 is also pulled up to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistor WR0, so that the transistor WTR3 is turned on and the transistor WTR3 The voltage applied to the collector terminal is lowered to the ground (GND) side of the payout control board 4110 via the wiring (harness), so that the payout contact signal whose logic is LOW is input to the payout control board 4110.

When the palm or finger is touching the front 506 of the rotary handle body, the payout contact signal whose logic is HI is input to the payout control board 4110, and is applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR45 by this payout connection signal. When the voltage is pulled up to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistor PR57a, the transistor PTR45 is turned on, and the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR45 is lowered to the ground (GND) side. As a result, the payout contact signal in which the logic of the collector terminal of the transistor PTR45 is LOW is input to the input terminal PA6 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU4120a. The payout control MPU4120a determines (determines) that the palm or finger is touching the rotary handle main body front 506 when the logic of the payout contact signal input to the input terminal PA6 is LOW, and the main control board 4100 determines that fact. Tell to. The main control board 4100 informs the peripheral control board 4140 shown in FIG. 11 that the palm or finger is touching the rotary handle main body front 506.

On the other hand, when the palm or finger is not touched on the front 506 of the rotary handle body, the payout contact signal whose logic is LOW is input to the payout control board 4110, so that the payout connection signal is applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR45. When the voltage to be applied is lowered to the ground (GND) side, the transistor PTR45 is turned off, and the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR45 is raised to the + 5V side by the resistor PR57d. As a result, the payout contact signal whose logic is HI is input from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR45 to the input terminal PA6 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU4120a. The payout control MPU4120a determines (determines) that the palm or finger is not touched on the rotary handle main body front 506 when the logic of the payout contact signal input to the input terminal PA6 is HI, and determines (determines) that the palm or finger is not touched, and this is determined by the main control board 4100. Tell to. The main control board 4100 informs the peripheral control board 4140 that the palm or fingers are not touched by the rotary handle main body front 506.

[11-2-3 (g). A circuit in which a right-handed signal is input from the launch control circuit of the power supply board]
The payout right-handed signal from the power supply board 851 shown in FIG. 12 is input to the payout control board 4110 from the launch control circuit 857a provided in the power supply board 851 via a right-handed signal output circuit (not shown) provided in the power supply board 851. .. The output terminal of the right-handed signal output circuit is configured as an open collector output type in which the emitter terminal is grounded to ground (GND). As shown in FIG. 29, one end of the payout control board 4110 is a + 12V power supply line. It is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor PR57e, which is electrically connected to, and is also electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR46 via the resistor PR57f. In addition to being electrically connected to the resistor PR57f, the base terminal of the transistor PTR46 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR57g, one end of which is grounded to ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR46 is grounded to ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR46 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR57h, one end of which is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line, and a non-inverting buffer. Payout control via ICPIC40 (non-inverting buffer ICPIC40 includes eight non-inverting buffer circuits, and formats and outputs the logic of the signal waveform input to one of them (PIC40E) without inverting it). It is electrically connected to the input terminal PA7 of the input port PA of the MPU4120a. When the transistor PTR46 is turned ON / OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR46 changes, and the signal is input to the input terminal PA7 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU4120a as a payout right-handed signal.

The circuit composed of the resistors PR57f, PR57g, and the transistor PTR46 is turned on by a payout right-handed signal output from the launch control circuit 857a provided on the power supply board 851 via a right-handed signal output circuit (not shown) provided on the power supply board 851. It is a switch circuit that turns off.

As described above, in the launch control circuit 857a, the rotation position θ of the rotation handle main body front 506 is set to the right-handed setting position (100 degrees (100 °)) based on the operation signal from the potentiometer 512 provided in the handle device 500 shown in FIG. )) When it is determined (determined) that the rotation operation has been performed, a right-handed signal indicating that the game is being played by right-handed is output to the payout control board 4110 as a right-handed payout signal. This output is output via a right-handed signal output circuit (not shown), and is an open collector output. When the launch control circuit 857a determines (determines) that the rotation position θ of the rotation handle main body front 506 is rotated by the right-handed set position (100 degrees (100 °)) or more, as described above, the right side (not shown) A payout right-handed signal whose logic is LOW is input to the payout control board 4110 by pulling down the collector terminal of the transistor of the hitting signal output circuit to the ground (GND) side on the payout control board 4110 via wiring (harness). On the other hand, when the launch control circuit 857a determines (determines) that the rotation position θ of the rotation handle main body front 506 is not rotated more than the right-handed set position (100 degrees (100 °)), a right-handed signal output (not shown) is output. In the payout control input circuit 4120b of the payout control unit 4120 in the payout control board 4110 where the collector terminal of the transistor of the circuit is connected via wiring (harness), one end is electrically connected to the + 12V power supply line and the other end of the pull-up resistor PR57e. The payout right-handed signal whose logic is HI is input to the payout control board 4110 by being electrically connected to and pulled up to the + 12V side.

When the launch control circuit 857a determines (determines) that the rotation position θ of the rotation handle main body front 506 has been rotated by the right-handed set position (100 ° (100 °)) or more, the logic is LOW. Since the right-handed signal is input to the payout control board 4110, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR46 is lowered to the ground (GND) side by this payout right-handed signal, so that the transistor PTR46 is turned off and the transistor PTR46 is turned off. The voltage applied to the collector terminal is raised to the + 5V side by the resistor PR57h. As a result, the payout right-handed signal whose logic is HI is input from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR46 to the input terminal PA7 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU4120a. When the logic of the payout right-handed signal input to the input terminal PA7 is HI, the payout control MPU4120a determines (determines) that the game is being played by right-handed hitting, and notifies the main control board 4100 to that effect. The main control board 4100 informs the peripheral control board 4140 that the game is being played by hitting the right side.

On the other hand, when the launch control circuit 857a determines (determines) that the rotation position θ of the rotation handle main body front 506 has not been rotated more than the right-handed set position (100 degrees (100 °)), the logic becomes HI. Since the payout right-handed signal is input to the payout control board 4110, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR46 by this payout right-handed signal is pulled up to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistor PR57e, so that the transistor PTR46 is turned on. , The voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR46 is lowered to the ground (GND) side. As a result, the payout right-handed signal in which the logic of the collector terminal of the transistor PTR46 is LOW is input to the input terminal PA7 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU4120a. When the logic of the payout right-handed signal input to the input terminal PA7 is LOW, the payout control MPU4120a determines (determines) that the right-handed game is not played (that is, the left-handed game is played). This is communicated to the main control board 4100. The main control board 4100 informs the peripheral control board 4140 that the game is not played by hitting right (that is, the game is played by hitting left).

[11-2-4. Payout motor drive circuit]
Next, a payout motor drive circuit 4120d for outputting a drive signal to the payout motor 744 of the prize ball device 740 shown in FIG. 5 will be described. As shown in FIG. 30, the payout motor drive circuit 4120d mainly includes a voltage switching circuit 4120da and a drive ICPIC60. The power input terminals 1 and 2 of the voltage switching circuit 4120da are electrically connected to the + 12V power supply line and the + 5V power supply line, respectively, and +12 and + 5V are applied, respectively, and the ground terminal of the voltage switching circuit 4120da is grounded (GND). It is grounded. A voltage switching signal is input to the power switching input terminal of the voltage switching circuit 4120da. This voltage switching signal is output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 4120a to the payout control output circuit 4120ca with a reset function, and is output from the payout control output circuit 4120ca with a reset function to the power supply switching input terminal of the voltage switching circuit 4120da. It is supposed to be done. The power output terminal of the voltage switching circuit 4120da is electrically connected to the cathode terminals of the drive ICPIC60, terminals 3 and 10, respectively, via a Zener diode PZD60, and is also electrically connected to the power supply terminal of the payout motor 744. Based on the voltage switching signal connected to and input to the voltage switching input terminal of the voltage switching circuit 4120da, + 12V or + 5V is used as the motor drive voltage via the Zener diode PZD60, and is the cathode terminal of the drive ICPIC60. It is supplied to the terminal and the 10th terminal, respectively, and is also supplied to the payout motor 744.

The drive ICPIC60 includes four Darlington power transistors. In this embodiment, the emitter terminals 6 and 7 of the drive ICPIC60 are grounded to ground (GND), respectively, and are the base terminals of the drive ICPIC60. At the 1st terminal, the 5th terminal, the 8th terminal, and the 12th terminal, the payout motor drive signal is input via the resistors PR60 to PR63, respectively. The 2nd terminal, 4th terminal, 9th terminal, and 11th terminal, which are the collector terminals of the drive ICPIC60, are the 1st terminal, the 5th terminal, the 8th terminal, and the 12th terminal, which are the base terminals of the drive ICPIC60, respectively. When the payout motor drive signal is input to the 1st terminal, 5th terminal, 8th terminal, and 12th terminal, which are the base terminals of the drive ICPIC60, via the resistors PR60 to PR63, it is an excitation signal. A certain drive pulse is output to each phase (/ B phase, B phase, A phase, / A phase) corresponding to the payout motor 744. This payout motor drive signal is output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 4120a to the payout control output circuit 4120ca with a reset function, and from the payout control output circuit 4120ca with a reset function to the drive ICPIC60 via resistors PR60 to PR63. It is designed to be output to the 1st terminal, 5th terminal, 8th terminal, and 12th terminal, which are the base terminals, respectively. These drive pulses are performed by switching the exciting current flowing through each phase (/ B phase, B phase, A phase, / A phase) of the payout motor 744 to rotate the payout motor 744. When the drive pulse (excitation signal) of each phase (/ B phase, B phase, A phase, / A phase) is cut off by this switching, a counter electromotive force is generated. If this counter electromotive force exceeds the withstand voltage of the drive ICPIC60, the drive ICPIC60 will be damaged. Therefore, as protection, the Zener diode PZD0 described above is electrically connected to the front stages of the 3rd and 10th terminals which are the cathode terminals of the drive ICPIC60. The circuit configuration is adopted.

[11-2-5. CR unit input / output circuit]
Next, the CR unit input / output circuit 4120e for inputting / outputting various signals with the CR unit 6 shown in FIG. 13 will be described. As described above, the payout control board 4110 includes the BRDY, which is a ball lending request signal, and the BRQ, which is a single payout operation start request signal, via the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869. , And the predetermined voltage VL (+ 12V) and ground LG created from AC24V supplied from the power supply board 851 shown in FIG. 13 are supplied, while the payout control board 4110 connects to the game ball rental device. An XS signal indicating that one payout operation has started or ended, and a PRDY signal indicating that the payout operation for paying out the rental ball is possible or impossible via the terminal board 869. And output. As shown in FIG. 31, the input / output circuits for inputting / outputting these various signals and the like are mainly composed of photocouplers PIC70 to PIC74 (infrared LED and phototransistor are built-in).

The predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70 via the resistor PR70. The cathode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70 is electrically connected to the ground LG from the CR unit 6. The resistor PR60 is a limiting resistor for limiting the current flowing through the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler PIC70. When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70, the photocoupler PIC70 is turned on, while the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is not applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70. Occasionally, the photocoupler PIC 70 is turned off. The emitter terminal of the photocoupler PIC70 is grounded to ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC70 is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR70 via the resistor PR71, and is also connected to the transistor via the resistor PR72. It is electrically connected to the base terminal of the PTR71. In addition to being electrically connected to the resistor PR71, the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC70 is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor PR73, one end of which is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line.

In addition to being electrically connected to the resistor PR71, the base terminal of the transistor PTR70 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR74, one end of which is grounded to ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR70 is grounded to ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR70 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR75, one end of which is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line, and a non-inverting buffer. FIG. 26 via the ICPIC80 (the non-inverting buffer ICPIC80 includes eight non-inverting buffer circuits, and formats and outputs the logic of the signal waveform input to one of them (PIC80A) without inverting it). It is electrically connected to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 4120a shown in 1. When the transistor PTR 70 is turned ON / OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR 70 is changed, and the signal is input as the CR connection signal 1 to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 4120a.

On the other hand, the base terminal of the transistor PTR71 is electrically connected to the resistor PR72 and also electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR76 whose one end is grounded to ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR71 is grounded to ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR71 is electrically connected to the power supply board 851 via wiring (harness). When the collector terminal of the transistor PTR71 is electrically connected to the power supply board 851 via wiring (harness), one end of the power supply board 851 is electrically connected to the + 12V power supply line. It is electrically connected to the other end of the. When the transistor PTR71 is turned ON / OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR71 changes, and the signal is input to the power supply board 851 as a CR connection signal.

The circuit composed of the resistors PR71 and PR74 and the transistor PTR70 is a switch circuit that is turned ON / OFF by ON / OFF of the photocoupler PIC70.

When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is not applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70, the photocoupler PIC70 is turned off, and the transistor PTR70 is turned on by being pulled up to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR73, and the switch circuit is also turned on. It will be turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR70 is lowered to the ground (GND) side, and the CR connection signal 1 whose logic is LOW is input to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU4120a.

On the other hand, when the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70, the photocoupler PIC70 is turned on and the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR70 is lowered to the ground (GND) side. As a result, the transistor PTR70 is turned off, and the switch circuit is also turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR70 is pulled up to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PTR75, and the CR connection signal 1 whose logic is HI is input to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU4120a. To.

The circuit composed of the resistors PR72 and PR76 and the transistor PTR71 is also a switch circuit that is turned ON / OFF by ON / OFF of the photocoupler PIC70.

When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is not applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70, the photocoupler PIC70 is turned off, and the transistor PTR71 is turned on by being pulled up to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR73, and the switch circuit is also turned on. It will be turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR71 is lowered to the ground (GND) side of the power supply board 851 via the wiring (harness), and the CR connection signal whose logic is LOW is input to the power supply board 851. To.

On the other hand, when the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70, the photocoupler PIC70 is turned on and the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR71 is lowered to the ground (GND) side. As a result, the transistor PTR71 is turned off, and the switch circuit is also turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR71 is pulled up to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistance of the power supply board 851 via the wiring (harness), and the CR connection signal whose logic is HI is input to the power supply board 851. Will be done.

The predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied not only to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70 but also to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 via the resistor PR77. BRDY from the CR unit 6 is input to the cathode terminal of the photocoupler PIC71. The resistor PR77 is a limiting resistor for limiting the current flowing through the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler PIC71. When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 and the logic of BRDY from the CR unit 6 is LOW, the photocoupler PIC71 is turned on while the photo When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the coupler PIC71 and the logic of BRDY from the CR unit 6 is HI, the photocoupler PIC71 is turned off. There is. The emitter terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 is grounded to ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor PR78, one end of which is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line. The non-inverting buffer ICPIC80 (the non-inverting buffer ICPIC80 includes eight non-inverting buffer circuits, and the logic of the signal waveform input to one of them (PIC80B) is formatted and output without being inverted). It is electrically connected to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 4120a via the device. When the photocoupler PIC71 is turned ON / OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 changes, and the signal is input as a BRDY signal to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU4120a.

When a predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 and the logic of BRDY from the CR unit 6 is LOW, the photocoupler PIC71 is turned on and therefore the photo The voltage applied to the collector terminal of the coupler PIC71 is lowered to the ground (GND) side, and the BRDY signal whose logic is LOW is input to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU4120a. On the other hand, when a predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 and the logic of BRDY from the CR unit 6 is HI, the photocoupler PIC71 is turned off. The voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 is pulled up to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR78, and the BRDY signal whose logic is HI is input to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU4120a. As described above, the logic of the BRDY signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 is the same as the logic of the BRDY from the CR unit 6.

The predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied not only to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70 and the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC71, but also to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 via the resistor PR79. The BRQ from the CR unit 6 is input to the cathode terminal of the photocoupler PIC72. The resistor PR79 is a limiting resistor for limiting the current flowing through the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler PIC72. When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 and the logic of the BRQ from the CR unit 6 is LOW, the photocoupler PIC72 is turned on while the photo is taken. When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the coupler PIC72 and the logic of the BRQ from the CR unit 6 is HI, the photocoupler PIC72 is turned off. There is. The emitter terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 is grounded to ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor PR80, one end of which is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line. The non-inverting buffer ICPIC80 (the non-inverting buffer ICPIC80 includes eight non-inverting buffer circuits, and the logic of the signal waveform input to one of them (PIC80C) is formatted and output without being inverted). It is electrically connected to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 4120a via the device. When the photocoupler PIC72 is turned ON / OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 changes, and the signal is input as a BRQ signal to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU4120a.

When a predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 and the logic of the BRQ from the CR unit 6 is LOW, the photocoupler PIC72 is turned on, so that the photocoupler PIC72 is turned on. The voltage applied to the collector terminal of the coupler PIC72 is lowered to the ground (GND) side, and the BRQ signal whose logic is LOW is input to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU4120a. On the other hand, when a predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 and the logic of the BRQ from the CR unit 6 is HI, the photocoupler PIC72 is turned off. The voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 is pulled up to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR80, and the BRQ signal whose logic is HI is input to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU4120a. As described above, the logic of the BRQ signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 is the same as the logic of the BRQ from the CR unit 6.

The XS signal indicating that one payout operation has started or ended from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 4120a is output to the payout control output circuit 4120 kb without the reset function, and the payout control output circuit without the reset function. It is input from 4120 kb to the cathode terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 via the resistor PR81. The anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR82, one end of which is electrically connected to the + 12V power supply line. The resistor PR82 is a limiting resistor for limiting the current flowing through the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler PIC73. When + 12V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 via the resistor PR82, the EXS is output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 4120a via the payout control output circuit 4120cc without a reset function. When the signal logic is LOW, the photocoupler PIC73 is turned on, while + 12V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 via the resistor PR82, and the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU4120a. When the logic of the EXS signal output from the output terminal of the output terminal without the reset function via the payout control output circuit 4120cc is HI, the photocoupler PIC73 is turned off. The emitter terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 is grounded to the ground LG from the CR unit 6, and the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 is inside the CR unit 6 via a pull-up resistor PR83 via a game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869. In, the voltage is raised to a predetermined voltage VL and is electrically connected to the built-in control device. When the photocoupler PIC73 is turned ON / OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 is changed, and the signal is input to the built-in control device of the CR unit 6 as EXS.

When + 12V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 via the resistor PR82, the EXS is output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 4120a via the payout control output circuit 4120cc without a reset function. When the signal logic is LOW, the photocoupler PIC73 is turned on, so the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 is lowered to the ground (GND) side, and the EXS whose logic is LOW is the CR unit. It is input to the built-in control device of 6. On the other hand, when + 12V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 via the resistor PR82, it is output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 4120a via the payout control output circuit 4120cc without a reset function. When the logic of the EXS signal is HI, the photocoupler PIC73 is turned off, so that the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 is raised to a predetermined voltage VL by the pull-up resistor PR83, and the logic becomes HI. The EXS is input to the built-in control device of the CR unit 6. As described above, the logic of the EXE output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 is the logic of the EXS signal output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 4120a via the payout control output circuit 4120cc without the reset function. It has the same logic.

The PRDY signal for notifying that the payout operation for paying out the rental ball from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU4120a is possible or impossible is the cathode terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 via the resistor PR84. Has been entered in. The anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR85, one end of which is electrically connected to the + 12V power supply line. The resistor PR85 is a limiting resistor for limiting the current flowing through the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler PIC74. When + 12V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 via the resistor PR85, the PRDY is output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 4120a via the payout control output circuit 4120cc without a reset function. When the signal logic is LOW, the photocoupler PIC74 is turned on, while + 12V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 via the resistor PR85, and the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU4120a. When the logic of the PRDY signal output from the output terminal of the output terminal without the reset function via the payout control output circuit 4120cc is HI, the photocoupler PIC74 is turned off. The emitter terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 is grounded to the ground LG from the CR unit 6, and the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 is inside the CR unit 6 via a pull-up resistor PR86 via a game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869. In, the voltage is raised to a predetermined voltage VL and electrically connected to the built-in control device. When the photocoupler PIC74 is turned ON / OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 changes, and the signal is input to the built-in control device of the CR unit 6 as a PRDY.

When + 12V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 via the resistor PR85, the PRDY is output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 4120a via the payout control output circuit 4120cc without a reset function. When the signal logic is LOW, the photocoupler PIC74 is turned on, so the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 is lowered to the ground (GND) side, and the PRDY whose logic is LOW is the CR unit. It is input to the built-in control device of 6. On the other hand, when + 12V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 via the resistor PR85, it is output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 4120a via the payout control output circuit 4120cc without a reset function. When the logic of the PRDY signal is HI, the photocoupler PIC74 is turned off, so that the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 is raised to a predetermined voltage VL by the pull-up resistor PR86, and the logic becomes HI. The PRDY is input to the built-in control device of the CR unit 6. As described above, the logic of the PRDY output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 is the logic of the PRDY signal output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 4120a via the payout control output circuit 4120cc without the reset function. It has the same logic.

[11-2-6. Various input / output signals to the payout control MPU]
Next, various input / output signals input / output from the input / output terminals of the various input / output ports of the payout control MPU 4120a will be described.

As shown in FIG. 26, the RXD terminal, which is the serial data input terminal of the serial input port of the payout control MPU 4120a, receives the serial data from the main control board 4100 as the main payout serial data reception signal via the payout control input circuit 4120b. Will be done. On the other hand, from the TXD terminal, which is the serial data output terminal of the serial output port of the payout control MPU4120a, the serial data to be transmitted to the main control board 4100 is transmitted as the payer serial data transmission signal to the payout control output circuit 4120cc without a reset function. No reset function The payer serial data transmission signal is transmitted from the payout control output circuit 4120 kb to the main control board 4100.

Each input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU4120a has the above-mentioned RWMCLR signal, payout power failure warning signal, door opening signal, full tank signal, and various signals from the CR unit 6 (BRQ signal, BRDY signal, CR connection). In addition to the signals 1 and the like being input, for example, the main payment ACK signal from the main control board 4100 that notifies the completion of normal reception of the above-mentioned payer serial data reception signal is transmitted via the payout control input circuit 4120b. It may be input, or the detection signals from the ball-out switch 750, the counting switch 751, the rotation angle switch 752, and the like shown in FIG. 12 may be input via the payout control input circuit 4120b, respectively.

On the other hand, from each output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 4120a, the above-mentioned EXS signal and PRDY signal are output to the payout control output circuit 4120 kb without the reset function, respectively, and the EXS signal and the EXS signal from the payout control output circuit 4120 cc without the reset function The PRDY signal is output to the CR unit input / output circuit 4120e, or the above-mentioned voltage switching signal is output to the payout control output circuit 4120ca with a reset function, and the voltage switching signal is output from the payout control output circuit 4120ca with a reset function to the voltage switching circuit 4120da. Output or output the payout motor drive signal to the payout control output circuit 4120ca with reset function and output the payout motor drive signal from the payout control output circuit 4120ca with reset function to the payout motor 744 via the payout motor drive circuit 4120d. In addition, for example, the payer ACK signal for notifying the completion of normal reception of the above-mentioned main pay serial data reception signal is output to the payout control output circuit 4120ca with a reset function, and the payer is output from the payout control output circuit 4120ca with a reset function. The ACK signal is output to the main control board 4100, or the drive signal of the error LED display 860b shown in FIG. 12 is output to the payout control output circuit 4120ca with a reset function, and the drive signal is output from the payout control output circuit 4120ca with a reset function. Output to the error LED display 860b, etc.

[11-3. Various input / output signals with the main control board and various output signals to the external terminal board]
Next, various input / output signals between the payout control board 4110 and the main control board 4100 and various output signals from the payout control board 4110 to the external terminal board 784 will be described with reference to FIG. 32.

[11-3-1. Various input / output signals with the main control board]
The payout control board 4110 exchanges various input / output signals with the main control board 4100. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 32A, the payout control board 4110 has the payer serial data transmission signal, payer ACK signal, operation signal (RAM clear signal), main frame door open signal, and the like described above. Is output to the main control board 4100. These output signals are pulled up to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistor of the main control input circuit 4100b of the main control board 4100.

On the other hand, in addition to the above-mentioned main payment serial data reception signal, main payment ACK signal, and operation signal (RAM clear signal), the payout control board 4110 has a 15-round jackpot information output signal, a 2-round jackpot information output signal, and the like. Game information signal related to the game such as jackpot information output signal, probability fluctuation information output signal, special symbol display information output signal, normal symbol display information output signal, time saving medium information output signal, start opening winning information output signal, etc. Signals and the like are input from the main control board 4100. These input signals are pulled up to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistance of the payout control input circuit 4120b of the payout control unit 4120 of the payout control board 4110.

[11-3-2. Various output signals to the external terminal board]
The payout control board 4110 outputs various signals to the external terminal board 784. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 32 (b), in addition to the above-mentioned outer end frame door opening information output signal, a prize ball number information output signal indicating the number of game balls actually paid out by the payout motor 744. , In addition to the jackpot information output signal such as the 15-round jackpot information output signal and the 2-round jackpot information output signal from the main control board 4100 via the payout control board 4110, the information output signal during probability fluctuation and the special symbol display information output. A game information signal such as a signal, a normal symbol display information output signal, a time saving medium information output signal, and a start opening winning information output signal is output to the external terminal board 784. These output signals are pulled up to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistor of the external terminal plate 784.

The signal output from the external terminal board 784 is transmitted to a hall computer installed in a game hall (hall) (not shown), and the hall computer monitors the player's game and the like. When the 15-round jackpot information output signal or the 2-round jackpot information output signal is output to the hall computer as one jackpot information output signal, the hall computer has the number of jackpots in which the round is 2 times (2 round jackpot). The number of big hits of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is the sum of the number of big hits in which the number of rounds is 15 (the number of times of big hits in 15 rounds). For this reason, the hall computer cannot grasp the number of occurrences of 2-round jackpots and the number of occurrences of 15-land jackpots from the total number of jackpots, so that the number of jackpots actually generated by the pachinko gaming machine 1 is large. However, it is not possible to grasp whether it is a 2-round jackpot or a 15-round jackpot. Further, a data counter (not shown) is arranged above the pachinko gaming machine 1, and some players may or may not play the game by referring to the number of occurrences of the jackpot gaming state displayed on the data counter. Some people choose.

However, the number of occurrences of the jackpot game state displayed on the data counter may actually be biased to the number of occurrences of the two-round jackpot, so even if the player starts the game, only two rounds of jackpots occur. In some cases, the 15-round jackpot does not occur easily. In this way, the number of occurrences of the jackpot gaming state displayed on the data counter can give the player a sense of expectation, but may unnecessarily arouse the player's gambling spirit.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, as the jackpot information output signal, the 15-round jackpot information output signal and the 2-round jackpot information output signal are separately output to the hall computer, so that the hall computer determines the number of occurrences of the 2-round jackpot and It is possible to accurately grasp the number of big hits in 15 rounds. Therefore, the hall computer can grasp whether the number of big hits actually generated in the pachinko game machine 1 is a 2-round big hit or a 15-round big hit, and the data counter has 15 Since the number of round jackpots and the number of 2-round jackpots can be displayed separately or only the number of 15-round jackpots can be displayed as the number of jackpot gaming states, the player's gambling spirit can be stimulated more than necessary. Nor.

In this embodiment, the 2-round jackpot information output signal is in a state of being output to the hall computer during the period from the occurrence of the 2-round jackpot to the end, and the 15-round jackpot information output signal is also the 15-round jackpot. It is in the state of being output to the hall computer during the period from the occurrence to the end. In addition to the method of outputting the 2-round jackpot information output signal and the 15-round jackpot information output signal to the hall computer as in the present embodiment, for example, when a 2-round jackpot occurs, the 2-round jackpot information output signal is output only for a predetermined period. Such a 2-round jackpot information output signal and 15-round jackpot information are output to the hall computer, and when a 15-round jackpot occurs, the 15-round jackpot information output signal is output to the hall computer for a predetermined period. A method of outputting the output signal to the hall computer for the same predetermined period can also be mentioned.

[12. Various commands related to transmission and reception of the main control board]
Next, various commands transmitted from the main control board 4100 to the payout control board 4110 and various commands transmitted from the main control board 4100 to the peripheral control board 4140 will be described with reference to FIGS. 33 to 36. FIG. 33 is a table showing an example of various commands transmitted from the main control board to the payout control board, and FIG. 34 is a table showing an example of various commands transmitted from the main control board to the peripheral control board. Is a table showing the continuation of various commands transmitted from the main control board to the peripheral control board of FIG. 34, and FIG. 36 is a table showing an example of various commands received from the payout control board received by the main control board. First, the prize ball command, which is a command related to payout transmitted from the main control board to the payout control board, is described, and then various commands transmitted from the main control board to the peripheral control board are described, and the main control board receives the command. Various commands from the payout control board will be described.

[12-1. Various commands sent from the main control board to the payout control board]
The main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 has detection signals from various winning switches such as the general winning port switches 3020 and 3020, the upper starting port switch 3022, the lower starting port switch 2109, and the count switch 2110 shown in FIG. When input, a prize ball command for paying out a predetermined number of game balls as a prize ball is transmitted to the payout control board based on these detection signals. This prize ball command is a command having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits). In the present embodiment, the pachinko gaming machine 1 and the CR unit 6 (communication with the pachinko gaming machine 1 and driving the payout motor 744 of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (prize ball device 740) to drive the payout motor 744, which is a storage tray When the lower plate 302 is electrically connected to a device for paying out game balls as a rental ball (such a pachinko game machine is referred to as a "CR machine"), as shown in FIG. The prize ball commands transmitted from the main control board 4100 to the payout control board 4110 include commands 10H to 1EH (“H” represents a hexadecimal number), and in command 10H, one prize ball is provided. Two prize balls are specified by the command 11H, and 15 prize balls are specified by the command 1EH. The payout control board 4110 controls the payout motor 744 to pay out the game balls by the designated number of prize balls.

In addition, a pachinko game machine 1 and a ball lending machine (a device that directly pays out game balls as lending balls to the upper plate 301 and the lower plate 302, which are storage plates) are installed adjacent to the game hall (hall). When the game machine 1 and the ball lending machine are electrically connected (such a pachinko game machine is referred to as a "general machine"), as shown in FIG. 33 (b), it is paid out from the main control board 4100. Commands 20H to 2EH are prepared for the prize ball command to be transmitted to the control board 4110. One prize ball is specified by the command 20H, two prize balls are specified by the command 21H, and so on. In 2EH, 15 prize balls are designated. The payout control board 4110 controls the payout motor 744 to pay out the game balls by the designated number of prize balls.

As shown in FIG. 33 (c), a command 30H is prepared as a common command for the CR machine and the general machine, and a self-check is specified in this command 30H. After the command is transmitted, the transmitting side transmits the command 30H and checks whether or not the ACK signal is input when the ACK signal to be output as confirmation of receipt of the command is not input from the receiving side for a predetermined period. Check the connection status. In the case of the CR machine in the present embodiment, the payout control board 4110 confirms the connection state with the CR unit 6.

[12-2. Various commands sent from the main control board to the peripheral control board]
Next, various commands transmitted from the main control board 4100 to the peripheral control board 4140 will be described. The main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 transmits various commands to the peripheral control board 4140 based on the progress of the game. These various commands are commands having a storage capacity of 2 bytes (16 bits), and as shown in FIGS. 34 and 35, the status indicating the type of the command having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits) and It is composed of a mode showing a variation of an effect having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits).

As shown in FIGS. 34 and 35, the various commands are related to the special figure 1 synchronization effect, the special figure 2 synchronization effect, the jackpot, the power on, the normal electric role effect, the notification display, and the state. It is divided into display and others.

[12-2-1. Special figure 1 Synchronized production related]
The special drawing 1 tuning effect-related is based on the detection signal from the upper start port switch 3022 shown in FIG. 11, and the classification is divided into the function display board 1191 shown in FIG. 11 as shown in FIG. The above special symbol display 1185 is composed of commands named special symbol 1 synchronization effect start, special symbol 1 designation, special diagram 1 synchronization effect end, and change state designation. These various commands are assigned "A * H" as the status and "** H" as the mode ("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number. This is determined in advance by the specifications of the pachinko gaming machine 1).

The special figure 1 synchronization effect start command instructs the start of the special figure synchronization effect with the effect pattern specified in the mode, and the special symbol 1 designation command specifies the loss, the specific jackpot, and the non-specific jackpot. The special figure 1 synchronization effect end command instructs the end of the special figure 1 synchronization effect, and the variable time state designation command indicates the probability and the time saving state.

As the transmission timing of these various commands, the special symbol 1 synchronization effect start command is transmitted at the start of the special symbol 1 fluctuation, and the special symbol 1 designation command is transmitted immediately after the start of the special diagram 1 synchronization effect. The effect end command is transmitted when the special symbol 1 variation time elapses (when the special symbol 1 is confirmed), and the variation state specification command is transmitted immediately after the special symbol winning information is specified. It should be noted that these various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process in step S92 in the main control side timer interrupt process described later.

[12-2-2. Special figure 2 synchronization production related]
The special drawing 2 tuning effect-related is based on the detection signal from the lower start port switch 2109 shown in FIG. 11, and the classification is divided into the function display board 1191 shown in FIG. 11 as shown in FIG. It consists of commands related to the lower special symbol display 1186, which are named special symbol 2 synchronization effect start, special symbol 2 designation, and special diagram 2 synchronization effect end. These various commands are assigned "B * H" as the status and "** H" as the mode ("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number. This is indicated in advance by the specifications of the pachinko gaming machine 1).

The special figure 2 synchronization effect start command instructs the start of the special figure synchronization effect with the effect pattern specified in the mode, and the special symbol 2 designation command specifies the loss, the specific jackpot, and the non-specific jackpot. , The end of the special figure 2 synchronization effect indicates the end of the special figure 2 synchronization effect.

As the transmission timing of these various commands, the special symbol 2 synchronization effect start command is transmitted at the start of the special symbol 2 fluctuation, and the special symbol 2 designation command is transmitted immediately after the start of the special diagram 2 synchronization effect. The effect end command is transmitted when the special symbol 2 variation time elapses (when the special symbol 2 is confirmed). These various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process in step S92 in the main control side timer interrupt process.

[12-2-3. Big hit related]
As shown in FIG. 34, the categories related to jackpot include jackpot opening, jackpot 1 open Nth display, jackpot 1 closed display, jackpot 1 count display, jackpot ending, jackpot symbol display, and jackpot opening. , Small hit open display, small hit count display, and small hit ending commands. These various commands are assigned "C * H" as the status and "** H" as the mode ("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number. This is indicated in advance by the specifications of the pachinko gaming machine 1).

The jackpot opening command indicates the start of the jackpot opening, and the Nth display command for opening the jackpot 1 is the start during the opening of the jackpot 1 in the 1st to 16th rounds (the attacker unit 2100 shown in FIG. 8). The opening of the Nth round of the large winning opening 2103 or the opening start) is instructed, and the large winning opening 1 closing display command starts during the closing of the large winning opening 1 between rounds (the large winning opening of the attacker unit 2100). It indicates (during closing or starting closing) between 2103 rounds, and the large winning opening 1 count display command has counted 0 to 10 counts (detected by the count switch 2110 shown in FIG. 11). The number of game balls that have entered the jackpot 2103) is transmitted, the jackpot ending command instructs the start of the jackpot ending, and the jackpot symbol display command instructs the jackpot symbol information display. is there.

In addition, the small hit opening command indicates the start of the small hit opening, and the small hit open display command starts during the small hit opening (at the time of the small hit, the large winning opening 2103 of the attacker unit 2100 is open or open. The small hit count display command indicates (start), and the small hit count display command is used when the small hit medium / large winning opening winning effect (during the small hit, the game ball that has entered the large winning opening 2103 is detected by the count switch 2110). The production) is instructed, and the small hit ending command is instructed to start the small hit ending.

As the transmission timing of these various commands, the jackpot opening command is transmitted at the start of the jackpot opening, and the Nth display command for opening the jackpot 1 is when the jackpot 1 is opened in the 1st to 16th rounds (large attacker unit 2100). It is sent when the Nth round of the winning opening 2103 is opened), and the big winning opening 1 closing display command is sent when the big winning opening 1 is closed (when the large winning opening 2103 of the attacker unit 2100 starts closing), and the big winning opening 1 is closed. The mouth 1 count display command is a count switch when the large winning opening 1 is opened and when the count changes to the large winning opening 1 (when the large winning opening 2103 of the attacker unit 2100 is opened, and the game ball that has entered the large winning opening 2103 is a count switch. (When detected by 2110), the jackpot ending command is transmitted at the start of the jackpot ending, and the jackpot symbol display command is transmitted when the jackpot symbol is opened (when the jackpot 2103 of the attacker unit 2100 is opened). To.

Further, the small hit opening command is transmitted at the start of the small hit opening, and the small hit open display command is transmitted at the time of opening the small hit (when the large winning opening 2103 of the attacker unit 2100 is opened at the time of the small hit). The hit count display command is transmitted at the time of winning the small hit medium / large winning opening (when the game ball that has entered the large winning opening 2103 during the small hit is detected by the count switch 2110), and the small hit ending command is It is sent at the start of the small hit ending. These various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process in step S92 in the main control side timer interrupt process.

[12-2-4. Power on]
As shown in FIG. 34, the power-on category is composed of various commands named power-on. This power-on command is assigned a status of "D * H" and a mode of "** H"("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number. It is determined in advance by the specifications of the pachinko gaming machine 1).

The power-on command instructs the start of the RAM clear effect and the start of each state effect (for example, the start of the effect when the operation switch 860a of the payout control board 4110 is operated at the time of power-on shown in FIG. It is something to instruct).

The power-on command is transmitted at a time other than RAM clear and RAM clear when the main control board is powered on. Specifically, when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, when the pachinko game machine 1 recovers from a power failure or a momentary power failure, and when the operation switch 860a of the payout control board 4110 is operated, the main control side power-on processing described later Is executed, and the power-on command is transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process in step S92 in the main control side timer interrupt process.

[12-2-5. Fuzu synchronization production related]
The normal diagram tuning effect-related is based on the detection signal from the gate switch 2352 shown in FIG. 11, and the classification is divided into the ordinary symbol display of the function display board 1191 shown in FIG. 11 as shown in FIG. It is composed of commands related to the device 1189, which are named as the start of the normal figure synchronization effect, the designation of the normal symbol, the end of the normal figure synchronization effect, and the specification of the state at the time of fluctuation. These various commands are assigned "E * H" as the status and "** H" as the mode ("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number. (It is determined in advance by the specifications of the pachinko gaming machine 1).

The normal figure synchronization effect start command is for instructing the start of the normal figure synchronization effect with the effect pattern specified in the mode, and the normal symbol designation command is for designating the off, specific jackpot, and non-specific jackpot. The figure synchronization effect end command instructs the end of the normal figure synchronization effect, and the variable time state specification command indicates the probability and the time saving state.

As the transmission timing of these various commands, the normal symbol synchronization effect start command is transmitted at the start of the normal symbol 1 fluctuation, the normal symbol designation command is transmitted immediately after the start of the normal symbol synchronization effect, and the normal symbol synchronization effect end command is transmitted. , Ordinary symbol is transmitted when the fluctuation time elapses (when the ordinary symbol is confirmed), and the change state specification command is transmitted immediately after the normal symbol winning information is specified. These various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process in step S92 in the main control side timer interrupt process.

[12-2-6. Ordinary electric role production related]
The normal electric service effect is related to the pair of movable pieces 2106 shown in FIG. 8 which are opened and closed by the drive of the start port solenoid 2105 shown in FIG. 11, and the classification is as shown in FIG. 34. It consists of commands named opening per figure, open display of solenoid, and ending per figure. These various commands are assigned "F * H" as the status and "** H" as the mode ("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number. This is determined in advance according to the specifications of the pachinko gaming machine 1).

The opening command per normal figure indicates the start of the opening per normal figure, and the open normal power display command starts while the normal power is open (a pair of movable pieces 2106 expands in the left-right direction by driving the starting port solenoid 2105). The ending command per normal figure indicates the start of the ending per normal figure.

As the transmission timing of these various commands, the opening command per normal figure is transmitted at the start of the opening per normal figure, and the open power display command is sent when the normal power is open (a pair of movable pieces 2106 are driven by the start port solenoid 2105). It is transmitted at the time of expanding in the left-right direction), and the ending command per normal figure is transmitted at the start of the ending per normal figure. These various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process in step S92 in the main control side timer interrupt process.

[12-2-7. Notification display]
As shown in FIG. 35, the notification display category is composed of commands named winning abnormality display, connection abnormality display, disconnection / short circuit abnormality display, magnetic detection switch abnormality display, door opening, and door closing. To these various commands, "6 * H" is assigned as the status and "** H"("H" represents a hexadecimal number) is assigned as the mode ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number. It is determined in advance by the specifications of the pachinko gaming machine 1).

The winning abnormality display command is used when a game ball enters the big winning opening 2103 of the attacker unit 2100 even though it is not a big hit (even though it is not a big hit) other than during the big hit (condition device is operating). When the count switch 2110 detects it), the start of the winning abnormality notification is instructed, and the connection abnormality display command is, for example, an electrical connection in the path between the main control board 4100 and the payout control board 4110. When there is an abnormality, the connection abnormality notification is instructed to start, and the disconnection / short-circuit abnormality display command includes, for example, the main control board 4100, the upper start port switch 3022, the lower start port switch 2109, the count switch 2110, and the like. Instructs the start of the disconnection / short-circuit abnormality display when the electrical connection is broken / short-circuited, and the magnetic detection switch abnormality display command causes an abnormality in the magnetic detection switch 3024 shown in FIG. In this case, the magnetic detection switch indicates the start of abnormality notification.

Further, in the door opening command, the door frame 5 is directed to the main body frame 3 based on the detection signal (opening signal) from the door frame opening switch 618 input via the payout control board 4110 shown in FIG. When the door is in the opened state, the door opening notification is instructed, and the door closing command closes the door frame 5 with respect to the main body frame 3 based on the detection signal from the door frame opening switch 618. This is to instruct the end of the door opening notification when the door is in the open state.

As the transmission timing of these various commands, the winning abnormality display command is transmitted when a prize is won in the big winning opening other than during the big hit (condition device is operating), and the connection abnormality display command is sent from the main control board 4100 to the payout control board 4110. When there is no ACK reply (ACK signal) from the payout control board 4110 when the command is sent to, the disconnection / short circuit error display command is among the upper start port switch 3022, lower start port switch 2109, count switch 2110, etc. , Which is sent when the wire is broken or short-circuited, the magnetic detection switch error display command is sent when an abnormality of the magnetic detection switch 3024 is detected, and the door open command is sent when the door open is detected (door frame open). Based on the detection signal from the switch 618, the door frame 5 is transmitted when the door frame 5 is open to the main body frame 3), and the door closing command is issued when the door closing is detected (from the door frame opening switch 618). (When the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3) based on the detection signal of. These various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process in step S92 in the main control side timer interrupt process.

[12-2-8. Status display]
As shown in FIG. 35, the status display division includes commands named frame state 1, error release navigation, and frame state 2. These various commands are assigned a status of "7 * H" and a mode of "** H"("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number. This is determined in advance according to the specifications of the pachinko gaming machine 1).

The frame state 1 command, the error release navigation command, and the frame state 2 command are commands having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits) transmitted from the payout control board 4110, and detailed description thereof will be described later. When the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 receives the frame state 1 command, the error release navigation command, and the frame state 2 command from the payout control board 4110, it outputs "7 * H" as shown in FIG. 35. While setting it as a status, set the received command as it is as a mode. That is, when the main control MPU4100a receives the frame state 1 command, the error release navigation command, and the frame state 2 command from the payout control board 4110, the main control MPU4100a adds "7 * H" which is additional information to these received commands. Formats the command into a command having a storage capacity of 2 bytes (16 bits).

The formatted frame state 1 command is sent when the power is restored, when the frame state changes, and when the error release navigation is performed, the error release navigation command is sent when the error release navigation is performed, and the frame state 2 command is sent when the power is restored. , And when the frame state changes. The shaped frame state 1 command, error release navigation command, and frame state 2 command are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process in step S92 in the main control side timer interrupt process.

[12-2-9. Test related]
As shown in FIG. 35, the test-related division is composed of various commands named tests. This test command is assigned "8 * H" as the status and "** H" as the mode ("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number. Is determined in advance according to the specifications of the pachinko gaming machine 1).

The test command instructs various inspections of the peripheral control board 4140 (for example, the peripheral control unit 4150, the liquid crystal and sound control unit 4160, the lamp drive board 4170, the motor drive board 4180, and the frame shown in FIG. 14). It inspects various boards such as the decorative drive amplifier board 194).

The test command is transmitted at a time other than RAM clear and RAM clear when the main control board is turned on. Specifically, when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, when the pachinko game machine 1 recovers from a power failure or a momentary power failure, and when the operation switch 860a of the payout control board 4110 is operated, the main control side power-on processing described later Is executed, and a test command is transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process in step S92 in the main control side timer interrupt process.

[12-2-10. Others]
In other categories, as shown in FIG. 35, start opening winning, fluctuation shortening operation end designation, high probability end designation, special symbol 1 memory, special symbol 2 memory, normal symbol memory, special symbol 1 memory look-ahead effect, and Special symbol 2 Consists of a command named memory look-ahead effect. These various commands are assigned a status of "9 * H" and a mode of "** H"("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number. It is determined in advance by the specifications of the pachinko gaming machine 1).

The start opening winning command instructs the start of the starting opening winning effect, and starts the effect when the game ball enters the upper starting port 2101 based on the detection signal from the upper starting port switch 3022, and lower. Based on the detection signal from the start port switch 2109, it is instructed to start the effect when the game ball enters the lower start port 2102, and the variation shortening operation end designation command is from the variation shortening operation state. The fluctuation shortening instructing the state transition to the non-operating state is instructed, the high probability end designation command is instructing the state transition from the high probability state to the low probability state, and the special symbol 1 storage command is a special symbol. 1 Hold 0 to 4 (The number of balls that have not yet been used for the variable display of the special symbol on the upper special symbol display 1185 of the function display board 1191 when the game ball enters the upper starting port 2101 shown in FIG. 8 ( The number of holdings)) is transmitted, and the special symbol 2 storage command is a special symbol 2 holding 0 to 4 (the lower special of the function display board 1191 when the game ball enters the lower starting port 2102 shown in FIG. 8). The symbol display 1186 conveys the number of balls (holding number) that have not yet been used for the variable display of the special symbol, and the normal symbol storage command is the normal symbol 1 hold 0 to 4 (gate shown in FIG. 8). The game ball passes through the unit 2350, and the normal symbol display 1189 of the function display board 1191 conveys the number of balls (holding number) that have not yet been used for the variable display of the normal symbol, and the special symbol 1 memory look-ahead effect. The command is pre-read and displayed by the upper special symbol display 1185 based on the special symbol 1 hold before the special symbol 1 hold is used for the variable display of the special symbol on the upper special symbol display 1185 of the function display board 1191. The special symbol 2 storage look-ahead effect command is used to indicate the start of the look-ahead effect that notifies the notice of the result, and the special symbol 2 hold is used for the variable display of the special symbol on the special symbol display 1186 under the function display board 1191. Before this, it is instructed to start the look-ahead effect of pre-reading and notifying the notice of the display result by the lower special symbol display 1186 based on the special symbol 2 hold.

As the transmission timing of these various commands, the start port winning command is used when the start port is won (when a game ball enters the upper start port 2101 based on the detection signal from the upper start port switch 3022, or when the lower start port switch is used. When the game ball enters the lower starting port 2102 based on the detection signal from 2109), the speaker housed in the speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3 shown in FIG. 5 and the door frame shown in FIG. The command for specifying the end of the fluctuation shortening operation is transmitted from the speaker 130 provided in No. 5 mainly to notify the fact by voice, and is at the end of the stop period after the fluctuation is confirmed after the specified number of fluctuation reductions have been completed (the stop period has elapsed). The high-probability end designation command is sent at the end of the stop period (after the out-of-order stop period has elapsed) after the fluctuation is confirmed after the high probability number of times in the case of "high probability N times" is exhausted. The memory command is a hold when the number of balls for which the special symbol 1 operation is held changes (a game ball enters the upper start port 2101 and is not yet used for displaying the change of the special symbol on the upper special symbol display 1185 of the function display board 1191. When there is a number, when a game ball enters the upper start port 2101 and the number of holds increases, or from the number of holds, the upper special symbol display 1185 is used to display the fluctuation of the special symbol and the number of holds. The special symbol 2 storage command is transmitted when the number of special symbol 2 operation pending balls changes (when the game ball enters the lower start port 2102 and the special symbol 2 storage command is displayed on the lower special symbol display 1186 of the function display board 1191). When there is a hold number that has not yet been used for the variable display of the special symbol, and when a game ball enters the lower start port 2102 and the hold number increases, or from the hold number, the lower special symbol display 1186 It is transmitted when the number of reserved balls is reduced by using it for variable display of special symbols), and the normal symbol storage command is sent when the number of reserved balls for normal symbol 1 operation changes (when the game ball passes through the gate 2350 and the number of reserved balls is reduced). When there is a hold number that has not yet been used for the variable display of the normal symbol on the 1191 normal symbol display 1189, and when the game ball passes through the gate 2350 and the hold number increases, or from the hold number, it is normal. It is transmitted when the number of reserved balls is reduced by using it for the variable display of the normal symbol on the symbol display 1189), and the special symbol 1 storage look-ahead effect command is sent when the number of special symbol 1 operation reserved balls increases (at the upper start port 2101). It is transmitted when the game ball enters and the number of reserved balls increases), and the special symbol 2 memory look-ahead effect command is sent when the number of special symbol 2 operation reserved balls increases (the game ball enters the lower start port 2102). It is sent when the number of pending balls increases). These various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process in step S92 in the main control side timer interrupt process.

By the way, as described above, the starting port winning command is issued when the starting port is won (when a game ball enters the upper starting port 2101 based on the detection signal from the upper starting port switch 3022, or from the lower starting port switch 2109. When a game ball enters the lower starting port 2102 based on the detection signal of (1), the speaker housed in the speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3 and the speaker 130 provided in the door frame 5 mainly by voice. Although it is transmitted to notify the fact, how the peripheral control board 4140 shown in FIG. 14 uses the start port winning command may differ depending on the specifications of the pachinko gaming machine. For example, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, in addition to notifying by voice from the speaker housed in the speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3 and the speaker 130 provided in the door frame 5, the presence or absence of fraudulent activity is monitored. It is a specification that is also used for the purpose. On the other hand, in other pachinko gaming machines, the peripheral control board 4140 simply receives the start opening winning command, and the speaker housed in the speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3 and the speaker provided in the door frame 5. There is also a specification that does not notify by voice from 130.

[12-3. Various commands from the payout control board received by the main control board]
Next, various commands received from the payout control board 4110 received by the main control board 4100 will be described.

As shown in FIG. 36, the classification of various commands from the payout control board 4110 is composed of commands named frame state 1, error release navigation, and frame state 2, frame state 1, error release navigation, and The order of priority is set in the order of frame state 2.

The frame state 1 command includes out-of-ball, full tank, stock of 50 or more, connection abnormality and CR not connected, and when the ball is out, bit 0 (B0, "B" represents a bit) is set. The value 1 is set, the value 1 is set to bit 1 (B1) when the tank is full, the value 1 is set to bit 2 (B2) in stock of 50 or more, and the value is set to bit 3 (B3) when the connection is abnormal. 1 is set, and the value 1 is set to bit 4 (B4) when CR is not connected. Bits 5 (B5) to 7 (B7) of the frame state 1 command are set to have a value of 1 in B5, a value of 0 in B6, and a value of 0 in B7.

The error release navigation command provides a ball-shaped error, a counting switch error, and a retry error. For a ball-shaped ball, the value 1 is set to bit 2 (B2), and for a counting switch error, the value is set to bit 3 (B3). 1 is set, and in the retry error, the value 1 is set in bit 4 (B4). Here, the "counting switch error" indicates whether or not the counting switch 751 shown in FIG. 12 has a defect. The "retry error" indicates that the inconsistent game balls are repeatedly paid out by the retry operation. Bits (B0), bits (B1), and bits 5 (B5) to 7 (B7) of the error release navigation command have a value of 0 for B0, a value of 0 for B1, a value of 0 for B5, and a value of 1 for B6. And the value 0 is set in B7.

The frame state 2 command is prepared for ball pulling, handle operation, and right-handed striking. Bit 0 (B0) is set to a value 1 during ball pulling, and bit 1 (B1) is set during handle operation. The value 1 is set, and the value 1 is set to bit 2 (B2) during right-handed strike. Bits 3 (B3) to 7 (B7) of the frame state 2 command are set with a value 0 for B3, a value 0 for B4, a value 1 for B5, a value 1 for B6, and a value 0 for B7. In addition, "during handle operation" means that the palm or finger is touched by the rotary handle body front 506 shown in FIG. 7, and "during right-handed hitting" means playing by right-handed hitting. It conveys that fact. In other words, when the frame state 2 command does not include "handle operation", the rotary handle body front 506 is informed that the palm or finger is not touched, and the frame state 2 command includes "right-handed". If not, tell the player that he is not playing right-handed (that is, he is playing left-handed).

As the transmission timing of these various commands, the frame state 1 command is transmitted at the time of power restoration, the frame state change, and the error release navigation, and the error release navigation command is transmitted at the time of error release navigation, and the frame state 2 command is transmitted. Is transmitted when the power is restored and when the frame state changes. For example, in the frame state 2 command, when the player sits on the front surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1 and touches the palm or finger on the front 506 of the rotating handle body, the rotation operation of the front 506 of the rotating handle body is still started. When the rotation position of the 506 in front of the rotation handle main body has not reached the right-handed set position described above (that is, at the stage when the game by left-handed is started), the B1 is notified to indicate the state of "handle operation in progress". A value of 1 is set, and a value of 0 is set in B2 to convey that the player is not in the "right-handed" state (that is, the player is playing a left-handed game), while the player is playing the game. In order to start the game by right-handed from the state where the game by left-handed is being performed, the rotary handle main body front 506 is rotated and the rotation position of the rotary handle main body front 506 is the right-handed above-mentioned. When the set position is reached, the value 1 is set in B1 to convey the state of "hand operation in progress", and the value 1 is set in B2 to convey the state of "right-handed" and transmitted. To. It should be noted that these various commands are actually transmitted in the command transmission process of step S558 in the payout control unit main process of the payout control unit power-on processing described later.

[13. Various control processes on the main control board]
Next, various control processes performed by the main control board 4100 shown in FIG. 11 according to the progress of the game of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 37 to 39. FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing an example of the main control side power-on processing, FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing the continuation of the main control-side power-on processing of FIG. 37, and FIG. It is a flowchart which shows. First, various random numbers used for game control will be described, and then the operation of the initial value update type counter, the main control side power-on processing, and the main control side timer interrupt processing will be described.

[13-1. Various random numbers]
As various random numbers used for game control, a big hit judgment random number to be used for determining whether or not to generate a big hit game state, and a big hit judgment initial value determination to be used for determining the initial value of this big hit judgment random number. Random numbers for, reach determination random numbers for determining whether to generate reach (reach loss) when the jackpot game state is not generated, and the upper special symbol display 1185 and lower special shown in FIG. A random number for the variable display pattern used to determine the variable display pattern of the special symbol that is variablely displayed by the symbol display 1186, and the upper special symbol display 1185 and the lower special symbol display 1186 when the big hit game state is generated. When generating a random number for the jackpot symbol to be used for determining the jackpot symbol to be derived and displayed, a random number for determining the initial value for the jackpot symbol to be used for determining the initial value of the random number for the jackpot symbol, and a small hit game state. A small hit symbol random number to be used to determine the small hit symbol derived and displayed by the upper special symbol display 1185 and the lower special symbol display 1186, and a small hit to be used to determine the initial value of this small hit symbol random number. Random numbers for determining initial values for symbols are prepared. Further, in addition to these random numbers, a random number for determining a normal symbol hit to be used for determining whether or not to open and close the movable piece 2106 shown in FIG. 8 and an initial value of the random number for determining a normal symbol hit are determined. Random numbers for determining the initial value for determining the hit of the normal symbol for use, random numbers for the normal symbol variation display pattern used for determining the variation display pattern of the normal symbol that is variablely displayed by the normal symbol display 1189 shown in FIG. Is prepared.

For example, the counter that updates the random number for jackpot determination is updated within a predetermined fixed numerical value range from the minimum value to the maximum value (in this embodiment, the minimum value is 0 to the maximum value is 32767). The range from the minimum value to the maximum value is counted up by adding a value of 1 each time the main control side timer interrupt process described later is performed. This counter counts up from the random number for determining the initial value for jackpot determination toward the maximum value, and then counts up from the minimum value toward the random number for determining the initial value for jackpot determination. When the counter finishes counting up the range from the minimum value to the maximum value of the jackpot determination random number, the jackpot determination initial value determination random number is updated. Such a counter update method is called an "initial value update type counter". The random number for determining the initial value for jackpot determination can be obtained by executing the initial value lottery process for drawing one value from the fixed numerical value range of the counter that updates the random number for jackpot determination. Further, the above-mentioned random number for determining the normal symbol hit and the random number for determining the initial value for determining the normal symbol hit are also the same as the above-mentioned method for updating the large hit determination random number.

In the present embodiment, when the counter for updating the big hit judgment random number finishes counting up in the range from the minimum value to the maximum value of the big hit judgment random number, as described above, for determining the initial value for big hit judgment. The random numbers are updated by executing the initial value lottery process, but when the operation switch 860a of the payout control board 4110 shown in FIG. 12 is operated when the power is turned on, or when the main control side is described later. The check sum value (sum value) obtained by calculating the total of the game information stored in the main control built-in RAM of the main control MPU 4100a shown in FIG. 11 as a numerical value in the power-on processing is the main control side. When clearing the entire area of the main control built-in RAM, such as when the check sum value (sum value) stored in the power off processing (power off) does not match, the initial value for jackpot judgment is determined. The random numbers for the main control MPU4100a shown in FIG. 11 are always the same from the fixed numerical range of the counter that extracts the ID code from the built-in non-volatile RAM and updates the random number for jackpot determination based on the extracted ID code. The initial value derivation process for deriving a fixed value is executed, and the derived fixed value is set. That is, the random number for determining the initial value for jackpot determination is constantly overwritten and updated with the same fixed value derived based on the ID code by executing the initial value derivation process. In this way, the value set in the random value for determining the initial value for jackpot determination is derived using the ID code, and the ID is stored in the non-volatile RAM built in the main control MPU4100a by the manufacturer of the main control MPU4100a. Based on the ID code by the first security measure that the ID code cannot be rewritten even if an external device is used when the code is stored, and by executing the initial value derivation process when clearing the entire area of the main control built-in RAM. It is prevented from being analyzed by taking a second security measure of deriving the same fixed value and a two-step security measure by.

Here, an advantage of extracting an ID code from the non-volatile RAM built in the main control MPU 4100a and using the extracted ID code as a random number for determining an initial value for jackpot determination will be described. For example, a person who illegally obtains a game ball to be paid out as a prize ball obtains the game board 4 by some method, disassembles it, and inputs an ID code stored in advance in the non-volatile RAM built in the main control MPU 4100a. Even if it is possible to grasp the timing at which the value of the counter that illegally acquires and updates the jackpot judgment random number and the jackpot judgment value match, the ID code is given a unique code for identifying the individual. Therefore, the ID code is completely different from the ID code stored in advance in the non-volatile RAM built in the main control MPU4100a'provided in the other game board 4'. That is, in the other game board 4', the timing at which the value of the counter for updating the big hit determination random number and the big hit determination value match is also completely different from that of the obtained game board 4. In other words, the ID code obtained by disassembling and analyzing the obtained game board 4 is completely useless in another game board 4', that is, another pachinko game machine 1', so it is disassembled and analyzed. Even if you aim for a start-up prize in which a momentary power failure is generated at each predetermined interval obtained and a game ball is inserted into the upper start port 2101 and the lower start port 2102 shown in FIG. 8 at each predetermined interval, a big hit is achieved. The game state cannot be generated.

[13-2. Initial value update type counter movement]
When the initial value update type counter clears the entire area of the main control built-in RAM (when the RAM is cleared), the main control MPU4100a extracts an ID code from the built-in non-volatile RAM, and based on the extracted ID code. The initial value derivation process for always deriving the same fixed value from the fixed numerical range of the counter that updates the jackpot determination random number is executed, and the derived fixed value is set. In the first cycle, the initial value update type counter counts up from this fixed value toward the maximum value, and then counts up from the minimum value toward the fixed value. When the counter finishes counting up the range from the minimum value to the maximum value of the big hit judgment random number, one value is drawn from the fixed numerical range of the counter that updates the big hit judgment random number as the big hit judgment initial value determination random number. The initial value lottery process is executed, and the value obtained in this lottery is set. In the second cycle, the initial value update type counter counts up from the value obtained by lottery toward the maximum value, and then counts up from the minimum value toward the value obtained by lottery. When the counter finishes counting up the range from the minimum value to the maximum value of the big hit judgment random number, the initial value lottery process is executed again, the value obtained in this lottery is set, and the initial value update type counter In the third cycle, the value obtained by lottery will be counted up toward the maximum value. In the present embodiment, a value 32668 to a value 32767 is set as a range of the jackpot determination value (big hit determination range) with a low probability, and is read from the normal judgment table, whereas a value 31768 to a value with a high probability is set. 32767 is set, and it is read from the probability change determination table. In the present embodiment, the counter that updates the random number for jackpot determination updates a predetermined fixed numerical value range from a value as a minimum value to a value of 32767 as a maximum value. In other words, the range of the jackpot judgment value (big hit judgment range) is the range closer to the maximum value side from the intermediate value (value 16384) between the minimum value and the maximum value in both the low probability and the high probability. It is set.

Here, as a range of jackpot determination values (big hit determination range), a case where a value 10 to a value 209 is set with a low probability and a value 10 to a value 339 is set with a high probability is examined. The value range (big hit judgment range) is set to a range closer to the minimum value side from the intermediate value (value 16384) between the minimum value and the maximum value in both the low probability and the high probability. .. In such a case, the period from the timing when the value of the initial value update type counter becomes the value 0 to the time when the first value 10 in the range of the jackpot judgment value (big hit judgment range) and this value 10 Comparing the period from the next value 11 to the maximum value (value 32767), the probability that the former period is drawn by the above-mentioned initial value lottery process is extremely lower than that of the latter period. In other words, the range from the timing when the value of the initial value update type counter becomes 0 to the last value (value 209 in low probability, value 339 in high probability) in the range of big hit judgment value (big hit judgment range). Comparing with the range from the value next to this last value (value 210 for low probability, value 340 for high probability) to the maximum value (value 32767), the former range is the latter. The probability of being drawn by the initial value lottery process is extremely low compared to the range. Then, for example, the game ball is started upward by illegally acquiring the timing when the value of the counter of the initial value update type becomes 0 by some method and irradiating the radio wave toward the upper start port 2101 and the lower start port 2102. When a fraudulent act pretending to have entered the mouth 2101 or the lower starting port 2102 is performed, the value of the initial value update type counter becomes one of the jackpot judgment value ranges (big hit judgment range). It can be said that the probability is high.

On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, the range of the jackpot determination value (big hit determination range) is from the intermediate value (value 16384) between the minimum value and the maximum value in both the low probability and the high probability. If it is set to a range closer to the maximum value side, it is before the first value in the jackpot judgment value range (big hit judgment range) from the timing when the value of the initial value update type counter becomes the value 0. The period from the first value (value 32668 in low probability, value 31768 in high probability) to the maximum value (value 32767) and the period until the value (value 32667 in low probability, value 31767 in high probability). Compared with the above, the former period has a much higher probability of being drawn by the above-mentioned initial value lottery process than the latter period. In other words, the value before the first value in the range of the jackpot judgment value (big hit judgment range) from the timing when the value of the initial value update type counter becomes the value 0 (value 32667 for low probability, value 31767 for high probability). Comparing the range up to and the range from the first value (value 32668 with high probability, value 31768 with high probability) to the maximum value (value 32767), the former range is compared with the latter range. The probability of being drawn by the initial value lottery process is extremely high. Then, the initial value update type counter has a range from the value 0 to the value before the first value in the range of the jackpot judgment value (big hit judgment range) (value 32667 for low probability, value 31767 for high probability). Of these, one of the values will be the value drawn by the initial value lottery process and will be set in the above-mentioned random number for determining the initial value for jackpot judgment. Therefore, from the value obtained in this lottery toward the maximum value. It counts up, and then counts up from the minimum value toward the value obtained by lottery. When the counter finishes counting up the range from the minimum value to the maximum value of the big hit judgment random number, the initial value lottery process is executed again, the value obtained in this lottery is set, and the initial value update type counter , The value obtained by lottery will be counted up toward the maximum value.

That is, as in the present embodiment, the range of the jackpot determination value (big hit determination range) is from the intermediate value (value 16384) between the minimum value and the maximum value to the maximum value side in both the low probability and the high probability. When the value is set to a range closer to, the value (low) before the first value in the range of the jackpot judgment value (big hit judgment range) from the timing when the value of the initial value update type counter becomes the value 0 The period until the value reaches 32667 in probability and 31767) in high probability is irregular, and is rich in randomness. As a result, for example, the game ball is raised by illegally acquiring the timing at which the value of the initial value update type counter becomes 0 by some method and irradiating the radio waves toward the upper start port 2101 and the lower start port 2102. Even if a fraudulent act is performed that pretends to have entered the start port 2101 or the lower start port 2102, the value of the initial value update type counter is one of the jackpot judgment value ranges (big hit judgment range). It can be said that the probability of becoming a value is low.

The initial value update type counter is repeatedly updated in the range from the minimum value to the maximum value. From the minimum value (first value) in the range of the jackpot judgment value (big hit judgment range) from the initial value to the minimum value (first value) of the jackpot judgment value range (big hit judgment range) in the second cycle The time required is time T0. The time required for the counter to reach the minimum value (first value) of the jackpot judgment value range (big hit judgment range) in the third cycle from the time T0 is the time T1, and the time T1 is shorter than the time T0. .. In the 4th cycle from time T1, the time required for the counter to reach the minimum value (first value) of the jackpot judgment value range (big hit judgment range) is time T2, and time T2 is shorter than time T1. .. In this way, in the initial value update type counter, by giving a fluctuation to the time when the updated counter becomes the minimum value (first value) of the jackpot judgment value range (big hit judgment range) (periodicity). (By eliminating the), it is not detected by the player.

[13-3. Main control side power-on processing]
When the power is turned on to the pachinko gaming machine 1, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 performs the main control side power-on processing as shown in FIGS. 37 and 38. When the main control side power-on processing is started, the main control MPU4100a sets the stack pointer (step S10). The stack pointer indicates, for example, the address loaded on the stack to temporarily store the contents of the storage element (register) in use, or temporarily returns the return address of this routine when the subroutine is terminated and returned to this routine. It indicates the address stacked on the stack for storage, and the stack pointer advances each time the stack is stacked. In step S10, the initial address is set on the stack pointer, and the contents of the register, the return address, and the like are pushed onto the stack from this initial address. Then, the stack pointer returns to the initial address by reading in order from the last stacked stack to the first stacked stack.

Following step S10, the output of the power failure clear signal to the power failure monitoring circuit 4100e shown in FIG. 24 is started (step S11). The power failure monitoring circuit 4100e is composed of a comparator MIC21 which is a voltage comparison circuit and a D type flip-flop MIC22. The comparator MIC21, which is a voltage comparison circuit, outputs the comparison result by comparing the voltage between + 24V and the reference voltage or comparing the voltage between + 12V and the reference voltage. This comparison result is input to the PR terminal, which is the preset terminal of the D type flip-flop MIC22, as the logic becomes HI when a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs, while when a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs. The logic becomes LOW and is input to the PR terminal which is a preset terminal of the D type flip-flop MIC22. In step S11, the output of the power failure clear signal is started to the CLR terminal which is the clear terminal of the D type flip-flop MIC22. This power failure clear signal is input from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the main control MPU 4100a to the CLR terminal which is the clear terminal of the D type flip-flop IC via the main control output circuit 4100ca with a reset function with its logic as LOW. Will be done. As a result, the main control MPU4100a can release the latch state of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, and until the latch state is set, the logic input to the PR terminal which is the preset terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22 is input. It can be inverted and output from the 1Q terminal, which is an output terminal, and the signal from the 1Q terminal can be monitored.

Following step S12, wait timer processing 1 is performed (step S12), and it is determined whether or not a power failure warning signal is input (step S14). The voltage does not rise immediately from the time the power is turned on until the specified voltage is reached. On the other hand, in the event of a power failure or momentary power failure (a phenomenon in which the power supply is temporarily stopped), the voltage drops, and when the voltage becomes smaller than the power failure warning voltage, a power failure warning signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 4100e as a power failure warning. Similarly, when the voltage becomes smaller than the power failure warning voltage between the time when the power is turned on and the voltage rises to a predetermined voltage, a power failure warning signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 4100e. Therefore, the wait timer process 1 in step S12 is a process for waiting until the voltage becomes larger than the power failure warning voltage and stabilizes after the power is turned on. In the present embodiment, the waiting time (wait timer) is 200 milliseconds (waiting timer). ms) is set. In the determination in step S14, it is determined whether or not the power failure warning signal is input. This determination is performed based on the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22 described above, as the power failure warning signal.

If there is no power failure warning signal input even after waiting until the voltage becomes higher than the power failure warning voltage and stabilizes after the power is turned on in step S14, the power failure clear signal is output to the CLR terminal, which is the clear terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22. Stop (step S15). Here, the power failure clear signal is a CLR terminal which is a clear terminal of the D type flip-flop IC via the main control output circuit 4100ca with a reset function from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the main control MPU 4100a with its logic as HI. Is entered in. As a result, the main control MPU4100a can set the D-type flip-flop MIC 22 in the latched state. When the D-type flip-flop MIC 22 latches the state in which the logic is LOW and is input to the PR terminal which is the preset terminal, the power failure warning signal is output from the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal.

Following step S15, it is determined whether or not the operation switch 860a of the payout control board 4110 shown in FIG. 12 is operated (step S16). This determination is based on the logic of the operation signal from the operation switch 860a of the payout control board 4110, and it is determined that this determination does not indicate that the RAM is cleared when the logic of the operation signal from the operation switch 860a is HI. While it is determined that the operation switch 860a is not operated, it is determined that when the logic of the operation signal from the operation switch 860a is LOW, it is determined that the RAM is cleared and the operation switch 860a is operated. Judge that there is.

When the operation switch 860a is operated in step S16, the value 1 is set in the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG (step S18), while when the operation switch 860a is not operated in step S16, the RAM clear notification flag is set. A value of 0 is set in RCL-FLG (step S20). The RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is a game related to a game such as a probability fluctuation or an unpaid prize ball stored in a RAM built in the main control MPU4100a (hereinafter, referred to as "main control built-in RAM"). It is a flag indicating whether or not to delete the information, and is set to a value of 1 when the game information is deleted and a value of 0 when the game information is not deleted. The value of the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG set in steps S18 and S20 is stored in the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the main control MPU4100a.

Following step S18 or step S20, the wait timer process 2 is performed (step S22). In this wait timer process 2, the system that controls the drawing of the liquid crystal display device 1900 on the game board side by the liquid crystal of the peripheral control board 4140 and the sound control unit 4160 shown in FIG. 14 is waiting until it starts (boots). In the present embodiment, 2 seconds (s) is set as the time until booting (boot timer). As described above, the mobile terminal 470 received by the player at the reception of the hall is placed in the recess 314d formed on the right side of the upper plate upper panel 314 of the plate unit 300 shown in FIG. At the time of power recovery, when the mobile terminal 470 is mounted in the recess 314d, the information on which the mobile terminal 470 is mounted is a control signal from the communication control circuit 4162a shown in FIG. Peripheral control of 4150 Peripheral control of MPU 4150a Input to various parallel I / O ports 4150ag. The peripheral control MPU 4150a to which this control signal is input controls the communication control circuit 4162a by outputting a control signal to the communication control circuit 4162a from the peripheral control various parallel I / O ports 4150ag, and controls the communication control circuit 4162a with the mobile terminal 470. Communication initial settings are made to exchange various information (various data) wirelessly in both directions. Therefore, in the wait timer process 2 in step S22, the system that controls the drawing of the liquid crystal display device 1900 on the game board side and the mobile terminal 470 by the liquid crystal of the peripheral control board 4140 and the sound control unit 4160 is waited until it starts (boots). However, the time set as the time until booting (boot timer) is set to the time to wait until the system that controls the drawing of the above-mentioned liquid crystal display device 1900 on the game board starts (boots). The time is the same as 2 seconds (s).

Following step S22, it is determined whether or not the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG has a value of 0 (step S24). As described above, the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is set to a value of 1 when the game information is erased and a value of 0 when the game information is not erased. When the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG has a value of 0 in step S24, that is, when the game information is not erased, the checksum is calculated (step S26). This checksum regards the game information stored in the main control built-in RAM as a numerical value and calculates the total.

Following step S26, whether or not the calculated checksum value (sum value) matches the checksum value (sum value) stored in the main control side power off processing (power off) described later. (Step S28). If they match, it is determined whether or not the backup flag BK-FLG has a value of 1 (step S30). The backup flag BK-FLG stores the game backup information such as the game information, the checksum value (sum value), and the backup flag BK-FLG value in the main control built-in RAM in the main control side power cutoff process described later. This flag indicates whether or not the operation has been performed, and is set to a value of 1 when the main control side power off processing is normally completed, and a value of 0 when the main control side power off processing is not normally completed.

When the backup flag BK-FLG has a value of 1 in step S30, that is, when the main control side power off processing is normally completed, the work area of the main control built-in RAM is set as the time of power recovery (step S32). In this setting, in addition to setting the value 0 to the backup flag BK-FLG, the power recovery information is read from the ROM built in the main control MPU4100a (hereinafter, referred to as "main control built-in ROM"), and this power recovery is performed. The time information is set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM. In addition, "recovery" means that the power is turned on from the state where the power is cut off, the state where the power is restored after the power failure or momentary power failure, and the state where high frequency is irradiated is detected and reset. The state of returning after that is also included.

Following step S32, a power-on command creation process is performed (step S34). In this power-on command creation process, the game information is read from the game backup information, and various commands corresponding to the game information are stored in a predetermined storage area of the main control built-in RAM.

On the other hand, when the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is not a value 0 (value 1) in step S24, that is, when the game information is erased, or when the checksum values (sum values) do not match in step S28. Or, when the backup flag BK-FLG is not a value 1 (value 0) in step S30, that is, when the main control side power off processing is not normally completed, the entire area of the main control built-in RAM is cleared ( Step S36). Specifically, the value 0 is written to the main control built-in RAM (note that a predetermined value may be read from the main control built-in ROM as an initial value and set). Further, the main control MPU4100a normally performs the processing when the operation signal from the operation switch 860a indicates RAM clear, and when the game information is erased, when the sum values do not match, or when the main control side power is turned off. When it is not finished, the unique ID code stored in advance in the non-volatile RAM of the main control MPU4100a is taken out, and the random number for jackpot determination is updated based on the taken out ID code. The initial value derivation process for deriving the fixed value of is performed, and this fixed value is set in the random number for determining the initial value for jackpot determination to be used for determining the initial value of the above-mentioned random number for jackpot determination.

Following step S36, the work area of the main control built-in RAM is set as an initial setting (step S38). This setting reads the initial information from the main control built-in ROM and sets this initial information in the work area of the main control built-in RAM.

Following step S38, RAM clear notification and test command creation processing are performed (step S40). In this RAM clear notification and test command creation process, a power-on command classified into power-on as shown in FIG. 34 is created to notify that the main control built-in RAM is cleared and the initial setting is performed, and the peripherals Test commands classified in relation to the test shown in FIG. 35 for performing various inspections of the control board 4140 are created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM.

Following step S34 or step S40, interrupt initial setting is performed (step S42). This setting sets the interrupt cycle when the main control side timer interrupt process, which will be described later, is performed. In this embodiment, it is set to 4 ms.

Following step S42, interrupt enable setting is performed (step S44). With this setting, the main control side timer interrupt process is repeatedly performed every 4 ms, that is, the interrupt cycle set in step S42.

Following step S44, the value A is set in the watch dock timer clear register WCL (step S46). The watch dock timer is set to clear by setting the value A, the value B, and the value C in this order in the watch dock timer clear register WCL.

Following step S46, it is determined whether or not a power failure warning signal has been input (step S48). As described above, when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is cut off, a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs, when the voltage becomes equal to or lower than the power failure warning voltage, a power failure warning signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 4100e as a power failure warning. The determination in step S48 is performed based on this power failure warning signal.

When there is no input of the power failure warning signal in step S48, the non-winning random number update process is performed (step S50). In this non-winning random number update process, the above-mentioned random number for reach determination, random number for variable display pattern, random number for determining initial value for big hit symbol, random number for determining initial value for small hit symbol, and the like are updated. In this way, in the non-winning random number update process, random numbers that are not related to the winning determination (big hit determination) are updated. In addition, the above-mentioned random number for determining normal symbol hit, random number for determining initial value for determining normal symbol hit, random number for normal symbol variation display pattern, and the like are also updated by this non-winning random number update process.

Following step S50, the process returns to step S46 again, the value A is set in the watch dock timer clear register WCL, it is determined in step S48 whether or not there is a power failure warning signal input, and this power failure warning signal must be input. For example, the non-winning random number update process is performed in step S50, and steps S46 to S50 are repeated. The processing of steps S46 to S50 is referred to as "main control side main processing".

On the other hand, when the power failure warning signal is input in step S48, the interrupt prohibition setting is set (step S52). With this setting, the timer interrupt process on the main control side, which will be described later, is not performed, writing to the main control built-in RAM is prevented, and rewriting of game information is protected.

Following step S52, the output of the power failure clear signal is started (step S53). Here, the same process as the process of starting the output of the power failure clear signal in step S11 is performed. As a result, the main control MPU4100a can release the latch state of the D-type flip-flop MIC22.

Following step S53, the starting port solenoid 2105, the attacker solenoid 2108, the upper special symbol display 1185, the lower special symbol display 1186, the upper special symbol storage display 1184, and the lower special symbol storage display 1187 shown in FIG. , The drive signal output to the normal symbol display 1189, the normal symbol storage display 1188, the game status display 1183, the round display 1190, etc. is stopped (step S54).

Following step S54, the checksum is calculated and the calculated value is stored (step S56). This checksum calculates the total of the game information in the work area of the main control built-in RAM, excluding the storage area of the checksum value (sum value) and the backup flag BK-FLG value described above, as numerical values.

Following step S56, the backup flag BK-FLG is set to a value of 1 (step S58). As a result, the storage of the game backup information is completed.

Following step S58, the watch dock timer is cleared (step S60). As described above, this clear setting is performed by setting the value A, the value B, and the value C in order in the watch dock timer clear register WCL.

Following step S60, an infinite loop is entered. In this infinite loop, the value A, the value B, and the value C are not set in order in the watch dock timer clear register WCL, so that the watch dock timer is not set to clear. Therefore, the main control MPU 4100a is reset, and then the main control MPU 4100a performs the main control side power-on processing again. The processing of steps S52 to S60 and the infinite loop are referred to as "main control side power off processing".

The pachinko gaming machine 1 (main control MPU4100a) is reset when there is a power failure or when there is a momentary power failure, and the main control side power is turned on when the power is restored thereafter.

In step S28, it is inspected whether or not the game backup information stored in the main control built-in RAM is normal, and then in step S30, whether or not the main control side power off processing is normally completed. Is inspecting. In this way, by double-checking the game backup information stored in the main control built-in RAM, it is inspected whether or not the game backup information is stored by fraudulent activity.

[13-4. Main control side timer interrupt processing]
Next, the timer interrupt processing on the main control side will be described. This main control side timer interrupt process is repeatedly performed every interrupt cycle (4 ms in this embodiment) set in the main control side power-on time process shown in FIGS. 37 and 38.

When the main control side timer interrupt process is started, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 sets the value B in the watch dock timer clear register WCL as shown in FIG. 39 (step S70). At this time, the value B is set in the watch dock timer clear register WCL following the value A set in step S46 of the main control side power-on processing (main control side main processing).

Following step S70, the interrupt flag is cleared (step S72). When this interrupt flag is cleared, the interrupt cycle is initialized, and the next interrupt cycle is clocked from the initial value.

Following step S72, switch input processing is performed (step S74). In this switch input process, various signals input to the input terminals of the various input ports of the main control MPU 4100a are read and stored as input information in the input information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. Specifically, the detection signals from the general winning opening switches 3020 and 3020 shown in FIG. 11 for detecting the game ball entered in the general winning opening 2104 and 2201 shown in FIG. 8, and the large winning opening shown in FIG. The detection signal from the count switch 2110 shown in FIG. 11 for detecting the game ball entering the 2103, and the upper starting port switch shown in FIG. 11 for detecting the game ball entering the upper starting port 2101 shown in FIG. It passed through the detection signal from 3022, the detection signal from the lower start port switch 2109 shown in FIG. 11 for detecting the game ball entering the lower start port 2102 shown in FIG. 8, and the gate portion 2350 shown in FIG. It was transmitted by the detection signal from the gate switch 2352 shown in FIG. 11 for detecting the game ball, the detection signal from the magnetic detection switch 3024 for detecting fraudulent activity using the magnet shown in FIG. 11, and the prize ball control process described later. The payer ACK signal from the payout control board 4110, which conveys that the payout control board 4110 shown in FIG. 11 has normally received the prize ball command, is read and stored in the input information storage area as input information. In addition, the detection signal from the upper start port switch 3022 for detecting the game ball entering the upper start port 2101 and the detection signal from the lower start port switch 2109 for detecting the game ball entering the lower start port 2102 are read. And the corresponding start port winning command shown in FIG. 35, which is classified into other categories, is stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area described above. That is, if there is a detection signal from the upper start port switch 3022, the corresponding start port winning command is stored in the transmission information storage area as transmission information, and if there is a detection signal from the lower start port switch 2109, The corresponding start opening winning command is stored in the transmission information storage area as transmission information.

In this embodiment, the detection signals from the general winning opening switches 3020 and 3020 for detecting the game balls entered in the general winning openings 2104 and 2201, and the count switch 2110 for detecting the game balls entered in the large winning openings 2103. Detection signal from, detection signal from the upper start port switch 3022 that detects the game ball that has entered the upper start port 2101, detection signal from the lower start port switch 2109 that detects the game ball that has entered the lower start port 2102 , And the detection signals from the gate switch 2352 that detects the game ball that has passed through the gate portion 2350 are first read as the first time when the switch input process is started, and after a predetermined time (for example, 10 μs) has elapsed. The second time, each is read again. Then, the result read for the second time and the result read for the first time are compared. It is determined whether or not any of the comparison results has the same result. If the result is not the same, it is read again as the third time, and the result read in the third time is compared with the result read in the second time. It is determined again whether or not any of the comparison results has the same result. If the result is not the same, it is read again as the fourth time, and the result read at the fourth time is compared with the result read at the third time. It is determined again whether or not any of the comparison results has the same result. If the result is the same, it is treated as if there is no game ball.

As described above, in the switch input process, the detection signals from the general winning port switches 3020 and 3020, the count switch 2110, the upper start port switch 3022, the lower start port switch 2109, and the gate switch 2352 are transmitted from the first to the third time. It is possible to avoid erroneous detection due to the influence of chattering, noise, etc. by performing a total of two readings, one for comparing twice and the other for comparing twice to four times. Therefore, it is possible to improve the reliability of the detection signals from the general winning port switches 3020 and 3020, the count switch 2110, the upper start port switch 3022, the lower start port switch 2109, and the gate switch 2352.

Following step S74, timer subtraction processing is performed (step S76). In this timer subtraction process, for example, the time during which the upper special symbol display 1185 and the lower special symbol display 1186 are lit according to the fluctuation display pattern determined by the special symbol and the special electric accessory control process described later, the normal symbol described later, and the normal symbol In addition to the time when the normal symbol display 1189 lights up according to the normal symbol variation display pattern determined by the normal electric accessory control process, the main control board 4100 (main control MPU4100a) issues various commands and the control board 4110 is normal. When determining whether or not a payer ACK signal for notifying that it has been received is input, time management such as the ACK signal input determination time set as the determination condition is performed. Specifically, when the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display pattern or the normal symbol fluctuation display pattern is 5 seconds, the timer interrupt cycle is set to 4 ms, so that the fluctuation time is subtracted by 4 ms each time the timer subtraction process is performed. Then, when the subtraction result becomes a value of 0, the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display pattern or the normal symbol fluctuation display pattern is accurately measured.

In the present embodiment, the ACK signal input determination time is set to 100 ms. Each time this timer subtraction process is performed, the ACK signal input determination time is subtracted by 4 ms, and the subtraction result becomes a value of 0, so that the ACK signal input determination time is accurately measured. These various times and the ACK signal input determination time are stored in the time management information storage area of the main control built-in RAM as time management information.

Following step S76, the winning random number update process is performed (step S78). In this winning random number update process, the above-mentioned big hit determination random number, big hit symbol random number, and small hit symbol random number are updated. Further, in addition to these random numbers, the random number for determining the initial value for the jackpot symbol, which is updated by the non-winning random number update process in step S50 in the main control side power-on processing (main control side main process) shown in FIG. 38, And the random number for determining the initial value for the small hit symbol is also updated. These random numbers for determining the initial value for the big hit symbol and the random numbers for determining the initial value for the small hit symbol are updated in the main control side main process and the main control side timer interrupt process, respectively, to further enhance the randomness. .. On the other hand, the big hit judgment random number, the big hit symbol random number, and the small hit symbol random number are random numbers related to the winning judgment (big hit judgment), so each counter is used only each time the winning random number update process is performed. Counts up.

For example, the counter that updates the random number for jackpot determination is an initial value update type counter as described above, and has a predetermined fixed numerical value range from the minimum value to the maximum value (in the present embodiment, the value is set as the minimum value). It is updated within the value 32767) as 0 to the maximum value, and the range from the minimum value to the maximum value is counted up by adding a value of 1 each time the main control side timer interrupt process is performed. The random number for determining the initial value for jackpot determination is counted up toward the maximum value (value 32767), and then the random number for determining the initial value for jackpot determination is counted up from the minimum value (value 0). When the counter that updates the big hit judgment random number finishes counting up in the range from the minimum value to the maximum value of the big hit judgment random number, the big hit judgment initial value determination random number is updated by this winning random number update process. The random number for determining the initial value for jackpot determination can be obtained by executing the initial value lottery process for drawing one value from the fixed numerical value range of the counter that updates the random number for jackpot determination. The above-mentioned random number for determining the normal symbol hit and the random number for determining the initial value for determining the normal symbol hit are also updated by this winning random number update process. The random number for determining the normal symbol hit is the same as the method for updating the random number for determining the big hit described above, and the description thereof will be omitted.

In the present embodiment, the random number for determining the initial value for jackpot determination, the random number for determining the initial value for the jackpot symbol, and the random number for determining the initial value for the small hit symbol are processed at power-on on the main control side shown in FIG. 38 (main control). The non-winning random number update process in step S50 in the side main process) and the hit random number update process in step S78 in the main control side timer interrupt process, which is this routine, are updated respectively, but this routine is performed every time an interrupt timer occurs. When the number of executions of the non-winning random number update process in step S50 becomes random by repeatedly executing the main control side main process within the remaining time until the next interrupt timer occurs due to unevenness in the process time of , The random number for determining the initial value for big hit determination, the random number for determining the initial value for the big hit symbol, and the random number for determining the initial value for the small hit symbol may be updated only in the non-winning random number update process in step S50.

Following step S78, prize ball control processing is performed (step S80). In this prize ball control process, the prize ball command shown in FIG. 33 for reading the input information from the above-mentioned input information storage area and paying out the game ball based on the input information can be created, or with the main control board 4100. The self-check command shown in FIG. 33 for confirming the connection state between the payout control board 4110 and the board is created. Then, the created prize ball command and self-check command are transmitted to the payout control board 4110 as main payment serial data. For example, when one game ball enters the large winning opening 2103 shown in FIG. 8, a prize ball command for paying out 15 balls as a prize ball is created and transmitted to the payout control board 4110, or this prize ball command Create a self-check command to check the connection status between the main control board 4100 and the payout control board 4110 when the payer ACK signal indicating that the payout control board 4110 has normally received is not input within a predetermined time. Then, it is transmitted to the payout control board 4110.

Following step S80, frame command reception processing is performed (step S82). The payout control board 4110 transmits various 1-byte (8-bit) commands (frame state 1 command, error release navigation command, and frame state 2 command) classified into the state display shown in FIG. 36. In the frame command reception process of step S82, when these various commands are normally received as payer serial data, the information to convey that fact to the payout control board 4110 is stored as output information in the output information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. .. In addition, the command normally received as the payer serial data is formatted into a 2-byte (16-bit) command (various commands classified into the status display in FIG. 35 (frame status 1 command, error release navigation command, and frame). State 2 command)), the transmission information is stored in the transmission information storage area described above.

Following step S82, fraud detection processing is performed (step S84). In this fraud detection process, an abnormal state related to the prize ball is confirmed. For example, when the input information is read from the above-mentioned input information storage area and the detection signal from the count switch 2110 is input when the game is not in the big hit game state (when the game ball enters the big winning opening 2103). , A winning abnormality display command classified into the notification display shown in FIG. 35 as an abnormal state is created, and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area described above.

Following step S84, a special symbol and a special electric accessory control process are performed (step S86). In this special symbol and special electric accessory control process, the value of the counter that updates the above-mentioned random number for jackpot determination is taken out, and it is determined whether or not it matches the jackpot determination value stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM (big hit). It is determined whether or not to generate a game state (referred to as "special lottery")), and the value of the counter that updates the random number for the jackpot symbol is taken out and used as the probability variation hit determination value stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM. It is determined whether or not they match (determination of whether or not a probability fluctuation is generated). Here, the "probability fluctuation" means that the probability of a big hit changes to a high probability (probability change) set higher than that in the normal time (low probability). In the present embodiment, the value 32668 to the value 32767 are set as the above-mentioned jackpot determination value range (big hit determination range) with a low probability, and are read from the normal judgment table, whereas the value 31768 with a high probability. ~ Value 32767 is set and is read from the probability change determination table. As described above, in the special symbol and the special electric accessory control process in step S86, whether or not the value of the counter for updating the random number for jackpot determination and the jackpot determination value stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM match. When determining whether or not, the value of the counter that updates the jackpot determination random number is included in the jackpot determination range.

When these determination results are based on the upper start port switch 3022, various commands related to the special figure 1 synchronization effect shown in FIG. 34 are created, while the lottery result is based on the lower start port switch 2109. In, various commands related to the special figure 2 synchronization effect shown in FIG. 34 are created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area, and the upper special symbol display 1185 or the upper special symbol display 1185 or according to the determined variation display pattern of the special symbol. The output of the lighting signal to the upper special symbol display 1185 or the lower special symbol display 1186 is set so as to light the lower special symbol display 1186, and the output information is stored in the above-mentioned output information storage area. Further, depending on the game state to be generated, for example, when a big hit game state is reached, various commands classified as related to the big hit shown in FIG. 34 (big hit opening command, big winning opening 1 opening Nth display command, big winning opening 1). A closing display command, a big winning opening 1 count display command, a big hit ending command, and a big hit symbol display command) are created and stored in the transmission information storage area as transmission information, or the opening / closing member 2107 shown in FIG. 8 is opened / closed. When the output of the drive signal to the attacker solenoid 2108 is set and stored as output information in the output information storage area, or when the number of times (round) that the grand prize opening 2103 is opened from the closed state is two times, the figure is shown in the figure. The output of the lighting signal to the 2-round indicator lamp 1190a is set so as to turn on the 2-round indicator lamp 1190a of the round indicator 1190 shown in 10. The output information is stored in the output information storage area, or the round is performed 15 times. At one time, the output of the lighting signal to the 15-round indicator lamp 1190b is set so as to light the 15-round indicator lamp 1190b of the round indicator 1190 shown in 89, and the output information is stored in the output information storage area or the probability fluctuates. The output of the lighting signal to the game status indicator 1183 is set so that the presence or absence of the occurrence of the above is lit in a predetermined color, and is stored in the output information storage area as output information.

Following step S86, a normal symbol and a normal electric accessory control process are performed (step S88). In this ordinary symbol and ordinary electric accessory control process, input information is read from the above-mentioned input information storage area, and gate winning processing is performed based on this input information. In this gate winning process, it is determined from the input information whether or not the detection signal from the gate switch 2352 has been input to the input terminal. Based on this determination result, when the detection signal is input to the input terminal, the value of the counter that updates the above-mentioned normal symbol hit determination random number is extracted and used as gate information in the gate information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. Remember in.

The gate information storage area is provided with 0th to 3rd sections (4 sections), and gate information is stored in the order of 0th section, 1st section, 2nd section, and 3rd section. It has become like. For example, when the gate information is stored in the 0th to 2nd sections of the gate information storage, the gate information is stored in the 3rd section of the gate information storage when the detection signal from the gate switch 2352 is input to the input terminal. To do.

The gate information stored in the 0th section of the gate information storage is set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM. When this gate information is set, the gate information of the first section of the gate information storage is in the 0th section of the gate information storage, and the gate information of the second section of the gate information storage is in the first section of the gate information storage. The gate information of the third section of the information storage is shifted to the second section of the gate information storage, and the third section of the gate information storage becomes an empty area. For example, when the gate information is stored in the first to second sections of the gate information storage, the gate information of the first section of the gate information storage is stored in the 0th section of the gate information storage, and the gate information is stored in the 0th section. The gate information of the two sections is shifted to the first section of the gate information storage, and the second section of the gate information storage and the third section of the gate information storage become free areas. Here, when the gate information is stored in the first to third sections of the gate information storage, the above-mentioned gate information is set so that the normal symbol storage display 1188 is turned on with the total number of the stored gate information as the holding ball. The output of the lighting signal of the normal symbol storage display 1188 is set based on the above, and is stored in the output information storage area described above as output information.

Following the gate winning process, the gate information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM is read, and the value of the random number for normal symbol hit determination is taken out from the read gate information and stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM. It is judged whether or not it matches the judgment value per normal symbol (referred to as "normal lottery"). Whether or not to open and close the movable piece 2106 is determined based on this determination result (lottery result by a normal lottery). When the opening / closing operation is performed by this determination, the pair of movable pieces 2106 is in a state of being expanded in the left-right direction, so that the game ball can be accepted into the lower starting port 2102, which is advantageous for the player. It becomes a game state. The variation display pattern of the normal symbol corresponding to this determination is determined based on the above-mentioned random number for the normal symbol variation display pattern, and various commands classified in relation to the normal symbol synchronization effect shown in FIG. 34 are created and used as transmission information. While storing in the transmission information storage area described above, the output of the lighting signal to the normal symbol display 1189 is set so as to light the normal symbol display 1189 according to the determined variation display pattern of the normal symbol, and the output information is described above. It is stored in the output information storage area. Further, for example, when the value of the extracted normal symbol hit determination random number matches the normal symbol hit determination value stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM, various commands related to the normal electric service effect shown in FIG. 34 Is created and stored in the transmission information storage area as transmission information, and the output of the drive signal to the start port solenoid 2105 is set so as to open and close the movable piece 2106, and is stored in the output information storage area described above as output information. On the other hand, when the value of the extracted normal symbol hit judgment random number does not match the normal symbol hit judgment value stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM, the normal symbol is based on the above-mentioned normal symbol variation display pattern random number. A variable display pattern is determined, various commands classified in relation to the normal symbol synchronization effect shown in FIG. 34 are created, stored as transmission information in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area, and according to the determined normal symbol variation display pattern. The output of the lighting signal to the normal symbol display 1189 is set so as to light the normal symbol display 1189, and the output information is stored in the above-mentioned output information storage area.

Following step S88, port output processing is performed (step S90). In this port output process, output information is read from the output information storage area described above from the output terminals of various output ports of the main control MPU 4100a, and various signals are output based on this output information. For example, when various commands from the payout control board 4110 are normally received from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the main control MPU 4100a based on the output information, the main payout ACK signal is output to the payout control board 4110 or a big hit. In the game state, a drive signal is output to the attacker solenoid 2108 that opens and closes the opening / closing member 2107 of the large winning opening 2103, and a drive signal is output to the starting port solenoid 2105 that opens / closes the movable piece 2106. In addition, 15 round jackpot information output signal, 2 round jackpot information output signal, probability fluctuation information output signal, special symbol display information output signal, normal symbol display information output signal, time saving medium information output information, start opening winning information output signal, etc. Various information (game information) signals related to the game are output to the payout control board 4110.

Following step S90, peripheral control board command transmission processing is performed (step S92). In this peripheral control board command transmission process, transmission information is read from the transmission information storage area described above, and this transmission information is transmitted to the peripheral control board 4140 as main peripheral serial data. This transmission information includes various commands classified in the special figure 1 synchronization effect-related and various types classified in the special figure 2 synchronization effect-related, as shown in FIG. 34, created by the main control side timer interrupt process of this routine. Commands, various commands classified as jackpot related, various commands classified as power-on, various commands classified as related to normal electric power production, various commands classified as related to ordinary electric service production, shown in FIG. 35. Various commands classified into the notification display, various commands classified into the status display, various commands classified into the test-related command, and various commands classified into others are stored. One packet of the main circumference serial data is composed of 3 bytes. Specifically, the main peripheral serial data has a status indicating the type of command having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits), a mode indicating a variation of an effect having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits), and a status. It is composed of a sum value obtained by regarding the mode as a numerical value and a sum of the sum values, and this sum value is created at the time of transmission.

Following step S92, the value C is set in the watch dock timer clear register WCL (step S94). By setting the value C in the watch dock timer clear register WCL in step S94, the value C is set in the watch dock timer clear register WCL following the value B set in step S70. As a result, the value A, the value B, and the value C are set in order in the watch dock timer clear register WCL, and the watch dock timer is set to clear.

Following step S94, register switching (returning) is performed (step S96), and this routine is terminated. Here, when the main control side timer interrupt process, which is this routine, is started, the main control MPU4100a stacks the contents of the general-purpose register in hardware and saves it. This prevents the contents of the general-purpose register used in the main processing on the main control side from being destroyed. In step S96, the contents loaded on the stack and saved are read and written to the original register. The main control MPU4100a sets interrupt enable after returning in step S96.

[14. Various control processes for payout control boards]
Next, various control processes performed by the payout control board 4110 shown in FIG. 12 will be described with reference to FIGS. 40 to 56. FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing an example of the power-on processing of the payout control unit, FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing the continuation of the power-on processing of the payout control unit, and FIG. 42 shows the payout control unit following FIG. 41. FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing the continuation of the power-on processing, FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing an example of the payout control unit timer interrupt processing, FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing an example of the rotation angle switch history creation processing, and FIG. 45 is a sprocket. FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing an example of the fixed position determination skip process, FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing an example of the ball squeeze determination process, and FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing an example of the prize ball stock number addition process for prize balls. 48 is a flowchart showing an example of the prize ball stock number addition process for lending, FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing an example of the stock monitoring process, and FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing an example of the payout ball motion determination setting process. 51 is a flowchart showing an example of a payout setting process, FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing an example of a ball-shaped motion setting process, and FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing an example of a retry operation monitoring process, FIG. 54. Is a flowchart showing an example of the inconsistency counter reset determination process, FIG. 55 is a flowchart showing an example of the error release operation determination process, and FIG. 56 is a signal process (a) at the time of payout operation by ball lending, from the CR unit. It is a timing chart which shows the input signal confirmation processing (a) of.

First, the payout control unit power-on processing will be described, followed by the payout control unit timer interrupt processing, ball removal switch operation judgment processing, rotation angle switch history creation processing, sprocket fixed position judgment skip processing, ball bending judgment processing, and prize. Ball prize ball stock number addition process, ball rental prize ball stock number addition process, stock monitoring process, payout ball motion judgment setting process, payout setting process, ball ball motion setting process, retry motion monitoring process, inconsistency The counter reset determination process and the error release operation determination process will be described. In addition, ball removal switch operation judgment processing, rotation angle switch history creation processing, sprocket fixed position judgment skip processing, ball bending judgment processing, prize ball stock number addition processing for prize ball stock number addition processing, stock The monitoring process, the payout ball motion determination setting process, the retry operation monitoring process, the inconsistency counter reset determination process, and the error release operation determination process are one of the main operation setting processes of step S562 in the payout control unit power-on process described later. It is performed as processing, rotation angle switch history creation processing, sprocket fixed position judgment skip processing, ball addition judgment processing, retry operation monitoring processing, inconsistency counter reset judgment processing, error cancellation operation judgment processing, prize ball stock number for prize balls The order of priority is set in the order of addition processing, prize ball stock number addition processing for lending, stock monitoring processing, and payout ball movement determination setting processing.

[14-1. Dispensing control unit power-on processing]
When the power is turned on to the pachinko gaming machine 1, the payout control MPU 4120a of the payout control unit 4120 on the payout control board 4110 performs a process when the payout control unit is turned on, as shown in FIGS. 40 to 42. When the payout control unit power-on processing is started, the payout control MPU4120a sets the interrupt mode (step S500). This interrupt mode sets the priority of interrupts of the payout control MPU4120a. In the present embodiment, the payout control unit timer interrupt process, which will be described later, is set to have the highest priority, and when an interrupt of the payout control unit timer interrupt process occurs, the process is preferentially performed.

Following step S500, input / output settings (I / O input / output settings) are performed (step S502). In this I / O input / output setting, various input ports and various output ports of the payout control MPU4120a are set.

Following step S502, wait timer processing 1 is performed (step S506) to determine whether or not a power failure warning signal has been input (step S508). The voltage does not rise immediately from the time the power is turned on until the specified voltage is reached. On the other hand, when a power failure or a momentary power failure (a phenomenon in which the power supply is temporarily stopped) occurs, the voltage drops, and when the voltage becomes smaller than the power failure warning voltage, the power failure monitoring circuit 4100e of the main control board 4100 shown in FIG. A warning signal (payout power failure warning signal) is input. Similarly, when the voltage becomes smaller than the power failure warning voltage between the time when the power is turned on and the voltage rises to a predetermined voltage, a power failure warning signal (payout power failure warning signal) is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 4100e of the main control board 4100. Therefore, the wait timer process 1 in step S506 is a process for waiting until the voltage becomes larger than the power failure warning voltage and stabilizes after the power is turned on. In the present embodiment, the waiting time (wait timer) is 200 milliseconds (waiting timer). ms) is set. The determination in step S508 is performed based on the power failure warning signal (payout power failure warning signal) from the power failure monitoring circuit 4100e of the main control board 4100.

Following step S508, it is determined whether or not the operation switch 860a is operated (step S512). This determination is based on the logic of the operation signal from the operation switch 860a, and it is determined that the operation switch 860a does not instruct to clear the RAM when the logic of the operation signal from the operation switch 860a is HI. On the other hand, when the logic of the operation signal from the operation switch 860a is LOW, it is determined that the operation switch 860a is not operated, and it is determined that the operation switch 860a is operated by determining that the RAM is cleared.

When the operation switch 860a is operated in step S512, the value 1 is set in the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG (step S514), while when the operation switch 860a is not operated in step S512, the payout RAM is cleared. The value 0 is set in the notification flag HRCL-FLG (step S516). The payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is stored in the RAM built in the payout control MPU4120a (hereinafter, referred to as “payout control built-in RAM”), for example, various flags and various information storage areas. Various information and the like (for example, the prize ball stock number PBS, the actual ball count PB, the drive command number DRV, the inconsistency counter INCC, etc. stored in the prize ball information storage area, and the CR communication information storage area. It is a flag indicating whether or not to delete the payout information related to the payout of the PRDY signal output setting information in which the logical state of the PRDY signal is set, and the value is 1 when the payout information is erased. Is set to a value of 0 when is not deleted. The payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG set in steps S514 and S516 is stored in the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the payout control MPU4120a.

Following step S514 or step S516, a setting is made to allow access to the payout control built-in RAM (step S518). With this setting, the RAM with built-in payout control can be accessed, and for example, payout information can be written (stored) or read out.

Following step S518, the stack pointer is set (step S520). The stack pointer indicates, for example, the address loaded on the stack to temporarily store the contents of the storage element (register) in use, or temporarily returns the return address of this routine when the subroutine is terminated and returned to this routine. It indicates the address stacked on the stack for storage, and the stack pointer advances each time the stack is stacked. In step S520, the initial address is set in the stack pointer, and the contents of the register, the return address, and the like are pushed onto the stack from this initial address. Then, the stack pointer returns to the initial address by reading in order from the last stacked stack to the first stacked stack.

Following step S520, it is determined whether or not the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG has a value of 0 (step S522). As described above, the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is set to a value 1 when the payout information is erased and a value 0 when the payout information is not erased.

When the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG has a value of 0 in step S522, that is, when the payout information is not erased, the checksum is calculated (step S524). In this checksum, the payout information stored in the payout control built-in RAM is regarded as a numerical value and the total is calculated.

Following step S524, it is determined whether or not the calculated checksum value matches the checksum value stored in the payout control unit power off processing (when the power is turned off), which will be described later (step S526). .. If they match, it is determined whether or not the payout backup flag HBK-FLG has a value of 1 (step S528). The payout backup flag HBK-FLG is a flag indicating whether or not the payout backup information such as the payout information and the checksum value is stored and held in the payout control built-in RAM in the payout control unit power cutoff process described later, and is paid out. The value is set to 1 when the control unit power off processing is normally completed, and to 0 when the payout control unit power off processing is not normally completed.

When the payout backup flag HBK-FLG has a value of 1 in step S528, that is, when the payout control unit power off processing is normally completed, the work area of the payout control built-in RAM is set as the time of power recovery (step S530). In this setting, in addition to setting the value 0 to the payout backup flag HBK-FLG, the power recovery information is read from the ROM built in the payout control MPU4120a (hereinafter, referred to as “payout control built-in ROM”), and this setting is performed. Set the power recovery information in the work area of the output control built-in RAM. As a result, various flags, various information stored in various information storage areas, etc. (for example, prizes stored in the prize ball information storage area), which are the above-mentioned payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM. Ball stock number PBS, actual ball count PB, drive command number DRV, inconsistency counter INCC, etc., PRDY signal output setting information in which the logical state of the PRDY signal is set, stored in the CR communication information storage area, Information to be used for various processes is set based on the payout information related to the payout of the inconsistency counter reset determination time stored in the time management information storage area. The term "recovery" includes not only the state in which the power is turned on from the state in which the power is cut off, but also the state in which the power is restored after the power failure or momentary power failure.

On the other hand, when the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is not a value 0 (value 1) in step S522, that is, when the payout information is deleted, or when the checksum values do not match in step S526, or step. When the payout backup flag HBK-FLG is not a value 1 (value 0) in S528, that is, when the payout control unit power off processing is not normally completed, the entire area of the payout control built-in RAM is cleared (step S532). ). As a result, the payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM is cleared.

Following step S532, the work area of the payout control built-in RAM is set as an initial setting (step S534). In this setting, the initial information is read from the payout control built-in ROM, and this initial information is set in the work area of the payout control built-in RAM.

Following step S530 or step S534, interrupt initial setting is performed (step S536). This setting sets the interrupt cycle when the payout control unit timer interrupt process, which will be described later, is performed. In this embodiment, it is set to 2 ms.

Following step S536, interrupt enable setting is performed (step S538). With this setting, the payout control unit timer interrupt process is repeatedly performed every 2 ms, that is, the interrupt cycle set in step S536.

Following step S538, the value A is set in the watch dock timer clear register HWCL (step S539). The watch dock timer is set to clear by setting the value A, the value B, and the value C in order in the watch dock timer clear register HWCL.

Following step S539, it is determined whether or not a power failure warning signal (payout power failure warning signal) has been input (step S540). As described above, when the power supply of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is cut off, or a power failure or momentary power failure occurs, when the voltage falls below the power failure warning voltage, a power failure warning signal (payout power failure warning signal) is used as the main control board. It is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 4100e of 4100. The determination in step S540 is performed based on this power failure warning signal.

When there is no input of the power failure warning signal in step S540, it is determined whether or not the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG has a value of 1 (step S542). This 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG is a flag that measures 2 ms by the timer interrupt process of the payout control unit that is processed every 2 ms, which will be described later. Set.

When the value of the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG is 0 in step S542, that is, when 2 ms has not elapsed, the process returns to step S540 to determine whether or not a power failure warning signal (payout power failure warning signal) has been input.

On the other hand, when the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG has a value of 1 in step S542, that is, when 2 ms has elapsed, the value 0 is set in the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG (step S544).

Following step S544, the value B is set in the watch dock timer clear register HWCL (step S546). At this time, the value B is set in the watch dock timer clear register HWCL following the value A set in step S539.

Following step S546, port output processing is performed (step S548). In this port output process, various information is read from the output information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM, and various signals are output from the output terminals of the various output ports of the payout control MPU 4120a based on the various information. In the output information storage area, for example, payer ACK information indicating that various commands related to payout from the main control board 4100 (prize ball command and self-check command shown in FIG. 33) have been normally received, payout motor 744 Various information such as drive information for driving control to, prize ball number information for the number of balls actually paid out by the payout motor 744, and LED display information displayed on the error LED display 860b is stored. When various commands related to payout from the main control board 4100 are normally received from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 4120a based on the output information, the payer ACK signal is output to the main control board 4100 or the payout motor. A drive signal is output to the 744, or the number of balls actually paid out by the payout motor 744 is output to the external terminal plate 784 as a prize ball number information signal (in the present embodiment, the payout motor 744 is actually 10). A prize ball number information signal is output to the external terminal board 784 each time each game ball is paid out.), A display signal is output to the error LED display 860b.

Following step S548, port input processing is performed (step S550). In this port input process, various signals input to the input terminals of the various input ports of the payout control MPU4120a are read and stored as input information in the input information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM. For example, an operation signal of the operation switch 860a, a detection signal from the rotation angle switch 752, a detection signal from the counting switch 751, a detection signal from the full tank switch 550, a BRQ signal from the CR unit 6, a BRDY signal, and a CR connection signal. The main control board 4100 reads the main payment ACK signal, etc., which conveys that the main control board 4100 has normally received various commands transmitted in the command transmission process described later, and stores them in the input information storage area as input information.

Following step S550, timer update processing is performed (step S552). In this timer update process, the ball squeeze determination set as a determination condition when determining whether or not a sphere squeeze state is generated by the payout rotating body to which the rotation of the rotation shaft of the payout motor 744 is transmitted is determined. The time, the skip determination time set when the fixed position determination of the payout rotating body is not performed, and the skip determination time set when discharging the game balls stored in the prize ball tank 720 and the tank rail 731 shown in FIG. Ball removal determination time, full tank determination set as a determination condition when determining whether or not the game ball in which the accommodation space of the foul cover unit 540 shown in FIG. 1 is stored is full. It is set as a judgment condition when judging whether or not the number of balls of the game ball taken into the supply passage of the prize ball device 740 is equal to or more than a predetermined number by the detection signal from the ball out switch 750. In addition to managing the time such as the ball out judgment time, the number of game balls received and paid out in the recess of the payout rotating body and the number of balls actually detected by the counting switch 751 are inconsistent. Inconsistency counter reset determination that is set as the determination condition when determining whether to reset the inconsistency counter INCC for monitoring whether or not the inconsistent game ball is paid out repeatedly. Time management of time. For example, when the ball squeeze judgment time is set to 5005 ms, the timer interrupt cycle is set to 2 ms. Therefore, the sphere squeeze judgment time is subtracted by 2 ms each time the timer update process is performed, and the subtraction result is obtained. When the value becomes 0, the ball squeeze judgment time is accurately measured.

In the present embodiment, the skip determination time is set to 22.75 ms, the ball removal determination time is set to 60060 ms, the full tank determination time is set to 504 ms, the ball out determination time is set to 119 ms, and the inconsistency counter reset determination time is set to 7000 s (about 2 hours). Each time this timer update process is performed, the ball removal judgment time, the full tank judgment time, the ball out judgment time, and the inconsistency counter reset judgment time are subtracted by 2 ms, and the subtraction result becomes a value of 0. The withdrawal judgment time, the full tank judgment time, the ball out judgment time, and the inconsistency counter reset judgment time are accurately measured. It should be noted that these various determination times are stored in the time management information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM as time management information.

Following step S552, CR communication processing is performed (step S554). In this CR communication process, whether or not various signals (BRQ signal, BRDY signal and CR connection signal) from the CR unit 6 are input based on the input information read from the above-mentioned input information storage area. To judge. The payout control MPU4120a exchanges various signals with the CR unit 6 based on various signals from the CR unit 6. In the process of setting the work area of the payout control built-in RAM in step S530, as described above, various flags and various information stored in the various information storage areas, which are payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM. Etc. (For example, the prize ball stock number PBS, the actual ball count PB, the drive command number DRV, the mismatch counter INCC, etc. stored in the prize ball information storage area, and the PRDY stored in the CR communication information storage area, etc. Information to be used for various processes is set based on the payout information related to the payout of the PRDY signal output setting information in which the logical state of the signal is set.

By this processing, for example, even if there is a momentary power failure or a power failure, the values of the prize ball stock number PBS, the actual ball count PB, the drive command number DRV, the inconsistency counter INCC, etc. at the time of power recovery are stored as the payout backup information. It can be restored to the values of the prize ball stock number PBS, the actual ball count PB, the drive command number DRV, the inconsistency counter INCC, etc. immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure. As a result, even if the payout operation of the game ball by the prize ball device 740 is being executed and the payout operation cannot be continued due to a momentary power failure or a power failure, the payout operation is continued at the time of power recovery. Therefore, the game ball can be paid out to the upper plate 301 and the lower plate 302 without excess or deficiency. In other words, the payout control MPU4120a momentarily stops or loses power when paying out the game ball to the upper plate 301 or the lower plate 302 while exchanging various signals with the CR unit 6 in the CR communication process. Even if the exchange of various signals with the unit 6 is interrupted and it becomes impossible to continue paying out the game balls, the number of prize balls stock PBS, the actual ball count PB, the drive command number DRV, and the mismatch counter INCC at the time of power recovery. Etc. are restored to the values of the prize ball stock number PBS, the actual ball count PB, the drive command number DRV, the inconsistency counter INCC, etc., which are stored as the payout backup information immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure. , The exchange of various signals between the pachinko game machine 1 (payout control MPU4120a) and the CR unit 6 immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure can be continued from the time of power recovery, and the game balls can be continuously paid out. You can do it.

In this way, even if the exchange of various signals between the pachinko gaming machine 1 (pain control MPU4120a) and the CR unit 6 is momentarily stopped or stopped, it is restored to the state immediately before the momentary stop or stop when the power is restored. The various signals by the pachinko gaming machine 1 (payout control MPU4120a) and the CR unit 6 do not change due to the influence of the momentary power failure or stop. Therefore, the reliability of exchanging various signals between the pachinko gaming machine 1 (payout control MPU4120a) and the CR unit 6 can be improved.

Further, various information stored in the CR communication information storage area is included in the payout backup information as described above. In the CR communication process, the PRDY signal output setting information is read from the CR communication information storage area stored in the payout control built-in RAM, which is set in the process of setting the work area of the payout control built-in RAM in step S530 at the time of power recovery. When the read PRDY signal output setting information is set to the logical state of the PRDY signal that conveys, for example, that the payout operation for paying out the rental ball is impossible, the PRDY signal is paid out. Output to the CR unit 6 from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the MPU 4120a. Then, in the retry operation monitoring process performed as one of the main operation setting processes, for example, the value of the inconsistency counter INCC of the prize ball information storage area stored in the payout control built-in RAM included in the payout backup information. Based on, it is determined whether or not the value of the inconsistent counter INCC is smaller than the inconsistent threshold value INCTH, and when the value of the inconsistent counter INCC is not smaller than the inconsistent threshold value INCTH, the retry operation is abnormal. In other words, it is determined that the payout operation of the game ball by the prize ball device 740 is in an abnormal state, a value 1 is set in the retry error flag RTERR-FLG, and the payout ball movement determination setting process is performed. In the setting of the output of the error state to the CR unit 6, for example, the logical state (LOW) of the PRDY signal telling that the payout operation for paying out the rental ball is impossible when not communicating with the CR unit 6. Is set in the PRDY signal output setting information and stored in the CR communication information storage area.

As a result, in the CR communication processing, the logical state of this PRDY signal is read from the CR communication information storage area by the next timer interrupt from the time of power recovery, and the PRDY signal is output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the MPU4120a. Outputs to the CR unit 6. In this way, for example, if the payout operation of the game ball by the prize ball device 740 is in an abnormal state immediately before the momentary power failure, that state is restored when the power is restored. At an early stage, a PRDY signal indicating that the payout operation for paying out the rental ball is impossible can be output to the CR unit 6 from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 4120a, and the CR unit 6 can be output. It is possible to convey that the payout operation of the game ball by the prize ball device 740 is in an abnormal state. As a result, it is possible to prevent the CR unit 6 from outputting BRDY, which is a useless ball lending request signal, at an extremely early stage from the time of power recovery.

Further, in the CR communication process, in the port input process of step S550, when the CR connection signal is read from the input information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM and the logic is HI based on the CR connection signal, that is, a pachinko game. When the power of the machine 1 is turned on and the payout control board 4110 and the CR unit 6 are electrically connected via the game ball or the like lending device connection terminal board 869, the lending ball is to be paid out. When the logic state of the PRDY signal is set to HI and output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 4120a to the CR unit 6 in order to convey that the payout operation is possible, the logic is LOW. That is, when the pachinko game machine 1 is turned on and the payout control board 4110 and the CR unit 6 are not electrically connected via the game ball or the like rental device connection terminal plate 869, the ball rental is provided. In order to convey that the payout operation for payout is impossible, the logical state of the PRDY signal is set to LOW and output to the CR unit 6 from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU4120a. The logical state of the EXS signal for notifying that one payout operation has started or ended is stored in the CR communication information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM as EXS signal output setting information, and is stored in the payout control board 4110. The CR connection signal that conveys whether or not the CR unit 6 is electrically connected is stored in the state information storage area as CR connection information.

Following step S554, a full tank and out-of-ball check process is performed (step S556). In this full tank and out-of-ball check process, the input information is read from the above-mentioned input information storage area, and based on this input information, the accommodation space of the above-mentioned foul cover unit 540 is stored by the detection signal from the full tank switch 550. It is determined whether or not the game ball is full, and the number of game balls taken into the supply passage of the prize ball device 740 described above by the detection signal from the ball out switch 750 becomes a predetermined number or more. It is judged whether or not it is. For example, to determine whether or not the game ball in which the accommodation space of the foul cover unit 540 is stored is full, the full tank switch is used in the current full tank and ball out check process using the timer interrupt cycle of 2 ms. When the detection signal from the 550 is ON and the detection signal from the full tank switch 550 is OFF in the previous (2 ms before) full tank and ball out check process, that is, the detection signal from the full tank switch 550 is from OFF to ON. When the transition to, the timer update process in step S552 starts timing the full tank determination time (504 ms) described above. Then, when the full tank determination time becomes 0 in the timer update process, that is, when the full tank determination time is reached, whether or not the detection signal from the full tank switch 550 is ON in this full tank and ball out check process. Is determined. In this determination, when the detection signal from the full tank switch 550 is ON, the full tank information for notifying that the accommodation space of the foul cover unit 540 is full in the stored game ball is stored in the above-mentioned state information storage. Store in the area. On the other hand, when the detection signal from the full tank switch 550 is OFF, the full tank information indicating that the game ball in which the accommodation space of the foul cover unit 540 is stored is not full is stored in the state information storage area. ..

Whether or not the number of game balls taken into the supply passage of the prize ball device 740 is equal to or greater than a predetermined number is also determined by using the timer interrupt cycle of 2 ms to check for full tank and out of balls. When the detection signal from the out-of-ball switch is ON, and the detection signal from the out-of-ball switch is OFF in the previous (2 ms before) full tank and out-of-ball check processing, that is, the detection signal from the out-of-ball switch 750 is from OFF to ON. When the transition to, the timer update process in step S552 starts the timing of the ball-out determination time (119 ms) described above. Then, when the value of the ball-out determination time becomes 0 in the timer update process, that is, when the ball-out determination time is reached, whether or not the detection signal from the ball-out switch 750 is ON in this full tank and ball-out check process. Is determined. In this determination, when the detection signal from the ball-out switch 750 is ON, the ball-out information indicating that the number of game balls taken into the supply passage of the prize ball device 740 is equal to or greater than a predetermined number is displayed. While storing in the information storage area, when the detection signal from the ball out switch 750 is OFF, it is assumed that the number of game balls taken into the supply passage of the prize ball device 740 is not equal to or more than a predetermined number, and the ball is out. Information is stored in the state information storage area.

Following step S556, command reception processing is performed (step S558). In this command reception process, various commands related to payout from the main control board 4100 (prize ball command and self-check command shown in FIG. 33) are received. When these various commands are normally received, the payer ACK information to that effect is stored in the output information storage area described above. On the other hand, when various commands cannot be received normally, a connection abnormality is transmitted to indicate that an abnormality has occurred in the connection between the main control board 4100 and the payout control board 4110 (an abnormality has occurred in various command signals). Information is stored in the state information storage area described above.

Following step S558, command analysis processing is performed (step S560). In this command analysis process, the command received in step S558 is analyzed, and the analyzed command is stored in the received command information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM as received command information.

Following step S560, the main operation setting process is performed (step S562). In this main motion setting process, motion settings such as prize balls, lending balls, ball pulling, and ball scooping are performed, retry operation is determined, and the number of unpaid balls (prize ball stock number) is monitored. To do.

Following step S562, LED display data creation processing is performed (step S564). In this LED display data creation process, various information is read from the state information storage area described above, display data to be displayed on the error LED display 860b of the payout control board 4110 is created, and the output information storage area described above is used as the LED display information. Remember. For example, when the above-mentioned ball-out information is read from the state information storage area and the number of game balls taken into the supply passage of the prize ball device 740 is not equal to or more than a predetermined number based on the ball-out information, the corresponding display data is displayed. (In this embodiment, the display value 1 (number "1")) is created and the LED display information is stored in the output information storage area.

Following step S564, a command transmission process is performed (step S566). In this command transmission process, various types of information are read from the above-mentioned state information storage area, and various commands (frame state 1 command, error release navigation command, and frame) classified into the state display shown in FIG. 35 based on the various information. A state 2 command) is created and transmitted to the main control board 4100. For example, when the ball-out information is read from the state information storage area, the frame state 1 command is issued when the number of game balls taken into the supply passage of the prize ball device 740 is not equal to or more than a predetermined number based on the ball-out information. It is created and transmitted to the main control board 4100.

Following step S566, the value C is set in the watch dock timer clear register HWCL (step S568). By setting the value C in the watch dock timer clear register HWCL in step S568, the value C is set in the watch dock timer clear register HWCL following the value B set in step S546. As a result, the value A, the value B, and the value C are set in order in the watch dock timer clear register HWCL, and the watch dock timer is set to clear.

Following step S568, the process returns to step S539 again, the value A is set in the watch dock timer clear register HWCL, it is determined in step S540 whether or not a power failure warning signal (payout power failure warning signal) is input, and this power failure is determined. If there is no input of the warning signal (payout failure warning signal), it is determined in step S542 whether or not the 2ms elapsed flag HT-FLG has a value of 1, and when the 2ms elapsed flag HT-FLG has a value of 1, that is, When 2 ms has elapsed, the value 0 is set in the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG in step S544, the value B is set in the watch dock timer clear register HWCL in step S546, the port output process is performed in step S548, and the port is ported in step S550. Input processing is performed, timer update processing is performed in step S552, CR communication processing is performed in step S554, full tank and ball out check processing is performed in step S556, command reception processing is performed in step S558, and command analysis is performed in step S560. Processing is performed, main operation setting processing is performed in step S562, LED display data creation processing is performed in step S564, command transmission processing is performed in step S566, and a value C is set in the watch dock timer clear register HWCL in step S568. Steps S539 to S568 are repeated. The processes of steps S539 to S568 are referred to as "payout control unit main process".

The processing content of the payout control unit main processing differs according to the progress of the game by the main control board 4100. Therefore, the time required for the processing of the payout control MPU 4120a varies. Therefore, in the port output process of step S548, the payout control MPU 4120a preferentially outputs a payer ACK signal indicating that various commands related to payout from the main control board 4100 have been normally received to the main control board 4100. There is. As a result, the payout control MPU4120a secures the processing time so that other fluctuating processing can be sufficiently performed.

On the other hand, when the power failure warning signal (payout power failure warning signal) is input in step S540, the interrupt prohibition setting is performed (step S570). With this setting, the timer interrupt process of the payout control unit, which will be described later, is not performed, writing to the payout control built-in RAM is prevented, and the above-mentioned rewriting of the payout information is protected.

Following step S570, the output of the drive signal to the payout motor 744 is stopped (step S574). As a result, the payout of the game ball is stopped.

Following step S574, the watch dock timer is cleared (step S60). As described above, this clear setting is performed by setting the value A, the value B, and the value C in order in the watch dock timer clear register HWCL.

Following step S576, the checksum is calculated and the calculated value is stored (step S578). For this checksum, the payout information of the work area of the payout control built-in RAM, excluding the storage area of the checksum value calculated in step S524 and the value of the payout backup flag HBK-FLG, is regarded as a numerical value and the total is calculated.

Following step S578, the payout backup flag HBK-FLG is set to a value of 1 (step S580). As a result, the storage of the payout backup information is completed.

Following step S580, access prohibition setting to the payout control built-in RAM is set (step S582). By this setting, access to the payout control built-in RAM is prohibited, writing and reading become impossible, and the payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM is protected.

Following step S582, an infinite loop is entered. In this infinite loop, the watch dock timer is not set to clear because the value A, the value B, and the value C are not set in order in the watch dock timer clear register HWCL. Therefore, the payout control MPU4120a is reset, and then the payout control MPU4120a performs the payout control unit power-on processing again. The process of steps S570 to S582 and the infinite loop are referred to as "payout control unit power cutoff process".

The pachinko gaming machine 1 (payout control MPU4120a) is reset when there is a power failure or when there is a momentary power failure, and when the power is restored thereafter, the payout control unit power-on processing is performed.

In step S526, it is inspected whether or not the payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM is normal, and then in step S528, whether or not the payout control unit power off processing is normally completed. Is inspecting. In this way, by double-checking the payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM, it is inspected whether or not the payout backup information is stored by fraudulent activity.

[14-2. Payout control unit timer interrupt processing]
Next, the payout control unit timer interrupt processing will be described. This payout control unit timer interrupt process is repeatedly performed every interrupt cycle (2 ms in the present embodiment) set in the payout control unit power-on process shown in FIGS. 40 to 42.

When the payout control unit timer interrupt process is started, the payout control MPU4120a of the payout control unit 4120 on the payout control board 4110 sets the timer interrupt to disabled and switches (saves) the register as shown in FIG. 43. (Step S590). Here, the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) used in the above-mentioned payout control unit main processing is switched to the auxiliary register. By using this auxiliary register in the payout control unit timer interrupt processing, the value of the general-purpose register is not overwritten. This prevents the contents of the general-purpose register used in the main processing of the payout control unit from being destroyed.

Following step S590, the value 1 is set in the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG (step S592). The 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG is a flag that clocks 2 ms every time the payout control unit timer interrupt process is performed, that is, every 2 ms, and becomes a value of 1 when 2 ms has elapsed and a value of 0 when 2 ms has not elapsed. Each is set.

Following step S592, register switching (returning) is performed (step S594). This return switches from the auxiliary register used in the payout control unit timer interrupt processing to the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register). By using this general-purpose register in the main processing of the payout control unit, the value of the auxiliary register is not overwritten. This prevents the contents of the auxiliary register used in the payout control unit timer interrupt processing from being destroyed.

Following step S594, interrupt enable setting is performed (step S596), and this routine is terminated.

[14-3. Rotation angle switch history creation process]
Next, the rotation angle switch history creation process will be described. In this rotation angle switch history creation process, the history of the detection signal from the rotation angle switch 752 shown in FIG. 12 is created.

When the rotation angle switch history creation process is started, the payout control MPU4120a of the payout control unit 4120 on the payout control board 4110 reads the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST from the payout control built-in RAM, as shown in FIG. (Step S610). This rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST is 1 byte (8 bits: most significant bit B7, B6, B5, B4, B3, B2, B1, least significant bit B0, "B" represents a bit). It has a storage capacity, and the history of the detection signal from the rotation angle switch 752 is stored in the rotation angle switch history information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM as the rotation angle switch detection history information LSB-HIST. In step S610, the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST is read from the rotation angle switch history information storage area.

Following step S610, it is determined whether or not there is a detection signal from the rotation angle switch 752 (step S612). This determination is performed based on the detection signal from the rotation angle switch 752 in the port input process of step S550 in the power-on processing of the payout control unit (main process of the payout control unit) shown in FIG. 42. Specifically, the detection signal is stored as input information in the input information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM. In step S612, the input information is read from the input information storage area, and it is determined whether or not there is a detection signal from the rotation angle switch 752. When there is a detection signal from the rotation angle switch 752 in the input information, the detection slit that grasps the rotation position of the payout rotating body to which the rotation of the rotation shaft of the payout motor 744 is transmitted cuts off the optical axis of the rotation angle switch 752. It is determined that the state has transitioned to the non-blocking state. On the other hand, when there is no detection signal from the rotation angle switch 752 in the input information, the detection slit determines that the optical axis of the rotation angle switch 752 has changed from the non-blocking state to the blocking state.

When the detection slit has transitioned the optical axis of the rotation angle switch 752 from the cutoff state to the non-blocking state in step S612, the rotation angle switch detection history information is shifted (step S614). In this shift process of the rotation angle switch detection history information, the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST read in step S610 is converted to the most significant bit B7 ← B6, B6 ← B5, B5 ← B4, B4 ← B3, B3 ← B2. , B2 ← B1, B1 ← least significant bit B0, and so on, shifting from the least significant bit B0 to the most significant bit B7 one bit at a time.

Following step S614, the least significant bit B0 of the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST is set to the value 1 (step S616), and this routine ends.

On the other hand, when the detection slit is in the state where the optical axis of the rotation angle switch 752 is changed from the non-blocking state to the blocking state in step S612, the rotation angle switch detection history information is shifted (step S618). In this shift processing of the rotation angle switch detection history information, the same processing as the shift processing of the rotation angle switch detection history information in step S614 is performed, and the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST read in step S610 is set to the most significant bit. B7 ← B6, B6 ← B5, B5 ← B4, B4 ← B3, B3 ← B2, B2 ← B1, B1 ← Most significant bit B0, and so on, shifting one bit at a time from the least significant bit B0 to the most significant bit B7. To do.

Following step S618, the value 0 is set in the least significant bit B0 of the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST (step S620), and this routine ends.

In this way, each time the rotation angle switch history creation process is performed, the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST is shifted by 1 bit from the least significant bit B0 to the most significant bit B7, and then the detection slit rotates. The least significant bit B0 is set to 1 or a value depending on the state in which the optical axis of the square switch 752 is transitioned from the cutoff state to the non-blocking state or the detection slit is in the state in which the optical axis of the rotation angle switch 752 is transitioned from the non-blocking state to the blocking state. Since the value 0 is set, the history of the detection signal from the rotation angle switch 752 can be created.

[14-4. Sprocket fixed position judgment skip processing]
Next, the sprocket fixed position determination skip process will be described. This sprocket fixed position determination skip process skips the determination of whether or not the payout rotating body to which the rotation of the rotation shaft of the payout motor 744 is transmitted is in the fixed position when a predetermined condition is satisfied. It should be noted that the fixed position determination of the payout rotating body is also performed when the payout of the game ball by the prize ball device 740 is completed. As a result, the rotation of the rotation shaft of the payout motor 744 can be reliably started in a state where the ball is not squeezed.

When the sprocket fixed position determination skip process is started, the payout control MPU4120a of the payout control unit 4120 on the payout control board 4110 determines whether or not the fixed position determination skip flag SKP-FLG has a value of 0, as shown in FIG. Is determined (step S630). This fixed position determination skip flag SKP-FLG is a flag indicating whether or not the fixed position determination of the payout rotating body is performed, and when the fixed position determination of the payout rotating body is not performed (when skipping), the value is 1, and the payout rotation The value is set to 0 when the fixed position of the body is determined (when not skipped).

When the fixed position determination skip flag SKP-FLG is 0 (not skipped) in step S630, that is, when the fixed position determination of the payout rotating body is performed, the rotation angle switch history information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM is used to determine the rotation angle. The switch detection history information RSW-HIST is read out (step S632), and it is determined whether or not the switch detection history information matches the fixed position determination value (step S634). This fixed position determination value is stored in the payout built-in ROM, and in the present embodiment, it is "000011111B (" B "represents a bit)", and the upper 4 bits B7 to B4 have a value of 0 and a lower 4 bits. Bits B3 to B0 have a value of 1. In the determination in step S634, it is determined whether or not the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST and the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the fixed position determination value match.

Here, when the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST have a value of 1, the detection slit described above is the optical axis of the rotation angle switch 752 in succession in four timer interrupt cycles. It means that the state has changed from the blocked state to the non-blocked state. In the generation of the four timer interrupt cycles, the payout motor 744 shown in FIG. 12 is rotated by four steps. The rotation of the payout motor 744 is the rotation of the payout rotating body of the rotation detection panel via the first gear, the second gear, and the third gear. Since the first gear, the second gear, and the third gear have play (backlash), the payout rotating body rotates clockwise or counterclockwise, but the payout rotating body due to this backlash Since the rotation is designed to correspond to the rotation of the payout motor 744 in about two steps, in the present embodiment, when determining the fixed position of the payout rotating body, the rotation angle switch 752 is used. The rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST is created by the rotation angle switch history creation process shown in the history of the detection signal and FIG. 44, and the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the created rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST, that is, This is performed based on the detection signal from the rotation angle switch 752 due to the occurrence of the latest four timer interrupt cycles. As a result, in the four timer interrupt cycles, the payout motor 744 rotates four steps, so that it rotates more than the rotation of the payout rotating body due to backlash, and absorbs the rotation of the payout rotating body due to backlash. Can be done. Therefore, since it is possible to prevent erroneous detection of the fixed position of the payout rotating body due to backlash, the rotation position of the payout rotating body can be correctly managed by the rotation position of the payout motor 744. In this embodiment, the four timer interrupt cycles are 8 ms (= 2 ms × 4 times), which is set as the backlash absorption time.

In step S634, when the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST read in step S632 and the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the fixed position determination value match, the fixed position determination skip flag A value of 1 is set in SKP-FLG (step S636). As a result, it is possible to set not to perform (skip) the fixed position determination of the payout rotating body. The payout control MPU4120a sets the rotation position of the payout rotating body in step S636 to a fixed position of the payout rotating body.

Following step S636, the skip determination time is set to valid (step S638), and this routine ends. Here, the number of detection slits is three, which is the same as the number of recesses of the payout rotating body, and is formed in equal parts (every 120 degrees) on the outer circumference of the rotation detection plate. Further, as described above, the rotation of the payout motor 744 is the rotation of the payout rotating body of the rotation detection panel via the first gear, the second gear, and the third gear. In the present embodiment, the rotation between the detection slits (120 degrees) of the rotation detection board (delivery rotating body) is designed to correspond to the rotation of 18 steps of the payout motor 744.

The payout control MPU4120a manages the rotation position of the payout rotating body based on the number of steps of the payout motor 744. Specifically, (1) a transient state in which the detection slit shifts the optical axis of the rotation angle switch 752 from a cutoff state to a non-blocking state (referred to as “edge detection state”), and (2) the detection slit has a rotation angle. The state in which the optical axis of the switch 752 is transitioned from the blocked state to the non-blocked state (referred to as "fixed position fixed state"), and (3) the detection slit shifts the optical axis of the rotation angle switch 752 from the non-blocked state to the blocked state. It is managed in three states: the state in which it is set (“fixed position determination skip state”). The edge detection state of (1) corresponds to the rotation of one step of the payout motor 744, the fixed position determination state of (2) corresponds to the rotation of four steps of the payout motor 744, and the fixed position determination skip state of (3). This corresponds to the rotation of the payout motor 744 in 13 steps, and the rotation position between the detection slits (120 degrees) of the rotation detection panel, that is, the rotation position of the payout rotating body is managed by a total of 18 steps of rotation.

In the fixed position determination skip state of (3), since the detection slit is in a state in which the optical axis of the rotation angle switch 752 is changed from the non-blocking state to the blocking state, the skip determination time is the time for 13 steps of rotation of the payout motor 744. Is set. As described above, since the timer interrupt cycle is set to 2 ms, the skip determination time is 26 ms (= 2 ms × 13 steps).

When the skip determination time becomes effective in step S638, the skip determination time is subtracted in the timer update process of step S552 in the payout control unit power-on processing (payout control unit main process) shown in FIG. 42. The payout control MPU4120a subtracts the skip determination time, and when the subtraction result reaches a value of 0, the fixed position determination skip flag SKP-FLG is set to an initial value of 0.

On the other hand, when the fixed position determination skip flag SKP-FLG is not a value 0 (value 1) (when skipping) in step S630, that is, when the fixed position determination of the payout rotating body is not performed, or in step S634, step S632. If the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST read in step 1 and the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the fixed position determination value do not match, this routine is terminated as it is. The fixed position determination skip flag SKP-FLG set in step S636 is stored in the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the payout control MPU4120a.

The game balls supplied from the pachinko island facility are stored in the prize ball tank 720 and the tank rail 731, taken into the supply passage of the prize ball device 740, and guided to the prize ball device 740. When the game balls rub against each other and become charged, they are electrostatically discharged to generate noise. Therefore, the prize ball device 740 is easily affected by noise and is in an environment. The rotation angle switch board 753 of the prize ball device 740 shown in FIG. 3 is provided with a rotation angle switch 752, and the detection signal from the rotation angle switch 752 is affected by noise due to electrostatic discharge of the game ball. Cheap. Further, the wiring (harness) connecting the payout control board 4110 and the board 754 in the prize ball case in the prize ball device 740 shown in FIG. 3 is also affected by noise due to electrostatic discharge of the game ball. Cheap.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, in order to suppress erroneous detection due to the influence of noise, the above-mentioned fixed position determination skip state (3), that is, the detection slit changes the optical axis of the rotation angle switch 752 from the non-blocking state to the blocking state. In the transitional state, the fixed position determination of the payout rotating body is not performed. As a result, the accuracy of the fixed position determination of the payout rotating body is improved. As described above, the period and period required to detect the fixed position of the payout rotating body can be calculated in advance, so that the skip determination time can be easily set and adjusted.

[14-5. Ball shaving judgment processing]
Next, the ball bending determination process will be described. This ball squeeze determination process determines whether or not a ball squeeze state is generated by the payout rotating body to which the rotation of the rotation shaft of the payout motor 744 is transmitted.

When the ball squeeze determination process is started, the payout control MPU4120a of the payout control unit 4120 on the payout control board 4110 has a rotation angle from the rotation angle switch history information storage area of the above-mentioned payout control built-in RAM, as shown in FIG. The switch detection history information RSW-HIST is read (step S640).

Following step S640, it is determined whether or not there is a detection signal from the rotation angle switch 752 described above (step S642). This determination determines whether or not the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST read in step S640 matches the fixed position determination value. As described above, this fixed position determination value is stored in the payout built-in ROM, and in the present embodiment, it is "00001111B (" B "represents a bit)", and the upper 4 bits B7 to B4 are The value 0 and the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 are the values 1. In the determination in step S642, it is determined whether or not the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST and the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the fixed position determination value match.

In step S642, when the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST read in step S640 and the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the fixed position determination value match, the detection slit has a rotation angle. Assuming that the optical axis of the switch 752 has transitioned from the non-blocking state to the blocking state, that is, the payout rotating body is rotating and the ball is not in a squeezing state, this routine is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, in step S642, when the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST read in step S640 and the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the fixed position determination value do not match, the ball is flagged. The value 1 is set in the middle flag PBE-FLG (step S644). This ball-sucking flag PBE-FLG is a flag indicating whether or not a ball-sucking state is generated by the payout rotating body, and has a value of 1 when the payout motor 744 is performing a ball-sucking operation. The value is set to 0 when no operation is performed.

Following step S644, the ball squeeze determination time is effectively set (step S646), and this routine ends. When the ball squeeze determination time becomes effective, the sphere squeeze determination time is subtracted in the timer update process of step S552 in the payout control unit power-on processing (payout control unit main process) shown in FIG. ..

[14-6. Various prize ball stock number addition processing]
Next, various prize ball stock number addition processes will be described. The various prize ball stock number addition processes include a prize ball stock number addition process for prize balls and a prize ball stock number addition process for rental balls, and the prize ball stock number addition process for prize balls is performed from the main control board 4100. It is a process of adding the number of balls to be paid out based on the prize ball command described later, and the process of adding the number of prize balls for lending is a process of adding the number of balls to be paid out based on the ball lending request signal from the CR unit 6. is there. First, the prize ball stock number addition process for prize balls will be described, and then the prize ball stock number addition process for rental balls will be described. In this embodiment, the prize ball stock number addition process for prize balls is set to be preferentially performed, and the number of prize ball stocks added in this prize ball stock number addition process is adjusted. After the game ball is paid out by the prize ball device 740, it is set to perform the process of adding the number of prize ball stocks for rental balls.

[14-6-1. Prize ball stock number addition processing for prize balls]
When the prize ball stock number addition process for prize balls is started, the payout control MPU4120a of the payout control unit 4120 on the payout control board 4110 determines whether or not there is a prize ball command as shown in FIG. 47 (step). S650). This determination is performed based on the command analyzed in the command analysis process of step S560 in the power-on processing of the payout control unit (main process of the payout control unit) shown in FIG. 42. Specifically, the analyzed command is stored as the received command information in the received command information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM. In step S650, the received command information is read from the received command information storage area, and it is determined whether or not the command is a prize ball command.

When the received command information is not a prize ball command in step S650, this routine is terminated as it is, while when the received command information is a prize ball command in step S650, the number of prize balls PBV corresponding to this prize ball command is set. Read from the number information table (step S652). The prize ball number information table, which will be described in detail later, is an information table stored in advance in the payout built-in ROM in association with the prize ball command and the prize ball number PBV.

Following step S652, the prize ball stock number PBS is read from the payout control built-in RAM (step S654). The prize ball stock number PBS represents the number of game balls that have not yet been paid out by the prize ball device 740, that is, the number of unpaid balls, and in the present embodiment, it has a storage capacity of 2 bytes (16 bits). ing. As a result, the prize ball stock number PBS can store the number of unpaid balls from a value of 0 to a value of 32767. The prize ball stock number PBS is stored in the prize ball information storage area of the RAM with built-in payout control. In step S652, the prize ball stock number PBS is read out from this prize ball information storage area.

The prize ball stock number PBS read in step S654 is added to the prize ball number PBV read in step S652 (step S656), and this routine is terminated. After the addition in step S656, the prize ball command read in step S650 is deleted from the received command information storage area.

[14-6-2. Prize ball stock number addition processing for ball rental]
Next, the process of adding the number of prize balls stock for lending will be described. When the process of adding the number of prize balls for ball rental is started, the payout control MPU 4120a of the payout control unit 4120 on the payout control board 4110 determines whether or not there is a ball rental request signal, as shown in FIG. (Step S660). This determination is performed based on the ball lending request signal from the CR unit 6 in the port input process of step S550 in the power-on processing of the payout control unit (main process of the payout control unit) shown in FIG. Specifically, the ball rental request signal is stored as input information in the input information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM. In step S660, the input information is read from the input information storage area and it is determined whether or not there is a ball lending request signal.

When there is no ball lending request signal in step S660, this routine is terminated as it is, while when there is a ball lending request signal in step S660, the prize ball stock number PBS is read from the prize ball information storage area of the above-mentioned payout control built-in RAM. (Step S662), the number of rented balls RBV is added to the number of prize ball stocks PBS (step S664), and this routine is terminated. The number of rented balls RBV is a fixed value and is stored in advance in the payout built-in ROM. In this embodiment, a value of 25 is set as the number of rented balls RBV. After adding in step S664, the ball lending request signal read in step S660 is deleted from the input information storage area. Further, in the present embodiment, since the prize ball is prioritized (the prize ball and the ball rental are managed separately), the ball rental request signal is held even when there is a ball rental request signal. , The loan ball will be paid out when the prize ball is paid out. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the loan ball is paid out after the prize ball stock number PBS reaches a value of 0.

[14-7. Stock monitoring process]
Next, the stock monitoring process will be described. This stock monitoring process monitors whether or not the player continues the game during the game in a state where the accommodation space of the foul cover unit 540 shown in FIG. 1 is filled with the stored game balls (stocked state). It is a process to do.

When the stock monitoring process is started, the payout control MPU4120a of the payout control unit 4120 on the payout control board 4110 obtains the prize ball stock number PBS from the prize ball information storage area of the above-mentioned payout control built-in RAM as shown in FIG. The reading (step S670) is performed, and it is determined whether or not the read prize ball stock number PBS is equal to or higher than the caution threshold TH (step S672). The caution threshold TH is a fixed value and is stored in advance in the payout built-in ROM. In this embodiment, a value of 50 is set as the caution threshold TH.

When the prize ball stock number PBS is equal to or higher than the caution threshold value TH in step S672, the caution flag CA-FLG is set to a value of 1 (step S674), and this routine is terminated. With this caution flag CA-FLG, the player starts stocking the game balls in the accommodation space of the foul cover unit 540, and the number of unpaid game balls (the number of prize balls stock described above) becomes equal to or higher than the caution threshold TH. It is a flag indicating that the value has been reached, and is set to a value 1 when the caution threshold value TH or higher is reached, and a value 0 when the caution threshold value TH or higher is not reached.

On the other hand, when the prize ball stock number PBS is less than the caution threshold value TH in step S672, the caution flag CA-FLG is set to a value 0 (step S676), and this routine is terminated.

When the game state becomes a big hit and the player relaxes and watches the production unfolded on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the mobile terminal 470 shown in FIG. 14, the player inadvertently makes one round. During that time, the game ball paid out as a prize ball may not be pulled out from the lower plate 302 by operating the lower plate ball removal button 354 shown in FIG. 7. If the game is continued in this state, the lower plate 302 is filled with the game balls, and the game balls start to accumulate in the accommodation space of the foul cover unit 540. When the accommodation space of the foul cover unit 540 is filled with game balls, as described above, the value of the prize ball stock number PBS increases to be equal to or higher than the caution threshold value TH, and the door frame 5 is provided as a caution effect. Multiple LEDs on various decorative boards flash. By this blinking, for example, it is possible to inform the clerk of the hall that the player is careful about the game. As a result, the clerk in the hall can inform the player that the game ball will be pulled out from the lower plate 302, and the player can fill the lower plate 302 (the accommodation space of the foul cover unit 540) with the game ball. It is possible to prevent the game from continuing.

In the present embodiment, the caution threshold TH is set to a value 50 corresponding to about one-fifth of the upper limit value 255 that can be represented by 1 byte (8 bits). This makes it possible to inform the clerk of the hall to call attention to the player's game at the earliest possible stage.

[14-8. Payout ball movement judgment setting process]
Next, the payout ball motion determination setting process will be described. In the payout ball movement determination setting process, the payout motor 744 pays out the game ball to the upper plate 301 or the lower plate 302 shown in FIG. 7, performs a ball-brushing operation, or such a payout. It is a process to set either or not to discharge.

When the payout ball operation determination setting process is started, the payout control MPU4120a of the payout control unit 4120 on the payout control board 4110 is subjected to the rotation angle switch history information storage area of the above-mentioned payout control built-in RAM, as shown in FIG. The rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST is read from (step S680).

Following step S680, it is determined whether or not there is a detection signal from the rotation angle switch 752 shown in FIG. 12 (step S682). This determination determines whether or not the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST read in step S680 matches the fixed position determination value. As described above, this fixed position determination value is stored in the payout built-in ROM, and in the present embodiment, it is "00001111B (" B "represents a bit)", and the upper 4 bits B7 to B4 are The value 0 and the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 are the values 1. In the determination in step S682, it is determined whether or not the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST and the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the fixed position determination value match.

In step S682, when the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST read in step S680 and the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the fixed position determination value match, the retry error flag RTERR- It is determined whether or not the FLG has a value of 1 (step S684). This retry error flag RTERR-FLG is a flag indicating whether or not the retry operation described later is abnormally operating. The value is 1 when the retry operation is abnormally operating, and when the retrying operation is not abnormally operating (retry). The value is set to 0 when the operation is normal).

When the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST read in step S682 and the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the fixed position determination value do not match in step S682, or in step S684. , When the retry error flag RTERR-FLG is not a value 1 (value 0), that is, when the retry operation is not abnormally operating, it is determined whether or not the ball-filled flag PBE-FLG is a value 1 (value 1). Step S686). The ball squeezing flag PBE-FLG is a flag indicating whether or not a sphere is squeezed by the payout rotating body to which the rotation of the rotation shaft of the payout motor 744 is transmitted, and the sphere is squeezed by the payout motor 744. The value is set to 1 when the motion is performed, and to 0 when the ball is not performing the motion.

When the ball-squeezing flag PEB-FLG is not a value 1 (value is 0) in step S686, that is, when the ball-squeezing operation is not performed, the prize ball stock from the prize ball information storage area of the above-mentioned payout control built-in RAM. The number PBS is read out (step S688), and it is determined whether or not the read prize ball stock number PBS is greater than the value 0 (step S690). This determination determines whether or not there is an unpaid number of balls in the payout of the game balls by the payout motor 744.

When the prize ball stock number PBS is greater than the value 0 in step S690, that is, when there is an unpaid number of balls, it is determined whether or not the accommodation space of the foul cover unit 540 is full with the stored game balls ( Step S692). This determination is made based on the full tank information stored in the full tank and out-of-ball check processing in step S556 in the power-on processing of the payout control unit (main process of the payout control unit) shown in FIG. 42. Specifically, the full tank information is stored in the state information storage area of the above-mentioned payout control built-in RAM. In step S692, the full tank information is read from the state information storage area, and it is determined whether or not the game ball in which the accommodation space of the foul cover unit 540 is stored is full.

When the accommodation space of the foul cover unit 540 is not full in the game ball stored in step S692, the payout setting process described later is performed (step S694), and this routine is terminated. In this payout setting process, a payout operation is performed in which the game ball is paid out to the upper plate 301 and the lower plate 302.

On the other hand, when the accommodation space of the foul cover unit 540 is full with the stored game balls in step S692, this routine is terminated as it is. In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the accommodation space of the foul cover unit 540 is filled with the stored game balls, the payout motor 744 is forcibly stopped. When a prize ball is generated while the payout motor 744 is forcibly stopped, the number of unpaid balls by the payout motor 744 increases, and the prize ball stock number PBS is added by the prize ball stock number addition process for prize balls shown in FIG. Will increase.

On the other hand, when the prize ball stock number PBS is not larger than the value 0 (value 0) in step S690, that is, when there is no unpaid number of balls, this routine is terminated as it is. As a result, the game ball is not paid out.

On the other hand, when the ball-grinding flag PBE-FLG has a value of 1 in step S686, that is, the ball-grinding motion is being performed, the ball-grinding motion setting process described later is performed (step S700), and this routine is terminated. In this ball-grinding motion setting process, a ball-grinding motion is performed to eliminate the ball-grinding state by the payout rotating body of the prize ball device 740.

On the other hand, in step S684, when the retry error flag RTERR-FLG has a value of 1, that is, when the retry operation is abnormally operating, the output stop (stop) of the drive signal to the payout motor 744 is set (step S702). .. In this setting, the drive information for stopping the drive signal is set in the payout motor 744 and stored in the output information storage area of the above-mentioned payout control built-in RAM.

Following step S702, the error state output to the CR unit 6 is set (step S704), and this routine ends. In step S704, in order to inform the CR unit 6 that the ball cannot be lent at present, the payout control MPU4120a is not communicating with the CR unit 6 (the logic of BRDY from the CR unit 6 is LOW, That is, when the PRDY signal is held down), the logic of the PRDY signal is LOW, that is, the state of being down is held, and the logic state of the PRDY signal is set in the PRDY signal output setting information and stored in the CR communication information storage area. Remember. As a result, in the CR communication process of step S554 in the payout control section main process of the payout control section power-on process of FIG. 42, the PRDY signal output setting information is read from the CR communication information storage area stored in the payout control built-in RAM. The read PRDY signal output setting information, that is, the PRDY signal whose logic is LOW, is CRed from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 4120a of the payout control unit 4120 via the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869. Output to unit 6. On the other hand, when communicating with the CR unit 6 (when the logic of BRDY from the CR unit 6 is HI, that is, when it stands up and is held), the logic state of the EXS signal is maintained, and the logic state of the EXS signal is maintained. Is set in the EXS signal output setting information and stored in the CR communication information storage area. As a result, the EXS signal output setting information is read from the CR communication information storage area stored in the payout control built-in RAM in the CR communication process of step S554 in the payout control section main process of the payout control section power-on process of FIG. 42. The read out EXS signal output setting information, that is, the EXS signal whose logic is maintained is output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU4120a to the CR unit 6 via the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869. .. In addition, "maintaining the logic state of the EXS signal" means that when the logic of the EXS signal is LOW (the EXS signal is held down), the logic LOW is maintained, and the logic of the EXS signal is HI. At some point (holding the XS signal up and running) is to maintain its logical HI.

[14-8-1. Payout setting process]
Next, the payout setting process will be described. In this payout setting process, the payout motor 744 is driven to set the game ball to be paid out.

When the payout setting process is started, the payout control MPU4120a of the payout control unit 4120 on the payout control board 4110 reads out the drive command number DRV from the payout control built-in RAM as shown in FIG. 51 (step S710). This drive command number DRV commands the number of game balls to be paid out by the payout motor 744, and is equivalent to the prize ball stock number PBS. The drive command number DRV is stored in the prize ball information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM. In step S710, the drive command number DRV is read from the prize ball information storage area.

Following step S710, it is determined whether or not the drive command number DRV has a value of 0 (step S712). In this determination, whether or not the number of game balls to be paid out by the payout motor 744 remains is determined based on the drive command number DRV.

When the drive command number DRV is 0 in step S712, that is, when the number of game balls to be paid out by the payout motor 744 is zero, the output stop (stop) of the drive signal to the payout motor 744 is set (stop). Step S714). In this setting, the drive information for stopping the drive signal is set in the payout motor 744 and stored in the output information storage area of the above-mentioned payout control built-in RAM.

Following step S714, the prize ball stock number PBS is read out from the prize ball information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM (step S716), and the actual ball count PB is read out (step S718). This actual ball count PB is a count of the number of game balls actually paid out by the payout motor 744. Although a detailed description of the count will be described later, the count is from the count switch 751 shown in FIG. 12 in the port input process of step S550 in the payout control unit power-on processing (payout control unit main process) shown in FIG. 42. Perform based on the detection signal. The actual ball count PB is stored in the prize ball information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM. In step S718, the actual ball count PB is read from the prize ball information storage area.

Following step S718, the value obtained by subtracting the actual ball count PB read in step S718 from the prize ball stock number PBS read in step S716 is set in the prize ball stock number PBS and the drive command number DRV (step S720). The value 0 is set in the real ball count PB (step S722), and this routine ends. When the drive command number DRV and the actual ball count PB are values 0, in step S722, the value of the prize ball stock number PBS read in step S716 is set to the drive command number DRV as it is.

On the other hand, when the drive command number DRV is not a value 0 in step S712, that is, when there is a number of game balls to be paid out by the payout motor 744, the output of the drive signal to the payout motor 744 is set. (Step S724). In this setting, the drive information for stopping the drive signal is set in the payout motor 744 and stored in the output information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM.

Following step S724, the number of drive commands DRV is subtracted by a value of 1 (decrement, step S726), and it is determined whether or not there is a detection signal from the counting switch 751 (step S728). This determination is performed based on the detection signal from the counting switch 751 in the port input process of step S550 in the power-on processing of the payout control unit (main process of the payout control unit) shown in FIG. 42. Specifically, the detection signal is stored as input information in the input information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM. In step S728, the input information is read from the input information storage area, and it is determined whether or not there is a detection signal from the counting switch 751.

When there is a detection signal from the counting switch 751 in step S728, a value 1 is added (incremented to the actual ball counting PB, step S730) to end this routine. By incrementing the actual ball count PB in step S730, the actual ball count PB is counted up.

On the other hand, when there is no detection signal from the counting switch 751 in step S728, this routine is terminated as it is. As described above, when the payout control MPU4120a decrements the drive command number DRV in step S726 and there is no detection signal from the counting switch 751 in the determination of step S728, that is, when the actual ball counting PB is not incremented. Determines that one of the game balls could not be paid out because the game ball was not received in the recess of the payout rotating body to which the rotation of the rotation shaft of the payout motor 744 is transmitted. Therefore, the payout control MPU4120a sets the value obtained by subtracting the actual ball count PB from the prize ball stock number PBS in the above-mentioned step S720 to the drive command number DRV in order to pay out the one ball to be paid out again. As a result, when there is no detection signal from the counting switch 751 in the determination of step S728, that is, when the actual ball counting PB is not incremented, the value 1 which is one ball to be paid out can be included in the prize ball stock number PBS. In other words, since the value 1 which is one ball to be paid out can be rounded into the prize ball stock number PBS, the retry operation to pay out the one ball to be paid out can be performed again. By performing this retry operation, the possibility that the game ball is not paid out to the player can be extremely reduced, and the disadvantage of the player due to the unpaid game ball can be prevented.

[14-8-2. Ball motion setting process]
Next, the ball bending motion setting process will be described. In this ball squeezing operation setting process, it is a process of setting to eliminate the ball squeezing state by the payout rotating body to which the rotation of the rotation shaft of the payout motor 744 of the prize ball device 740 is transmitted.

When the ball squeezing operation setting process is started, the payout control MPU 4120a of the payout control unit 4120 on the payout control board 4110 determines whether or not the ball squeeze determination time has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 52 (step). S750). This determination is performed based on the ball squeeze determination time subtracted in the timer update process of step S552 in the payout control unit power-on process (payout control unit main process) shown in FIG. Specifically, the ball bending determination time is stored in the time management information storage area of the above-mentioned payout control built-in RAM as time management information. In step S750, the time management information is read from the time management information storage area, and it is determined whether or not the ball squeezing determination time has elapsed.

When the ball squeeze determination time has not elapsed in step S750, the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST is read from the rotation angle switch history information storage area of the above-mentioned payout control built-in RAM (step S752).

Following step S752, it is determined whether or not there is a detection signal from the rotation angle switch 752 described above (step S754). This determination determines whether or not the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST read in step S752 matches the fixed position determination value. As described above, this fixed position determination value is stored in the payout built-in ROM, and in the present embodiment, it is "00001111B (" B "represents a bit)", and the upper 4 bits B7 to B4 are The value 0 and the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 are the values 1. In the determination in step S754, it is determined whether or not the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST and the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the fixed position determination value match.

In step S754, when the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST read in step S752 and the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the fixed position determination value do not match, the ball scooping operation is performed. The output of the drive signal to the payout motor 744 is set to be performed (step S756), and this routine is terminated. In this setting, drive information for outputting a drive signal is set in the payout motor 744 and stored in the output information storage area of the above-mentioned payout control built-in RAM.

On the other hand, in step S754, when the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST read in step S752 and the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the fixed position determination value match, the payout motor 744 The stop of the drive signal to is set (step S758). In this setting, the drive information for stopping the drive signal is set in the payout motor 744 and stored in the output information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM.

Following step S758, the value 0 is set in the ball-grinding flag PBE-FLG as the end of the ball-grinding operation (step S760), and this routine is terminated. This ball-sucking flag PBE-FLG is a flag indicating whether or not a ball-sucking state is generated by the payout rotating body, and has a value of 1 when the payout motor 744 is performing a ball-sucking operation. When no operation is performed (end of ball-sliding operation), the values are set to 0, respectively.

On the other hand, when the ball squeeze determination time has elapsed in step S750, the stop of the drive signal to the payout motor 744 is set (step S762). In this setting, the drive information for stopping the drive signal is set in the payout motor 744 and stored in the output information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM.

Following step S762, the output of the error state to the CR unit 6 is set (step S764). Here, in order to inform the CR unit 6 that the ball cannot be rented at present, the payout control MPU4120a is not communicating with the CR unit 6 (the logic of BRDY from the CR unit 6 is LOW, that is, (When it is down and held), the logic of the PRDY signal is LOW, that is, the down state is held, the logic state of the PRDY signal is set in the PRDY signal output setting information, and it is stored in the CR communication information storage area. To do. As a result, in the CR communication process of step S554 in the payout control section main process of the payout control section power-on process of FIG. 42, the PRDY signal output setting information is read from the CR communication information storage area stored in the payout control built-in RAM. The read PRDY signal output setting information, that is, the PRDY signal whose logic is LOW, is CRed from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 4120a of the payout control unit 4120 via the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869. Output to unit 6. On the other hand, when communicating with the CR unit 6 (when the logic of BRDY from the CR unit 6 is HI, that is, when it stands up and is held), the logic state of the EXS signal is maintained, and the logic state of the EXS signal is maintained. Is set in the EXS signal output setting information and stored in the CR communication information storage area. As a result, the EXS signal output setting information is read from the CR communication information storage area stored in the payout control built-in RAM in the CR communication process of step S554 in the payout control section main process of the payout control section power-on process of FIG. 42. The read out EXS signal output setting information, that is, the EXS signal whose logic is maintained is output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU4120a to the CR unit 6 via the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869. .. As described above, "maintaining the logical state of the EXS signal" means that when the logic of the EXS signal is LOW (the EXS signal is held down), the logical LOW is maintained and the EXS signal is maintained. When the logic of is HI (the XS signal is held up), that logic HI is maintained.

Following step S764, the value 0 is set in the ball-grinding flag PBE-FLG as the end of the ball-grinding operation (step S766), and this routine is terminated.

[14-9. Retry operation monitoring process]
Next, the retry operation monitoring process will be described. In this retry operation monitoring process, it is a process of monitoring whether or not the retry operation of paying out the game ball to be paid out again is normally performed.

When the retry operation monitoring process is started, the payout control MPU4120a of the payout control unit 4120 on the payout control board 4110 is switched from the rotation angle switch history information storage area of the above-mentioned payout control built-in RAM as shown in FIG. 53. The detection history information RSW-HIST is read (step S770).

Following step S770, it is determined whether or not there is a detection signal from the rotation angle switch 752 described above (step S772). This determination determines whether or not the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST read in step S770 matches the fixed position determination value. As described above, this fixed position determination value is stored in the ROM with built-in payout control, and in the present embodiment, it is "00001111B (" B "represents a bit)", and the upper 4 bits B7 to B4. Is a value 0, and B3 to B0 of the lower 4 bits are a value 1. In the determination in step S772, it is determined whether or not the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST and the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the fixed position determination value match.

In step S772, when the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST read in step S770 and the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the fixed position determination value match, the mismatch counter INCC is set. Add only the value 1 (increment, step S774). This mismatch counter INCC includes the number of game balls that are received and discharged in the recess of the payout rotating body to which the rotation of the rotation shaft of the payout motor 744 is transmitted, the number of balls detected by the counting switch 751 and the number of balls. This is a counter for calculating the difference between the two, and normally, the number of game balls received and paid out in the recess of the payout rotating body matches the number of balls detected by the counting switch 751. , The value is 0. Since the payout control MPU4120a performs a retry operation in the payout installation process shown in FIG. 51, the number of game balls received and paid out in the recess of the payout rotating body by this retry operation and the actual counting switch. The inconsistency counter INCC monitors and determines whether or not the number of balls detected in 751 and the inconsistent payout of game balls due to the inconsistency are repeated. The inconsistency counter INCC is stored in the prize ball information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM. In step S774, the mismatch counter INCC stored in the prize ball information storage area is incremented.

Following step S774 or in step S772, the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST read in step S770 and the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the fixed position determination value do not match. Occasionally, it is determined whether or not there is a detection signal from the counting switch 751 (step S776). This determination is performed based on the detection signal from the counting switch 751 in the port input process of step S550 in the power-on processing of the payout control unit (main process of the payout control unit) shown in FIG. 42. Specifically, as described above, the detection signal is stored in the input information storage area of the above-mentioned payout control built-in RAM as input information. In step S776, the input information is read from the input information storage area, and it is determined whether or not there is a detection signal from the counting switch 751.

When there is a detection signal from the counting switch 751 in step S776, the value 1 is subtracted from the inconsistency counter INCC stored in the prize ball information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM (decrement, step S778).

Following step S778, or when there is no detection signal from the counting switch 751 in step S776, it is determined whether or not the value of the inconsistency counter INCC is smaller than the inconsistency threshold value INCTH (step S780). In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present invention, it has been experimentally obtained that the probability that one inconsistent gaming ball is paid out due to the retry operation is about 1 in millions, and in the present embodiment, it is inconsistent. A value of 5 is set as the threshold value INCTH.

As described above, in the process of setting the work area of the payout control built-in RAM in step S530 in the payout control unit power-on process of FIG. 42, the payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM is stored at the time of power recovery. , Information used for this retry operation monitoring process is set based on the inconsistency counter INCC stored in the prize ball information storage area. By this processing, for example, even if there is a momentary power failure or a power failure, the value of the inconsistent counter INCC or the like at the time of power recovery is restored to the value of the mismatch counter INCC or the like immediately before the momentary power failure or the power failure stored as the payout backup information. You can do it. As a result, in the determination of step S780, the monitoring of the game ball payout operation (retry operation) by the prize ball device 740, which was performed until immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure, can be continued from the time of power recovery. ing. Therefore, for example, when the value of the inconsistency counter INCC is smaller than the inconsistency threshold value INCTH in the determination in step S780 immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure, it is determined that the retry operation is operating normally, that is, the prize ball It can be determined that the payout operation of the game ball by the device 740 is in the normal state, and even at the time of power recovery, it can be determined that the payout operation of the game ball by the prize ball device 740 is in the normal state by the determination in step S780. On the other hand, when the value of the inconsistency counter INCC is not smaller than the inconsistency threshold value INCTH in the determination in step S780, it is determined that the retry operation is abnormal, that is, the game ball payout operation by the prize ball device 740 is abnormal. It can be determined that the state is in the state, and even at the time of power recovery, it can be determined in the determination in step S780 that the payout operation of the game ball by the prize ball device 740 is in an abnormal state.

When the value of the inconsistency counter INCC is smaller than the inconsistency threshold value INCTH in step S780, this routine is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when the value of the inconsistency counter INCC is not smaller than the inconsistency threshold value INCTH in step S780, that is, when the value of the inconsistency counter INCH is equal to or more than the inconsistency threshold value INCTH, it is determined that a "retry error" has occurred. In order to notify, the retry error information for displaying the number "5" is set on the error LED display 860b, which is a segment display mounted on the payout control board 4110, and the state information storage area of the above-mentioned payout control built-in RAM is set. Is set (stored) in (step S782).

Following step S782, a value 0 (initial value 0) is set in the mismatch counter INCC stored in the prize ball information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM (step S784). In step S784, the inconsistent counter INCC is determined in step S780 when the value of the inconsistent counter INCC is not smaller than the inconsistent threshold value INCTH, that is, when the value of the inconsistent counter INCC is equal to or greater than the inconsistent threshold value INCTH. It is initialized when this internal factor occurs. The inconsistency counter INCC is initialized when the operation switch 860a is operated to clear the RAM when the power is turned on, triggered by the occurrence of this external factor. When the operation switch 860a is operated when the power is turned on, the operation signal is input to the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 shown in FIG. 11 as a RAM clear signal as described above. As described above, the main control MPU 4100a erases all the various information stored in the main control built-in RAM, and outputs the RAM clear notification command to the peripheral control board 4140 shown in FIG. As a result, the RAM clear notification sound flows from the speaker housed in the speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3 shown in FIG. 5 and the speaker 130 provided in the door frame 5 shown in FIG.

Following step S784, the retry error flag RTERR-FLG is set to a value of 1 (step S786), and this routine ends. This retry error flag RTERR-FLG is a flag indicating whether or not the retry operation is abnormally operating. The value is 1 when the retry operation is abnormally operating, and when the retrying operation is not abnormally operating (retrying operation is). It is set to 0 when it is operating normally).

The payout control MPU4120a sets (stores) the retry error information set (stored) in the output information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM in step S782 in the payout control unit power-on processing (payout control unit main process) shown in FIG. 42. A retry error status command is created in the command transmission process of step S566 and transmitted to the main control board 4100, and display data to be displayed on the error LED display 860b is created in the LED display data creation process of step S564 in the same process. It is stored in the output information storage area as LED display information, and a drive signal is output to the error LED display 860b based on the LED display information stored in the output information storage area in the port output process of step S548 in the same process, and this error occurs. The number "5" is displayed on the LED display 860b. The main control board 4100 that has received the status command transmits the peripheral control board command transmission process in step S92 in the main control side timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 39 to the peripheral control board 4140, and the peripheral control board 4140 is the door frame 5. A door frame side lighting / blinking command for outputting a lighting signal, which causes a plurality of LEDs of various decorative boards provided in the above to emit light in a predetermined color (red in this embodiment), is given to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 shown in FIG. It outputs and causes a plurality of LEDs to emit light in a predetermined color. As described above, the clerk in the hall who noticed the light emission of the plurality of LEDs put the number "on the error LED display 860b mounted on the payout control board 4110 by opening the main body frame 3 with respect to the outer frame 2. It can be confirmed that the "retry error" has occurred by visually observing that "5" is displayed. As a result, the clerk in the hall, etc., in order to investigate the cause of the occurrence, confirms the malfunction of the counting switch 751, the disconnection of various harnesses extending from the counting switch 751 to the payout control board 4110, and the poor contact of various connectors. This can be performed extremely quickly as compared with the case where the light emission of a plurality of LEDs and the display content of the error LED display 860b are not notified.

Further, by intentionally deactivating the counting switch 751, it is difficult to detect the game ball that is received and paid out by the recess of the payout rotating body to which the rotation of the rotation shaft of the payout motor 744 is transmitted. Even if a retry operation is forcibly generated and a fraudulent act of illegally acquiring the game ball paid out by this retry operation is performed, the value of the inconsistency counter INCC described above becomes the inconsistency threshold value INCTH or more. Since a plurality of LEDs of various decorative substrates provided on the door frame 5 emit light, a clerk in the hall or the like rushes to check the state of the pachinko gaming machine 1. Then, the player who commits the fraudulent act has no choice but to interrupt the act so that the act is not discovered, and cannot continuously acquire the fraudulent game ball due to the fraudulent act. Even if the value of the inconsistency counter INCC matches the inconsistency threshold value INCTH, the number of game balls that can be acquired by the cheating player is the same as the inconsistency threshold value INCTH, that is, 5 balls. Therefore, the damage to the hall due to the act of intentionally deactivating the counting switch 751 can be suppressed to an extremely small value.

Further, as described above, the inconsistent counter INCC is set when the value of the inconsistent counter INCC is not smaller than the inconsistent threshold value INCTH in step S780, that is, the value of the inconsistent counter INCC is equal to or higher than the inconsistent threshold value INCTH. It has come to be initialized when an internal factor that has become is generated. As a result, the inconsistency counter INCC is not initialized when an external factor such as the operation switch 860a is operated to clear the error occurs. Therefore, even if the error release switch 860a or the like is illegally modified so that the operation signal is input to the payout control MPU4120a, the inconsistency counter INCC is forcibly initialized by such an illegal act. There is no.

[14-10. Inconsistency counter reset judgment process]
Next, the inconsistency counter reset process will be described. In this inconsistency counter reset process, the number of game balls received and paid out in the recess of the payout rotating body to which the rotation of the rotation shaft of the payout motor 744 is transmitted, and the number of balls detected by the counting switch 751. This is a process of determining whether or not to reset the inconsistency counter INCC that calculates the difference between.

When the inconsistency counter reset determination process is started, the payout control MPU 4120a of the payout control unit 4120 on the payout control board 4110 determines whether or not the inconsistency counter reset determination time has elapsed (as shown in FIG. 54). Step S790). This determination is performed based on the inconsistency counter reset determination time updated in the timer update process of step S552 in the payout control unit power-on process (payout control unit main process) shown in FIG. 42. Specifically, the inconsistency counter reset determination time is stored in the time management information storage area of the above-mentioned payout control built-in RAM as time management information. In step S790, the time management information is read from the time management information storage area, and it is determined whether or not the inconsistency counter reset determination time has elapsed.

If the inconsistency counter reset determination time has not elapsed in step S790, this routine is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when the inconsistency counter reset determination time has elapsed in step S790, the inconsistency counter reset determination time is initialized (step S792). By this initialization, the inconsistency counter reset determination time is set to an initial value of 7000s (about 2 hours).

Following step S792, the inconsistency counter INCC stored in the prize ball information storage area of the above-mentioned payout control built-in RAM is set to a value 0 (initial value 0) (step S794), and this routine is terminated. As described above, the inconsistency counter INCC was detected by the counting switch 751 and the number of game balls that were received and paid out in the recess of the payout rotating body to which the rotation of the rotation shaft of the payout motor 744 was transmitted. It is a counter for calculating the difference between the number of balls and the number of balls, and usually, the number of game balls received and paid out in the recess of the payout rotating body and the number of balls detected by the counting switch 751 are one. The value is 0 because it is done. Since the payout control MPU4120a performs a retry operation in the payout installation process shown in FIG. 51, the number of game balls received and paid out in the recess of the payout rotating body by this retry operation and the actual counting switch. The inconsistency counter INCC monitors and determines whether or not the number of balls detected in 751 and the inconsistent payout of game balls due to the inconsistency are repeated. In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present invention, it has been experimentally obtained that the probability that one inconsistent gaming ball is paid out by the retry operation is about 1 in millions.

Here, as described above, the pachinko game machine 1 is composed of a game board 4 and a frame body such as a main body frame 3 on which the game board 4 is mounted, and by exchanging the game board 4 (replacement of a new machine). Since the game specifications can be changed, the payout control board 4110 for controlling the prize ball device 740, the power supply board 851 for generating the drive power supply for the prize ball device 740 and the control power supply for the payout control board 4110 are common. It is equipped on the frame side as a function. As described above, the payout control MPU4120a of the payout control unit 4120 on the payout control board 4110 can determine an abnormal operation as to whether or not the retry operation is repeatedly performed by monitoring the inconsistency counter INCC. In the payout control unit power-off process in the payout control unit power-on process shown in FIG. 42, the inconsistent counter INCC immediately before the power-off is stored when the power is turned off, while the payout control unit power-on is shown in FIG. In the process of step S530 in the time process (setting at the time of power recovery of the RAM work area), the process is restarted from the stored inconsistency counter INCC when the power is turned on.

Then, when the power is cut off and the game board 4 mounted on the pachinko game machine 1 is replaced with a game board 4'of another game specification different from the game board 4, the payout control is performed. The payout control MPU4120a of the payout control unit 4120 on the board 4110 starts processing again from the inconsistency counter INCC stored when the game board 4 is mounted on the pachinko gaming machine 1. That is, when the player plays the pachinko game machine 1 on which the game board 4'is mounted, the inconsistency counter INCC in the pachinko game machine 1 on which the game board 4 before replacement is mounted is inherited as it is. For this reason, the player plays the pachinko game machine 1 equipped with the game board 4', and there is a probability of 1 in millions that the number of inconsistent game balls is generated, and the mismatch counter INCC. When the inconsistency counter INCC becomes equal to or higher than the above-mentioned inconsistency value INCTH, the game board 4 is replaced with the game board 4', and the payout control MPU4120a determines that the retry operation is abnormal in a short period of time. There is a risk of That is, in the short period after the game board 4 is replaced with the game board 4', the counting switch 751 is defective, the various harnesses extending from the counting switch 751 to the payout control board 4110 are broken, and the various connectors are poorly contacted. May be suddenly determined as an abnormal operation of the retry operation even though the above has not occurred.

In this way, when the game board 4 is replaced with the game board 4'and judged as an abnormal operation of the retry operation in a short period of time, the replaced game board 4'is new, but the impression is that it is easy to break down. It may be given to the player. The probability that one inconsistent game ball will be paid out due to the retry operation is 1 in millions, the pachinko game machine 1 of the present invention is installed in the hall and continuously operated for one week during the business hours of the hall. In this case, since it is the same as the probability that one inconsistent game ball due to the retry operation is paid out, the process of step S778 in the retry operation monitoring process shown in FIG. 53 is performed from the mismatch counter INCC to several million minutes. There is a probability of 1 that the value 1 is not subtracted. Then, in one week, the value 1 is incremented to the inconsistent counter INCC and the inconsistent counter INCC becomes the value 1, and in two weeks, the value 1 is further incremented to the inconsistent counter INCC and the inconsistent counter INCC becomes the value 2. In the week, the value 1 is further incremented to the inconsistency counter INCC and the inconsistency counter INCC becomes the value 3, and in the 4th week the value 1 is further incremented to the inconsistency counter INCC and the inconsistency counter INCC becomes the value 4. The value 1 is further incremented by the inconsistency counter INCC, and the inconsistency counter INCC becomes a value of 5, which matches the above-mentioned inconsistency threshold INCTH. That is, after 5 weeks have passed, since the inconsistency counter INCC matches the inconsistency threshold value INCTH, the payout control MPU4120a determines from step S776 in the retry operation monitoring process shown in FIG. 53 from the counting switch 751. It is determined that there is no detection signal, and it is determined that a malfunction of the counting switch 751, disconnection of various harnesses extending from the counting switch 751 to the payout control board 4110, poor contact of various connectors, etc. have occurred. In the process of step S782 in the retry operation monitoring process shown in 53, in order to notify that a “retry error” has occurred, a number “” is displayed on the error LED display 860b, which is a segment display mounted on the payout control board 4110. The retry error information for displaying "5" is set and set (stored) in the state information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM.

Therefore, when the payout control MPU4120a determines that the inconsistency counter reset determination time has elapsed in the determination in step S790 in this inconsistency counter reset determination process, that is, every 7000s (about 2 hours), the inconsistency counter reset is repeated. By forcibly setting the value 0 to the inconsistency counter INCC in the process of step S794 in the determination process, that is, forcibly resetting it, the increment of the inconsistency counter INCC that occurs with a probability of 1 in millions described above is incremented. It has been disabled. As a result, an error has occurred in the retry operation even though there is no malfunction of the counting switch 751, disconnection of various harnesses extending from the counting switch 751 to the payout control board 4110, and poor contact of various connectors. It is possible to prevent the retry error information for transmitting the above from being set (stored) in the state information storage area of the discharge control built-in RAM.

It should be noted that by intentionally deactivating the counting switch 751, it is difficult to detect the game ball that is received and paid out by the recess of the payout rotating body to which the rotation of the rotation shaft of the payout motor 744 is transmitted. Even if a retry operation is forcibly generated and a fraudulent act of illegally acquiring the game ball paid out by this retry operation is performed, the counting switch 751 is intentionally repeatedly inactive for a short time as described above. As described above, when the value of the inconsistency counter INCC becomes equal to or higher than the inconsistency threshold value INCTH, a plurality of LEDs of various decorative boards provided on the door frame 5 emit light, so that the clerk in the hall or the like can check the state of the pachinko gaming machine 1. I will rush to confirm. Then, the player who commits the fraudulent act has no choice but to interrupt the act so that the act is not discovered, and cannot continuously acquire the fraudulent game ball due to the fraudulent act. On the other hand, when the counting switch 751 is intentionally repeatedly inactive for a long time so that the value of the inconsistency counter INCC does not exceed the inconsistency threshold value INCTH, the inconsistency counter INCC is set every 7000s (about 2 hours). Although it is reset, the number of game balls that can be acquired by the cheating player during this period is, as described above, the inconsistency counter INCC up to the inconsistency threshold value INCTH, and the counting switch 751 is intentionally used. Even if the player is repeatedly inactive for a long time, the number of game balls that can be acquired by a player who cheats can be extremely reduced.

[14-11. Error release operation judgment processing]
Next, the error release operation determination process will be described. In this error release operation determination process, it is determined whether or not the operation switch 860a shown in FIG. 12 is being operated.

When the error release operation determination process is started, the payout control MPU 4120a of the payout control unit 4120 on the payout control board 4110 determines whether or not the operation switch 860a is operated to clear the error, as shown in FIG. 55. (Step S800). This determination is performed based on the operation signal from the operation switch 860a in the port input process of step S550 in the power-on processing of the payout control unit (main process of the payout control unit) shown in FIG. 42. Specifically, the operation signal is stored as input information in the input information storage area of the above-mentioned payout control built-in RAM. In step S800, the input information is read from the input information storage area, and it is determined that when the logic of the operation signal from the operation switch 860a is HI, it is not instructed to cancel the error, and the operation switch 860a operates. On the other hand, when the logic of the operation signal from the operation switch 860a is LOW, it is determined that the operation switch 860a is not operated, and it is determined that the operation switch 860a is operated.

When the operation switch 860a is not operated in step S800, this routine is terminated as it is, while when the operation switch 860a is operated in step S800, an error flag state confirmation process is performed (step S802). In this error flag state determination process, the state of the error flag corresponding to various error information related to the prize ball device 740 is confirmed. For example, the state of the retry error flag RTERR-FLG indicating whether or not the retry operation is abnormal is confirmed. As described above, the retry error flag RTERR-FLG has a value of 1 when the retry operation is abnormally operating and a value of 0 when the retry operation is not abnormally operating (the retry operation is operating normally). Since it is set, the payout control MPU4120a confirms whether the value of the retry error flag RTERR-FLG is a value 0 or a value 1.

Following step S802, state information setting processing is performed (step S804). In this state information setting process, if the state of the error flag indicates that an error has occurred based on the error flag confirmed in step S802, the state information corresponding to the error flag is described above. Set (store) in the status information storage area of the dispensed control built-in RAM. As a result, various information (state information) is read from the state information storage area in the command transmission process of step S566 in the power-on processing of the payout control unit (main process of the payout control unit) shown in FIG. 42, and the read state information is read out. A state command is created based on the above and transmitted to the main control board 4100. For example, when the retry error flag RTERR-FLG indicating whether or not the above-mentioned retry operation is abnormally operating has a value of 1, that is, when the retrying operation is abnormally operating, an error has occurred in the retrying operation. When the retry error information to be transmitted is set (stored) in the state information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM, the command transmission process in step S566 in the payout control unit power-on process (payout control unit main process) shown in FIG. 42 A retry error status command is created and sent to the main control board 4100.

The main control board 4100 that has received the retry error information transmits the peripheral control board command transmission process in step S92 in the main control side timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 39, and the peripheral control board 4140 transmits the peripheral control board 4140. A retry operation error notification process is performed to notify that an error has occurred in the retry operation. In this retry operation error notification process, the error notification announcement of the retry operation of "Please check the prize ball unit" and "Check the harness of the payout control board" is made a predetermined number of times (in this embodiment). 2 times.) Repeatedly, the speaker housed in the speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3 shown in FIG. 5 and the speaker 130 provided in the door frame 5 shown in FIG. It is designed to do. The clerk in the hall who heard the error notification announcement of this retry operation had a problem with the counting switch 751 shown in FIG. 12, disconnection of various harnesses extending from the counting switch 751 to the payout control board 4110, poor contact of various connectors, etc. This can be confirmed extremely quickly as compared with the case where the error notification announcement of the retry operation does not flow from the speaker housed in the speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3 and the speaker 130 provided in the door frame 5. Further, in the retry operation error notification process, a plurality of LEDs of various decorative substrates provided on the door frame 5 are made to emit light in a predetermined color (red in the present embodiment).

Following step S804, the release setting process is performed (step S806). In this release setting process, based on the error flags corresponding to the various error information confirmed in step S802, if the state of the error flag indicates that an error has occurred, it corresponds to the error flag. The CR unit 6 indicates that the content displayed by the error LED display 860b, which is a segment display already mounted on the payout control board 4110, is forcibly stopped or the ball can be rented. In order to convey the above-mentioned logic of the PRDY signal to HI, that is, the state in which it is started up, the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869 is connected from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 4120a of the payout control unit 4120. It is output to the CR unit 6 via. For example, when the retry error flag RTERR-FLG indicating whether or not the above-mentioned retry operation is abnormally operating has a value of 1, that is, when the retry operation is abnormally operating, the error LED indicator 860b has already displayed the error. In order to forcibly stop the number "5" that notifies that the "retry error" is present, the retry error information stored in the state information storage area of the above-mentioned payout control built-in RAM is "normal". Forcibly overwrite the information in which the figure "-" that notifies the effect is displayed. Further, in order to inform the CR unit 6 that the ball can be rented, the logic of the PRDY signal is kept in the HI, that is, the rising state, and the game ball is played from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU4120a. It is output to the CR unit 6 via the equal rental device connection terminal plate 869.

Following step S806, an error flag initialization process is performed (step S808), and this routine is terminated. In this error flag initialization process, if the state of the error flag indicates that an error has occurred based on the error flag corresponding to the various error information confirmed in step S802, the error flag is set. initialize. For example, when the retry error flag RTERR-FLG indicating whether or not the above-mentioned retry operation is abnormally operating has a value of 1, that is, when the retry operation is abnormally operating, a value 0 is set to the retry error flag RTERR-FLG. Set and initialize. At this time, the logic of the PRDY signal described above is held in the HI, that is, the rising state, and the logic state of the PRDY signal is set in the PRDY signal output setting information and stored in the CR communication information storage area. As a result, in the CR communication process of step S554 in the payout control section main process of the payout control section power-on process of FIG. 42, the PRDY signal output setting information is read from the CR communication information storage area stored in the payout control built-in RAM. The read PRDY signal output setting information, that is, the PRDY signal whose logic is LOW is output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 4120a to the CR unit 6 via the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869. ..

As described above, the retry error flag RTERR-FLG is an internal factor when the value of the inconsistency counter INCC is equal to or more than the inconsistency threshold value INCTH in the determination of step S780 in the retry operation monitoring process shown in FIG. Is set to the retry error flag RTERR-FLG in the process of step S786 of the same process, but when the operation switch 860a is operated, this is the trigger, that is, this external factor is caused. When it occurs, the retry error flag RTERR-FLG is set to a value of 0 and initialized. When the operation switch 860a is operated to clear the RAM when the power is turned on, the retry error flag RTERR-FLG is operated to clear the RAM in order to clear the RAM, that is, the operation switch 860a is operated to clear the RAM. Similar to the case where the switch 860a is operated, it is initialized when this external factor occurs.

[14-12. Exchange of various signals with the CR unit]
Next, the CR communication process in step S554 in the payout control section main process of the payout control section power-on process of FIG. 42 will be described using a timing chart. In this CR communication process, various signals are exchanged between the payout control board 4110 and the CR unit 6 shown in FIG. First, the signal processing at the time of payout operation by ball lending will be described, and then the input signal confirmation processing from the CR unit 6 will be described. Here, the number of game balls for 200 yen as the amount of money (in this embodiment, 50 balls, and the payout operation of 25 balls for 100 yen as the amount of money is performed twice) is used as the number of balls to be rented. The case of paying out to the upper plate 301 and the lower plate 302 shown in FIG. 7 will be described. The BRQ signal, BRDY signal, and CR connection signal from the CR unit 6 read input information from the input information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM and store it in the read input information, and perform CR communication processing. Checks the logical state of the BRQ signal, BRDY signal, and CR connection signal from the input information every 2 ms, which is the interrupt timer cycle.

[14-12-1. Signal processing during payout operation by lending a ball]
The payout control MPU4120a of the payout control unit 4120 on the payout control board 4110 reads out the PRDY signal output setting information from the CR communication information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM, and the read out PRDY signal output setting information pays out the rental ball. When the logic state of the PRDY signal that conveys that the payout operation is possible is set, the payout operation for paying out the rental ball is possible as shown in FIG. 56 (d). The logic of the PRDY signal is output as HI, that is, started up and held, and output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU4120a of the payout control unit 4120, and as PRDY, the game ball rental device connection terminal. Output to the CR unit 6 via the plate 869 (timing H0). In this state, for example, when the player presses the ball lending button 361 of the ball lending unit 360 shown in FIG. 2, the ball lending switch 365b is switched on (turned on). The operation signal is input to the CR unit 6 from the frequency display board 365 as the TDS shown in FIG. 13 via the game ball rental device connection terminal board 869. The CR unit 6 into which the TDS is input pays out the number of game balls worth 200 yen as the number of balls to be rented to the upper plate 301 and the lower plate 302, as shown in FIG. 56 (a). BRDY, which is a ball request signal, is output from the CR unit 6 to the payout control board 4110 (payout control MPU4120a) via the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869, and the signal is started up and held (timing H1). .. This BRDY is input as a BRDY signal to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU4120a.

As shown in FIG. 56 (b), the payout control MPU 4120a to which the BRDY signal is input is set from the timing H1 to the lending request monitoring time HA (in this embodiment, 20 milliseconds (ms) to 58 ms). ) Elapses from the CR unit 6 via the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869, and a predetermined number of balls can be rented in one payout operation (25 balls in this embodiment, and the amount is 100 yen). It is monitored whether or not BRQ, which is a single payout operation start request signal for paying out), is started.

Of the 200 yen worth of game balls, the CR unit 6 first pays out 100 yen worth of game balls to the upper plate 301 and the lower plate 302 as the number of balls to be rented. Therefore, FIG. 56 (b) ), The BRQ is output from the CR unit 6 to the CR unit 6 via the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869 from the timing H1 until the rental request monitoring time HA elapses, and the signal is output. Start up and hold (timing H2). This BRQ is input as a BRQ signal to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU4120a.

As shown in FIG. 56 (c), when the BRQ signal rises from the timing H1 until the lending request monitoring time HA elapses, the payout control MPU4120a has the BRQ request approval ACK monitoring time HB from the timing H2 (in this embodiment, (It is set to 20 ms ± 1 ms.) In order to convey that one payout operation has started by the time, the logic of the EXS signal is set to HI, that is, the payout control MPU4120a is held in the started state. It is output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the above, and is output as an XS to the CR unit 6 via the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869 (timing H3).

As shown in FIG. 56 (b), the CR unit 6 to which the XS is input has a lending instruction monitoring time HC (set to 20 ms to 58 ms in this embodiment) from timing H3 to elapse. The BRQ that has been started up and held from the timing H2 is output from the CR unit 6 to the payout control board 4110 via the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869, and the signal is lowered and held (timing H4).

As shown in FIG. 56 (c), the payout control MPU4120a performs one payout operation from the timing H4 until the payout monitoring time HD (in the present embodiment, the ball payout time is set) elapses. Go and pay out the predetermined number of balls to be rented, that is, the number of game balls for 100 yen to the upper plate 301 and the lower plate 302 as the number of rented balls. Then, when the payout monitoring time HD elapses, the XS signal that is started up and held from the timing H3 is held as LOW, that is, in the down state, and is output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU4120a. , EXS is output to the CR unit 6 via the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869 (timing H5).

Since the CR unit 6 pays out the remaining 100 yen worth of game balls out of the 200 yen worth of game balls to the upper plate 301 and the lower plate 302 as the number of rented balls, FIG. 56 (b) ), The BRQ is transferred from the CR unit 6 to the terminal board for connecting the rental device such as a game ball by the time when the next request confirmation timing HE (in this embodiment, the maximum is set to 268 ms) elapses from the timing H5. It is output to the payout control board 4110 (payout control MPU4120a) via the 869, and the signal is started up and held (timing H6).

Similarly, when the payout control MPU4120a pays out the remaining 100 yen worth of game balls to the upper plate 301 and the lower plate 302 as the number of rented balls using the above-mentioned method, as shown in FIG. 56 (c). , The logic of the XS signal that has been started up and held is held as LOW, that is, in the lowered state, and is output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU4120a. It is output to the CR unit 6 via the plate 869 (timing H7).

As shown in FIG. 56A, the CR unit 6 stands up from the timing H1 until the CR unit lending completion monitoring time HF (in the present embodiment, the maximum is set to 268 ms) elapses from the timing H7. The raised and held BRDY is output from the CR unit 6 to the payout control board 4110 (payout control MPU4120a) via the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869, and the signal is lowered and held (timing H8).

The above-mentioned lending request monitoring time HA, BRQ request approval ACK monitoring time HB, lending instruction monitoring time HC, payout monitoring time HD, next request confirmation timing HE, and CR unit lending completion monitoring time HF are the payout control shown in FIG. The time is measured in the timer update process of step S552 in the unit power-on processing (payout control unit main process).

The payout control MPU4120a is not communicating with the CR unit 6 when the ball is out, the ball is flat, a counting switch error, a retry error, a full tank, etc. (the logic of BRDY from the CR unit 6). Is LOW, that is, when it is held down), as shown in FIG. 56 (d), the PRDY signal that is started up and held from the timing H1 is set to the logic of LOW, that is, in the state of being held down. It is held and output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU4120a, and is output as a PRDY to the CR unit 6 via the game ball or the like rental device connection terminal plate 869 (timing H9). On the other hand, when communicating with the CR unit 6 (when the logic of BRDY from the CR unit 6 is HI, that is, when it stands up and is held), although not shown, the logic state of the EXS signal is maintained and dispensed. It outputs from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the control MPU 4120a, and outputs as EXS to the CR unit 6 via the game ball or the like rental device connection terminal plate 869. "Maintaining the logical state of the EXS signal" means that when the logic of the EXS signal is LOW (the EXS signal is held down), the logic LOW is maintained, and the logic of the EXS signal is HI (maintaining the logical state of the EXS signal). The logic HI is maintained when the EXS signal is up and held).

In this way, the CR unit 6 exchanges various signals with the payout control MPU 4120a of the payout control unit 4120 on the payout control board 4110, and the payout control MPU 4120a uses the number of game balls for 200 yen as the amount of money and 100 as the amount of money. By performing the payout operation of 25 balls for the yen twice, the game balls with a loan number of 50 balls are paid out to the upper plate 301 and the lower plate 302. A clerk in the hall or the like operates a setting unit (not shown) provided on the front side of the CR unit 6, for example, the upper plate 301 or the number of balls rented for 100 yen as the amount of money. When it is set to pay out to the lower plate 302, the payout control MPU4120a performs a payout operation of 25 balls for 100 yen as the amount of money once, and the number of game balls for 500 yen as the amount of money is used as the number of balls to be rented. When it is set to pay out to the upper plate 301 or the lower plate 302, the payout control MPU4120a performs the payout operation of 25 balls for 100 yen as the amount of money five times, and the number of game balls for 1000 yen as the amount of money is calculated. When the number of balls to be rented is set to be paid out to the upper plate 301 or the lower plate 302, the payout control MPU4120a will perform the payout operation of 25 balls for 100 yen as the amount of money 10 times.

[14-12-2. Input signal confirmation processing from CR unit]
In the payout control MPU4120a of the payout control unit 4120 on the payout control board 4110, the CR unit 6 passes the BRQ from the CR unit 6 via the game ball or the like lending device connection terminal plate 869 even after the above-mentioned lending request monitoring time HA has elapsed. Therefore, even if the signal is output to the payout control board 4110 and the signal is not started, or even if the above-mentioned lending instruction monitoring time HC has elapsed, the CR unit 6 connects the BRDY to the lending device such as a game ball from the CR unit 6. The CR unit 6 plays the BRQ from the CR unit 6 even when the signal is output to the payout control board 4110 via the terminal plate 869 and the signal is not shut down or the above-mentioned next request confirmation timing HE has passed. The CR unit 6 is BRDY even if the signal is output to the payout control board 4110 via the ball rental device connection terminal plate 869 and the signal is not started, or even if the above-mentioned CR unit rental completion monitoring time HF has elapsed. Is output from the CR unit 6 to the payout control board 4110 via the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869, and when the signal is not shut down, the BRQ and the BRQ and the XS described above are used. Check whether the BRDY is normal or not. Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 56 (e) and 56 (f), when the payout control MPU4120a determines that BRQ and BRDY are not normal (timing J0), JA (in the present embodiment) from this timing J0 to a predetermined period JA (in this embodiment). , 200 ms ± 1 ms), the logic of the PRDY signal is set to LOW, that is, the state of being stopped is maintained and output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 4120a of the payout control unit 4120. Then, as a PRDY, it is output to the CR unit 6 via the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869, and the logic of the EXS signal is set as LOW, that is, the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU4120a is held in the down state. It is output from the output terminal of the above, and is output to the CR unit 6 as EXS via the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869 (timing J1).

Subsequently, the payout control MPU4120a uses the logic of the PRDY signal, which is held down from the timing J1 after the lapse of a predetermined period JB (set to 200 ms ± 1 ms in the present embodiment) from the timing J1, as HI. That is, it is held in the started-up state and output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU4120a, and is output as PRDY to the CR unit 6 via the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869 (timing J2). ).

Subsequently, the payout control MPU4120a uses the PRDY signal that is started up and held from the timing J2 after the elapse of the predetermined period JC (in this embodiment, 100 ms ± 1 ms) from the timing J2, and its logic is set to LOW. That is, it is held in the lowered state and output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU4120a, and is output to the CR unit 6 as a PRDY via the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869 (timing J3). ).

Subsequently, the payout control MPU4120a uses the logic of the PRDY signal that is stopped and held from the timing J3 as HI after the lapse of the predetermined period JD (in this embodiment, 100 ms ± 1 ms) from the timing J3. That is, it is held in the started-up state and output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU4120a, and is output as PRDY to the CR unit 6 via the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869 (timing J4). ).

Subsequently, the payout control MPU4120a uses the PRDY signal that is started up and held from the timing J4 after the lapse of a predetermined period JE (set to 100 ms ± 1 ms in this embodiment) from the timing J4, and its logic is LOW. That is, it is held in the lowered state and output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU4120a, and is output to the CR unit 6 as a PRDY via the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869 (timing J5). ).

Subsequently, the payout control MPU4120a uses the logic of the PRDY signal that is held down from the timing J5 as HI after the elapse of the predetermined period JF (in this embodiment, 10000 ms ± 1 ms) from the timing J5. That is, it is held in the started-up state and output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU4120a, and is output as PRDY to the CR unit 6 via the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869 (timing J6). ).

The predetermined period JA to the predetermined period JF described above are timed by the timer update process of step S552 in the payout control unit power-on process (payout control unit main process) shown in FIG. 42.

[15. Various control processes for peripheral control boards]
Next, various processes of the peripheral control board 4140 for receiving various commands from the main control board 4100 (main control MPU 4100a) shown in FIG. 11 will be described with reference to FIGS. 57 to 59. FIG. 57 is a flowchart showing an example of peripheral control unit power-on processing, FIG. 58 is a flowchart showing an example of peripheral control unit V blank interrupt processing, and FIG. 59 shows an example of peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing. FIG. 60 is a flowchart showing an example of peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing, and FIG. 61 is a flowchart showing an example of peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt processing.

As shown in FIG. 14, the peripheral control board 4140 is composed of a peripheral control unit 4150, a liquid crystal display, and a sound control unit 4160. Here, various control processes of the peripheral control unit 4150 will be described. First, the peripheral control unit power-on processing will be described, and then the peripheral control unit V blank interrupt processing, the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing, the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing, and the peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt processing will be described. .. In the present embodiment, the peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt processing is set to the highest priority as the interrupt processing, followed by the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing, the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing, and the peripheral control unit. It is set in the order of V blank interrupt processing.

[15-1. Various control processes of the peripheral control unit]
[15-1-1. Peripheral control unit power-on processing]
First, the peripheral control unit power-on processing will be described with reference to FIG. 57. When the power is turned on to the pachinko gaming machine 1, the peripheral control MPU 4150a of the peripheral control unit 4150 shown in FIG. 14 performs the peripheral control unit power-on processing as shown in FIG. 57. When the peripheral control unit power-on processing is started, the peripheral control MPU4150a performs the initial setting processing (step S1000). This initial setting process includes a process of initializing the peripheral control MPU4150a itself, a process of determining a hot start / cold start, a process of setting a wait timer after reset, and the like. The peripheral control MPU4150a first performs a process of initializing itself, and the time required for the process of initializing the peripheral control MPU4150a is on the order of microseconds (μs), and the peripheral control MPU4150a is initialized in an extremely short time. be able to. As a result, the peripheral control MPU 4150a is output from the main control board 4100 in the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing, which will be described later, when the interrupt enable is set, as shown in FIGS. 34 and 35. , It becomes possible to receive various commands such as a command related to the control of the game effect and a command related to the state of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

In the hot start / cold start determination process, the peripheral control RAM 4150c shown in FIG. 15 has the effect backup information (1fr) that is backed up in Bank1 (1fr) and Bank2 (1fr) in the backup first area 4150cc. ), And the effect backup information (1 ms), which is the content backed up in Bank 1 (1 ms) and Bank 2 (1 ms), are compared, and Bank 3 (1 fr) and Bank 4 (1 fr) in the backup second area 4150 cc. The production backup information (1fr), which is the content backed up in, is compared, and the production backup information (1ms), which is the content backed up in Bank3 (1ms) and Bank4 (1ms), is compared. When they match, the effect backup information (1fr), which is the content stored in Bank1 (1fr) with respect to Bank0 (1fr), which is the normally used storage area of the peripheral control RAM 4150c shown in FIG. When the production backup information (1 ms), which is the content stored in Bank 1 (1 ms), is copied back to Bank 0 (1 ms) to make a hot start, but the compared contents do not match (that is,). , When there is a discrepancy), the value 0 is forcibly written to each of the normally used storage areas of the peripheral control RAM 4150c, Bank0 (1fr) and Bank0 (1ms), to make a cold start.

Further, in the hot start / cold start determination process, the peripheral control SRAM 4150d shown in FIG. 15 is also backed up in Bank1 (SRAM) and Bank2 (SRAM) in the backup first area 4150db. (SRAM) are compared, and the effect backup information (SRAM), which is the content backed up in Bank 3 (SRAM) and Bank 4 (SRAM), in the backup second area 4150 dc is compared. When the compared contents match, the effect backup information (SRAM) which is the contents stored in the Bank0 (SRAM) with respect to the normally used storage area of the peripheral control SRAM 4150d shown in FIG. 15 (SRAM). ) Is copied back to make a hot start, while when the compared contents do not match (that is, when they do not match), the value is set with respect to Bank0 (SRAM), which is a normally used storage area of the peripheral control SRAM 4150d. Forcibly write 0 to make it a cold start. Following such a hot start or cold start, a value 0 is forcibly written to the backup unmanaged work area 4150cf of the peripheral control RAM 4150c shown in FIG. 15 to clear zero. After performing this initialization setting process, the peripheral control MPU4150a outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control built-in WDT4150af shown in FIG. 15 and the peripheral control external WDT4150e shown in FIG. 14 and resets to the peripheral control MPU4150a. I try not to take it.

The peripheral control MPU4150a may also perform communication initial setting in this initialization setting process. The mobile terminal 470 received by the player at the reception in the hall is placed in the recess 314d formed on the right side of the upper plate upper panel 314 of the plate unit 300 shown in FIG. When the mobile terminal 470 is mounted in the recess 314d, the information that the mobile terminal 470 is mounted is input to the peripheral control various parallel I / O ports 4150ag of the peripheral control MPU 4150a as a control signal from the communication control circuit 4162a shown in FIG. Will be done. The peripheral control MPU 4150a to which this control signal is input controls the communication control circuit 4162a by outputting a control signal to the communication control circuit 4162a from the peripheral control various parallel I / O ports 4150ag, and controls the communication control circuit 4162a with the mobile terminal 470. Communication initial settings are made to exchange various information (various data) wirelessly in both directions.

In this initial communication setting, an individual information acquisition process for acquiring an ID number (No. 123 in this embodiment) is performed from the mobile terminal 470, and the ID number acquired in this individual information acquisition process and the pachinko gaming machine 1 stand. Correspondence processing is performed to associate the numbers (unit numbers installed in the hall, No. 8 in this embodiment) with each other. As a result, in the initial communication setting, in the state where the mobile terminal 470 associated with the association process is placed (set) in the recess 314d formed on the right side of the upper plate upper panel 314 of the plate unit 300, the game is played. It is possible to maintain a state in which the operation of various game devices provided on the board 4 can be started, and when this initial communication setting is completed, the word "game ready" is carried as a to that effect. It is displayed large in the center of the display area of the terminal 470, and nothing is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 1900 on the game board side (that is, black) when the power is turned on or when the power is restored from a power failure (instantaneous power failure). Switch from (the state of the screen) to the screen of the effect when the mobile terminal is set, which will be described later. In this production when the mobile terminal is set, the pachinko game machine 1 is formed in the shape of sunglasses provided in the humanoid machine head unit 3150 of the back unit 3000 of the game board 4 shown in FIG. 8 and the decorated frame is in the standby position. Appears descending from the original position, which is difficult to see when viewed from the front, to almost the center position (directing position) of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 1900 on the game board side, and the pink sphere is three-dimensionally played. The "eyeball" is drawn by moving in the frame in the vertical and horizontal directions after being drawn in the center of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 1900 on the board side (FIGS. 62 (a) to 62 (a) to be described later). c) screen). On the other hand, in the initial communication setting, other mobile terminals 470'(excluding the mobile terminal MST for staff possessed by a staff such as a hall clerk who patrols the hall) different from the mobile terminal 470 associated by the matching process. In a state where another mobile terminal 470') is placed (set) in the recess 314d formed on the right side of the upper plate upper panel 314 of the plate unit 300, the operation of various game devices provided in the game board 4 can be operated. It is possible to maintain a state in which it cannot be started, and when this initial communication setting is completed, the content "This is a platform where another player is playing a game" is displayed on the mobile terminal 470. It is designed to be displayed large in the display area of.

Following step S1000, the current time information acquisition process is performed (step S1002). In this current time information acquisition process, the calendar information for specifying the date and the time information for specifying the hour, minute, and second are acquired from the RTC built-in RAM4165aa of the RTC41654a of the RTC control unit 4165 shown in FIG. In the RTC information acquisition storage area 4150cad of the peripheral control RAM 4150c shown in the above, the current calendar information is set in the calendar information storage unit, and the current time information is set in the time information storage unit. Further, in the current time information acquisition process, the brightness setting process of the liquid crystal display device is also performed. In the brightness setting process of this liquid crystal display device, the peripheral control MPU4150a acquires the brightness setting information from the RTC built-in RAM4165aa of the RTC control unit 4165 so that the brightness of the LED is included in the acquired brightness setting information. A process of adjusting the brightness of the backlight of the side liquid crystal display device 1900 to turn it on is performed. As described above, the brightness setting information includes brightness adjustment information for adjusting the brightness of the LED, which is the backlight of the liquid crystal display device 1900 on the game board side, in a range of 100% to 70% in 5% increments. The brightness of the LED, which is the backlight of the liquid crystal display device 1900 on the game board side, which is set, is included.

In the brightness setting process of the liquid crystal display device, specifically, the brightness of the LED included in the brightness setting information stored in the RTC built-in RAM4165aa of the RTC control unit 4165 is 75%, and the backlight of the liquid crystal display device 1900 on the game board side. Is turned on by adjusting the brightness of the backlight of the liquid crystal display device 1900 on the game board side based on the brightness adjustment information included in the brightness setting information, and the brightness stored in the RTC built-in RAM4165aa of the RTC control unit 4165. When the brightness of the LED included in the setting information is 80% and the backlight of the liquid crystal display device 1900 on the game board side is turned on, the backlight of the liquid crystal display device 1900 on the game board side is based on the brightness adjustment information included in the brightness setting information. Adjust the brightness to turn on. In the brightness setting process of this liquid crystal display device, the same correction as the brightness correction program for correcting the brightness of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 according to the usage time of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 is performed. It is not done at all. This is because a correction program similar to the brightness correction program is incorporated in the brightness setting process of the liquid crystal display device, so that the brightness of the LED is corrected toward 100% each time the brightness setting process of the liquid crystal display device is executed. This is to prevent it from being done.

In the present embodiment, the peripheral control MPU4150a acquires the calendar information and the time information from the RTC built-in RAM4165aa of the RTC4165a only once when the power is turned on. Further, the peripheral control MPU4150a outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control built-in WDT4150af and the peripheral control external WDT4150e after performing the current time information acquisition process so that the peripheral control MPU4150a is not reset.

Following step S1002, the value 0 is set in the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG (step S1006). This V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is a flag for determining whether or not to execute the peripheral control unit steady processing described later, and has a value of 1 when the peripheral control unit steady processing is executed, and the peripheral control unit steady processing. Is set to a value of 0 when is not executed. The V-blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is executed when a V-blank signal indicating that the screen data from the peripheral control MPU4150a can be accepted is input from the sound source built-in VDP4160a, which will be described later. The value 1 is set in the part V blank signal interrupt processing. In this step S1006, the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is initialized once by setting the value 0 in the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG. Further, the peripheral control MPU4150a outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control built-in WDT4150af and the peripheral control external WDT4150e after setting the value 0 in the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG so that the peripheral control MPU4150a is not reset. There is.

Following step S1006, it is determined whether or not the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value of 1 (step S1008). When the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is not a value 1 (value 0), the process returns to step S1008 again to repeatedly determine whether or not the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value 1. By repeating such a determination, the state waits until the peripheral control unit steady processing is executed. Further, the peripheral control MPU4150a outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control built-in WDT4150af and the peripheral control external WDT4150e after determining whether or not the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value of 1, and resets to the peripheral control MPU4150a. I try not to take it.

When the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value of 1 in step S1008, that is, when the peripheral control unit steady-state processing is executed, the value 1 is first set in the steady-state processing flag SP-FLG (step S1009). The steady-state processing flag SP-FLG is set to a value of 1 when the peripheral control unit steady-state processing is being executed, and to a value of 0 when the peripheral control unit steady-state processing is completed.

Following step S1009, the 1 ms interrupt timer activation process is performed (step S1010). In this 1 ms interrupt timer activation process, the 1 ms interrupt timer for executing the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process, which will be described later, is activated, and the number of times the 1 ms interrupt timer is activated and the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed. 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN is set to a value of 1 to initialize the 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN. The 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN is updated by the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing.

Following step S1010, lamp data output processing is performed (step S1012). In this lamp data output process, DMA serial continuous transmission to the lamp drive board 4170 shown in FIG. 14 is performed. Here, the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac of the peripheral control MPU 4150a shown in FIG. 15 is used to continuously transmit the serial I / O port for the lamp drive board. When the continuous transmission of the serial I / O port for the lamp drive board is started, the transmission data storage area 4150caa on the lamp drive board side of the peripheral control RAM 4150c externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 4150a shown in FIG. 15 is shown in FIG. The game board side light emission data SL-DAT for outputting lighting signals, blinking signals, or gradation lighting signals to a plurality of LEDs of various decorative boards provided on the game board 4 is created by the lamp data creation process described later. It is in the set state.

The peripheral control CPU core 4150aa of the peripheral control MPU 4150a shown in FIG. 15 specifies the transmission of the serial I / O port for the lamp drive board as a requirement factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac, and the transmission data storage area 4150caa on the lamp drive board side. The first byte of the game board side light emission data SL-DAT stored in the start address is sent to the serial I / O port for the lamp drive board via the external bus 4150h, the peripheral control bus controller 4150ad, and the peripheral bus 4150ai. Transfer to the transmit buffer register of and write. As a result, the serial I / O port for the lamp drive board transfers the written data of the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register, and synchronizes with the game board side emission clock signal SL-CLK to 1 byte of the transmission shift register. Data is started to be transmitted bit by bit.

The peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac triggers each time a transmission interrupt request for the serial I / O port for the lamp drive board is generated (in the present embodiment, the transmission buffer register for the serial I / O port for the lamp drive board is used). The written 1-byte data is transferred to the transmission shift register, and the transmission buffer register runs out of 1-byte data and becomes empty.) The peripheral control CPU core 4150aa is using the bus. If not, the remaining game board side light emission data SL-DAT stored in the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 4150ca is sent byte by byte via the external bus 4150h, the peripheral control bus controller 4150ad, and the peripheral bus 4150ai. By transferring and writing to the transmission buffer register of the serial I / O port for the lamp drive board, the serial I / O port for the lamp drive board transfers the data of the written transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register and plays a game. In synchronization with the board-side emission clock signal SL-CLK, 1-byte data of the transmission shift register is started to be transmitted bit by bit, and continuous transmission is performed by the serial I / O port for the lamp drive board.

Further, in the lamp data output processing, the DMA serial continuous transmission processing to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 shown in FIG. 14 is performed. Here, too, the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac of the peripheral control MPU 4150a is used to continuously transmit the serial I / O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED. When the continuous transmission of the serial I / O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED is started, the transmission data storage area for the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED of the peripheral control RAM 4150c externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 4150a shown in FIG. Door-side light emission data STL-DAT for outputting lighting signals, blinking signals, or gradation lighting signals to a plurality of LEDs of various decorative substrates provided on the door frame 5 is created on the 4150cab by the lamp data creation process described later. It is in the set state.

The peripheral control CPU core 4150aa of the peripheral control MPU 4150a specifies the transmission of the serial I / O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED as a requirement factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac, and the transmission data storage area for the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED. The first byte of the door-side emission data STL-DAT stored at the start address of the 4150cab is serialized for the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED via the external bus 4150h, the peripheral control bus controller 4150ad, and the peripheral bus 4150ai. Transfer to the transmit buffer register of the I / O port and write. As a result, the serial I / O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED transfers the written transmission buffer register data to the transmission shift register, and synchronizes with the door-side emission clock signal STL-CLK of the transmission shift register. Transmission of 1 byte of data is started bit by bit.

The peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac triggers each time a transmission interrupt request for the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED serial I / O port is generated (in this embodiment, the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED serial I / O). The 1-byte data written in the transmission buffer register of the port is transferred to the transmission shift register, and the transmission buffer register is empty when the 1-byte data is exhausted.), Peripheral control CPU core 4150aa When the bus is not used, the remaining door-side emission data STL-DAT stored in the transmission data storage area 4150cab for the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED is stored in 1 byte at a time, external bus 4150h, peripheral control bus controller 4150ad. Then, the serial I / O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED is written by transferring the data to the transmission buffer register of the serial I / O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED via the peripheral bus 4150ai. The data in the transmission buffer register is transferred to the transmission shift register, and 1-byte data in the transmission shift register is started to be transmitted bit by bit in synchronization with the door-side emission clock signal STL-CLK, for the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED. Continuous transmission is performed by the serial I / O port.

Following step S1012, the mobile terminal monitoring process is performed (step S1013). In this mobile terminal monitoring process, whether or not the mobile terminal 470 received by the player at the reception in the hall is placed in the recess 314d formed on the right side of the upper plate upper panel 314 of the plate unit 300 shown in FIG. To monitor. The peripheral control MPU 4150a is ready for the player to sit in front of the pachinko gaming machine 1 and start the game when the mobile terminal 470 is not placed in the recess 314d in the mobile terminal monitoring process. Judging that there is no such thing, set a screen to notify that you are away from your desk, set permission to perform a demonstration that will be a screen waiting for customers, or switch to power saving mode after demonstrating. Set up a migration. On the other hand, when the mobile terminal 470 is placed in the recess 314d, as described above, the information is used as a control signal from the communication control circuit 4162a shown in FIG. 14, and the peripheral control MPU4150a peripheral control various parallel I / Os Since it is input to the O port 4150ag, the peripheral control MPU 4150a to which this control signal is input outputs a control signal from the peripheral control various parallel I / O ports 4150ag to the communication control circuit 4162a. , The communication control circuit 4162a is controlled to perform initial communication settings for bidirectionally exchanging various information (various data) with the mobile terminal 470.

This communication initial setting is the same as that executed in the initialization setting process of step S1000, and as described above, the individual information acquisition for acquiring the ID number (No. 123 in this embodiment) from the mobile terminal 470. The processing is performed, and the ID number acquired in this individual information acquisition process is associated with the machine number of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (the machine number installed in the hall, No. 8 in this embodiment). .. As a result, in the initial communication setting, in the state where the mobile terminal 470 associated with the association process is placed (set) in the recess 314d formed on the right side of the upper plate upper panel 314 of the plate unit 300, the game is played. It is possible to maintain a state in which the operation of various game devices provided on the board 4 can be started, and when this initial communication setting is completed, the word "game ready" is carried to that effect. A large display is displayed in the center of the display area of the terminal 470, and nothing is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 1900 on the game board side due to the demonstration screen drawn in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 1900 on the game board side or the power saving mode. Switch from the state where it is not displayed (that is, the state where the screen becomes a black screen) to the screen of the effect when the mobile terminal is set, which will be described later. In this production when the mobile terminal is set, the pachinko game machine 1 is formed in the shape of sunglasses provided in the humanoid machine head unit 3150 of the back unit 3000 of the game board 4 shown in FIG. 8 and the decorated frame is in the standby position. Appears descending from the original position, which is difficult to see when viewed from the front, to almost the center position (directing position) of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 1900 on the game board side, and the pink sphere is three-dimensionally played. The "eyeball" is drawn by moving in the frame in the vertical and horizontal directions after being drawn in the center of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 1900 on the board side (FIGS. 62 (a) to 62 (a) to be described later). c) screen).

Even when the mobile terminal 470 is placed in the recess 314d, the rotating handle main body is caused by the player moving away from the seat of the pachinko gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. 7 or interrupting the game. The palms and fingers were separated from the front 506 and the game was not played, and the game balls did not enter the upper start opening 2101 or the lower start opening 2102, and the reserved balls were digested to zero. When the state is reached, the permission to perform the demonstration that the screen is in the customer waiting state is set, and the transition to the power saving mode is set after the demonstration. On the other hand, in the initial communication setting, other mobile terminal 470'(excluding the mobile terminal MST for staff possessed by a staff such as a hall clerk who patrols the hall) different from the mobile terminal 470 associated by the matching process. In a state where the mobile terminal 470') is placed (set) in the recess 314d formed on the right side of the upper plate upper panel 314 of the plate unit 300, the operation of various gaming devices provided in the game board 4 is started. It is possible to maintain the state where it can not be done, and when this initial communication setting is completed, the content "It is a stand where the game is being played by another player" is handled by the mapping process. The screen of the absence notification (for example, FIG. 66 described later) is displayed large in the display area of another mobile terminal 470'different from the attached mobile terminal 470 and drawn in the display area of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900. The screen) is maintained, and the screen for games (for example, the screen of FIG. 65 (b) described later) is not switched from such a screen to the state displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 1900 on the game board side. ing. In the mobile terminal monitoring process, in the initial communication setting, other mobile terminals 470'(excluding the mobile terminal MST for staff possessed by staff such as hall clerk who patrols the hall) different from the associated mobile terminal 470. The mobile terminal 470') is placed (set) in the recess 314d formed on the right side of the upper plate upper panel 314 of the plate unit 300, so that the operation of various game devices provided in the game board 4 is started. When maintaining the incapable state, the game information display device processing and the command transmission / reception processing, which will be described later, are not performed.

Further, in the mobile terminal monitoring process, the game information display device process is performed following the initial communication setting. In this game information display device processing, in addition to outputting various signals to the game information display device DCNT shown in FIG. 14, the game information display device is used in the game information display device information acquisition process in the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing described later. Various information of the game information display device DCNT is set based on various signals from the DCNT. The game information display device information acquisition storage area in the Bank (1 ms) of the backup management target work area 4150ca of the peripheral control RAM 4150c shown in FIG. Based on (not shown), various information from the game information display device DCNT is acquired, and a command corresponding to the acquired information is issued to the Bank (1fr) of the backup management target work area 4150ca of the peripheral control RAM 4150c shown in FIG. Set in the transmission command storage area for mobile terminals (not shown).

Further, in the mobile terminal monitoring process, command transmission / reception processing is performed following the communication initial setting and the game information display device processing. This command transmission / reception process is a process for transmitting / receiving various commands to / from the mobile terminal 470. When various commands are received from the mobile terminal 470, they are stored in the reception command storage area 4150cc of the peripheral control RAM 4150c shown in FIG. When various commands are set in the transmission command storage area (not shown) for a mobile terminal in the Bank (1fr) of the backup management target work area 4150ca of the peripheral control RAM 4150c shown in FIG. 15, the set various commands are carried. Send to terminal 470.

Following step S1013, the operation unit monitoring process is performed (step S1014). In this operation unit monitoring process, in the operation unit information acquisition process in the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process described later, the dial operation unit 401 is based on the detection signals from various detection switches provided in the operation unit 400 shown in FIG. Rotation (rotation direction) of the dial operation unit 401 created based on various information acquired from the rotation (rotation direction) and the operation of the pressing operation unit 405 (for example, detection signals from various detection switches provided in the operation unit 400). ) History information, operation history information of the pressing operation unit 405, etc.) Based on the operation unit information acquisition storage area 4150kai of the peripheral control RAM 4150c shown in FIG. 15, the rotation direction and pressing operation of the dial operation unit 401. The presence or absence of operation of the unit 405 is monitored, and it is appropriately determined whether or not the rotation direction of the dial operation unit 401 and the operation state of the pressing operation unit 405 are reflected in the game effect.

Following step S1014, display data output processing is performed (step S1016). In this display data output process, the drawing data for one screen (one frame) generated on the built-in VRAM of the sound source built-in VDP4160a in the display data creation process described later is generated by the sound source built-in VDP4160a from channels CH1 and 2 shown in FIG. Output to the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the mobile terminal 470 (actually, the image data for the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 is output from the channel CH1 to the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900, and the image for the mobile terminal 470 is output. Data is output from channel CH2 to the mobile terminal 470 via the communication control circuit 4162a of the communication control unit 4162 shown in FIG. 16; the same applies hereinafter). As a result, various screens are drawn on the liquid crystal display device 1900 on the game board side and the mobile terminal 470. In the display data output processing, when drawing exceeding the drawing capacity of the VDP4160a with a built-in sound source is performed, the generated drawing data for one screen (one frame) is transmitted to the liquid crystal display device 1900 on the game board side and the mobile terminal 470. It is designed to cancel the output. As a result, it is possible to prevent a delay in the processing time, but so-called frame dropping occurs, but the various decorative substrates provided on the game board 4 shown in FIG. 8 by the lamp data output processing in step S1012. The speaker and the speaker housed in the speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3 shown in FIG. 5 by the effect of the plurality of LEDs and the plurality of LEDs of various decorative substrates provided on the door frame 5 and the sound data output processing described later. The speaker 130 provided on the door frame 5 shown in FIG. 2 has a mechanism that allows priority to be synchronized with the production by music, sound effects, etc. that match various effects.

Following step S1016, sound data output processing is performed (step S1018). In this sound data output process, sound data such as music and sound effects set in the sound source built-in VDP4160a in the sound data creation process described later is output to the audio data transmission IC4160c as serialized audio data, or music and sound effects. In addition, the sound data of the notification sound and the notification sound are output to the audio data transmission IC 4160c as serialized audio data. When the serialized audio data from the VDP4160a with a built-in sound source is input, the audio data transmission IC 4160c is directed toward the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 as differential serial data in which the right audio data is a positive signal and a negative signal. At the same time, the left side audio data is transmitted to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 as differential serial data having a positive signal and a negative signal. As a result, music, sound effects, and the like that match various effects are reproduced in stereo from the speakers housed in the speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3 and the speakers 130 provided in the door frame 5, as well as notification sounds and notification sounds. Is also played back in stereo.

Following step S1018, the scheduler update process is performed (step S1020). In this scheduler update process, various schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 4150cae of the peripheral control RAM 4150c shown in FIG. 15 are updated. For example, in the scheduler update process, among the screen data arranged in the time series constituting the screen generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 4150 cage, the number of screen data from the first screen data is sent to the sound source built-in VDP4160a. Update the pointer to indicate whether to output.

Further, in the scheduler update process, among the light emission data arranged in the time series constituting the light emission mode generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 4150 cage, the light emission data at which number from the first light emission data is emitted from various LEDs. Update the pointer to indicate which aspect to use.

Further, in the scheduler update process, sound data such as music and sound effects, and sound data of notification sound and notification sound arranged in a time series constituting the sound generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 4150 cage are instructed. The pointer is updated in order to indicate which sound command data is to be output to the sound source built-in VDP4160a from the first sound command data among the sound command data.

Further, in the scheduler update process, the first drive data among the drive data of the electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids arranged in the time series constituting the electric drive source schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 4150 cage is started. Update the pointer to indicate which drive data is to be output. Electrical drive source The drive data of electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids arranged in time series that compose the schedule data is the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt that is repeatedly executed every time a 1ms timer interrupt occurs, which will be described later. Updated with motor and solenoid drive processing in processing. In the motor and solenoid drive processing that is repeatedly executed each time this 1 ms timer interrupt occurs, the electric drive source such as the motor or solenoid is driven according to the drive data indicated by the pointer, and the next drive specified in time series is performed. It updates the pointer to the data and updates the pointer each time it executes its own processing. That is, since the drive data indicated by the pointer updated in the motor and solenoid drive processing is forcibly updated in the scheduler update processing, the pointer is originally instructed in the motor and solenoid drive processing for some reason. Even if another drive data is instructed from the drive data that should be used, the drive data that should be originally instructed is forcibly updated in the scheduler update process.

Following step S1020, the received command analysis process is performed (step S1022). In this reception command analysis process, various commands transmitted from the main control board 4100 are received by the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process described later, and the received commands are analyzed and transmitted from the mobile terminal 470. Various commands are received in the command transmission / reception process in the mobile terminal monitoring process in step S1013, and the received various commands are analyzed. Various commands from the main control board 4100 are received by the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing and stored in the reception command storage area 4150cc of the peripheral control RAM 4150c shown in FIG. 15, and are stored in the reception command storage area 4150cc in the reception command analysis processing. , Received command storage area 4150cc is analyzed for various commands stored in the storage area. The various commands are classified into the various commands shown in FIG. 34, which are classified as related to the special figure 1 synchronization effect, the various commands classified as related to the special figure 2 synchronization effect, the various commands classified as related to the jackpot, and the power-on. Various commands to be executed, various commands classified to be related to the normal electric service production, various commands classified to be related to the normal electric service production, various commands classified into the notification display shown in FIG. 35, and classified into the status display. There are various commands, various commands classified as test-related, and various commands classified as others. Various commands from the mobile terminal 470 include a break time setting completion command that tells that a break time has been set for taking a meal break or taking a break to interrupt and refresh the game, a hall clerk, etc. There is a staff call request command, etc. for transmitting a request to call a staff member.

Following step S1022, warning processing is performed (step S1024). In this warning process, when the command analyzed in the received command analysis process in step S1022 includes various commands classified into the notification display shown in FIG. 35, the abnormality display mode for executing various abnormality notification is set. The set schedule data for screen generation, schedule data for generating light emission mode, schedule data for sound generation, schedule data for electrical drive source, etc. are displayed as various control data of peripheral control ROM 4150b or peripheral control RAM 4150c of peripheral control unit 4150. It is extracted from the copy area 4150ce and set to 4150cae in the schedule data storage area of the peripheral control RAM 4150c. Further, when the command analyzed in the received command analysis process in step S1022 includes the door opening command among the various commands classified into the notification display shown in FIG. 35, a screen for setting the break time is displayed. A break time setting drawing command for displaying is extracted from the peripheral control ROM 4150b of the peripheral control unit 4150 or various control data copy areas 4150ce of the peripheral control RAM 4150c, and the backup management target work area 4150ca of the peripheral control RAM 4150c shown in FIG. It is set in the transmission command storage area (not shown) for a mobile terminal in Bank (1fr). In the warning process, when a plurality of abnormalities occur at the same time, the abnormality notification is performed in descending order of priority registered in advance, and the abnormality is automatically resolved and the remaining abnormality notification is automatically transferred. It is designed to do. This allows multiple anomalies to be monitored simultaneously without losing information that another anomaly has occurred and one anomaly has occurred after one anomaly has occurred but before the anomaly has been resolved. Can be done.

Following step S1024, RCT acquisition information update processing is performed (step S1026). In this RTC acquisition information update process, the calendar information acquired in the current time information acquisition process of step S1002 and set in the RTC information acquisition storage area 4150cad of the peripheral control RAM 4150c shown in FIG. 15 and the calendar information stored in the calendar information storage unit. Updates the time information stored in the time information storage unit. By this RCT acquisition information update process, the hour, minute, and second, which is the time information stored in the time information storage unit, is updated, and the year and month, which is the calendar information stored in the calendar information storage unit based on the updated time information. The day is updated.

Following step S1026, lamp data creation processing is performed (step S1028). In this lamp data creation process, the pointer is updated in the scheduler update process of step S1020, and among the light emission data arranged in time series constituting the schedule data for generating the light emission mode, based on the light emission data indicated by the pointer. , The peripheral control unit outputs the game board side light emission data SL-DAT for outputting the lighting signal, blinking signal, or gradation lighting signal to the plurality of LEDs of the various decorative boards provided on the game board 4 shown in FIG. It is created by extracting from the peripheral control ROM 4150b of the 4150 or the various control data copy areas 4150ce of the peripheral control RAM 4150c, and is set in the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 4150caa of the peripheral control RAM 4150c shown in FIG. Door-side light emission data STL-DAT for outputting lighting signals, blinking signals or gradation lighting signals to a plurality of LEDs of various decorative boards provided in the peripheral control unit 4150, peripheral control ROM 4150b or peripheral control RAM 4150c. It is created by extracting from the control data copy area 4150ce, and is set in the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 4150cab of the peripheral control RAM 4150c shown in FIG.

Following step S1028, display data creation processing is performed (step S1030). In this display data creation process, the pointer is updated in the scheduler update process of step S1020, and among the screen data arranged in the time series constituting the screen generation schedule data, the screen data indicated by the pointer is referred to by the peripheral control unit. It is extracted from the peripheral control ROM 4150b of the 4150 or the various control data copy areas 4150ce of the peripheral control RAM 4150c and output to the sound source built-in VDP 4160a. When screen data is input from the peripheral control MPU4150a, the sound source built-in VDP4160a extracts character data from the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 4160b based on the input screen data to create sprite data, and creates a sprite data on the game board side liquid crystal display device. Drawing data for one screen (one frame) to be displayed on the 1900 and the mobile terminal 470 is generated on the built-in VRAM.

Following step S1030, sound data creation processing is performed (step S1032). In this sound data creation process, the pointer is updated in the scheduler update process of step S1020, and among the sound command data arranged in the time series constituting the sound generation schedule data, the sound command data indicated by the pointer is displayed. It is extracted from the peripheral control ROM 4150b of the peripheral control unit 4150 or various control data copy areas 4150ce of the peripheral control RAM 4150c and output to the sound source built-in VDP 4160a. When sound command data is input from the peripheral control MPU4150a, the sound source built-in VDP4160a extracts sound data such as music and sound effects stored in the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 4160b and controls the built-in sound source to control the sound command. Sound data such as music and sound effects are incorporated according to the track number specified in the data, and the output channel to be used is set according to the output channel number.

In the sound data creation process, each time the sound data creation process is performed (that is, each time the peripheral control unit routine process is performed), the peripheral control A / D converter 4150ak shown in FIG. 15 is started to adjust the volume. The voltage divided by the resistance value at the rotation position of the knob portion of 4140a is converted into a value of 1024 steps from the value 0 to the value 1023. In the present embodiment, the value of 1024 steps is divided into seven and managed as the board volumes 0 to 6, the board volume 0 is set to mute, the board volume 6 is set to the maximum volume, and the board volume 0 to the board. The volume is set so as to increase toward the volume 6. The LCD and the VDP4160a with a built-in sound source of the sound control unit 4160 are controlled so as to have the volume set to the board volumes 0 to 6, and the sound data is serialized in the sound data output process of step S1018 described above. By outputting to the transmission IC 4160c, music and sound effects can be played from the speaker housed in the speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3 and the speaker 130 provided in the door frame 5.

In addition, the notification sound and the notification sound flow without depending on the volume adjustment based on the rotation operation of the knob part, and the volume from the mute to the maximum volume is programmed into the liquid crystal and the sound source of the sound control unit 4160. The built-in VDP4160a can be controlled and adjusted. The volume adjusted by this program is different from the above-mentioned substrate volume divided into seven stages, and can smoothly change from mute to maximum volume. For example, even when a hall clerk or the like rotates the knob portion of the volume adjustment volume 4140a to set the volume low, the speaker and the door frame 5 housed in the speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3 can be used. Although the production sounds such as music and sound effects flowing from the provided speaker 130 are reduced, the volume is loud when the pachinko gaming machine 1 has a problem or when the player is cheating (in the present embodiment). The notification sound set to (maximum volume) can be played. Therefore, even if the volume of the effect sound is reduced, it is possible to prevent the hall clerk and the like from becoming less likely to notice the occurrence of a problem or the cheating of the player due to the notification sound. In addition, based on the current board volume set by adjusting the volume based on the rotation operation of the knob, the volume at which the advertisement sound is played is reduced so as not to interfere with music and sound effects, while the advertisement sound is played. In addition to music and sound effects, increase the volume of the advertisement to make the screen unfolded on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and mobile terminal 470 more powerful, or shift to a game state that is advantageous for the player. You can also announce that you are likely to do so.

Following step S1032, a backup process is performed (step S1034). In this backup process, the contents stored in the peripheral control MPU 4150a and the external peripheral control RAM 4150c shown in FIG. 15 are copied to the backup first area 4150 cc and the backup second area 4150 cc, respectively, and backed up. At the same time, the contents stored in the peripheral control MPU 4150a and the external peripheral control SRAM 4150d are copied and backed up in the backup first area 4150db and the backup second area 4150dc, respectively.

Specifically, in the backup process, the peripheral control RAM 4150c is backed up for each frame (1 frame) in the backup target work area 4150ca shown in FIG. 15, that is, every time the peripheral control unit routine processing is executed. The lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 4150caa, the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 4150cab, the reception command storage area 4150cac, the RTC information acquisition storage area 4150cad, and the schedule, which are included in Bank0 (1fr). The effect information (1fr) stored in the data storage area 4150 cage, the transmission command storage area for a mobile terminal (not shown), and the output data storage area for the game information display device is backed up as the effect backup information (1fr). Peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac copies to Bank1 (1fr) and Bank2 (1fr) in 1 area 4150cc at high speed, and peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac copies to Bank3 (1fr) and Bank4 (1fr) in backup 2nd area 4150cc at high speed. make a copy.

To briefly explain the high-speed copy of the contents stored in Bank0 (1fr) by the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac, the peripheral control MPU core 4150aa of the peripheral control MPU 4150a shown in FIG. 15 is a requirement factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac. Specify a copy of the contents stored in Bank0 (1fr) to Bank1 (1fr) of the backup first area 4150cc, and change the contents stored in the start address of Bank0 (1fr) to the end address of Bank0 (1fr). Up to the stored contents are continuously copied by predetermined bytes (for example, 1 byte) in order from the start address of Bank1 (1fr) in the first area 4150 kb, and the peripheral control MPU core 4150aa is the peripheral control DMA controller. Specify the copy of the contents stored in Bank0 (1fr) as the request factor of 4150ac to Bank2 (1fr) of the backup first area 4150cc, and from the contents stored in the start address of Bank0 (1fr), Bank0 (1fr). ) Is continuously copied by a predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte) from the start address of Bank 2 (1fr) in the backup first area 4150 kb up to the contents stored in the terminal address.

Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU core 4150aa specifies a copy of the contents stored in Bank0 (1fr) as a requirement factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac to Bank3 (1fr) of the backup second area 4150cc, and specifies Bank0 (1fr). ) From the content stored in the start address to the content stored in the end address of Bank0 (1fr), the start address of Bank3 (1fr) in the second area 4150cc is continuously backed up by a predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte). Copy everything in order from, and specify that the peripheral control MPU core 4150aa copies the contents stored in Bank0 (1fr) as the requirement factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac to Bank4 (1fr) of the backup second area 4150cc. Then, from the content stored in the start address of Bank0 (1fr) to the content stored in the end address of Bank0 (1fr), a predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte) is continuously backed up in Bank4 (4150cc of the second area). Copy everything in order from the start address of 1fr).

Further, in the backup process, the peripheral control SRAM 4150d is backed up for each frame (1 frame) in the backup target work area 4150da shown in FIG. 15, that is, every time the peripheral control unit routine processing is executed. Peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac is high speed in Bank1 (SRAM) and Bank2 (SRAM) of backup first area 4150db using the effect information (RAM) stored in Bank0 (SRAM) as the effect backup information (SRAM). And the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac copies to Bank3 (SRAM) and Bank4 (SRAM) in the backup second area 4150dc at high speed.

To briefly explain the high-speed copy of the contents stored in Bank0 (SRAM) by the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac, the peripheral control MPU core 4150aa of the peripheral control MPU 4150a shown in FIG. 15 is a requirement factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac. Specify the copy of the contents stored in Bank0 (SRAM) to Bank1 (SRAM) of the backup first area 4150db, and change the contents stored in the start address of Bank0 (RAM) to the end address of Bank0 (SRAM). Up to the stored contents are continuously copied by predetermined bytes (for example, 1 byte) in order from the start address of Bank1 (SRAM) in the first area 4150db, and the peripheral control MPU core 4150aa is the peripheral control DMA controller. Specify the copy of the contents stored in Bank0 (SRAM) as the request factor of 4150ac to Bank2 (SRAM) of the backup first area 4150db, and from the contents stored in the start address of Bank0 (SRAM), Bank0 (SRAM). ) Is continuously copied by a predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte) up to the contents stored in the terminal address of the backup first area 4150db in order from the start address of Bank 2 (SRAM).

Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU core 4150aa specifies a copy of the contents stored in the Bank0 (SRAM) as a request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac to the Bank3 (SRAM) of the backup second area 4150dc, and specifies the copy to the Bank0 (SRAM). ), The contents stored in the end address of Bank0 (SRAM) are continuously backed up by predetermined bytes (for example, 1 byte). The start address of Bank3 (SRAM) in the second area 4150 dc. All the contents are copied in order from, and the peripheral control MPU core 4150aa specifies the copy of the contents stored in Bank0 (SRAM) as the requirement factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac to Bank4 (SRAM) of the backup second area 4150dc. Then, from the contents stored in the start address of Bank0 (SRAM) to the contents stored in the end address of Bank0 (SRAM), predetermined bytes (for example, 1 byte) are continuously backed up in Bank4 of the second area 4150dc (Bunk4). Copy everything in order from the start address of SRAM).

Following step S1034, the WDT clear process is performed (step S1036). In this WDT clear processing, a clear signal is output to the peripheral control built-in WDT4150af and the peripheral control external WDT4150e so that the peripheral control MPU4150a is not reset.

Following step S1036, the value 0 is set in the steady processing flag SP-FLG as the execution of the peripheral control unit steady processing is completed (step S1038), the process returns to step S1006 again, and the value 0 is set in the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG. Is set and initialized, and the determination in step S1008 is repeated until the value 1 is set in the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG in the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing described later. That is, in step S1008, it waits until the value 1 is set in the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG, and when it is determined in step S1008 that the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value 1, steps S1009 to step S1009. The process of S1038 is performed, and the process returns to step S1006 again. As described above, when it is determined in step S1008 that the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value of 1, the processes of steps S1009 to S1038 are performed. The processing of steps S1009 to S1038 is referred to as "peripheral control unit steady processing".

This peripheral control unit steady processing starts by first setting a value 1 in the steady processing flag SP-FLG assuming that the peripheral control unit steady processing is being executed in step S1009, and in step S1010, the 1 ms interrupt timer activation process is performed. Then, each process of step S1012, step S1014, ..., And step S1036 is performed, and finally, in step S1038, when the value 0 is set in the steady processing flag SP-FLG as the execution completion of the peripheral control unit steady processing, the process is completed. Will be done. The peripheral control unit steady processing is executed when the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value of 1 in step S1008. As described above, the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is executed when a V blank signal indicating that the screen data from the peripheral control MPU4150a can be accepted is input from the sound source built-in VDP4160a. The value 1 is set in the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing described later. In the present embodiment, as described above, the frame frequency (number of screen updates per second) of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the mobile terminal 470 is set to approximately 30 fps per second, so that a V blank signal is input. The interval is about 33.3 ms (= 1000 ms ÷ 30 fps). That is, the peripheral control unit steady processing is repeatedly executed approximately every 33.3 ms.

[15-1-2. Peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing]
Next, a V-blank signal indicating that the screen data from the peripheral control MPU 4150a of the peripheral control unit 4150 shown in FIG. 14 can be accepted was input from the liquid crystal and the sound source built-in VDP 4160a of the sound control unit 4160. Peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing executed with this as an opportunity will be described. When the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing is started, the peripheral control MPU 4150a of the peripheral control unit 4150 determines whether the steady-state processing flag SP-FLG has a value of 0, as shown in FIG. 58 (step). S1045). As described above, the steady-state processing flag SP-FLG has a value of 1 when the peripheral control unit steady-state processing in steps S1009 to S1038 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing in FIG. 57 is being executed, and the peripheral control unit steady-state. The value is set to 0 when the processing is completed.

When the steady processing flag SP-FLG is not a value 0 (value 1) in step S1045, that is, when the peripheral control unit steady processing is being executed, this routine is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when the steady processing flag SP-FLG is a value 0 in step S1045, that is, when the execution of the peripheral control unit steady processing is completed, the value 1 is set in the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG (step S1050). Exit this routine. As described above, this V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is a flag for determining whether or not to execute the peripheral control unit steady processing, and has a value of 1 when the peripheral control unit steady processing is executed, and peripheral control. The value is set to 0 when the steady processing is not executed.

In the present embodiment, in step S1045, it is determined whether or not the constant processing flag SP-FLG has a value of 0, that is, whether or not the peripheral control unit stationary processing has been executed, and the peripheral control unit stationary processing has been executed. Occasionally, in step S1050, the value 1 is set in the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG, but this is because the V blank signal is input and the V blank is input while the peripheral control unit steady processing is being executed. When the value 1 is set in the signal detection flag VB-FLG, the peripheral control unit steady processing currently being executed is assumed to be executed in the determination of step S1008 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing in FIG. 57. Since the peripheral control unit steady processing is forcibly canceled in the middle and the execution is started from the beginning, in order to prevent this, the peripheral control unit power-on processing (peripheral control unit steady processing) in FIG. 57 is steady in step S1009. By setting the value 1 to the processing flag SP-FLG, it is notified to the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing, which is this routine, that the peripheral control unit steady processing is being executed, and the peripheral control unit power supply in FIG. 57. Peripheral control unit V blank, which is this routine, indicates that the peripheral control unit steady processing has been executed by setting the value 0 to the flag SP-FLG during steady processing in step S1038 in the on-time processing (peripheral control unit steady processing). By transmitting to the signal interrupt processing, whether or not the constant processing flag SP-FLG has a value of 0 in the determination of step S1045 in the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing, which is this routine, that is, the peripheral control unit steady processing is executed. It is designed to determine whether it is completed or not. In other words, it is a measure when the peripheral control unit steady processing cannot be completed by the time the V blank signal is input and the next V blank signal is input, so-called processing failure.

As a result, in the peripheral control unit steady processing this time, if the processing cannot be completed in about 33.3 ms and the processing fails, the next time is determined in step S1008 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing in FIG. 57. It is in a state of waiting until the V blank signal of is input. That is, the time for executing the current peripheral control unit steady processing that has failed processing is about 66.6 ms. Normally, the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing, which will be described later, is repeatedly executed every time the 1ms interrupt timer is activated by starting the 1ms interrupt timer in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing (peripheral control unit steady processing) in FIG. 57. Is executed only 32 times for one peripheral control unit steady processing, but if the above-mentioned peripheral control unit steady processing that has failed this time exists, the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is 64 times. It is designed to be executed only 32 times. That is, even if the peripheral control unit steady processing fails, the consistency between the production progress state by the peripheral control unit steady processing and the production progress state by the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing, which is the timer interrupt control, is consistent. It is designed not to collapse. Therefore, even if the peripheral control unit steady processing fails, the progress state of the effect can be reliably matched.

[15-1-3. Peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing]
Next, the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing that is repeatedly executed every time the 1ms interrupt timer is generated by the activation of the 1ms interrupt timer in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady processing of the peripheral control unit power-on processing of FIG. 57 will be described. .. When the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is started, the peripheral control MPU4150a of the peripheral control unit 4150 shown in FIG. 14 has whether or not the 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN is smaller than 33 times, as shown in FIG. 59. Is determined (step S1100). As described above, the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is determined by the 1 ms interrupt timer activation process in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process of the peripheral control unit power-on processing in FIG. It is a counter that counts the number of times that a certain peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is executed. In the present embodiment, as described above, the frame frequency (the number of screen updates per second) of the liquid crystal display device 1900 on the game board side and the mobile terminal 470 is set to approximately 30 fps per second, so that a V blank signal is input. The interval is about 33.3 ms (= 1000 ms ÷ 30 fps). That is, since the peripheral control unit steady processing is repeatedly executed about every 33.3 ms, after the 1 ms interrupt timer is started in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process, the next peripheral control unit steady process is performed. Is executed, the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is executed only 32 times. Specifically, when the 1 ms interrupt timer is activated in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady processing, the first 1 ms timer interrupt is generated first, the second, ..., And the 32nd 1 ms timer interrupt is sequentially performed. It will occur.

When the 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN is not smaller than 33 times in step S1100, that is, when the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt occurs and the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is started, this routine is terminated as it is. When the occurrence of the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt happens to precede the generation of the next V blank signal, in the present embodiment, the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing has the peripheral control unit V as the priority of the interrupt processing. Although it is set higher than the blank interrupt processing, the start of the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing by the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled. In other words, in the present embodiment, since the V blank signal is the signal that controls the entire system of the peripheral control board 4140, when the occurrence of the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt happens to precede the generation of the next V blank signal, , The start of the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing by the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled in order to execute the peripheral control unit V blank interrupt processing. Then, after the 1ms interrupt timer is restarted in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady processing due to the generation of the V blank signal, the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing due to the generation of the first 1ms timer interrupt is newly started. ing.

On the other hand, when the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is smaller than 33 in step S1100, a value 1 is added (incremented, step S1102) to the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN. When the value 1 is added to the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN, the 1 ms interrupt timer is activated by the 1 ms interrupt timer activation process in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady processing of the peripheral control unit power-on processing in FIG. 57. The number of times the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing, which is this routine, is executed is increased by one time.

Following step S1102, a motor and solenoid drive process is performed (step S1104). In this motor and solenoid drive process, they are arranged in a time series constituting the electrical drive source schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 4150cae of the peripheral control MPU 4150a and the external peripheral control RAM 4150c shown in FIG. Among the drive data of the electric drive sources such as the motor and the solenoid, the electric drive sources such as the motor and the solenoid of the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 and the motor drive board 4180 shown in FIG. 14 according to the drive data indicated by the pointer. The pointer is updated to the next drive data specified in time series, and the pointer is updated each time the motor and solenoid drive process is executed.

Specifically, in the motor and solenoid drive processing, the DMA serial continuous transmission process to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 is performed. Here, the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac of the peripheral control MPU 4150a shown in FIG. 15 is used to continuously transmit the serial I / O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor. When continuous transmission of the serial I / O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor is started, first, the electrical drive source schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 4150cae of the peripheral control MPU 4150a and the external peripheral control RAM 4150c is input. Of the drive data of the electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids arranged in the time series, the drive signal to the dial drive motor 414 of the operation unit 400 shown in FIG. 7 is based on the drive data indicated by the pointer. The door-side motor drive data STM-DAT for outputting is extracted from the peripheral control ROM 4150b of the peripheral control unit 4150 or various control data copy areas 4150ce of the peripheral control RAM 4150c, and is created, and the peripheral control RAM 4150c shown in FIG. Frame decoration drive amplifier Set in the transmission data storage area 4150 caf for the board side motor. The peripheral control CPU core 4150aa of the peripheral control MPU 4150a specifies the transmission of the serial I / O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor as a requirement factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac, and stores the transmission data for the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor. The first byte of the door-side motor drive data STM-DAT stored at the start address of the region 4150 caf is sent to the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor via the external bus 4150h, the peripheral control bus controller 4150ad, and the peripheral bus 4150ai. Transfer to the transmission buffer register of the serial I / O port for writing. As a result, the serial I / O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor transfers the written transmission buffer register data to the transmission shift register, and synchronizes with the door side motor drive clock signal STM-CLK to transmit the transmission shift register. 1 byte of data is started to be transmitted bit by bit.

The peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac triggers each time a transmission interrupt request for the serial I / O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor is generated (in this embodiment, the serial I / O for the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor). The 1-byte data written in the transmission buffer register of the port is transferred to the transmission shift register, and the transmission buffer register is empty when the 1-byte data is exhausted.), Peripheral control CPU core 4150aa When the bus is not used, the remaining door-side motor drive data STM-DAT stored in the frame decoration drive amplifier board-side motor transmission data storage area 4150 buffer is stored byte by byte, external bus 4150h, peripheral control bus controller. The serial I / O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor is written by transferring to the transmission buffer register of the serial I / O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor via the 4150ad and the peripheral bus 4150ai. The data of the transmitted buffer register is transferred to the transmission shift register, and 1 byte of data of the transmission shift register is started to be transmitted bit by bit in synchronization with the door side motor drive clock signal STM-CLK, and the frame decoration drive amplifier board is used. Continuous transmission is performed by the serial I / O port for the motor.

Further, in the motor and solenoid drive processing, the DMA serial continuous transmission process to the motor drive board 4180 is performed. Here, too, the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac of the peripheral control MPU 4150a shown in FIG. 15 is used to continuously transmit the serial I / O ports for the motor drive board. When the continuous transmission of the serial I / O port for the motor drive board is started, first, when configuring the electrical drive source schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 4150cae of the peripheral control MPU 4150a and the external peripheral control RAM 4150c. Of the drive data of electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids arranged in series, a motor for moving various movable bodies provided on the game board 4 shown in FIG. 8 based on the drive data indicated by the pointer. The game board side motor drive data SM-DAT for outputting the drive signal to the or solenoid is extracted from the peripheral control ROM 4150b of the peripheral control unit 4150 or the various control data copy areas 4150ce of the peripheral control RAM 4150c, and is created. The peripheral control RAM 4150c shown in FIG. 15 is set in the transmission data storage area 4150 cg on the motor drive board side. Then, the peripheral control CPU core 4150aa of the peripheral control MPU 4150a specifies the transmission of the serial I / O port for the motor drive board as the required factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac, and stores it in the start address of the transmission data storage area 4150 cg on the motor drive board side. The first byte of the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT is sent to the transmission buffer of the serial I / O port for the motor drive board via the external bus 4150h, the peripheral control bus controller 4150ad, and the peripheral bus 4150ai. Transfer to register and write. As a result, the serial I / O port for the motor drive board transfers the written data of the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register, and synchronizes with the game board side motor drive clock signal SM-CLK to be one of the transmission shift registers. Transmission of byte data is started bit by bit.

The peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac triggers each time a transmission interrupt request for the serial I / O port for the motor drive board is generated (in the present embodiment, the transmission buffer register for the serial I / O port for the motor drive board is used). The written 1-byte data is transferred to the transmission shift register, and the transmission buffer register runs out of 1-byte data and becomes empty.) The peripheral control CPU core 4150aa is using the bus. If not, the remaining game board side motor drive data SM-DAT stored in the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 4150 cag is sent byte by byte via the external bus 4150h, the peripheral control bus controller 4150ad, and the peripheral bus 4150ai. By transferring and writing to the transmission buffer register of the serial I / O port for the motor drive board, the serial I / O port for the motor drive board transfers the data of the written transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register. In synchronization with the game board side motor drive clock signal SM-CLK, 1-byte data of the transmission shift register is started to be transmitted bit by bit, and continuous transmission is performed by the serial I / O port for the motor drive board.

Following step S1104, the movable body information acquisition process is performed (step S1106). In this movable body information acquisition process, history information of detection signals from various detection switches (for example, in-situ history information) is determined by determining whether or not detection signals from various detection switches provided on the game board 4 are input. , Movable position history information, etc.) are created and set in the movable body information acquisition storage area 4150cah of the peripheral control MPU 4150a and the external peripheral control RAM 4150c shown in FIG. From the history information of the detection signals from the various detection switches set in the movable body information acquisition storage area 4150cah, the original position, the movable position, and the like of the various movable bodies provided in the game board 4 can be acquired.

Following step S1106, operation unit information acquisition processing is performed (step S1108). In this operation unit information acquisition process, history information of detection signals from various detection switches (for example, a dial operation unit) is determined by determining whether or not detection signals from various detection switches provided in the operation unit 400 are input. The rotation (rotation direction) history information of 401, the operation history information of the pressing operation unit 405, etc.) are created, and the operation unit information acquisition storage area of the peripheral control MPU 4150a and the external peripheral control RAM 4150c shown in FIG. Set to 4150 kai. From the history information of the detection signals from various detection switches set in the operation unit information acquisition storage area 4150 kai, the rotation direction of the dial operation unit 401 and the presence / absence of operation of the pressing operation unit 405 can be acquired.

Following step S1108, the game information display device information acquisition process is performed (step S1109). In this game information display device information acquisition process, history information of various signals (for example, the game information display device DCNT) is determined by determining whether or not various signals from the game information display device DCNT shown in FIG. 14 are input. The call button DCNTb is operated to create the staff call cancellation information, etc., which informs that the staff call status has been canceled.), And the backup management target work of the peripheral control MPU 4150a and the external peripheral control RAM 4150c shown in FIG. It is set in the game information display device information acquisition storage area (not shown) in the Bank (1 ms) of the area 4150 ca. Various information from the game information display device DCNT can be acquired from the history information of various signals from the game information display device DCNT set in the game information display device information acquisition storage area (not shown).

Following step S1109, a backup process is performed (step S1110), and this routine is terminated. In this backup process, the contents stored in the peripheral control MPU 4150a and the external peripheral control RAM 4150c shown in FIG. 15 are copied to the backup first area 4150 cc and the backup second area 4150 cc, respectively, and backed up. At the same time, the contents stored in the peripheral control MPU 4150a and the external peripheral control SRAM 4150d are copied and backed up in the backup first area 4150db and the backup second area 4150dc, respectively.

Specifically, in the backup process, for the peripheral control RAM 4150c, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process, which is this routine, is executed every time the 1 ms interrupt timer occurs in the backup target work area 4150ca shown in FIG. Each time it is backed up, the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 4150 caf, motor drive board side transmission data storage area 4150 cag, and movable body information acquisition storage area 4150 cah included in the backup target Bank0 (1 ms). , Operation unit information acquisition storage area 4150 kai, and effect information (1 ms), which is the content stored in the game information display device information acquisition storage area, as effect backup information (1 ms), Bank 1 (1 ms) of the backup first area 4150 kb. ) And Bank2 (1ms), the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac copies at high speed, and the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac copies to Bank3 (1ms) and Bank4 (1ms) of the backup second area 4150cc at high speed.

To briefly explain the high-speed copy of the contents stored in Bank 0 (1 ms) by the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac, the peripheral control MPU core 4150aa of the peripheral control MPU 4150a shown in FIG. 15 is a requirement factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac. Specify a copy of the contents stored in Bank0 (1ms) to Bank1 (1ms) of the backup first area 4150cc, and change the contents stored in the start address of Bank0 (1ms) to the end address of Bank0 (1ms). All the stored contents are continuously copied in order from the start address of Bank 1 (1 ms) of the backup first area 4150 kb by a predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte), and the peripheral control MPU core 4150aa is the peripheral control DMA controller. Specify a copy of the contents stored in Bank0 (1ms) as the request factor of 4150ac to Bank2 (1ms) of the backup first area 4150cc, and Bank0 (1ms) from the contents stored in the start address of Bank0 (1ms). ), The contents stored in the terminal address of) are continuously copied in order from the start address of Bank 2 (1 ms) in the backup first area 4150 kb by a predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte).

Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU core 4150aa specifies a copy of the contents stored in Bank0 (1ms) as a requirement factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac to Bank3 (1ms) of the backup second area 4150cc, and specifies Bank0 (1ms). ) From the content stored in the start address to the content stored in the end address of Bank0 (1ms), the start address of Bank3 (1ms) in the second area 4150cc is continuously backed up by a predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte). Copy everything in order from, and specify that the peripheral control MPU core 4150aa copies the contents stored in Bank0 (1ms) as a requirement factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac to Bank4 (1ms) of the backup second area 4150cc. Then, from the contents stored in the start address of Bank0 (1 ms) to the contents stored in the end address of Bank0 (1 ms), a predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte) is continuously backed up in Bank 4 of the second area 4150 cc. Copy everything in order from the start address of 1ms).

As described above, in the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process, various processes related to the effect of steps S1104 to S1109 described above are executed as the progress of the effect within the period of 1 ms. On the other hand, in the peripheral control unit steady processing in the peripheral control unit power-on processing of FIG. 57, various processes related to the production of steps S1012 to S1032 described above are executed as the progress of the production within a period of about 33.3 ms. are doing. In the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing, when the 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN is not smaller than the value 33 in step S1100, that is, when the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt occurs and the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is started. Since this routine is terminated as it is, even if the occurrence of the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt happens to precede the generation of the next V blank signal, the peripheral control unit by the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt Peripheral control by forcibly canceling the start of the 1 ms timer interrupt process, restarting the 1 ms interrupt timer in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process due to the generation of the V blank signal, and then newly generating the 1 ms timer interrupt. Part 1ms timer interrupt processing is started. That is, the consistency between the progress state of the effect by the peripheral control unit steady processing and the progress state of the effect by the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process, which is the timer interrupt control, is not broken. Therefore, the progress state of the production can be surely matched.

Further, as described above, the interval at which the V blank signal is output varies slightly depending on the liquid crystal size of the liquid crystal display device 1900 on the game board side and the mobile terminal 470, and the peripheral control MPU4150a and the peripheral VDP4160a with a built-in sound source are mounted. Even in the production lot of the control board 4140, the interval at which the V blank signal is output may change slightly. In the present embodiment, since the V blank signal is a signal that controls the entire system of the peripheral control board 4140, if the occurrence of the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt happens to precede the generation of the next V blank signal, peripheral control is performed. The start of the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing by the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled in order to execute the unit V blank interrupt processing. That is, in the present embodiment, even if the interval at which the V blank signal is output changes slightly, the start of the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing by the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled. It is possible to absorb the time lag due to a slight change in the interval at which the V-blank signal is output.

[15-1-4. Peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing]
Next, peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing for receiving various commands from the main control board 4100 will be described. When various commands from the main control board 4100 are started to be transmitted as serial data, the peripheral control MPU 4150a of the peripheral control unit 4150 shown in FIG. 14 triggers the main control to incorporate the main peripheral serial data into the peripheral control MPU 4150a. 1 byte (8 bits) of information is fetched into the reception buffer by the serial I / O port for the board, and when this fetching is completed, an interrupt is generated with this as a trigger, and peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing is performed. In the main circumference serial data, one packet is composed of 3 bytes, the status is assigned as the 1st byte, the mode is assigned as the 2nd byte, and the status and mode are regarded as numerical values as the 3rd byte, and the total thereof. The calculated sum value is assigned.

When the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process is started, the peripheral control MPU 4150a of the peripheral control unit 4150 determines whether or not the 1-byte reception period timer has timed out, as shown in FIG. 60 (step S1200). This 1-byte reception period timer sets a period during which 1-byte (8-bit) information of the main peripheral serial data transmitted from the main control board 4100 can be received.

When the 1-byte reception period timer has not timed out in step S1200, that is, when 1 byte (8 bits) of information of the main peripheral serial data transmitted from the main control board 4100 can be received, the peripheral The 1-byte information received from the receive buffer of the serial I / O port for the main control board built in the control MPU4150a is taken in (step S1202), and a value 1 is added to the reception counter SRXC (increment, step S1204). This reception counter SRXC is a counter indicating the number of times the data is taken out from the receive buffer, and when the status which is the first byte of the main cycle serial data is taken out from the receive buffer, the value is 1, and the mode which is the second byte of the main cycle serial data is set. When it is taken out from the receive buffer, it becomes a value 2, and when the sum value which is the third byte of the main peripheral serial data is taken out from the receive buffer, it becomes a value 3. The initial value 0 of the reception counter SRXC is set when the power is turned on or the like.

Following step S1204, it is determined whether or not the reception counter SRXC has a value of 3, that is, whether or not the sum value, which is the third byte of the main peripheral serial data, has been fetched from the reception buffer (step S1206). In this determination, following the status that is the first byte of the main circumference serial data, the mode that is the second byte of the main circumference serial data, and the sum value that is the third byte of the main circumference serial data are sequentially output from the receive buffer. It is determined whether or not it has been taken out.

When the reception counter SRXC is not a value 3 in step S1206, that is, the mode which is the second byte of the main circuit serial data after the status which is the first byte of the main cycle serial data, and the third byte of the main cycle serial data. When the sum values are not sequentially fetched from the receive buffer, the 1-byte reception period timer is set (step S1208), and this routine is terminated. By setting the 1-byte reception period timer in step S1208, the mode in which the second byte of the main cycle serial data or the sum value which is the third byte of the main cycle serial data can be received is set.

On the other hand, when the reception counter SRXC has a value of 3 in step S1206, that is, the status which is the first byte of the main circumference serial data, the mode which is the second byte of the main circumference serial data, and 3 of the main circumference serial data When the sum value, which is the byte th, is sequentially taken out from the reception buffer, the initial value 0 is set in the reception counter SRXC (step S1210), and the sum value is calculated (step S1212). In this calculation, the status which is the first byte of the main peripheral serial data and the mode which is the second byte of the main peripheral serial data already taken out from the receive buffer in step S1202 are regarded as numerical values, and the total (sum value). ) Is calculated.

Following step S1212, it is determined whether or not the sum value, which is the third byte of the main peripheral serial data already fetched from the receive buffer in step S1202, and the sum value calculated in step S1212 match (step). S1214). The thumb value, which is the third byte of the main peripheral serial data already taken out from the receive buffer in step S1202, is the sum value allocated as the third byte of the main peripheral serial data among the main peripheral serial data from the main control board 4100. Therefore, it should match the sum value calculated in step S1212. However, in the pachinko game machine 1, game balls are supplied from the pachinko island facility, and when the game balls rub against each other and become charged, they are electrostatically discharged to generate noise. Therefore, the pachinko game machine 1 is affected by noise. It is in a vulnerable environment. Therefore, in the present embodiment, on the peripheral control unit 4150 side, the status allocated as the first byte of the received main peripheral serial data and the mode allocated as the second byte of the main peripheral serial data are regarded as numerical values. The total (sum value) is calculated, and whether the calculated sum value matches the sum value allocated as the third byte of the main circumference serial data in the main circumference serial data from the main control board 4100. It is judged whether or not. As a result, the peripheral control MPU 4150a determines whether or not the main peripheral serial data has changed to the main peripheral serial data different from the normal due to the influence of noise between the substrates of the main control board 4100 and the peripheral control board 4140. be able to.

In step S1214, when the sum value which is the third byte of the main circumference serial data already taken out from the reception buffer in step S1202 and the sum value calculated in step S1212 match, the main circumference serial data received. The status allocated as the first byte of the above and the mode allocated as the second byte of the main peripheral serial data are shown in FIG. 15, and the reception command storage area 4150cc of the peripheral control MPU 4150a and the external peripheral control RAM 4150c shown in FIG. (Step S1216), and the routine ends. This reception command storage area 4150cc is used as a ring buffer, and the status allocated as the first byte of the main circumference serial data and the mode allocated as the second byte of the main circumference serial data are the reception command storage area. It is stored in the peripheral control unit reception ring buffer of 4150 cc. This "peripheral control unit receive ring buffer" is a buffer that is used so that the end and the beginning of the buffer are connected. Data is stored sequentially from the beginning of the buffer, and when the end of the buffer is reached, it returns to the beginning. Remember. The peripheral control MPU4150a is allocated as the status allocated as the first byte of the main peripheral serial data received when stored in the peripheral control unit reception ring buffer in step S1216 and as the second byte of the main peripheral serial data. The mode is stored in association with the specified mode, and the sum value allocated as the third byte is discarded.

On the other hand, when the 1-byte reception period timer has not timed out in step S1200, that is, the period during which 1 byte (8 bits) of information of the main peripheral serial data transmitted from the main control board 4100 can be received has been exceeded. Occasionally, or in step S1214, if the sum value, which is the third byte of the main peripheral serial data already fetched from the receive buffer in step S1202, and the sum value calculated in step S1212 do not match, this routine is used as it is. finish.

[15-1-5. Peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt processing]
Next, the peripheral control unit power failure warning signal executed when the power failure warning signal (peripheral power failure warning signal) from the power failure monitoring circuit 4100e of the main control board 4100, which is shown in FIG. 17, is input from the main control board 4100. Interrupt processing will be described. When the peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt process is started, the peripheral control MPU4150a of the peripheral control unit 4150 shown in FIG. 14 first activates a 2-microsecond timer (step S1300), and then starts a power failure warning signal (peripheral power failure warning). It is determined whether or not the signal) is input (step S1302). If a power failure warning signal (peripheral power failure warning signal) is not input in this determination, this routine is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, when the power failure warning signal is input in step S1302, it is determined whether or not 2 microseconds have elapsed (step S1304). In this determination, it is determined whether or not the timer started in step S1300 has elapsed 2 microseconds. When 2 macroseconds have not elapsed in step S1304, the process returns to step S1302 to determine whether or not the power failure warning signal has been input, and when the power failure warning signal has not been input, this routine is terminated as it is, while the power failure warning is terminated. When the signal is input, it is determined again in step S1304 whether or not 2 microseconds have elapsed. That is, in the determination in step S1304, it is determined whether or not the power failure warning signal is continuously input for 2 microseconds after the peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt processing, which is the routine, is started.

When the peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt process, which is the routine, is started in step S1304 and the power failure warning signal is continuously input for 2 microseconds, power saving processing is performed (step S1306). In this power saving process, the backlights of the liquid crystal display device 1900 and the mobile terminal 470 on the game board side are turned off, the motors and solenoids provided on the game board 4 are turned off, the various LEDs are turned off, and the like. By suppressing the power consumption of the entire system of 1, even if the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is cut off, stable operation is ensured for a period of 20 milliseconds, which is the time during which the peripheral control MPU 4150a can operate.

Following step S1306, command reception standby processing is performed (step S1308). In this command reception standby process, assuming that there are various commands being transmitted by the main control board 4100, the peripheral control MPU4150a can receive the commands being transmitted for a period of at least 17 milliseconds. It is supposed to wait. When the command is received, the above-mentioned peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing is started, and the reception command storage area 4150cc (peripheral control unit reception ring buffer) of the peripheral control MPU 4150a and the external peripheral control RAM 4150c shown in FIG. 15 is started. The received command is stored in).

Following step S1308, command backup processing is performed (step S1310). In the backup process of this command, the contents stored in the reception command storage area 4150ca included in the Bank0 (1fr) in the backup target work area 4150ca shown in FIG. The peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac copies to Bank2 (1fr) at high speed, and the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac copies to Bank3 (1fr) and Bank4 (1fr) of the backup second area 4150cc at high speed.

The high-speed copy of the contents stored in the received command storage area 4150cc included in Bank0 (1fr) by the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac will be briefly described. The peripheral control MPU core 4150aa of the peripheral control MPU 4150a shown in FIG. 15 is peripheral. Specify the copy of the contents stored in the received command storage area 4150cc included in Bank0 (1fr) to the receiving command storage area included in Bank1 (1fr) of the backup first area 4150cc as the request factor of the control DMA controller 4150ac. Then, from the content stored in the start address of the receive command storage area 4150cc included in Bank0 (1fr) to the content stored in the end address of the receive command storage area 4150cc included in Bank0 (1fr), a predetermined byte (for example, , 1 byte) in succession Copy all in order from the start address of the received command storage area included in Bank 1 (1fr) of the first area 4150 kb, and the peripheral control MPU core 4150aa is a requirement factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac. Specify a copy of the contents stored in the reception command storage area 4150cc included in Bank0 (1fr) to the reception command storage area included in Bank2 (1fr) of the backup first area 4150cc, and set it to Bank0 (1fr). From the content stored in the start address of the received command storage area 4150cc included to the content stored in the end address of the received command storage area 4150cc included in Bank0 (1fr), a predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte) is continuous. Then, all copies are made in order from the start address of the received command storage area included in Bank 2 (1fr) of the backup first area 4150 cc.

Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU core 4150aa includes the contents stored in the reception command storage area 4150cc included in the Bank0 (1fr) as a requirement factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac in the Bank3 (1fr) of the backup second area 4150cc. Specify the copy to the received command storage area to be stored, and store the contents stored in the start address of the received command storage area 4150cc included in Bank0 (1fr) in the terminal address of the received command storage area 4150cc included in Bank0 (1fr). The contents are copied continuously by a predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte) in order from the start address of the received command storage area included in Bank 3 (1fr) of the second area 4150 cc, and the peripheral control MPU core. The contents stored in the receive command storage area 4150 cc included in Bank 0 (1fr) as a requirement factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 4150 a are transferred to the receive command storage area included in Bank 4 (1 fr) of the backup second area 4150 cc. Specify a copy and specify the contents stored in the start address of the receive command storage area 4150cc included in Bank0 (1fr) to the contents stored in the end address of the receive command storage area 4150cc included in Bank0 (1fr). All the bytes (for example, 1 byte) are continuously copied from the start address of the received command storage area included in Bank 4 (1fr) of the second area 4150 cc.

Following step S1310, it is determined whether or not a power failure warning signal (peripheral power failure warning signal) has been input (step S1312). When the power failure warning signal is input in this determination, the WDT clear process is performed (step S1314). In this WDT clear process, the peripheral control MPU4150a outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control built-in WDT4150af shown in FIG. 15 and the peripheral control external WDT4150e shown in FIG. 14 so that the peripheral control MPU4150a is not reset. ..

On the other hand, when the power failure warning signal is not input in step S1312, or after step S1314, the process returns to step S1312 again to determine whether or not the power failure warning signal is input. That is, it is infinitely determined whether or not the power failure warning signal (peripheral power failure warning signal) is input. By continuing the determination infinitely in this way, when the power failure warning signal (peripheral power failure warning signal) is not input in step S1312, the peripheral control MPU4150a clears the peripheral control built-in WDT4150af and the peripheral control external WDT4150e. Is not output and the peripheral control MPU4150a is reset. On the other hand, when the power failure warning signal is input in step S1312, the WDT clear process is performed in step S1314 and the peripheral control MPU4150a is not reset. When the peripheral control MPU4150a is reset, the peripheral control unit power-on processing shown in FIG. 57 is restarted.

In this way, when the input of the power failure warning signal (peripheral power failure warning signal) continues in the infinite loop according to the determination in step S1312, the WDT clear processing is executed in step S1314 to perform peripheral control immediately before the power failure state occurs. The MPU4150a is not reset. On the other hand, if the input of the power failure warning signal is not continued and is canceled in the infinite loop by the determination in step S1312, the WDT clear process is not executed, so that the peripheral control built-in WDT4150af and the peripheral control external WDT4150e are displayed. The output of the clear signal is interrupted. As a result, even if the peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt process, which is this routine, is erroneously started due to noise or the like, and the noise is generated for more than a period of 2 microseconds, the determination in step S1302 is passed. If the input of the power failure warning signal (peripheral power failure warning signal) is not continued and is canceled in the infinite loop by the determination in S1312, the peripheral control MPU4150a is reset because the WDT clear process in step S1314 is not executed. Therefore, it is possible to deal with such noise by automatically resetting and returning.

[16. Image displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device on the game board side]
Next, an image displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 1900 on the game board side provided in the game board 4 shown in FIG. 8 will be briefly described with reference to FIGS. 62 to 66. The image displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 1900 on the game board side is the periphery of the peripheral control unit power-on processing shown in FIG. 57 by the peripheral control MPU 4150a of the peripheral control unit 4150 on the peripheral control board 4140 shown in FIG. It is drawn by executing regular processing of the control unit. As a result, various effects are advanced in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 1900 on the game board side. Here, first, when the mobile terminal 470 is placed in the recess 314d formed on the right side of the upper plate upper panel 314 of the plate unit 300 shown in FIG. 7, it is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 1900 on the game board side. The effect when the mobile terminal is set will be described, and then when the player starts the game by touching the palm or finger of the rotary handle main body front 506 shown in FIG. 7, it is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 1900 on the game board side. The effect at the start of the game will be described, and after the effect at the start of the game is started, the game ball is entered into the upper start opening 2101 and the lower start port 2102 shown in FIG. 8 (starting prize) to proceed with the effect. The start winning inspiration effect displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 1900 on the game board side when inspiring the player's willingness to play is explained, and the game board side when the start-up effect is started and the start prize is first won. The first start winning limited effect displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 1900 will be explained, the effect such as the variable display displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 1900 on the game board side will be explained, and the liquid crystal display device 1900 on the game board side will be described. The image of the absence notification displayed in the display area of is described. FIG. 62 is a diagram showing an example of the effect when the mobile terminal is set displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device on the game board side, and FIG. 63 is the effect at the start of the game displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device on the game board side. FIG. 64 is a diagram showing an example, FIG. 64 is a diagram showing an example of a start winning inspiration effect and a first start winning limited effect displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device on the game board side, and FIG. 65 is a liquid crystal on the game board side. It is a figure which shows an example of the variation display effect displayed in the display area of a display device, and FIG. 66 is a figure which shows an example of the image of the absence notice displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device on the game board side.

[16-1. Production when the mobile terminal is set displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device on the game board side]
First, when the mobile terminal 470 is placed in the recess 314d formed on the right side of the upper plate upper panel 314 of the plate unit 300 shown in FIG. 7, the mobile terminal displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 1900 on the game board side. The set-time effect will be described with reference to FIG. 62. As described above, the player goes to the reception of the hall, receives the mobile terminal 470, sits on the front of the pachinko game machine 1 that plays the game, and has the mobile terminal 470 in the recess 314d formed on the right side of the plate unit 300. The peripheral control board 4140 performs communication initial settings for bidirectionally exchanging various information (various data) with the mobile terminal 470, and acquires an ID number from the mobile terminal 470. Is performed, and the ID number acquired in this individual information acquisition process is associated with the machine number of the pachinko game machine 1 (the machine number installed in the hall, No. 8 in the present embodiment). .. When this association is completed, the effect when the mobile terminal is set is performed. In this production when the mobile terminal is set, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is formed in the shape of sunglasses provided in the humanoid machine head unit 3150 of the back unit 3000 of the game board 4 shown in FIG. 8 and the decorated frame is the standby position. Appears descending from the original position, which is difficult to see when viewed from the front, to a substantially central position (effect position) of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 1900 on the game board side.

When the frame provided in the humanoid machine head unit 3150 descends to almost the center position of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 1900 on the game board side and appears, as shown in FIG. 62A, the pink sphere is three-dimensionally formed. The "eyeball" is expressed by drawing in the center of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 1900 on the game board side. Then, as shown in FIGS. 62 (b) and 62 (c), the “eyeball” is drawn in a manner of moving the “eyeball” in the vertical and horizontal directions in the frame.

In this way, the player visually recognizes the movable mode of the humanoid machine (robot), which is the real pleasure of the pachinko gaming machine 1, even before the game is started by touching the front 506 of the rotating handle main body shown in FIG. Because it is possible to do so, it is possible to contribute to further improving the player's desire to start the game.

[16-2. Game start effect displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device on the game board side]
Next, the game start effect displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 1900 on the game board side when the player starts the game by touching the palm or finger on the rotary handle main body front 506 shown in FIG. It will be described with reference to 63. When the player touches the palm or finger in front of the rotating handle body 506 to start the game while the effect when the mobile terminal is set is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 1900 on the game board side, the payout is performed as described above. The payout control MPU 4120a of the payout control unit 4120 in the control board 4110 informs the main control board 4100 that the palm or finger is touching the rotary handle main body front 506, and the main control board 4100 tells the main control board 4100 that the palm or finger is touching the rotary handle main body front 506. The peripheral control MPU 4150a of the peripheral control unit 4150 on the peripheral control board 4140 produces an effect at the start of the game because the peripheral control board 4140 is informed that the player or the finger is touched. In this game start production, first, the frame formed and decorated in the shape of sunglasses provided in the humanoid machine head unit 3150 of the back unit 3000 of the game board 4 shown in FIG. 8 is the liquid crystal display device 1900 on the game board side. The pachinko gaming machine 1 is raised from a substantially central position (effect position) of the display area to an original position where it is difficult to see the pachinko game machine 1 from the front, and the pachinko machine 1 is in a standby state. At this time, the pink sphere is no longer drawn. Then, as shown in FIG. 63 (a), the humanoid machine was switched to the image on which the humanoid machine was mounted on the catapult in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 1900 on the game board side, and was mounted on the catapult as shown in FIG. 63 (b). The entire image of the humanoid machine is scrolled from the foot of the humanoid machine toward the head, and the entire image of the humanoid machine is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 1900 on the game board side. Then, as shown in FIG. 63 (c), an image of the pilot who boarded the cockpit of the humanoid machine (robot) is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 1900 on the game board side, and the pilot starts in the cockpit. Proceed with preparations. Then, as shown in FIG. 63 (d), the display area of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 is switched to the image of the space as seen from the catapult.

In this way, when the player starts the game by touching the palm or finger in front of the rotary handle main body 506, the game start effect is advanced to the display area of the liquid crystal display device 1900 on the game board side. Therefore, you can get on the cockpit of the humanoid machine (robot) and experience the world view of the humanoid machine (robot) at the same time as the game starts, and it will be expanded to various productions of the humanoid machine (robot). You can get a sense of expectation. As a result, when the player starts the game by touching the palm or finger in front of the rotating handle body 506, the pachinko machine 1 synchronizes with the player's feeling of playing the game, and the feeling is raised. It is possible to contribute to further improving the player's willingness to play by taking the form as if the player is playing.

Further, the mobile terminal 470 received by the player at the reception of the hall is placed in the recess 314d formed on the right side of the upper plate upper panel 314 of the plate unit 300 shown in FIG. 7, and the player Was seated in the seat of the pachinko gaming machine 1 and rotated the rotation handle main body front 506 shown in FIG. 7 clockwise to launch a game ball from the hitting ball launching device 650 shown in FIG. 5 to start the game. Nevertheless, even if the game ball does not enter the upper start opening 2101 or the lower start opening 2102 (starting prize) shown in FIG. 8, the player puts the palm or finger in front of the rotating handle body 506. When the game is started by touching, the effect at the start of the game is automatically advanced to the display area of the liquid crystal display device 1900 on the game board side, so that the upper start port 2101 and the lower start port 2102 at the start of the game are started. It is possible to avoid a situation in which the production does not proceed at all when the game ball does not enter (starting prize). As a result, the player's willingness to play due to stress such as frustration and humiliation that the production does not proceed at all when the game ball does not enter the upper start port 2101 or the lower start port 2102 at the start of the game (starting prize). It is possible to suppress the decrease. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's motivation to play at the start of the game.

[16-3. Start winning inspiration displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device on the game board side]
Next, after the above-mentioned game start effect is started, the player's game is such that the game ball is entered into the upper start port 2101 or the lower start port 2102 shown in FIG. 8 (starting prize) to advance the effect. The start winning inspiration effect displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 1900 on the game board side when inspiring motivation will be described with reference to FIGS. 64 (a) and 64 (b). The effect at the start of the game is advanced in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 1900 on the game board side, and the player rotates the rotation handle main body front 506 clockwise to launch the game ball from the ball launching device 650 shown in FIG. When the game ball passes through the gate portion 2350 formed in the center accessory 2300 shown in FIG. 8 without entering the upper start port 2101 or the lower start port 2102 (starting prize) even if the game is started. , The start winning inspiration production is advanced following the production at the start of the game. As described above, the main control board 4100 transmits commands related to the normal drawing tuning effect to the peripheral control board 4140 based on the detection signal from the gate switch 2352 provided in the gate portion 2350. The peripheral control MPU 4150a of the peripheral control unit 4150 on the peripheral control board 4140 performs a start winning inspiration effect following the game start effect. In this start winning inspiration effect, as shown in FIG. 64 (a), the battle in outer space is performed from the image of outer space seen from the catapult in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 1900 on the game board side shown in FIG. 63 (d). It switches to the image of the other humanoid machine (robot) inside. Then, as shown in FIG. 64 (b), the image of the pilot boarding the cockpit is displayed as a balloon together with the other humanoid machine (robot) shown in FIG. 64 (a), and the pilot "sorts quickly". Let's aim for a big hit! ”Inspires the player. Then, the display area of the liquid crystal display device 1900 on the game board side shown in FIG. 63 (d) is switched to the image of outer space seen from the catapult.

Even if the player starts the game by firing the game ball from the hit ball launching device 650 shown in FIG. 5 by rotating the rotation handle main body front 506 clockwise, the upper start port 2101 and the lower start port 2102 are used. When the game ball passes through the gate portion 2350 formed in the center accessory 2300 without entering the ball (starting prize), it is seen from the catapult in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 1900 on the game board side shown in FIG. 63 (d). As a start winning inspiration effect from the image of outer space, the effect of proceeding to FIGS. 64 (a) and 64 (b) and switching to the image shown in FIG. 63 (d) is repeated. The production at the start of the game and the production for inspiring the start prize are both productions related to a humanoid machine (robot), and are related to each other. In other words, the story continues even if the production is switched from the start prize inspiration effect to the start prize inspiration effect, and the start prize inspiration effect is switched to the game start effect again to proceed with the effect. However, since the story is continuous, even if the game start production and the start prize inspiration production are switched to each other, the "production with a story" will be continuously developed (progressed). ing.

In this way, when the player starts the game by touching the palm or finger on the rotary handle main body front 506, the game start effect is advanced to the display area of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900, and the game start effect is advanced to the rotary handle main body front 506. Even if it is difficult to launch a game ball from the hit ball launching device 650 shown in FIG. 5 to enter the upper starting port 2101 or the lower starting port 2102 (starting prize) by rotating the ball clockwise. That is, the game ball does not enter the upper start port 2101 and the lower start port 2102, which are the start areas, and the game ball enters the upper start port 2101 and the lower start port 2102. If the game effect for deriving and displaying the winning determination result that conveys whether or not an advantageous jackpot game state occurs is not progressed, when the game ball passes through the gate portion 2350 formed in the center accessory 2300, In the display area of the liquid crystal display device 1900 on the game board side, the start winning inspiration effect is advanced following the game start effect. In the start-up prize inspiration production, the effect of encouraging the player to start-up prize and inspiring (encourage) the player to generate a big hit game state is being promoted, so it is said that the start-up prize is given at the start of the game. It can contribute to improving the feelings of the player. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's motivation to play from the start of the game to the progress of the game production.

[16-4. First start prize limited production displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device on the game board side]
Next, when the above-mentioned game start effect is started and the ball first enters the upper start port 2101 or the lower start port 2102 (starting prize is won), the first time it is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 1900 on the game board side. The start winning limited production will be described with reference to FIGS. 64 (c) and 64 (d). When the game start effect is being advanced in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 1900 on the game board side, the player rotates the rotary handle main body front 506 clockwise to perform the ball launching device 650 shown in FIG. When the game ball is fired and entered into the upper start opening 2101 or the lower start opening 2102 (starting prize), the production at the start of the game is switched to the first starting prize limited production. Further, when the above-mentioned start winning inspiration effect is in progress in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 1900 on the game board side, the player rotates the rotation handle main body front 506 clockwise to play the game from the ball launching device 650. When the ball is fired and entered into the upper starting opening 2101 or the lower starting opening 2102 (starting prize), the starting winning inspiration effect is switched to the first starting winning limited effect. As described above, the main control board 4100 receives commands related to the synchronization effect of the special figure 1 and the lower start port based on the detection signal from the upper start port switch 3022 that detects the game ball received by the upper start port 2101. Based on the detection signal from the lower start port switch 2109 that detects the game ball that has entered the 2102, the command related to the special drawing 2 tuning effect is transmitted to the peripheral control board 4140, so that the peripheral control board 4140 The peripheral control MPU4150a of the peripheral control unit 4150 in the above switches from the game start effect and the start prize inspiration effect to the first start prize limited effect. In this first start prize limited production, a person who waits in a catapult in the display area of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 shown in FIG. 63 as shown in FIG. 64 (d) from the game start production and the start prize inspiration effect. An image of the driver boarding the cockpit is displayed as a balloon along with the type machine (robot), and the driver tells the crew that "D Corps is leaving!", And the catapult is accelerated, as shown in Fig. 64 (d). In this way, a humanoid machine (robot) is ejected from the catapult toward space and starts off. Then, the humanoid machine (robot) is produced during the battle in outer space, and the decorative design (see FIGS. 65 (a) and 65 (b)) to be described later is started to be variablely displayed with this effect as the background image. ..

In this way, when the player starts the game by touching the front 506 of the rotating handle body with his / her palm or fingers and then first enters the upper starting port 2101 or the lower starting port 2102 (starting prize), the game starts. "Production with a story" that the production is switched from the production and the start prize inspiration production to the first start prize limited production and the variable display of the decorative pattern is started is continuously developed (progressed). When switching from the game start production or start prize inspiration production to the first start prize limited production, the continuation of the game start production and start prize inspiration production starts for the first time by switching this production without giving the player a sense of discomfort. It has been continuously developed as a prize-limited production. Therefore, it is possible to contribute to giving the player a feeling of expectation that a big hit game state will occur in the winning determination result due to the switching of the production. As a result, after the game is started, the start prize is first won and the variable display of the decorative symbol (that is, the derivation display of the winning judgment result that tells whether or not a big hit game state that is advantageous for the player occurs) is started. It is possible to contribute to gradually improving the player's willingness to play in each of the productions up to. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's motivation to play from the start of the game to the progress of the game production.

[16-5. Production of variable display, etc. displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device on the game board side]
Next, an image such as a variable display displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 1900 on the game board side will be described with reference to FIG. 65. FIG. 8 shows the main control side main processing of the main control side power-on processing shown in FIG. 38 and the main control side timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. 39 by the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 shown in FIG. The result of the first special lottery drawn by accepting the game ball to the upper starting port 2101 or the result of the second special lottery drawn by accepting the game ball to the lower starting port 2102 shown in FIG. 8 is a "big hit". Then, the number of repetitions (number of rounds) of the opening / closing operation of the large winning opening 2103 shown in FIG. 8 is a total of 15 rounds from 1 round to 15 rounds, and in each round, within a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds). When a game ball enters the large winning opening 2103 and the number of balls reaches a predetermined number (for example, 9 balls), the round is digested, and one game ball enters the large winning opening 2103. A predetermined number (for example, 15 balls) of game balls are paid out for each ball.

The first special lottery result drawn by accepting the game ball to the upper starting port 2101 or the second special lottery result drawn by accepting the game ball to the lower starting port 2102 is shown in FIG. 34 from the main control board 4100. As shown in FIG. 65 (a), the peripheral control unit 4150 of the peripheral control board 4140 shown in FIG. 14 controls the liquid crystal and the sound control unit 4160 based on the various commands shown in FIG. The variable display of the decorative symbol 1950a on the left side of the display area of the display device 1900, the decorative symbol 1950b in the center, and the decorative symbol 1950c on the right side is started, and the variable display of the decorative symbols 1950a to 1950c is stopped after a predetermined time has elapsed. The result of the first special lottery or the result of the second special lottery can be recognized by the player. At this time, the upper special symbol display 1185 or the lower special of the function display unit 1180 shown in FIG. The result of the first special lottery or the result of the second special lottery can also be confirmed in the first special symbol or the second special symbol displayed on the symbol display 1186. When the decorative symbols 1950a to 1950c are displayed in a variable manner, the decorative symbols 1950a to 1950c become translucent to the extent that the background image (the above-mentioned effect of the humanoid machine (robot) in battle in outer space) can be visually recognized. The symbol 1950a is reeled from the upper left side to the lower left side of the display area, the decorative symbol 1950b is reeled from the upper center to the lower center of the display area, and the decorative symbol 1950c is reeled from the upper right side to the lower right side of the display area. Is displayed in a variable manner as if it is rotating.

As shown in FIG. 65 (a), when the variable display of the decorative symbols 1950a to 1950c is started and a predetermined time elapses, the stop symbols of the decorative symbols 1950a to 1950c are stopped and displayed with the same decorative symbol. It becomes a "big hit". On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 65 (a), the variable display of the decorative symbols 1950a to 1950c is started, and after a predetermined time has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 65 (b), the stop symbols of the decorative symbols 1950a to 1950c are displayed. If the same decorative pattern is not stopped and displayed, it will be "off". At this time, there is no holding ball (that is, the number of holding balls related to the acceptance of the game ball into the upper starting port 2101 in the upper special symbol storage display 1184 and the lower special symbol storage display 1187 of the function display unit 1180 shown in FIG. (When the number of reserved balls) and the number of reserved balls related to the acceptance of the game ball to the lower starting port 2102 (the number of reserved balls) are not displayed and the number of reserved balls is zero, respectively), the upper starting port 2101 or Even if the game ball does not enter the lower start port 2102, when the player is playing the game by touching the palm or finger to the rotation handle main body front 506 shown in FIG. 7, the payout control is performed as described above. The payout control MPU 4120a of the payout control unit 4120 on the board 4110 informs the main control board 4100 that the palm or finger is touching the rotary handle main body front 506, and the main control board 4100 tells the main control board 4100 that the palm or finger is touching the rotary handle main body front 506. Since the fact that the finger is being touched is transmitted to the peripheral control board 4140, the peripheral control MPU 4150a of the peripheral control unit 4150 in the peripheral control board 4140 becomes the screen in the customer waiting state shown in FIG. 65 (c). The demonstration screen is not drawn in the display area of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900, and the stop symbols of the decorative symbols 1950a to 1950c shown in FIG. 65 (b) are displayed (that is, the background image is a person in space). The game screen, which is the production of the type machine (robot) during the battle, is maintained. At this time, the sound effects and music are not faded out and continue to flow.

On the other hand, when the player leaves the seat of the pachinko game machine 1 or interrupts the game, the palm or fingers are separated from the rotary handle main body front 506 and the game is not performed. The payout control MPU 4120a of the payout control unit 4120 of the control board 4110 informs the main control board 4100 that the palm or finger is not touched by the rotary handle main body front 506, and the main control board 4100 tells the main control board 4100 that the palm or finger is not touched by the rotary handle main body front 506. Since the peripheral control board 4140 is informed that the player or finger is not touched, the peripheral control MPU 4150a of the peripheral control unit 4150 in the peripheral control board 4140 receives the mobile terminal 470 that the player received at the reception of the hall. Peripheral control unit shown in FIG. 57 Peripheral control unit for power-on processing even when mounted in the recess 314d formed on the right side of the upper plate upper panel 314 of the plate unit 300 shown in FIG. In the mobile terminal monitoring process of step S1013 in the steady process, as described above, the state in which the game balls do not enter the upper start port 2101 or the lower start port 2102 continues, and the reserved balls are digested to zero. If this happens, set the permission to perform the demonstration that displays the screen in the waiting state for customers, and set the transition to the power saving mode after the demonstration. As a result, first, the demonstration screen, which is the screen in the customer waiting state shown in FIG. 65 (c), is drawn in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 1900 on the game board side. At this time, the sound effect and music are set to mute. Then, when the demonstration screen is drawn in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 1900 on the game board side a predetermined number of times (for example, three times in this embodiment), the mode shifts to the power saving mode and the liquid crystal on the game board side is displayed. Nothing is displayed in the display area of the display device 1900 (that is, a black screen is displayed). At this time, the various lamps provided on the door frame 5 and the various lamps provided on the game board 4 shown in FIG. 2 are also turned off.

When the demonstration screen is drawn in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 1900 on the game board side and progresses, or when the power saving mode is set, the player touches the palm or finger in front of the rotating handle body 506. When the game is played (when it starts), the stop symbols of the decorative symbols 1950a to 1950c shown in FIG. 65 (b) are displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 1900 on the game board side (that is, the background image is in outer space). It is designed to switch to the game screen), which is a production of a humanoid machine (robot) during battle. That is, the variation of the decorative symbols 1950a to 1950c shown in FIG. 65 (a) from the demonstration screen shown in FIG. 65 (c) based on the game ball entering the upper start opening 2101 and the lower start port 2102. FIG. 65 (a) shows a state in which the screen suddenly switches to the screen at which the display is started, or nothing is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 1900 on the game board side in the power saving mode (that is, a state in which the screen becomes a black screen). It is designed so that the screen does not suddenly switch to the screen at which the variable display of the decorative symbols 1950a to 1950c is started.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the mobile terminal 470 received by the player at the reception of the hall is placed in the recess 314d formed on the right side of the upper plate upper panel 314 of the plate unit 300 shown in FIG. In the state, the game ball does not enter the upper start opening 2101 or the lower start port 2102 even though the player has not left the seat of the pachinko game machine 1 or interrupted the game. Even when the reserved balls are digested and the number of balls becomes zero, the waiting for customers shown in FIG. 65 (c) is displayed from the game screen in which the decorative symbols 1950a to 1950c shown in FIG. 65 (b) are stopped and displayed. Since it is not switched to the demonstration screen, which is the screen of the state, the player's motivation to play is reduced due to stress such as frustration and humiliation of switching to the demonstration screen even though the game is in progress. It can be suppressed.

[16-6. Image of leaving seat notification displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device]
Next, an image of the absence notification displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 1900 on the game board side will be described with reference to FIG. 66. When a player sits in front of the pachinko machine 1 and plays a game, he / she may leave his / her seat due to, for example, a restroom break or purchase of a drink. When the player leaves the seat, the mobile terminal 470 and its surroundings are taken out (by lifting) from the recess 314d formed on the right side of the upper plate upper panel 314 of the plate unit 300 shown in FIG. Communication with the control board 4140 becomes impossible. Taking this as an opportunity, the peripheral control board 4140 starts timing the elapsed time when the mobile terminal 470 cannot communicate with the mobile terminal 470, that is, the elapsed time from when the player takes out (lifts) the mobile terminal 470 from the recess 314d. It has become like. The peripheral control board 4140 determines that the player is not ready to sit in front of the pachinko gaming machine 1 and start the game when the mobile terminal 470 is not mounted in the recess 314d. The screen for notifying that the player is away from the seat is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 1900 on the game board side.

Specifically, in the mobile terminal monitoring process of step S1013 in the peripheral control unit steady processing of the peripheral control unit power-on processing of FIG. 57, the portable terminal 470 received by the player at the reception of the hall is shown in FIG. 7. When the mobile terminal 470 is taken out (lifted) from the recess 314d formed on the right side of the upper plate upper panel 314 of the unit 300, the peripheral control board 4140 is the pachinko gaming machine 1. As shown in FIG. 163, in order to notify that the player is not ready to sit on the front surface and start the game and is away from the seat, the liquid crystal display device 1900 on the game board side. In the center of the display area, the message MS30 "away from the seat" is controlled so as to be displayed in a large size as a screen for notifying the departure from the seat. By displaying the screen for notifying the absence of seats in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 1900 on the game board side and maintaining the state of notifying the notification, it is possible to continue notifying that the person is away from the seat.

On the screen for notifying the departure from the seat, the player who left the seat returns to the pachinko game machine 1 again, and the mobile terminal 470 is placed (set) in the recess 314d formed on the right side of the upper plate upper panel 314 of the plate unit 300. ), The state displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 1900 on the game board side is maintained. However, as described above, a staff member such as a hall clerk who patrols the hall places his / her own mobile terminal MST for the staff member in the recess 314d formed on the right side of the upper plate upper panel 314 of the plate unit 300. Then, the elapsed time from the time when the player who left the seat took out (lifted) the mobile terminal 470 from the recess 314d is displayed in the display area of the mobile terminal MST for staff, and the elapsed time displayed on the screen is the predetermined time ( In the present embodiment, when 15 minutes have passed, the correspondence between the mobile terminal 470 owned by the player who has left the seat and the pachinko game machine 1 is canceled, and the customer is displayed on the screen of the departure notification. It is designed to switch to a demonstration that is a waiting screen. As a result, when the correspondence between the mobile terminal 470 owned by the player who has left the seat and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is canceled, the staff such as the clerk in the hall takes out the mobile terminal MST for the staff from the recess 314d ( (When lifted), the pachinko gaming machine 1 (peripheral control board 4140) can accept the mobile terminal 470'owned by another player. That is, another player can sit on the front surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1 and place the mobile terminal 470'in the recess 314d formed on the right side of the plate unit 300 to start the game. There is. When a clerk such as a clerk in the hall takes out the mobile terminal MST for the clerk from the recess 314d (when he lifts it), the demonstration switches from the leave notification screen to the customer waiting screen, but this demonstration is performed. When the mobile terminal is placed (set) in the recess 314d and the game is not started, the mode shifts to the power saving mode after the demonstration.

In this way, when the player sits in front of the pachinko gaming machine 1 and plays a game, for example, when he / she leaves his / her seat due to a restroom break, purchase of a drink, etc. By taking out (lifting) the mobile terminal 470 from the recess 314d formed on the right side of the plate upper panel 314, the mobile terminal 470 and the peripheral control board 4140 cannot communicate with each other. Taking this as an opportunity, the peripheral control board 4140 displays a screen for notifying the departure from the seat in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 1900 on the game board side for notifying that the person is away from the seat. As a result, the players other than the player who has left the seat can see the screen of the seat leaving notification displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 1900 on the game board side, so that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has already started the game. , Because it is possible to understand that the game is interrupted due to restroom breaks, purchase of drinks, etc., it is necessary to accidentally sit in front of the pachinko game machine 1 during which the game is interrupted and restart the game. Can be prevented. Therefore, even if the player leaves the seat, it is possible to prevent the game from being restarted by another player before returning to the original seat.

[17. Image displayed in the display area of the mobile terminal]
Next, the image displayed in the display area of the mobile terminal 470 will be briefly described with reference to FIGS. 67 to 69. First, the image of the error notification displayed in the display area of the mobile terminal 470 will be described, then the image of the break time setting displayed in the display area of the mobile terminal 470 will be described, and the image will be displayed in the display area of the mobile terminal 470. The image of the call of the clerk to be made will be described. FIG. 67 is a diagram showing an example of an image of error notification displayed in the display area of the mobile terminal, and FIG. 68 is a diagram showing an example of an image of the setting of the break time displayed in the display area of the mobile terminal. FIG. 69 is a diagram showing an example of an image of a call of a staff member displayed in a display area of a mobile terminal.

[17-1. Error notification image displayed in the display area of the mobile terminal]
First, the error notification image displayed in the display area of the mobile terminal 470 will be briefly described with reference to FIG. 67. The state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is notified by displaying alphanumeric characters, figures, and the like on the error LED display 860b provided on the payout control board 4110 shown in FIG. When the player places the mobile terminal 470 received at the reception in the hall in the recess 314d formed on the right side of the upper plate upper panel 314 of the plate unit 300 shown in FIG. 7 and plays the game, the pachinko game When an error occurs in the state of the machine 1, the content displayed on the error LED display 860b is also displayed as an error notification screen in the display area of the mobile terminal 470, such as a clerk in the hall. Before opening the main body frame 3 from the outer frame 2 shown in FIG. 1, the content displayed on the error LED display 860b can be known from the screen displayed in the display area of the mobile terminal 470. It has become.

Specifically, for example, in order to notify that the ball is out when the number "1" is displayed on the error LED display 860b, as shown in FIG. 67, the display area of the mobile terminal 470 is displayed. The rear photo PIC of the pachinko game machine 1 is displayed on the right side, and "<< error notification >>" indicating that it is an error notification screen is displayed as message MS0 on the upper left side of the PIC, and below this message MS0 "" Ball out "(NO.1)" that conveys the content of the error is displayed as the message MS1. In this example, the content that conveys "out of ball" is displayed as the message MS1, and "NO.1", which is the number "1" displayed on the error LED display 860b, is displayed. .. Below this message, MS1, there is a "ball out" that tells you the specific steps to resolve the error. Open the main body frame and inspect the blinking parts A to C in the figure on the right. Is displayed as message MS2. In this example, as a specific procedure for eliminating the error of "out of ball", it is instructed to inspect the prize ball tank 720 at the position corresponding to the prize ball tank 720 in the rear photograph PIC of the pachinko game machine 1. Step A is flashed in red with the letter A circled (EP0), and step B instructing the tank rail 731 to be inspected at the position corresponding to the tank rail 731 is the letter B circled. Flashes in red in the state (EP1), and the procedure C instructing to inspect the prize ball unit 700 at the position corresponding to the prize ball unit 700 is in the state where the letter C is circled (EP2). Flashes in red. In this way, step A, step B, and step C, return to step A again, step B, and so on, step A to step C are repeatedly blinked and displayed in order to complete the procedure for inspection. It is supposed to be notified.

Also, below the message MS2, tell the method for canceling the error notification. "Press the operation switch to cancel the error. Is displayed as message MS3. In this example, in the rear photograph PIC of the pachinko gaming machine 1, the characters "operation switch" indicating the position of the operation switch 860a are displayed as the state (ER) of the balloon characters in red characters. As described above, the operation switch 860a is capable of canceling the error when it is operated when the error is notified after the power is turned on.

Further, a 7-segment image ED imitating the error LED display 860b is displayed below the message MS3 and on the lower left side of the display area of the mobile terminal 470. In this example, since the number "1" indicating "out of ball" is displayed on the error LED display 860b, the number "1" is displayed in red on the 7-segment image ED and the dots are also displayed in red.

When an error occurs in the state of the pachinko gaming machine 1, the clerk in the hall, etc., before opening the main body frame 3 from the outer frame 2 shown in FIG. 1 according to the contents displayed in the display area of the mobile terminal 470. In addition to being able to know the contents displayed on the error LED display 860b, even if you are not familiar with the pachinko game machine 1, you can handle the pachinko game machine 1 with the procedure for eliminating the error. You can know it without looking up the instructions. Further, when the hall clerk or the like actually opens the main body frame 3 from the outer frame 2 in order to actually eliminate the error, the mobile terminal 470 is formed on the right side of the upper plate upper panel 314 of the plate unit 300 shown in FIG. It is possible to easily find (specify) the place to be inspected by the pachinko gaming machine 1 while looking at the message MS2 and the rear photograph PIC of the pachinko gaming machine 1 displayed in the display area of the mobile terminal 470 by taking out from the recess 314d to be inspected. At the same time, it is possible to inspect one by one according to the procedure. Therefore, it is possible to contribute to the early resolution of the error generated in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

When the clerk in the hall opens the main body frame 3 from the outer frame 2 and operates the operation switch 860a, the error notification state can be canceled, but the error LED is not resolved unless the error itself is resolved. The content of the error continues to be displayed on the display 860b, and the content displayed in the display area of the mobile terminal 470 by taking out the mobile terminal 470 from the recess 314d formed on the right side of the upper plate upper panel 314 of the plate unit 300. It does not change. When the clerk in the hall resolves the error and the payout control MPU4120a of the payout control unit 4120 on the payout control board 4110 shown in FIG. 12 recognizes the error, the payout control MPU4120a is displayed on the error LED display 860b. The figure "-" is displayed to notify that it is "normal". Further, when the clerk in the hall resolves the error and returns the mobile terminal 470 to the recess 314d formed on the right side of the upper plate upper panel 314 of the plate unit 300, the display area of the mobile terminal 470 is shown in FIG. 67. After the text "Error has been resolved" is displayed large in the center of the display area of the mobile terminal 470 from the error display notification screen, the game screen (during the game before switching to the error display notification screen) It is designed to switch to the screen).

[17-2. Image of break time setting displayed in the display area of the mobile terminal]
Next, an image of the break time setting displayed in the display area of the mobile terminal 470 will be briefly described with reference to FIG. 68. When a player sits in front of the pachinko machine 1 and plays a game, he / she leaves his / her seat to take a meal break (including a break for interrupting and refreshing the game; the same applies hereinafter). In some cases. In such a case, the player calls a clerk in the hall and informs the clerk in the hall that he / she will leave the seat. The clerk in the hall said, "Please return to your seat by what time and minute and call the clerk in the hall again." Or "From now on, return to your seat within the specified period (for example, within 45 minutes) and re-enter the hall. Please call the clerk, etc. "to the player. The hall clerk or the like contacts the hall manager by radio and informs that the door frame 5 shown in FIG. 1 will be released from the main body frame 3 shown in FIG. 1, and the game board shown in FIG. A plate "resting" is arranged in front of the game area 1100 of 4, and the door frame 5 is closed again to the main body frame 3. In addition to the radio for contacting the hall manager, the hall clerk also has a terminal for operating the game information display device DCNT shown in FIG. 14, which is arranged above the pachinko game machine 1. I carry it around the hall. The game information display device DCNT displays information related to the game on the data display unit DCNTa. As described above, the information regarding this game includes, for example, the number of big hits, the number of fluctuations until the big hit, the number of times the big hit continues, and the time when the player leaves the seat (the game information display device DCNT is a game). It also has a function to measure the time when a person leaves the seat.) That is, in the data display unit DCNTa, in addition to displaying the number of big hits, the fluctuating number of times until the big hit, and the continuous number of big hits, the time when the player left the seat is displayed. You can do it. Information on these games is transmitted to the management terminal of the hall via the pachinko island facility.

The clerk of the hall contacts the manager of the hall by radio, informs that the door frame 5 will be released from the main body frame 3, and places a plate "resting" in front of the game area 1100 of the game board 4. Then, when the door frame 5 is closed to the main body frame 3 again, the operation to start timing the time when the player leaves the seat is performed on the game information display device DCNT using the terminal. In addition, the hall clerk or the like can use the terminal to display the time when the player leaves the seat on the data display unit DCNTa of the game information display device DCNT.

In the present embodiment, when the player is sitting in front of the pachinko gaming machine 1 and playing a game, when he / she leaves his / her seat to take a meal break, he / she calls a clerk in the hall, as shown in FIG. The break time setting screen is displayed in the display area of the mobile terminal 470 placed in the recess 314d formed on the right side of the upper plate upper panel 314 of the plate unit 300. That is, an application for setting the break time is pre-installed on the mobile terminal 470. This application is started by a command command (a break time setting drawing command described later) from the peripheral control board 4140.

Specifically, when a player is sitting in front of the pachinko machine 1 and playing a game, when he / she leaves his / her seat to take a meal break, he / she calls the hall clerk, etc. As described above, contacts the hall manager by radio to inform that the door frame 5 is to be released from the main body frame 3, and the door frame 5 is opened from the main body frame 3 to open the game area of the game board 4. A plate "resting" is arranged in front of the 1100, and the door frame 5 is closed to the main body frame 3 again. When the door frame 5 is released from the main body frame 3 by this action, the door frame opening switch 618 shown in FIG. 27 is transmitted to the main control board 4100 as a main frame door opening signal via the payout control board 4110. , The main control board 4100 transmits the door opening command shown in FIG. 35 to the peripheral control board 4140 based on the logic of the main frame door opening signal, while when the door frame 5 is closed from the main body frame 3, the door is opened. The frame opening switch 618 is transmitted to the main control board 4100 as a main frame door opening signal via the payout control board 4110, and the main control board 4100 is the door shown in FIG. 35 based on the logic of the main frame door opening signal. A close command is transmitted to the peripheral control board 4140.

The peripheral control board 4140 analyzes various commands transmitted from the main control board 4100 in the received command analysis process of step S1022 in the peripheral control unit steady processing of the peripheral control unit power-on processing shown in FIG. 57, and this analysis is performed. When the command issued includes a door opening command from the main control board 4100, a break time is given to the mobile terminal 470 placed in the recess 314d formed on the right side of the upper plate upper panel 314 of the plate unit 300. A break time setting drawing command for displaying a screen for setting is extracted from the peripheral control ROM 4150b of the peripheral control unit 4150 or various control data copy areas 4150ce of the peripheral control RAM 4150c, and the backup of the peripheral control RAM 4150c shown in FIG. It is set in the transmission command storage area (not shown) for a mobile terminal in the Bank (1fr) of the managed work area 4150ca. Then, the break time set in the transmission command storage area (not shown) for the mobile terminal in the command transmission / reception processing of the mobile terminal monitoring process in step S1013 in the peripheral control unit steady processing of the peripheral control unit power-on processing shown in FIG. 57. The setting drawing command is transmitted to the mobile terminal 470.

Upon receiving this break time setting drawing command, the mobile terminal 470 starts an application for setting the break time. When this application is started, as shown in FIG. 68 (a), in the display area of the mobile terminal 470, "<< setting of break time >>" indicating that the screen is for setting the break time is displayed as the message MS10. The scroll display unit SC10 for setting the break time is displayed at the lower left of the message MS10. In the scroll display unit SC10, when a hall clerk or the like moves a finger while touching from the lower side to the upper side, it seems as if the reel is rotating in a direction of increasing the break time in 5 minute increments. On the other hand, when the reel is moved while contacting from the upper side to the lower side, it is as if the reel is rotating in the direction of reducing the break time in 5 minute increments. The time highlighted in the center of the scroll display unit SC10 is the time set as the break time. When the break time setting screen is drawn in the display area of the mobile terminal 470, the break time (45 minutes in the present embodiment) set as the default (initial value) is set in the center of the scroll display unit SC10. Is highlighted as the default (initial value). From this, it is assumed that the clerk of the hall or the like sets a break time of 45 minutes, which is the default (initial value).

In the display area of the mobile terminal 470, the OK button BT10 is displayed at the lower right of the message MS10, at the upper right of the scroll display unit SC10, and the cancel button BT11 is displayed at the lower right of the scroll display unit SC10. .. When a clerk in the hall taps the cancel button BT11 (touches the cancel button BT11), the mobile terminal 470 terminates this application and before the break time setting screen is displayed from the break time setting screen. It is designed to switch (return) to the screen of.

When a clerk in the hall operates the scroll display unit SC10 to set a break time and taps the OK button BT10 (touching the OK button BT10), the display of the mobile terminal 470 is displayed as shown in FIG. 68 (b). In the area, "I set a break time" above it. Message MS11 is displayed, and below this message MS11, the message MS12 "45 minutes remaining until the game restart time" is displayed. In this state, when a predetermined time (15 seconds in the present embodiment) elapses, the content of the message M11 is switched to the message MS13 "Mission is being executed". When a clerk in the hall taps the OK button BT10 (touching the OK button BT10), a break time is set for taking a meal break or taking a break to interrupt the game and refresh. The break time setting completion command to be transmitted is transmitted to the peripheral control board 4140.

When the clerk in the hall takes out (lifts) the mobile terminal 470 from the recess 314d formed on the right side of the upper plate upper panel 314 of the plate unit 300 and hands it to the player, the mobile terminal 470 and the peripheral control board 4140 are displayed. As a result of the inability to communicate with the mobile terminal 470, the mobile terminal 470 starts timing the remaining time until the game restart time. On the other hand, as described above, the peripheral control board 4140 (peripheral control MPU4150a) has a recess in the mobile terminal monitoring process of step S1013 in the peripheral control unit steady process of the peripheral control unit power-on processing shown in FIG. 57. When the mobile terminal 470 is not mounted on the 314d, it is judged that the player is not ready to sit in front of the pachinko gaming machine 1 and start the game, and the screen is displayed in the customer waiting state. The permission to perform the demonstration will be set, and the transition to the power saving mode will be set after the demonstration.

In the mobile terminal 470, the remaining time until the game restart time is timed, and when the remaining time is 3 minutes, as shown in FIG. 68 (c), the display area of the mobile terminal 470 is "Mission in progress" on the upper side. Message MS13 is displayed, and below this message MS13, the message MS12 "3 minutes remaining until the game restart time" is displayed, and the 3 minute number "3" which is the remaining time is blinking and the background color is changed. The mode changes from white to bright red. At this time, the mobile terminal 470 continues to vibrate and the alarm sound "boo, boo, boo" continues to sound.

In such a state, when the mobile terminal 470 is placed again in the recess 314d formed on the right side of the upper plate upper panel 314 of the plate unit 300, the communication between the mobile terminal 470 and the peripheral control board 4140 is restored. Since the peripheral control board 4140 has already received the break time setting completion command, it determines that the meal break has ended, and transmits a command to stop the vibration and the alarm sound to the mobile terminal 470. As a result, the vibration and alarm sound of the mobile terminal 470 are stopped. And although not shown, in the display area of the mobile terminal 470, the background color is white and "Mission completed! Is displayed in large size, and in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 1900 on the game board side shown in FIG. 8, a state in which the screen is in a customer waiting state is displayed and then the power saving mode is entered. The background color is white and the center is "Congratulations on completing the mission! The red message "" is displayed in large size. Then, after a predetermined time (15 seconds in the present embodiment) has elapsed, the content displayed when the player leaves the seat of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is displayed in the display area of the mobile terminal 470 and the display of the liquid crystal display device 1900 on the game board side. It is designed to be displayed in each area.

The mobile terminal 470 is formed on the right side of the upper plate upper panel 314 of the plate unit 300 even if the time remaining until the game restart time exceeds 3 minutes (for example, when the game restart time has 5 minutes remaining). When the communication between the mobile terminal 470 and the peripheral control board 4140 is restored, the command to stop the vibration and the alarm sound is always transmitted from the peripheral control board 4140. Since the mobile terminal 470 does not vibrate and does not sound an alarm when the game restart time exceeds 3 minutes remaining (for example, when the game restart time has 5 minutes remaining), the peripheral control board Even if a command from 4140 is received, this received command is discarded.

In this way, when the player is sitting in front of the pachinko game machine 1 and playing a game, when leaving the seat to take a meal break, a clerk in the hall is called and shown in FIG. A break time setting screen is displayed in the display area of the mobile terminal 470 placed in the recess 314d formed on the right side of the upper plate upper panel 314 of the plate unit 300, and the clerk in the hall sets the break time and the plate. When the mobile terminal 470 is taken out (lifted) from the recess 314d formed on the right side of the upper plate upper panel 314 of the unit 300 and handed to the player, the display area of the mobile terminal 470 has a few minutes remaining until the game restart time. By displaying whether or not, the mission to return to the pachinko game machine 1 is started again by the game restart time. In other words, the time during which the pachinko machine 1 was continuously enjoyed until the meal break was taken is not interrupted by the meal break, but is returned to the pachinko machine 1 again by the game restart time at the meal break. Even if the player is unable to play the game on the pachinko machine 1 due to the meal break due to the special mission given to the player, that is, the effect performed by the pachinko machine 1 is performed by the meal break. Even if you can no longer enjoy it, you can let the player experience the behavior of always returning by the player's own game restart time in order to carry out the special production of the mission during the meal break. .. As a result, the time during which the player continues to enjoy the game on the pachinko machine 1 until the player takes a meal break is not interrupted by the meal break, but the player's own behavior is performed on the pachinko machine during the meal break. Even if the production is separated from the production performed by the machine No. 1, the production by one's own experience is continued.

Further, since the break time can be set in the display area of the mobile terminal 470, for example, the break time is set to any one of the main control board 4100, the payout control board 4110, and the peripheral control board 4140. There is no need to provide operation buttons or operation switches to set the time, and there is no need to install a program to set the break time and time.

[17-3. Image of staff call displayed in the display area of the mobile terminal]
Next, the image of the call of the clerk displayed in the display area of the mobile terminal 470 will be briefly described with reference to FIG. 69. A player sits in front of the pachinko gaming machine 1 to play a game, and a game ball launched toward the game area 1100 enters the upper starting port 2101 shown in FIG. 8 and the lower starting port 2102 shown in FIG. By the main control MPU4100a of the main control board 4100 shown in FIG. 11, the main control side main processing of the main control side power-on processing shown in FIG. 38, the main control side timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. FIG. 8 shows that the result of the first special lottery drawn by accepting the game ball to the starting port 2101 or the result of the second special lottery drawn by accepting the game ball to the lower starting port 2102 is a "big hit". The number of repetitions (number of rounds) of the opening and closing operation of the large winning opening 2103 is a total of 15 rounds from 1 round to 15 rounds, and in each round, a game ball is inserted into the large winning opening 2103 within a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds). When the number of balls reaches a predetermined number (for example, 9 balls), the round is digested, and every time one game ball enters the large winning opening 2103, a predetermined number (for example, 15 balls) is entered. ) Is paid out, which is advantageous for the player.

The first special lottery result drawn by accepting the game ball to the upper starting port 2101 or the second special lottery result drawn by accepting the game ball to the lower starting port 2102 is shown in FIG. 34 from the main control board 4100. As shown in FIG. 62 (a), the peripheral control unit 4150 of the peripheral control board 4140 shown in FIG. 14 controls the liquid crystal and the sound control unit 4160 based on the various commands shown in FIG. The variable display of the decorative symbol 1950a on the left side of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 1900, the decorative symbol 1950b in the center, and the decorative symbol 1950c on the right side is started, and the variable display of the decorative symbols 1950a to 1950c is displayed after a lapse of a predetermined time. It is stopped so that the player can recognize the result of the first special lottery or the result of the second special lottery. At this time, the upper special symbol display 1185 or the lower of the function display unit 1180 shown in FIG. The result of the first special lottery or the result of the second special lottery can also be confirmed in the first special symbol or the second special symbol displayed on the special symbol display 1186. When the decorative symbols 1950a to 1950c are displayed in a variable manner, the decorative symbols 1950a to 1950c are translucent so that the background image can be visually recognized, and the decorative symbols 1950a are arranged from the upper left side to the lower left side of the display area. Is displayed in a variable manner from the upper center to the lower center of the display area, and the decorative symbol 1950c is displayed as if the reels are rotating from the upper right side to the lower right side of the display area. There is.

As shown in FIG. 62 (a), when the stop symbols of the decorative symbols 1950a to 1950c are stopped and displayed with the same decorative symbols after a predetermined time has elapsed after the variable display of the decorative symbols 1950a to 1950c is started, the above-mentioned It becomes a "big hit". On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 62A, the variable display of the decorative symbols 1950a to 1950c is started, and after a predetermined time has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 62B, the stop symbols of the decorative symbols 1950a to 1950c are displayed. If the same decorative pattern is not stopped and displayed, it will be "off".

The main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 transmits the big hit opening command shown in FIG. 34 to the peripheral control board 4140 when it becomes a “big hit” and a big hit game state is generated. The peripheral control board 4140 analyzes various commands transmitted from the main control board 4100 in the received command analysis process of step S1022 in the peripheral control unit steady processing of the peripheral control unit power-on processing shown in FIG. 57, and this analysis is performed. When the command given includes the jackpot opening command from the main control board 4100, the jackpot opening is started in the display area of the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 to develop the jackpot game effect, and is shown in FIG. For the mobile terminal 470 placed in the recess 314d formed on the right side of the upper plate upper panel 314 of the plate unit 300, a clerk call drawing command for displaying a screen for calling a clerk such as a clerk in the hall is issued. , A transmission command for a mobile terminal in the Bank (1fr) of the backup management target work area 4150ca of the peripheral control RAM 4150c shown in FIG. 15 extracted from the peripheral control ROM 4150b of the peripheral control unit 4150 or various control data copy areas 4150ce of the peripheral control RAM 4150c. Set in the storage area (not shown). Then, the clerk call set in the transmission command storage area (not shown) for the mobile terminal in the command transmission / reception process of the mobile terminal monitoring process in step S1013 in the peripheral control unit steady processing of the peripheral control unit power-on processing shown in FIG. 57. The drawing command is transmitted to the mobile terminal 470.

Upon receiving this clerk call drawing command, the mobile terminal 470 activates an application for calling a clerk such as a clerk in the hall. That is, an application for calling a clerk such as a clerk in the hall is pre-installed on the mobile terminal 470. When this application is started, as shown in FIG. 69 (a), the display area of the mobile terminal 470 is informed that it is a call screen of a staff member for calling a staff member such as a clerk in the hall above the display area. ≫ ”is displayed as the message MS20, and a rectangular call button BT20 for calling a staff member is displayed below the message MS20 and substantially in the center of the display area of the mobile terminal 470. The comment "Call: Long press" is drawn in the call button BT20, and the call button BT20 is drawn in the same color as the background color (white in the present embodiment) of the display area of the mobile terminal 470. .. When the player touches the call button BT20 with a finger, the background color of the call button BT20 changes (changes from white to red in this embodiment) as shown in FIG. 69 (b), and the content of the comment. Is changed from "call: long press" to "call: long press". When this state is continued until a predetermined time (15 seconds in the present embodiment) elapses, as shown in FIG. 69 (c), the message MS20 is not displayed from the display area of the mobile terminal 470, and the mobile terminal 470 is displayed. The background color of the display area of is changed from white to red, and the message "Calling" MS21 is displayed in a large size in the center of the display area of the mobile terminal 470. If the call button BT20 is not kept in a state of being touched by a finger until a predetermined time (15 seconds in the present embodiment) elapses, the screen of long press in FIG. 68 (b) is displayed again in FIG. 68 (a). The screen returns to the initial screen for calling the staff shown in.

The mobile terminal 470 transmits a clerk call request command for transmitting a request to call a clerk such as a clerk in the hall when the message MS21 "calling" is displayed in a blinking manner. The peripheral control board 4140 also analyzed various commands transmitted from the mobile terminal 470 in the received command analysis process of step S1022 in the peripheral control unit steady processing of the peripheral control unit power-on processing shown in FIG. 57, and this analysis was performed. When the command includes the clerk call request command from the mobile terminal 470, the output data for outputting the clerk call request signal to the game information display device DCNT shown in FIG. 14 is the output data of the peripheral control RAM 4150c shown in FIG. It is set in the output data storage area (not shown) for the game information display device in the Bank (1fr) of the backup management target work area 4150ca. Then, it is set in the output data storage area (not shown) for the game information display device in the game information display device processing of the mobile terminal monitoring process in step S1013 in the peripheral control unit steady processing of the peripheral control unit power-on processing shown in FIG. 57. The clerk call request signal is output to the game information display device DCNT.

The game information display device DCNT to which the clerk call request signal is input controls the data of the game information display device DCNT by controlling the call button DCNTb provided in advance for calling the clerk of the hall or the like to be operated. A plurality of lamps (decorative lamps) provided on both sides of the display unit DCNTa emit light in a ringing mode, and the word "calling" is scrolled and displayed on the data display unit DCNTa of the game information display device DCNT to call a staff member. It is supposed to be in a state. When a clerk in the hall rushes and operates the call button DCNTb of the game information display device DCNT, the light emission of the call light emission mode by the multiple lamps of the game information display device DCNT is stopped, and the data display unit DCNTa of the game information display device DCNT By stopping the scrolling display of the character "calling" by, the clerk calling state is released.

When the clerk in the hall operates the call button DCNTb of the game information display device DCNT to release the clerk call state, the game information display device DCNT outputs a clerk call release signal to the peripheral control board 4140. The peripheral control board 4140 determines whether or not various signals from the game information display device DCNT are input in the game information display device information acquisition process in step S1109 in the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 59. Based on this determination, clerk call release information is created as history information and set in the game information display device information acquisition storage area (not shown) in the Bank (1 ms) of the backup management target work area 4150ca of the peripheral control RAM 4150c shown in FIG. To do. Then, the clerk set in the game information display device information acquisition storage area (not shown) in the command transmission / reception processing of the mobile terminal monitoring process in step S1013 in the peripheral control unit steady processing of the peripheral control unit power-on processing shown in FIG. 57. Based on the call release information, for example, it is determined whether or not the staff call release signal is continuously (every 1 ms) a predetermined number of times (four times in this embodiment) in the staff call release information. When the clerk call release signal is input, a clerk call release command is transmitted to the mobile terminal 470 in order to notify the mobile terminal 470 to that effect.

The mobile terminal 470 that has received this clerk call release command returns to the normal background color (white in this embodiment) from the display mode shown in FIG. 69 (c), and the characters "big hit" are displayed in the center of the display area. It is displayed large.

In this way, the player sits on the front surface of the pachinko game machine 1 to play the game, and the game ball launched toward the game area 1100 is the upper start opening 2101 shown in FIG. 8 and the lower start shown in FIG. The main control side timer interrupt of the main control side power-on processing shown in FIG. 38 and the main control side timer interrupt shown in FIG. 39 by the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 shown in FIG. 11 after entering the port 2102. When the result of the first special lottery drawn by accepting the game ball to the upper starting port 2101 or the result of the second special lottery drawn by accepting the game ball to the lower starting port 2102 by processing or the like becomes a "big hit". Since a plurality of game balls are paid out one after another as prize balls from the prize ball device 740 shown in FIG. 3, when the upper plate 301 of the plate unit 300 shown in FIG. 7 is full, the plate unit 300 shown in FIG. 7 is filled. Game balls are paid out one after another to the lower plate 302. Since a so-called "dollar box" is arranged below the lower plate 302, the game balls stored in the lower plate 302 can be dropped into the dollar box. Since the number of game balls that can be stored in this dollar box is limited, a game information display device placed above the pachinko game machine 1 in order to replace the dollar box with another empty dollar box before the dollar box is full. It is necessary to reach out to the DCNT call button DCNTb and operate it to call a clerk in the hall. However, during the jackpot, the player cannot obtain the prize ball unless the rotary handle main body front 506 shown in FIG. 7 is rotated, so that it is difficult to separate the right hand from the rotary handle main body front 506, and the left hand. There is no choice but to take an unreasonable posture of extending to the call button DCNTb of the game information display device DCNT arranged above the pachinko game machine 1. Elderly players could not reach their left hand and had to stand up a little from their seats and operate in a mid-waisted state, which was a burden on their lower back.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, when it becomes a "big hit", the opening of the big hit is started in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 1900 on the game board side to develop the big hit game effect, and the upper plate upper panel 314 of the plate unit 300 A clerk call drawing command for displaying a screen for calling a clerk such as a hall clerk is transmitted to the mobile terminal 470 for the mobile terminal 470 placed in the recess 314d formed on the right side. An application for calling a staff member such as a clerk in the hall is started. As a result, the player does not have to reach for the call button DCNTb of the game information display device DCNT arranged above the pachinko game machine 1 and directly operate the call button, which is displayed in the display area of the mobile terminal 470. By maintaining the state of touching the BT20 with a finger until a predetermined time (15 seconds in this embodiment) elapses, the clerk in the hall, etc., as in the case of directly operating the call button DCNTb of the game information display device DCNT. It is possible to call the staff of.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the call button BT20 is not maintained in the state of being touched by a finger until a predetermined time (15 seconds in the present embodiment) elapses, the screen of long press is shown again in FIG. 68 (b). The screen returns to the initial screen of the call of the staff shown in 68 (a). This is based on the assumption that the player's finger happens to touch the call button BT20, and waits until the player's intention for a predetermined period can be confirmed.

According to the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment described above, the touch switch 516 provided in the ball striking device 650 of FIG. 5, the main control board 4100 of FIG. 11, the peripheral control board 4140 of FIG. 11, and the handle device 500 of FIG. It has. When the rotary handle main body front 506 of the handle device 500 of FIG. 7 is operated, the hit ball launching device 650 plays a game toward the game area 1100 formed in the game board 4 of FIG. 8 with a firing intensity commensurate with the operation amount. The sphere can be launched by the launch solenoid 654 of FIG. 12, which is an electrical drive source. The main control board 4100 detects that a game ball has entered the upper start port 2101 and the lower start port 2102 of FIG. 8, which are start areas provided on the game board 4, respectively, and the upper start port switch 3022 and the lower of FIG. The progress of the game can be controlled based on the detection signal from the start port switch 2109. The peripheral control board 4140 can control the progress of the effect by the liquid crystal display device 1900 on the game board side of FIG. 8 based on various commands which are the control commands shown in FIGS. 34 and 35 from the main control board 4100. is there. The touch switch 516 provided in the handle device 500 can detect whether or not the rotary handle main body front 506 of the handle device 500 is being operated. Specifically, the touch switch 516 provided in the handle device 500 can detect whether or not the palm or finger is touched by the rotary handle main body front 506.

The peripheral control MPU 4150a of the peripheral control unit 4150 on the peripheral control board 4140 determines that the game has been started by operating the rotary handle main body front 506 at least based on the detection signal from the touch switch 516 provided in the handle device 500. Then, the humanoid machines (robots) shown in FIGS. 63 (a) to 63 (d) by the liquid crystal display device 1900 on the game board side can be mounted on the catapult to proceed with the start preparation of the game. ing. Specifically, when the detection signal from the touch switch 516 provided in the handle device 500 is input to the power supply board 851 of FIG. 22, the payout control board 4110 of FIG. 29 is used as a payout contact signal via the power supply board 851. It is input to the payout control input circuit 4120b in the above and is input to the payout control MPU 4120a. The payout control MPU4120a determines that the rotary handle main body front 506 of the handle device 500 is being operated, that is, the palm or finger is touched by the rotary handle main body front 506 based on the logic of the payout contact signal. When this is done, the value 1 is set in bit 1 (B1) in order to convey that "the handle is being operated" in the frame state 2 command of FIG. 36, and the payout control unit of FIG. 42 is the payout control unit main of the power-on processing. It is transmitted to the main control board 4100 by the command transmission process of step S566 in the process. The main control board 4100 that has received this frame state 2 command is shaped into a command having a storage capacity of 2 bytes (16 bits) by adding "7 * H", which is additional information, to the received frame state 2 command. Then, it is transmitted to the peripheral control board 4140 by the peripheral control board command transmission process in step S92 in the main control side timer interrupt process of FIG. 39. The peripheral control MPU4150a of the peripheral control unit 4150 of the peripheral control board 4140 that received the frame state 2 command shaped into 2 bytes (16 bits) is the peripheral control unit steady of the peripheral control unit power-on processing shown in FIG. 57. In the received command analysis process of step S1022 in the process, when the frame state 2 command includes the fact that "handle is being operated", it is determined that the rotary handle main body front 506 of the handle device 500 is being operated. In the schedule data storage area 4150cae of the peripheral control RAM 4150c of FIG. 15, various schedule data corresponding to the received command are set based on the command received from the main control board 4100 (main control MPU4100a). Therefore, the schedule data for performing the effect at the start of the game is set in the schedule data storage area 4150 cage. Then, in the scheduler update process of step S1020 in the peripheral control unit steady processing of the peripheral control unit power-on processing shown in FIG. 57, various schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 4150 cage are updated to be shown in FIG. 57. The humanoid machines of FIGS. 63 (a) to 63 (d) by the peripheral control unit steady processing (game start effect progress control means) of steps S1009 to S1038 in the peripheral control unit steady processing of the peripheral control unit power-on processing shown. The robot) is placed on the catapult to prepare for the start, which is the start of the game.

Further, the peripheral control MPU 4150a of the peripheral control unit 4150 on the peripheral control board 4140 is based on the detection signals from the upper start port switch 3022 and the lower start port switch 2109 in FIG. 11, which are the start regions of the upper start port 2101 and the lower start port. A jackpot that is advantageous to the player based on the fact that the game ball has not entered the 2102 and the game has not progressed (that is, the game ball has entered the upper starting port 2101 and the lower starting port 2102, which are the starting areas. FIGS. 63 (a) to (d) are progressing on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 when the game effect for deriving and displaying the winning determination result indicating whether or not the game state occurs) is not progressing. ) Humanoid machine (robot) is mounted on the catapult to proceed with the start preparation, and the game is advanced by inserting the game ball into the upper start port 2101 and the lower start port 2102, which are the start areas. As a ball entry reminder effect that urges the player to that effect, the player enters the game balls shown in FIGS. 64 (a) and 64 (a) and (b) into the upper start opening 2101 and the lower start port 2102 (starting prize) to proceed with the effect. By switching to the start winning inspiration effect that inspires the player's willingness to play, it is possible to proceed with the start prize inspiration effect as this entry reminder effect. Specifically, when the game ball passes through the gate portion 2350 formed in the center accessory 2300 shown in FIG. 8, the main control board 4100 is based on the detection signal from the gate switch 2352 provided in the gate portion 2350. Of the commands related to the normal-figure tuning effect shown in FIG. 34, the normal-figure synchronization effect start command for instructing the start of the normal-figure synchronization effect is transmitted as a peripheral control board command in step S92 in the main control side timer interrupt process of FIG. It is transmitted to the peripheral control board 4140 in the process. The peripheral control MPU4150a of the peripheral control unit 4150 of the peripheral control board 4140 that has received the normal figure synchronization effect start command is the reception command analysis process of step S1022 in the peripheral control unit steady processing of the peripheral control unit power-on processing shown in FIG. In the above, it is determined that the start winning inspiration effect for urging the player to advance the game by entering the game ball into the upper start port 2101 and the lower start port 2102, which are the start areas, is started. In the schedule data storage area 4150cae of the peripheral control RAM 4150c of FIG. 15, various schedule data corresponding to the received command are set based on the command received from the main control board 4100 (main control MPU4100a). Therefore, the schedule data for performing the game effect is set in the schedule data storage area 4150 cage. Then, in the scheduler update process of step S1020 in the peripheral control unit steady processing of the peripheral control unit power-on processing shown in FIG. 57, various schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 4150 cage are updated to be shown in FIG. 57. The game balls of FIGS. 64 (a) and 64 (b) are generated by the peripheral control unit steady processing (ball entry prompting effect progress control means) in steps S1009 to S1038 in the peripheral control unit steady processing of the peripheral control unit power-on processing shown. The start winning inspiration effect of inspiring the player's willingness to play is being advanced so that the upper starting port 2101 and the lower starting port 2102 are entered (starting prize) to advance the effect.

The start winning inspiration effect of FIGS. 64 (a) and 64 (b) as a ball entry reminder effect that switches from the game start effect of FIGS. 63 (a) to 63 (d) is an effect having a story continuous with the game start effect. It is designed to be deployed. In addition, the start-up prize inspiration effect shown in FIGS. 64 (a) and 64 (b) as a ball entry reminder effect inspires (encourages) the player to aim for a big hit by encouraging the player to start a prize. It inspires players' willingness to play. Specifically, in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 1900 on the game board side, the game ball is started from the upper start opening 2101 or the lower start from the game start effect that the humanoid machine (robot) is mounted on the catapult to proceed with the start preparation. The production is being developed by switching to the starting prize inspiring production, which inspires the player's willingness to play so that the player enters the ball (starting prize) in the mouth 2102 to proceed with the production.

In this way, when it is determined that the rotary handle main body front 506 of the handle device 500 is being operated based on the detection signal from the touch switch 516 provided in the handle device 500, FIG. 63 by the liquid crystal display device 1900 on the game board side. The humanoid machines (robots) (a) to (d) are mounted on the catapult to prepare for starting, and the display at the start of the game is started. As a result, the player sits on the seat of the pachinko game machine 1 and operates the rotary handle main body front 506 of the handle device 500 to electrically drive the game ball toward the game area 1100 formed in the game board 4. Even if the game ball is not entered into the upper start port 2101 or the lower start port 2102, which is the start area provided in the game board 4, even though the game is started by firing by the launch solenoid 654. When the player operates the rotary handle main body front 506 of the handle device 500 to start the game, the game start effect of FIGS. 63 (a) to 63 (d) by the liquid crystal display device 1900 on the game board side automatically progresses. Therefore, it is possible to avoid a state in which the effect does not proceed at all when the game ball does not enter the upper start port 2101 or the lower start port 2102, which is the start area at the start of the game. ing. Then, even if the player operates the rotary handle main body front 506 of the handle device 500 to launch the game ball by the firing solenoid 654 which is an electric drive source, the upper starting port 2101 and the lower starting port 2102 which are the starting areas are quite difficult. If the game ball cannot enter the ball, that is, if the game ball does not enter the upper start port 2101 or the lower start port 2102, which is the start area, and the game effect does not proceed, the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 From the game start production in which the humanoid machines (robots) shown in FIGS. 63 (a) to 63 (d) are mounted on the catapult to prepare for starting, the upper start port 2101 and the lower start port, which are the start areas, are used. The 2102 is switched to a start winning inspiration effect as an entry reminder effect that urges the player to enter the game ball and proceed with the game. The start prize inspiration effect as a ball entry reminder effect that switches from the game start effect is a production that has a story that is continuous with the game start effect, that is, a game in which a humanoid machine (robot) is placed on the catapult to prepare for the start. Starting from the start production, the start prize inspiration effect as a ball entry reminder effect to inspire the player's game motivation to advance the effect by letting the game ball enter the upper start port 2101 or the lower start port 2102 (starting prize). When switching from the game start production to the start prize inspiration production as a ball entry reminder production, it will inspire the player's motivation to play without giving the player a sense of discomfort. ing. In this way, even if the player operates the rotary handle main body front 506 of the handle device 500 to launch the game ball by the firing solenoid 654 which is an electric drive source, the upper starting port 2101 and the lower starting which are the starting regions are quite difficult. If the ball cannot be entered into the mouth 2102, that is, if the game ball does not enter the upper starting port 2101 or the lower starting port 2102, which is the starting area, and the game effect does not proceed, the liquid crystal display on the game board side is displayed. From the game start effect that the humanoid machines (robots) of FIGS. 63 (a) to 63 (d) being advanced in the device 1900 are mounted on the catapult to proceed with the start preparation, the upper start port 2101 and the lower start area are started. Starting prize inspiration as a ball entry urging effect that inspires (encourages) the player to generate a big hit game state by encouraging the player to enter the game ball into the starting port 2102 and proceed with the game. It is designed to switch to. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's motivation to play from the start of the game to the progress of the game production.

Further, the peripheral control MPU 4150a of the peripheral control unit 4150 on the peripheral control board 4140 proceeds in the liquid crystal display device 1900 on the game board side based on the detection signals from the upper start port switch 3022 and the lower start port switch 2109 in FIG. FIG. 64 as a game start effect in which the humanoid machines (robots) of 63 (a) to (d) are mounted on the catapult to proceed with the start preparation, or as a ball entry reminder effect progressing on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900. From the start winning inspiration effect that the game balls of (a) and (b) are entered into the upper start opening 2101 and the lower start port 2102 (starting prize) to inspire the player's motivation to play the game. The humanoid machines (robots) shown in FIGS. 64 (c) and 64 (d) as game effects for deriving and displaying the winning judgment result that conveys whether or not a jackpot game state that is advantageous to the person will occur are from catapult to outer space. It is now possible to proceed with these effects by switching to the first start prize-limited effect of being ejected toward the vehicle and starting, and the effect of displaying the decorative symbols in FIGS. 65 (a) and 65 (b) in a variable manner. ing. Specifically, the main control board 4100 is shown in FIG. 34 based on a detection signal from the upper start port switch 3022 that detects a game ball received by the upper start port 2101, which is a start area provided in the game board 4. Among the commands related to the special figure 1 synchronization effect shown, the special figure 1 synchronization effect start command for instructing the start of the special figure synchronization effect is transmitted by the peripheral control board command transmission process in step S92 in the main control side timer interrupt process of FIG. 39. FIG. 34 is shown based on a detection signal from the lower start port switch 2109 that transmits the game ball to the peripheral control board 4140 or detects the game ball received by the lower start port 2102, which is a start area provided in the game board 4. Among the commands related to the special figure 2 synchronization effect, the special figure 2 synchronization effect start command for instructing the start of the special figure synchronization effect is peripherally controlled by the peripheral control board command transmission process in step S92 in the main control side timer interrupt process of FIG. 39. It is transmitted to the board 4140. The peripheral control MPU4150a of the peripheral control unit 4150 of the peripheral control board 4140 that received the special drawing 1 tuning effect start command and the special drawing 2 tuning effect start command is the peripheral control unit steady state of the peripheral control unit power-on processing shown in FIG. 57. In the reception command analysis process of step S1022 in the process, it is determined that the game effect for deriving and displaying the winning determination result indicating whether or not the jackpot game state that is advantageous to the player occurs is started. In the schedule data storage area 4150cae of the peripheral control RAM 4150c of FIG. 15, various schedule data corresponding to the received command are set based on the command received from the main control board 4100 (main control MPU4100a). Therefore, the schedule data for performing the game effect is set in the schedule data storage area 4150 cage. Then, in the scheduler update process of step S1020 in the peripheral control unit steady processing of the peripheral control unit power-on processing shown in FIG. 57, various schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 4150 cage are updated to be shown in FIG. 57. The humanoid machines (robots) shown in FIGS. 64 (c) and 64 (d) by the peripheral control unit steady processing (game effect progress control means) of steps S1009 to S1038 in the peripheral control unit steady processing of the peripheral control unit power-on processing shown. ) Is ejected from the catapult toward outer space to start, and the first start prize-limited production is in progress. Then, the production of a humanoid machine (robot) in battle in outer space is used as a background image in FIG. 65 (a). , (B) The variable display of the decorative symbols 1950a to 1950c is progressing.

FIGS. 64 (c) and 64 (d) as a game effect that switches from the game start effect of FIGS. 63 (a) to 63 (d) or the start winning inspiration effect of FIGS. 64 (a) and 64 (b). The first start prize limited production is developed as a production having a story continuous with the start prize inspiration production as a game start production or a ball entry reminder production. Specifically, in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 1900 on the game board side, the humanoid machine (robot) is placed on the catapult to prepare for starting, and the humanoid machine (robot) moves from the catapult to outer space. Figures 65 (a) and 65 (b) show the production of a humanoid machine (robot) in outer space as a background image after switching to the first-time start-up prize-limited production in which the catapult is ejected toward space and starts. The effect is developed by advancing the variable display of the decorative symbols 1950a to 1950c, and the image of the operator boarding the cockpit is displayed as a balloon together with the other humanoid machines (robots) shown in FIG. 64 (a). Then, the humanoid machine (robot) moves from the catapult to outer space from the start prize inspiration production as a ball entry reminder production in which the operator inspires the player to "sort out early and aim for a big hit!" It switches to the first start prize limited production of being ejected and starting, and then the production of a humanoid machine (robot) in outer space during battle is used as a background image, and the decorative symbols 1950a to 1950a of FIGS. As the variable display of 1950c progresses, the production is developed.

In this way, the player operates the rotary handle main body front 506 of the handle device 500 to launch the game ball by the firing solenoid 654 which is an electric drive source, and causes the upper starting port 2101 and the lower starting port 2102 which are the starting areas. When the ball is entered, the humanoid machines (robots) shown in FIGS. 63 (a) to 63 (d) progressing on the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 are placed on the catapult to proceed with the start preparation, which is the effect at the start of the game or the game board side. A game in which the game balls of FIGS. 64 (a) and 64 (b) as the ball entry reminder effect progressing in the liquid crystal display device 1900 are entered into the upper start port 2101 and the lower start port 2102 (starting prize) to advance the effect. A humanoid machine (robot) as a game production for deriving and displaying the winning judgment result that tells whether or not a big hit game state that is advantageous for the player occurs from the start winning inspiration effect that inspires the player's motivation to play. Is ejected from the catapult toward outer space and starts off, which is a limited production for the first start prize, followed by a variable display of the decorative symbols 1950a to 1950c with the production of a humanoid machine (robot) in battle in outer space as a background image. It is designed to switch. The first start prize-limited production as a game production that switches from the start prize inspiration production as a game start production or a ball entry reminder production has a story that is continuous with the start prize inspiration production as a game start production or a ball entry reminder production. In other words, the first start prize limited production that the humanoid machine (robot) is ejected from the catapult toward outer space from the game start production where the humanoid machine (robot) is placed on the catapult and prepares for start. Then, in outer space, the production of a humanoid machine (robot) during battle is used as a background image, and the decorative symbols 1950a to 1950c are displayed in a variable manner, or together with other humanoid machines (robots) in the cockpit. The image of the driver on board is displayed as a balloon, and the humanoid machine (from the start prize inspiration effect as a ball entry reminder effect that the operator inspires the player to "sort out early and aim for a big hit!" The robot) is ejected from the catapult toward outer space and starts off, switching to the first start prize-limited production, followed by the production of a humanoid machine (robot) in battle in outer space as a background image. Decorative designs 1950a to 1950c Is being developed as a variable display effect, and when switching from the start prize inspiration effect as the game start effect or the ball entry reminder effect to the first start prize limited effect as the game effect, the game feels uncomfortable. By switching this effect, the continuation of the start prize inspiration effect as the game start effect or the ball entry reminder effect is continuously developed as the first start prize limited effect as the game effect without giving to the person. .. Therefore, it is possible to contribute to giving the player a feeling of expectation that a big hit game state will occur in the winning determination result due to the switching of the production. In this way, the winning judgment result tells whether or not a jackpot game state that is advantageous to the player occurs after the player operates the rotary handle main body 506 of the steering wheel device 500 to start the game and then wins the start. It is possible to contribute to gradually improving the player's motivation to play in each production until the derivation display of is started. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's motivation to play from the start of the game to the progress of the game production.

[18. Another example]
It goes without saying that the present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiment, and can be implemented in various aspects as long as it belongs to the technical scope of the present invention.

For example, in the above-described embodiment, the effect at the start of the game is advanced in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 1900 on the game board side, and the player rotates the rotary handle main body front 506 clockwise to hit the ball shown in FIG. Even if the game ball is launched from the launching device 650 to start the game, the ball does not enter the upper start port 2101 or the lower start port 2102 (starting prize), and the gate formed in the center accessory 2300 shown in FIG. When the game ball passes through the part 2350, it is detected by the gate switch 2352 provided in the gate part 2350, and based on the detection signal from the gate switch 2352, the start winning inspiration effect is advanced following the game start effect. However, in addition to the gate portion 2350, the start winning inspiration effect is advanced following the game start effect based on the fact that the game ball has entered the general winning openings 2104 and 2201 shown in FIG. You may do so. In this case, since the game balls accepted by the general winning opening 2104 and 2201 are detected by the general winning opening switch 3020, the main control board 4100 is based on the detection signal from the general winning opening switch 3020 to that effect. Is not shown, and is transmitted to the peripheral control board 4140 in the peripheral control board command transmission process in step S92 in the main control side timer interrupt process of FIG. 39. The peripheral control MPU4150a of the peripheral control unit 4150 of the peripheral control board 4140 that has received this general winning opening command is in the reception command analysis process of step S1022 in the peripheral control unit steady processing of the peripheral control unit power-on processing shown in FIG. , It is determined that the start winning inspiration effect is started while the effect at the start of the game is in progress. In the schedule data storage area 4150cae of the peripheral control RAM 4150c of FIG. 15, various schedule data corresponding to the received command are set based on the command received from the main control board 4100 (main control MPU4100a). Therefore, the schedule data for performing the start winning inspiration effect is set in the schedule data storage area 4150 cage. Then, in the scheduler update process of step S1020 in the peripheral control unit steady processing of the peripheral control unit power-on processing shown in FIG. 57, various schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 4150 cage are updated to be shown in FIG. 57. The start winning inspiration effect of FIGS. 64 (a) and 64 (b) is advanced by the peripheral control unit steady processing of steps S1009 to S1038 in the peripheral control unit steady processing of the peripheral control unit power-on processing shown.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, when a predetermined condition of "big hit" and generating a big hit game state is satisfied, a screen for calling a staff member such as a clerk in the hall is displayed in the display area of the mobile terminal 470. However, assuming that the predetermined condition is satisfied when the lower plate 302 is full with the game ball, a staff member such as a clerk in the hall is called to the display area of the mobile terminal 470. The screen may be displayed. In this way, the gaming ball is not yet stored in the box (so-called "dollar box") arranged below the lower plate 302 (for example, the player starts the gaming machine of the pachinko gaming machine 1). Even in the state of the first big hit), it is not necessary to call a staff member such as a clerk in the hall, so that a useless call can be avoided. Then, when the box is filled with the game balls discharged one after another from the pachinko game machine 1, the lower plate ball removal button 354 is operated to remove the game balls stored in the lower plate 302 through the lower plate ball removal hole 324b. The game ball will be stored in the lower plate 302 by stopping the pulling downward. Eventually, the lower plate 302 is also filled with the game balls that are paid out one after another from the pachinko game machine 1. Therefore, it is assumed that the predetermined condition is satisfied when the lower plate 302 is full with the game balls. A screen for calling a staff member such as a hall clerk is displayed in the display area of the terminal 470. Specifically, when the lower plate 302 is full with the game ball (more specifically, when the game ball with the storage space described above is full), it is detected by the full tank switch 550 in FIG. The detection signal is input to the payout control board 4110 of FIG. 12 via the handle relay terminal 192 of FIG. 12 and the power supply board 851 of FIG. The payout control MPU 4120a of the payout control unit 4120 in the payout control board 4110 of FIG. 12 transmits the frame state 1 command of FIG. 36 to the main control board 4100 of FIG. 11 based on the logic of the detection signal from the full tank switch 550. .. The main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 of FIG. 11 shapes the received frame state 1 command and transmits the frame state 1 command classified into the state display of FIG. 35 to the peripheral control board 4140. When the peripheral control board 4140 receives the frame state 1 command from the main control board 4100 and the received frame state 1 command contains information that the tank is full, the peripheral control board 4140 is on the right side of the upper plate upper panel 314 of the plate unit 300. A clerk call drawing command for displaying a screen for calling a clerk such as a clerk in the hall is transmitted to the mobile terminal 470 placed in the recess 314d formed in the hall.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, when a predetermined condition of "big hit" and generating a big hit game state is satisfied, a screen for calling a staff member such as a clerk in the hall is displayed in the display area of the mobile terminal 470. However, the jackpot game was started, and a predetermined condition of starting a predetermined round out of 15 rounds (for example, 6 rounds were digested and the 7th round was started) was satisfied. Occasionally, a screen for calling a staff member such as a clerk in the hall may be displayed in the display area of the mobile terminal 470. In this way, when the jackpot game state occurs and the first round is started, the number of game balls stored in the box placed below the lower plate 302 may still be small, so 15 rounds. Of these, when the predetermined condition of starting a predetermined round is satisfied, the screen of the jackpot game production is switched to the screen for calling a staff member such as a hall clerk and displayed in the display area of the mobile terminal 470. This makes it possible to notify the player that the box will be replaced before the box is full.

Furthermore, in the above-described embodiment, a screen for calling a staff member such as a clerk in the hall is displayed in the display area of the mobile terminal 470, and the player operates the call button BT20 provided on this screen to display the hall. When a request to call a clerk such as a clerk is output from the mobile terminal 470 to the game information display device DCNT as a clerk call request signal via the pachinko game machine 1, the game information display device DCNT for calling the clerk in the hall or the like When the call button DCNTb is controlled to be operated and the hall clerk or the like operates the call button DCNTb of the game information display device DCNT to release the clerk call state, the game information display device DCNT moves to the peripheral control board 4140. By outputting the clerk call release signal, the mobile terminal 470 that received the clerk call release command from the peripheral control board 4140 returns to the normal background color (white in this embodiment) from the display mode shown in FIG. 69 (c). , The word "Big hit" was displayed in large size in the center of the display area, but a screen for calling a staff member such as a clerk in the hall was displayed in the display area of the mobile terminal 470 for a predetermined period ( For example, if the mobile terminal 470 cannot receive the clerk call release command from the peripheral control board 4140 even after 3 minutes), the mobile terminal management device that manages the mobile terminal 470 installed in the management room or reception of the hall Therefore, information that the clerk in the hall or the like has not arrived at the pachinko game machine 1 (that is, the call request of the player is not responded to) may be transmitted wirelessly. In this way, the manager of the hall management room and the counter staff at the reception of the hall will contact the staff such as the clerk of the hall who patrols the hall by radio, and immediately head to the pachinko game machine 1. Can be instructed to.

Then, in the above-described embodiment, the mobile terminal 470 received by the player at the reception of the hall is placed in the recess 314d formed on the right side of the upper plate upper panel 314 of the plate unit 300 shown in FIG. 7, and the game is played. Although it has started, it may be a mobile terminal owned by the player himself, instead of the mobile terminal 470 managed in the hall. In this case, the same application as the mobile terminal 470 managed by the hall may be installed on the mobile terminal owned by the player himself by a clerk of the hall, or the hall may access the homepage of the manufacturer of the pachinko game machine 1. The same application as the managed mobile terminal 470 may be downloaded and installed.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the image data for the mobile terminal 470 among the drawing data generated on the built-in VRAM of the sound source built-in VDP4160a is controlled by communication from the channel CH2 of the sound source built-in VDP4160a, except when the break time is set. By outputting to the mobile terminal 470 via the communication control circuit 4162a of the unit 4162, the image data from the channel CH2 is drawn in the display area of the mobile terminal 470. However, in the VDP4160a with a built-in sound source, the mobile terminal Instead of generating the image data drawn in the display area of 470, the image data drawn in the display area of the mobile terminal 470 may be installed in the mobile terminal in a state of being incorporated in the application in advance. In this case, the peripheral control MPU4150a outputs a command command to the mobile terminal via the communication control circuit 4162a, and the mobile terminal draws image data in the display area of the mobile terminal according to the received command command. It will proceed.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the current position can be tracked even if the mobile terminal 470 is taken out of the hall, but the pachinko gaming machine installed in another hall can be used by using the taken-out mobile terminal 470. Even if it is placed, communication may be rejected by the pachinko gaming machine, and it may not be possible to use it at all in other halls.

1 ... Pachinko game machine (game machine), 2 ... Outer frame, 3 ... Main body frame, 4 ... Game board, 5 ... Door frame, 192 ... Handle relay terminal plate, 300 ... Dish unit, 314d ... Recess, 460 ... Portable terminal Charging device 460, 470 ... Mobile terminal, 500 ... Handle device, 506 ... Rotating handle Main body front (launch handle), 512 ... Potentiometer, 516 ... Touch switch (detection means), 519 ... Gear mechanism, 470 ... Mobile terminal, 650 ... Ball launcher (ball launcher), 654 ... Small launch solenoid (electric drive source), 740 ... Prize ball device, 784 ... External terminal board, 851 ... Power supply board, 851a ... Fuse, 852 ... Power switch, 855 ... Power supply control unit, 855a ... Synchronous rectifier circuit, 855b ... Power factor improvement circuit, 855c ... Smoothing circuit, 855d ... Power supply creation circuit, 855e ... Power supply destruction circuit, 857 ... Launch control unit, 857a ... Launch control circuit, 857b ... Electrolytic Capacitor, 857c ... Waste hit prevention circuit, 860a ... Operation switch, 860b ... Error LED display, 1100 ... Game area, 1900 ... Game board side liquid crystal display device, 2109 ... Lower start port switch (start area entry detection means), 3022 ... Upper start port switch (starting area entry detection means), 3100 ... Upper unit, 3150 ... Humanoid machine head unit, 3400 ... Character unit, 3500 ... Gear decoration unit, 4100 ... Main control board (game control means) ), 4100a ... Main control MPU, 4100e ... Power failure monitoring circuit, 4110 ... Payout control board, 4120 ... Payout control unit, 4120a ... Payout control MPU, 4140 ... Peripheral control board (effect control means), 4150 ... Peripheral control unit, 4160 ... Liquid crystal and sound control unit, 4165 ... RTC control unit, 4170 ... Lamp drive board, 4180 ... Motor drive board, BT20 ... Call button, DCNT ... Game information display device, DCNTa ... Data display unit, DCNTb ... Call button, DCNTc ... Manual operation button.

Claims (1)

It is a game machine that performs variable display
An operating means that the player can operate to launch the game ball,
Display means that can display the effect,
The effect execution means for executing the effect and
With
The effect executing means is
In a situation where the variable display is not performed, when a predetermined condition is satisfied, the display means can be made to execute the standby effect.
In the situation where the standby effect is being executed, when the player touches the palm or finger of the operating means, the result of the variable display being performed from the standby effect displayed on the display means is displayed. It is possible to switch to the variable display waiting effect that is being performed, and in a situation where the standby effect is being executed and the variable display waiting effect is switched to, the player touches the operation means with the palm or finger. A gaming machine characterized in that the variable display waiting effect is continued in a situation where the variable display is not performed without executing the standby effect during the period.